GFZ 62564E 102l PDF

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
Series 15 / 150 Model B

for Machining Center
Operator's Manual (Operation)
GFZ-62564E-1/02 December 1996

GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration). Note that some precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus
may not be applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual sup-
plied by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control the
operation of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Contents
1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
s1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B62564E1/02
1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s2
B62564E1/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
WARNING
1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.
Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing
a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or
by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the
correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
3. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each
machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
user.
4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
user.
5. The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factoryset. Usually, there is not need to change
them. When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that
you fully understand the function of the parameter before making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
6. Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until
the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special operations.
Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its normal state. Starting the
machine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly.
7. The operators manual and programming manual supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall
description of the machines functions, including any optional functions. Note that the optional
functions will vary from one machine model to another. Therefore, some functions described
in the manuals may not actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification
of the machine if in doubt.
s3
WARNING
8. Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machinetool builder. When
using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machinetool builder for details of
their use and any related cautions.
NOTE
Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit.
Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently,
however, or it may prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error
recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of deleted data, backup
all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.
s4
3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO

PROGRAMMING
This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to
perform programming, read the supplied operators manual and programming manual carefully
such that you are fully familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1. Coordinate system setting

If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave unexpectedly as a
result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move command.
Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause
injury to the user.
2. Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear movement
between the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully confirmed before performing
programming.
Positioning involves rapid traverse. If the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the
tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3. Function involving a rotation axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normaldirection (perpendicular)
control, pay careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect programming may
result in the rotation axis speed becoming excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes
the chuck to lose its grip on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely.
Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to
the user.
4. Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement units of data such
as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current position. Before starting the machine,
therefore, determine which measurement units are being used. Attempting to perform an
operation with invalid data specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece,
or cause injury to the user.
5. Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of the workpiece
coordinate system, the spindle speed may become excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary
to specify a maximum allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectly
may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
s5
WARNING
6. Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Stroke
check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when
stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly
damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
7. Tool post interference check
A tool post interference check is performed based on the tool data specified during automatic
operation. If the tool specification does not match the tool actually being used, the interference
check cannot be made correctly, possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causing
injury to the user.
After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool post manually, always start automatic
operation and specify the tool number of the tool to be used.
8. Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine
may behave unexpectedly.
9. Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or a canned
cycle, the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the respective
functions for details.
10. Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip is specified
without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will be executed without
performing a skip.
11. Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable mirror image is
enabled.
12. Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position return command
is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in
the unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel compensation function
mode.
s6
4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING
This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before
attempting to operate your machine, read the supplied operators manual and programming manual
carefully, such that you are fully familiar with their contents.
WARNING
1. Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool and
workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have been specified
correctly. Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
2. Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as required. If the
machine is operated without first performing manual reference position return, it may behave
unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is
performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the
workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3. Manual numeric command
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position of the tool and
workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and command have been specified
correctly, and that the entered values are valid.
Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may damage the tool,
the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
4. Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100, applied causes
the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may damage the tool and/or machine, or
cause injury to the user.
5. Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable) during threading, rigid
tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
6. Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is operating under the
control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging
the tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing injury to the user.
s7
WARNING
7. Workpiece coordinate system shift

Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate
system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control of a program, confirm the
coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making allowances for any
shift in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly
damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
8. Software operators panel and menu switches
Using the software operators panel and menu switches, in combination with the MDI panel,
it is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine operators panel, such as mode
change, override value change, and jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury
to the user.
9. Manual intervention
If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the machine, the tool path
may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after manual
intervention, therefore, confirm the settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental command mode.
10. Feed hold, override, and single block
The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled using custom macro
system variable #3004. Be careful when operating the machine in this case.
11. Dry run
Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry run, the machine
operates at dry run speed, which differs from the corresponding programmed feedrate. Note
that the dry run speed may sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.
12. Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode
Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode, because cutter or tool
nose radius compensation is not applied. When a command is entered from the MDI to interrupt
in automatic operation in cutter or tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention
to the tool path when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions
of the corresponding functions for details.
13. Program editing
If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited (modification, insertion,
or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the control
of that program. Basically, do not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining
program while it is in use.
s8
5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE
WARNING
1. Memory backup battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered highvoltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such
as programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators
panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
contents of the CNCs memory will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operators manual or programming manual for details of
the battery replacement procedure.
s9
WARNING
2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered highvoltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
NOTE
The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operators
panel or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operators manual or programming manual for details of
the battery replacement procedure.
s10
WARNING
3. Fuse replacement
For some units, the chapter covering daily maintenance in the operators manual or
programming manual describes the fuse replacement procedure.
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the
blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the highvoltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered highvoltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.
s11
B62564E1/02 PREFACE
PREFACE
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Series 15MB 15MB
FANUC Series 15MFB 15MFB

S i 15
Series 1
FANUC Series 15MEKMODEL B4 (*) 15MEK
FANUC Series 15MELMODEL B4 (*) 15MEL
FANUC Series 150MB 150MB Series 150
(*) The FANUC Series 15MEK/MELMODEL B4 is a softwarefixed CNC capable of 4 contouring axes
switchable out of 8 axes for milling machines and machining centers.
Further the following functions can not be used in the 15MEK or 15MEL.
D Increment system D/E (Increment system C is an option function)
D Helical interpolation B
D Plane switching
D Designation direction tool length compensation
D 2 axes electric gear box
D Manual interruption of 3dimensional coordinate system conversion
D 3dimensional cutter compensation
D Trouble diagnosis guidance
D OSI/ETHERNET function
D Highprecision contour control using RISC
D Macro compiler (self compile function)
D MMCIII, MMCIV
D Smooth interpolation
D Connecting for personal computer by highspeed serialbus
p1
PREFACE B62564E1/02
Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B are as follows.

This manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
Table Related Manuals

Specification
Manual Name
Number
FANUC Series 15TB/TFBTTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS B62072E

FANUC Series 15/150MB DESCRIPTIONS B62082E
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL B62073E
FANUC Series 15MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface) B62073E1
FANUC Series 15MODEL B For Lathe
B62554E
OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming)
FANUC Series 15MODEL B For Lathe
B62554E1
OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation)
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center
B62564E
OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming)
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center
B62564E1 *
OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation)
FANUC Series 15MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL B62560E
FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL B62075E
FANUC Series 15MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS (Suppelement for Remote Buffer) B62072E1
FANUC Series 15MODEL B PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler /
B62073E2
Macro Executer)
FANUC Series 15MB CONNECTION MANUAL (MultiTeaching Function) B62083E1
FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B61013E
FANUC PMCMODEL NB/NB2 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language) B61863E
FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B61013E2
FANUC PMCMODEL NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language) B61863E1
FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA
B61013E4
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language Tool Management Library)
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B61263E
MACHINING CENTER (Series 15MFMFB) PROGRAMMING MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B61264E
MACHINING CENTER (Series 15MF/MFB) OPERATORS MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE
B61234E
(Series 15TF/TTF/TFB/TTFB) OPERATORS MANUAL
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION II FOR LATHE
B61804E2
(Series 15TFB/TTFB) OPERATORS MANUAL
p2
CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p1
I. OPERATION
1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1 Setting and Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1.1 MDI keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.1.2 Contents to be displayed and operations when the MMC is installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1.3 Key input and input buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1.4 Changing the contents of the key input buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1.5 Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1.6 Soft key display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1.7 When the soft keys are insufficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1.8 Changing soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.1.9 Outline of operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.10 Function selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.1.11 Chapter selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.1.12 Operation selection keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.1.13 Operation guidance keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.1.14 Changing language of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.1.15 Arithmetic key (SHIFT and ALTER key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.2 Machine Operators Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.3 Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.3.1 Tape reader without reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.3.2 Tape reader with reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2.3.3 Portable tape reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2.3.4 Note for handling tape reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.4 FANUC PPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3. POWER ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.1 Manual Reference Position Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.2 Manual Continuous Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.3 Incremental Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.4 Manual Handle Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.5 Manual Feed in a Specified Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.6 Manual Numeric Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4.7 Manual Absolute ON and OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.8 Effect of Manual Intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.9 ThreeDimensional Handle Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.9.1 Handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
4.9.2 Handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
c1
4.9.3 Rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.9.4 Changing tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool . . . . . . . . 86
4.9.5 Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal
direction of the tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
4.9.6 Notes on threedimensional handle feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.9.7 Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.9.8 Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt and the traveled distance . . . . 89
4.10 Manual Interruption Function for ThreeDimensional Coordinate Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.10.1 Interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.10.2 Manual interruption and the coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.1 Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.1.1 Operation in the tape mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.1.2 Operation in the MEMORY mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.1.3 MDI operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.2 Selecting a Program to be Executed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2.1 Searching for a program number or sequence number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.2.2 Searching for a program by name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.2.3 Rewinding a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.3 Starting Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.4 Executing Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.5 Stopping Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.5.1 Program stop (M00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.5.2 Optional stop (M01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.5.3 Program end (M02, M30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.5.4 Feed hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.5.5 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.5.6 Singleblock stop according to the comparison between sequence numbers . . . . . . 100
5.6 Restarting Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.6.1 Program restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.6.2 Program restart function and output of M, S, T, and B, codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.6.3 Block restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.6.4 Tool retraction and recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.6.5 Retrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.7 Manual Interrupt during Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.7.1 Manual handle interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.7.2 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
5.8 Override Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6. TEST OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

6.1 All Axes Machine Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.3 Auxiliary Function Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.4 Dry Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.5 Single Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.6 RETRACE PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.6.1 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.6.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
c2
6.6.3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.6.4 Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

7.1 Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.2 Overtravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.3 PreTravel Stroke Limit Check Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7.4 Stored Stroke Limit Check in Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS
(INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
9.1 Preparations for Storing and Editing Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
9.2 Registering Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
9.2.1 Registering a part program from the tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
9.2.2 Registering part programs from CRT/MDI panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
9.3 Deleting Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
9.4 Editing Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
9.4.1 Moving the cursor to the position to be edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
9.4.2 Repeat search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
9.4.3 Editing part programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
9.5 MULTIEDIT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
9.5.1 Operation and Display Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
9.5.2 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
9.6 Collating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
9.7 Part Program Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
9.8 Background Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
9.9 Number of Programs that can be Registered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
9.10 Length of Part Program Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
9.11 Extended Part Program Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
9.11.1 Copying and moving a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
9.11.2 Merging programs (MERGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9.11.3 Changing words and addresses (CHANGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
9.11.4 Automatically inserting sequence numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
9.12 Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
9.13 Format Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9.13.1 NC format guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
9.13.2 Format guidance with figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
9.14 Program Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
9.15 Time Stamp Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
9.16 Simple Conversational Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

10.1 Offset Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
10.1.1 Display and setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
10.1.2 Clearing all tool offset values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
10.2 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
10.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
10.4 Custom Macro Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
c3
10.5 Read/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
10.6 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
10.7 Pitch Error Compensation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
10.8 Data Protection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
10.9 Measuring the Tool Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
10.10 Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Workpiece Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
10.10.1 Class B measurement of the tool length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
10.10.2 Class B measurement of the workpiece reference position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
10.11 Menu Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
10.12 Tool Life Management Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.12.1 Displaying and modifying a tool group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.12.2 Displaying tool life data while executing a machining program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.12.3 Presetting a tool life counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.12.4 Clearing execution data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
10.12.5 Display format of tool life data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
10.12.6 Tool change signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
10.12.7 Resetting a tool change signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
10.12.8 New tool selection signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
10.12.9 Tool skip signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
10.12.10 Expanded tool life management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
10.13 Software Operators Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
10.14 Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
10.14.1 Selecting the tool data screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
10.14.2 Setting tool data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
10.15 Setting the Floating Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
10.16 Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens and Spindle Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 263
10.16.1 Servo screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
10.16.2 Spindle screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
10.16.3 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
10.17 Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
10.17.1 Subscreen states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
10.17.2 Subscreen operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
10.17.3 Data displayed on the subscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
10.17.4 Subscreen operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
10.18 RS232C Parameter Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
10.18.1 Selecting RS232C Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
10.18.2 Details of Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
10.18.3 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
10.18.4 Help Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
10.19 Screen for Specifying HighSpeed and HighPrecision Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
10.19.1 Screen configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
10.19.2 Setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
10.19.3 Tuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
10.19.4 Example of the procedure for using the tuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
10.19.5 Setting by specifying accelerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
10.20 M Code Group Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
c4
10.20.1 Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently Being Executed or
Which Have Already Been Executed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
10.20.2 M,S,T,B Codes Output for Program Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
10.20.3 M Code Group Check Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
10.20.4 Details of Grouping M codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
10.21 Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10.21.1 Screen Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10.21.2 Operation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
10.21.3 Workpiece zero point measurement B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
10.22 Transverse Inhibit Limit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
11. DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

11.1 Program Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
11.1.1 Execution program and program directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
11.1.2 Program check screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
11.1.3 Groupbygroup program directory display and punchout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
11.2 Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
11.3 Current Position Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
11.3.1 Currentposition screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
11.3.2 Presetting the current position display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
11.3.3 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
11.4 Operator Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
11.5 Alarm Message Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
11.6 Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
11.6.1 Selecting the graphic screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
11.6.2 Setting the graphic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
11.6.3 Drawing a tool path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.7 Displaying the Actual Spindle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
11.8 Directory of Floppy Disk Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
11.9 Load Meter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
11.10 Display of Run Times and Parts Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
11.11 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
11.12 Background Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
11.12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
11.12.2 Setting of graphic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
11.12.3 Procedure for setting graphic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
11.12.4 Drawing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
11.12.5 Figure to be drawn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
11.12.6 Start coordinates and position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
11.12.7 Drawing position after the start of drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
11.12.8 Graphic shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
11.12.9 Graphic enlargement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
11.12.10 Initial values at the start of drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
11.13 Waveform Diagnosis Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
11.13.1 Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
11.13.2 Specifying the conditions for starting data sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
11.13.3 Starting or terminating data sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
11.13.4 Waveform display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
c5
11.13.5 Editing a displayed waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
11.13.6 Erasing a displayed waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
11.13.7 Waveform data input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
11.14 Help Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
11.14.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
11.14.2 Help window states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
11.15 Operation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
11.15.1 Operation history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
11.15.2 Selecting signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
11.15.3 Alarm history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
11.15.4 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
11.16 Internal Position Compensation Data Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
11.17 Coordinate System Related Data Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

12.1 Small CRT/MDI Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
12.2 Panels Other than the Small CRT/MDI Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
12.3 Screen Saver Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
13. DATA OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

13.1 Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
13.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
13.3 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
13.4 Output of Tool Offset Data Corresponding to Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE AND

FANUC FA CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
14.1 What is a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
14.2 File SearchOut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
14.3 Data Output Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
14.3.1 CNC program output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
14.3.2 Offset data output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
14.3.3 CNC parameter output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
14.4 Data Input Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
14.4.1 CNC program input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
14.4.2 Offset data input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
14.4.3 CNC parameter input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
14.5 File Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
14.6 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
14.6.1 Request for cassette replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
14.6.2 Adaptor lamp conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
14.7 File Name of Floppy Cassette or Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
14.8 Expanded File Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
14.8.1 Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting a file by specifying its file name . . . 402
14.8.2 Twodrive floppy cassette control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
14.8.3 Soft key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
14.8.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

15.1 Initial Setting at PowerOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
c6
15.2 Manual Reference Position Return at Machine Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
15.3 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
15.4 Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder through MDI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
16. AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

16.1 Axis Control by the PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
16.2 Mirror Image Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
II. MAINTENANCE
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
1.1 Cleaning the Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
1.2 Tape Reader Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
1.3 Adjusting the PhotoAmplifier of the Tape Reader with Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
1.4 Cleaning the Air Filter (For the SelfStanding Cabinet Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
2. REPLACING A FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

2.1 Fuse Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
2.2 Fuse Mounting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
2.2.1 Power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
2.2.2 Connection unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
3. REPLACING BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

3.1 Replacing the Battery for Backing Up the Memory in the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
3.2 Replacing the Batteries of the Absolute Pulse Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
4. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.1 Symptom and Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
4.2 Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions, Handling, Programming,
Operation, Machine, and Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
4.3 Visually Checking the CNC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
4.4 CNC Status Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
4.4.1 How to display the CNC internal status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
4.4.2 Description of internal selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A. STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET . . . 439
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
2. INTERFACE CONNECTOR POSITIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
3. RS232C INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
3.1 Names of RS232C Interface Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
3.2 Signal Description of RS232C Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
3.3 RS232C Interface Transmission Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
3.4 Connection between RS232C Interface and I/O Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
4. RS422 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

4.1 Names of RS422 Interface Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
c7
4.2 Explanation of RS422 Interface Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
4.3 RS422 Interface Transmission Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
4.4 Connection between RS422C Interface and Input/Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
APPENDIX E. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY AND

SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
c8
I. OPERATION
B62564E1/02 1. INTRODUCTION
1. INTRODUCTION
1) Manual operation
a) Manual reference position return (See Section 4.1)
The memory in the CNC machine tool holds the positional data for setting the machine.
This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the coordinate are set. Ordi-
narily, after the power is turned on, the tool is moved to the reference position.
Manual reference position return is to move the tool to the reference position using switches and push-
buttons located on the operators panel.

Fig. 1 (a) Manual Reference Position Return
The tool can be moved to the reference position also with program commands.
This operation is called automatic reference position return. (See Section 7.1)
b) The tool movement by manual operation
Using operators panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual handle, the tool can be moved along
each axis.

Fig. 1 (b) Tool Movement by Manual Operation
3
1. INTRODUCTION B62564E1/02
The tool can be moved in the following ways:

i) Manual continuous feed (See Section 4.2)
The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed.
ii) Step feed (See Section 4.3)
The tool moves by the predetermined distance each time a pushbutton is pressed.
iii) Manual handle feed (See Section 4.4)
By rotating the manual handle,the tool moves by the distance corresponding to the degree of han-
dle rotation.
iv) Manual feed at any angle(See Section 4.5)
The tool is moved in any direction on the plane.
v) Manual numeric command(See Section 4.6)
When numeric data is entered from the MDI keyboard, the tool is moved by the distance corre-
sponding to the data.
2) Tool movement by programing Automatic operation (See Section 5)
Program
Tool
01000 ;
M-S-T-;
G92X-Y-Z-;
G00 . . . ;
G01 . . . . . . ;
.
.
.
.
.
Fig. 1 (c) Tool Movement by programing
Operating the machine according to a coded program is called automatic operation. Automatic operations
are classified into operations according to tape, memory, and the MDI.
(i) Operation according to tape
CNC Machine
Tape reader
CNC tape
Operation according the tape
The machine can be operated based on a program, while the program is being loaded from the tape
reader. This is called the operation according to tape.
4
(ii) Memory operation

After the program is once registered in memory of CNC, the machine can be run according to the pro-
gram instructions. This operation is called memory operation.

Fig. 1 (d) Memory operation
(iii) MDI operation

After the program is entered, as an command group, from the MDI keyboard, the machine can be run
according to the program. This operation is called MDI operation.

Fig. 1 (e) MDI Operation
5
3) Automatic operation
(i) Program selection
Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program is prepared for one workpiece.
If two or more programs are in memory, select the program to be used, by searching the program num-
ber (See 5.2.1).
O1001 Program number

G92 - - - - -
Work-1 program
M30
G92 - - - - -
Program number search
Work-2 program Automatic
operation
M30
G92 - - - - -
Work-3 program
M30
Fig. 1 (f) Program Selection for Automatic Operation
(ii) Start and stop (See Section 5.3 to 5.5)

Pressing the cycle start pushbutton causes automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed hold
or reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program
termination command in the program, the running will stop during automatic operation. When one pro-
cess machining is completed, automatic operation stops.
Cycle start Manual start
Manual stop Automatic

Feed hold reset operation
Stop caused
Program stop Program end
by program
Fig. 1 (g) Start and Stop for Automatic Operation
6
(iii) Restarting machining

Machining a workpiece can be stopped midway and restarted after several days holiday. Also, if the
tool is broken during machining, machining can be restarted after the tool is replaced.

(iv) Handle interruption (See Section 5.8)

While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotat-
ing the manual handle.

Fig. 1 (h) Handle Interruption for Automatic Operation
7
4) Program test (See Chapter 6)

Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created
program can operate the machine as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine
actually or viewing the position display change (without running the machine).
a) Check by running
i) Dry run (See Section 6.4)
Tool
Remove the workpiece, check only movement

of the tool. Select the tool movement rate using
the dial on the operator's panel.
Table
Fig. 1 (i) Dry Run
ii) Feedrate override
Feed rate specified by

program : 100 mm/min.
Tool
Feed rate after feed rate
override : 20 mm/min. Check the program by changing
the rate specified in the program.
Workpiece
Fig. 1 (j) Feedrate Override
8
iii) Single block (See Section 6.5)
Cycle
Cycle Cycle
start
start start
Tool
Cycle Stop Stop

start
When the cycle start pushbutton is pressed,
the tool executes on operation then stops.
By pressing the cycle start again, the tool
Workpiece
executes the next operation then stops.
The program is checked in this manner.
Stop
Fig. 1 (k) Single Block
b) How to view the position display change without running the machine
i) Machine lock (See Sections 6.1 and 6.2)
Tool CRT/MDI
X
Z
Workpiece Change cause by machine movement
The tool remains stopped, and only the

positional displays of the axes change.
Fig. 1 (l) Machine Lock
ii) Auxiliary function lock (See Section 6.3)

When automatic running is placed into the auxiliary function lock mode during the machine lock
mode, all auxiliary functions (spindle rotation, tool replacement, coolant on/off, etc.) are disabled.
9
5) Part program editing (See Section 9)

After a created program is once registered in memory, it can be corrected or modified from the CRT/MDI
panel.
This operation can be executed using the part program storage/edit function.
Program registration Program correction or modification
CRT/MDI
CNC tape
(program)
PPR
Fig. 1 (m) Part Program Editing
6) Data display/setting (See Section 10.10 and 10.2)

Data stored in NC memory can be displayed and corrected via the CRT/MDI screen.
Data setting
Data display
Screen Keys
CRT/MDI Data
CNC memory
Fig. 1 (n) Data Display/Setting
10
i) Offset value (See Section 10.1)

The tool has the tool dimension (length, diameter). When a workpiece is machined, the tool movement
route depends on the tool dimensions.
By setting tool dimension data in CNC memory beforehand, automatically generates tool routes that
permit any tool to cut the workpiece specified by the program. Tool dimension data is called the offset
value.
Geometric Wear
Setting compensation compensation
Tool Offset number 1 12.3 25.0
Display Tool Offset number 2 20.0 40.0
Screen Keys Tool Offset number 3
CRT/MDI
CNC memory
Fig. 1 (o) Offset Value Display/Setting
Machined
shape 1st tool
2nd tool
Offset value of
the 1st tool
Offset value of
the 2nd tool
Fig. 1 (p) Offset Value
11
ii) Displaying and setting parameters (10.6)

The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action in characteristics of various machines. For
example, CNC can specify the following:
a) Rapid traverse rate of each axis
b) Whether the position is detected with digital or analog data
Whether reference position return is based on the grid or analog system
The data determining these items are called parameters (see Section 10.5).
The parameters are specific to the machine.
Parameter
Setting
Rapid traverse rate
Position control
Display
Screen Keys Backlash compensation data
:
:
CRT/MDI
CNC memory
Operational
characteristics
Automatic
Program Machine operation
operation
Fig. 1 (q) Parameter Display/Setting
iii) Displaying and specifying data (see Section 10.3).
Parameters
Setting Rapid traverse feedrate
Position control system
Reference position return system
Display Backlash compensation data
Screen Keys Pitch error compensation data

CRT/MDI
CNC memory
Operation properties
Automatic
Program operation Machine movement
In addition to the parameters, settings for changing the attributes of the machine are provided. The
operator can set these items if necessary while the machine is operating.
For example, the following settings are provided:
(1) Settings for the area the tool must not approach (stroke check)
(2) Settings for I/O devices
(3) Amount of return and minimum depth of cut in the canned cycle
12
iv) Data protection key (See Section 10.8).
Machine operator's panel

Specifying data
fData protection key

Screen Keys
Protection
key
CRT/MDI Signals
Inputting programs
Inhibiting data from being registered

and specified
Programs
Offsets
Parameters
Tape reader Settings
CNC memory
Fig. 1 (r) Data Protection key
The protection key prevents the programs, offsets, parameters, and settings from being regis-
tered, changed, or deleted by mistake.
(v) Menu switches and software operators panel (See Section 10.13).
MACHINE ON OFF
LOCK MACHINE SINGLE
SINGLE LOCK BLOCK
BLOCK ON OFF

CRT screen Machine operator's panel
Turn on and off some of the switches provided for the machine operators panel such as <MA-
CHINE LOCK>and <SINGLE BLOCK> switches on the CRT screen.
13
7) Display
Tool
Screen Keys
Tool position
CRT/MDI Data
Operating condition
Programs Operator
messages
The contents of memory are displayed on the CRT/MDI screen.

The memory contains information on programs, tool position, and suchlike.
(i) Program display (See Section 11.1)
The contents of the currently active program are displayed. In addition, the programs scheduled next
and the program list are displayed.
Active program number
O1234N10123 Active sequence number

B92X300.0Y250.0 . . . . . .
G00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program
N10123G33 . . . . . . . . . . . content
............................

The cursor indicates the
currently executed Currently executed program
location.
01002 (WORK1.) 01046

01057 01245 01556 . . . . . .
02006 02567 03456 . . . . . .
.................
.................

Programs
(ii) Displaying the state of the system (See Section 11.2).
14
Displays the current state of the system according to

the classification.
CRT screen
Type of automatic
During operation using memory, MDI, or tape
operation
Type of manual During jog feed, handle feed, or incremental feed
operation
State of automatic When operation is reset, stopped, or suspended, or when searching
operation for a sequence number

(iii) Current position display (See Section 11.3)
x
X .
Y
y Z .
.
Workpiece coordinate X CRT screen

system
The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. The distance from the current
position to the target position can also be displayed.
15
(iv) Displaying operator messages (See Section 11.4).
SET WORKPIECE Memory
Message 1
CRT screen Message display signal
Message 2
Message 3
When the system must notify the operator of necessary information during machining, the system dis-
plays the message preset in memory.
(v) Displaying alarms (See Section 11.5).
PS133 MISSING ="
PS805 ILLEGAL COMMAND
P/S
CRT screen Alarm No. (program/setting)
alarm
Servo alarm

Error codes
Meaning
Code
Memory alarm
PS000

PS133

Operator's manual
If a failure occurs while the machine is operating, the system displays the corresponding error code
and alarm message on the CRT screen.
For details of the error codes, see Appendix G in the Operators Manual (Programming).
16
(vi) Displaying the operating times

The system displays the following three operating times on the CRT:
Value obtained by adding the automatic operating time
The system displays as follows the value obtained by adding the automatic operating time:
Example 10 hours 43 minutes 8 seconds
Value obtained by adding the cutting time
The system displays the value obtained by adding the time required for the machine to move by
cutting feed (linear or circular interpolation).
Generalpurpose time display
The system adds and displays the elapsed time while the operating time count signal (an input
signal) is on. For the type of time displayed, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
These three types of operating times are displayed on the setting screen. For how to display data
on the setting screen, see Section 10.3 in Part III.
(vii) Graphic display (See Section 11.6)
(2) Z
(3) (4)
Z
Z
Y
Data displayed on the
Y-Z plane
Data displayed on the

X
X-Z plane
X
Three-dimensional data displayed
(isometric) Y
Y
(1)
Data displayed on the X

X-Y plane
The programmed movement of the tool is displayed using threedimensional data.

Programmed tool movement can be displayed on the following planes:
(1) XY plane
(2) YZ plane
(3) XZ plane
(4) Three dimensional display
17
8) Data output (See Section 13)

Programs, offset values, parameters, etc. input in CNC memory can be output to paper tape, cassette,
or a floppy disk for saving. After once output to a medium, the data can be input into CNC memory.
Paper tape
Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
FANUC PPR
Memory
Program
Reader/puncher FANUC FANUC cassette
Offset interface Floppy
cassette
Parameters adaptor
.
.
.
Floppy disk
Automatic
programming
system
CNC P-G
Fig. 1 (s) Data Output
18
B62564E1/02 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES
2.1 Setting and Display Unit

Setting and display units are classified into the following types.:
Type Remarks
9 monochrome CRT/MDI (Small) Fig. 2.1 (a)
9 color or monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard) Fig. 2.1 (b)
10 PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Vertical) Fig. 2.1 (c)
10 PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Horizontal) Fig. 2.1 (d)
14 color CRT/MDI (Vertical) Fig. 2.1 (e)
14 color CRT/MDI (Horizontal) Fig. 2.1 (f)
(a) 9 monochrome CRT/MDI (Small)
O N G
A B C 7 8 9
X Y Z 4 5 6
U V W
1 2
F D H@ ?
3
E L SP
P Q RK 0 .,
I J + #
M[ S] T( EOB =&
)
PMC
CNC
SHIFT
AUX
HELP CAN INPUT
Fig. 2.1 (a) 9 monochrome CRT/MDI (Small)
19
2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES B62564E1/02
(b) 9 color or monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard)
A B C D E F G H
! / # $ % &
POWER I J
K: L M N O P< Q>
; SP ?
R S T U_ V [ W] X Y Z
( )
ON
EOB
7 8 9 HELP
SHIFT POS PROG
4 5 6 CAN
OFF

1 2 3 PAGE

0=
PAGE
AUX

+
Fig. 2.1 (b) 9 color or monochrome CRT/MDI (Standard)
20
(c) 10 PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Vertical)
POWER
ON
OFF
A B C D E 7 8 9 POS PROG
! / # $
F G H I J
K: 4 5 6
% &
L M N O P < Q> 1 2 3 CAN MMC AUX

; SP ?
R S

T U_ V [ W]
+
0=
PAGE

X Y Z SHIFT
EOB PAGE

( ) @ HELP
Fig. 2.1 (c) 10 PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Vertical)
21
(d) 10PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Horizontal)
POS PROG
POWER
A B
!
EOB
C D E 7 8 9
/ # $ HELP
ON F G H 4 5 6 CAN
% &
I J
K: 1 2 3
L
;
M
SP
N
+
0=

OFF O P < Q> MMC AUX
?
R S T SHIFT

U_ V [ W]
PAGE

X Y Z PAGE
( )
Fig. 2.1(d) 10PL/MDI or PCD/MDI (Horizontal)
22
(e) 14color CRT/MDI (Vertical)
POWER
A B C D E 7 8 9 POS PROG
! / # $
ON
F G H I J K: 4 5 6
% &
L M N O P < Q> 1 2 3 CAN MMC AUX

; SP ?
R S

T U_ V [ W]
+
0=
PAGE

OFF
X Y Z SHIFT
EOB PAGE

( ) @ HELP
Fig. 2.1(e) 14color CRT/MDI (Vertical)
23
(f) 14color CRT/MDI (Horizontal)
A B C
! /
D E F G
# $ %
H I J
K:
&
L M N O
; SP ?
P < Q> R S

T U_ V [ W]
X Y Z SHIFT
( ) @
EOB
7 8 9 HELP
4 5 6 CAN
1 2 3

+
0=

MMC AUX
POS PROG

OFF ON PAGE

PAGE

Fig. 2.1(f) 14color CRT/MDI (Horizontal)
24
2.1.1 MDI keyboard
(23)OTHERSkey
(2)RESETkey (6)Address key (19)P-CHECKkey
A B C D E F G H
! / # $ % &
POWER I J
K: L M N O P< Q>
; SP ?
R S T U_ V [ W] X Y Z
( )
ON (17)PROG key (22)MESSAGE key
(21)SERVICE key
(20)SETTING key (18)OFFSETkey
(16)POS key
EOB
7 8 9 HELP
SHIFT POS PROG
4 5 6 CAN
OFF

1 2 3 PAGE

0=
PAGE
AUX

+
(26)AUX (12)Cursor move

key
key
(4)Function menu key (3)Soft keys (5)Operation menu key (8)INPUT/

INSERT key
(6)Numerical keys (13)Page change keys

(1)POWER on/off buttons (9)Alter key (7)Shift key
(25)CALC key
(11)CAN key
(10)Delete key
(14)PMC/CNC key
(24)EOB/HELPkey
25
Table 2.1.1 MDI Keyboard functions (1/3)
No. Name Functions

(1) <Power> ON/OFF button Press this button to turn CNC power ON and OFF.
(2) <RESET> key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc.
(3) Soft key The soft key has various functions, according to the Ap-
plications. The soft key functions are displayed at the
bottom of the CRT screen.
(4) Function menu key Pressing this key when the soft keys are not function
selection keys (see Subsection 2.1.9) returns the soft
keys to the states of the function selection keys. Press-
ing the key when the soft keys are function selection
keys changes the soft keys to the function selection keys
that do not fit on the screen. (The 9 CRT/MDI panel has
five soft keys. The 14 CRT/MDI panel has ten soft keys.
However, these soft keys are not sufficient for some ap-
plications. In this case, a plus sign (+) is displayed at the
extreme right of the bottom line on the CRT. The plus
sign indicates that some soft keys do not fit on the
screen.)
(5) Operation menu key The functions of the soft keys vary according to the ap-
plications. Pressing this key when the soft keys are not
operation selection keys changes the soft keys to the
operation selection keys that are effective on the se-
lected CRT screen (see Subsection 2.1.11). Pressing
this key when the soft keys are operation selection keys
changes the soft keys to the operation selection keys
that do not fit on the screen. (The 9 CRT/MDI panel has
five soft keys. The 14 CRT/MDI panel has ten soft keys.
However, these soft keys are not sufficient for some ap-
plications. In this case, a plus sign (+) is displayed in the
rightmost frame of the bottom line on the CRT. The plus
sign indicates that some soft keys do not fit on the
screen.)
(6) Address/numerical key Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other
characters.
(7) <SHIFT> key Some address keys are marked with two characters. To
enter the lower right character, press the shift key first.
When the shift key is pressed, ^ is displayed in the key
input buffer. This indicates that pressing the address key
enters the lower right character.
!, , $, \, , <, >, :, ;, %,
These characters can be used on the MMC screen.
(8) <INPUT/INSERT> key When an address or numeric key is pressed, the data is
entered in the key input buffer, then displayed on the
CRT. Press the input key to store the data entered in the
key input buffer in the offset register.
The input key is equivalent to an <INPUT> soft key. Ei-
ther may be used.
Pressing this key on the program editing screen inserts
the contents of the key input buffer after the position
where the cursor is located. The INSERT soft key has
the equivalent function. Either key can be used.
(9) ALTER key Pressing this key on the program editing screen replaces
the word where the cursor is located with the contents of
the key input buffer. The ALTER soft key has the equiva-
lent function. Either key can be used.
26

No. Name Functions
(10) DELETE key Pressing this key on the program editing screen deletes
the word where the cursor is located. The DELETE
WORD soft key has the equivalent function. Either key
can be used.
(11) Cancel <CAN> key Pressing this key deletes a character or symbol input to
the key input buffer.
The contents of the buffer are displayed on the CRT. The
position where a new entry is to be input is displayed with
an underscore (_). Pressing the CAN (cancel) key de-
letes the character immediately before the underscore.
Example) When the contents of the key input buffer are
displayed as shown below,
>N001X100Z_
pressing the CAN key deletes Z and the displayed con-
tents change as follows:
>N001Z100_
(12) Cursor move keys The following four cursor keys are provided:
: This key moves the cursor forward in small incre-
ments.
The cursor is moved in the direction of order.
: This key moves the cursor backward in small incre-
ments.
The cursor is moved to the opposite direction.
: This key moves the cursor for the key input buffer
forward when a character is entered in the key input buff-
er. The position of the cursor for the key input buffer is
indicated by an underscore. Pressing an address or nu-
meric key enters an address or number at the cursor
position. Pressing the cancel <CAN> key deletes the
character before the cursor position.
This key moves the cursor on the CRT screen forward in
large increments when no data is entered in the key input
buffer.
The cursor is moved in the direction of order.
: This cursor key moves the cursor for the key input
buffer backward. This key moves the cursor on the CRT
screen backward in large increments when no data is
entered in the key input buffer.
The cursor is moved to the opposite direction.
(13) Page change keys Two kinds of page change keys are described below.
< >: This key is used to changeover the page on the
CRT screen in the forward direction.
< >: This key is used to changeover the page on the
CRT screen in the reverse direction.
The small 9 monochrome CRT/MDI panel is not pro-
vided with page keys. Pressing the and cursor keys
simultaneously is equivalent to pressing the page key.
Pressing the and cursor keys simultaneously is
equivalent to pressing the page key.
(14) PMC/CNC switch key This key is used to determine whether the CRT/MDI pan-
el is used for the CNC or PMC.
(15) MMC key Pressing this key enables the CRT/MDI to be used in the
MMC. This key is valid only when a CNC having the
MMC is used.
(16) POS key Pressing this key selects the current position display
screen. The POSITION soft key has the equivalent func-
tion. Either key can be used.
(17) PROG key Pressing this key selects the part program display
screen. The PROGRAM soft key has the equivalent
function. Either key can be used.
27

No. Name Functions
(18) OFFSET key Pressing this key selects the tool offset display screen or
the screen displaying offset from the workpiece reference
position. The OFFSET soft key has the equivalent func-
tion. Either key can be used.
(19) PCHECK key Pressing this key selects the program check screen. The
P CHECK soft key has the equivalent function. Either
key can be used.
(20) SETTING key Pressing this key selects the setting screen. The SET-
TING soft key has the equivalent function. Either key
can be used.
(21) SERVICE key Pressing this key selects the parameter and diagnosis
screen. The MAINTENANCE soft key has the equivalent
function. Either key can be used.
(22) MESSAGE key Pressing this key selects the screen for alarm messages
and operator messages. The MESSAGE soft key has
the equivalent function. Either key can be used.
(23) OTHERS key Pressing this key selects and displays the screen speci-
fied with parameter No. 2215.
(24) HELP key Pressing this key displays the help window on a screen.
(SHIFT/EOB) Alarm help, soft key help, and G code guide can be dis-
played. For details, see Help Functions.
(25) Arithmetic <CALC> key Press this key to execute operation commands in the key
<SHIFT>+<ATER> input buffer.
Example) When the data in the key input buffer is [10 +
20 x 30 + 400/8], the arithmetic key is pressed. Then,
the data in the key input buffer is changed to 660.
The arithmetic key is standard.
(26) <AUX> key Auxiliary key
28
2.1.2 Contents to be displayed and operations when the MMC is installed

The data to be displayed and key input operations vary entirely according to whether the MMC screen or CNC/
PMC screen is displayed on the CRT/MDI panel.
The MMC switch key and CNC/PMC switch key are used to determine whether the MMC screen or the CNC/
PMC screen is displayed.
When the CNC/PMC screen is selected, the contents displayed on the CRT/MDI and the operations are identi-
cal to those for the Series 15MB.
This manual describes the contents displayed and the operations when the CNC screen is selected. Refer
to the machine tool builders manual for the contents displayed and the operations when the MMC screen is
selected.
(1) Selecting the MMC screen
Press the MMC switch key to select the MMC screen.
(2) Selecting the CNC/PMC screen
Press the CNC/PMC key to display the CNC/PMC screen. Pressing the CNC/PMC key while the CNC
screen is displayed displays the PMC screen. Pressing the CNC/PMC key while the PMC screen is dis-
played displays the CNC screen.
Press the CNC/PMC key while the MMC screen is displayed to change the display mode (to display the
CNC or PMC screen) before pressing the MMC switch key.
2.1.3 Key input and input buffer
When an address or a numerical key is pressed, the character corresponding to that key is input once into the
key input buffer. The contents of the key input buffer is displayed at the bottom of the CRT screen. In order
to indicate that it is key input data, a > symbol is displayed immediately in front of it. A _ is displayed at the
end of the key input data indicating the input position of the next character. To input the lower character of the
keys that have two characters inscribed on them, first press the <SHIFT> key and then the key in question.
When the <SHIFT> key is pressed the _ that indicates the input position of the next character changes to ^
and indicates that the lower character can be input (shift status). When a character is input in shift status the
shift status is canceled.
To enter the lower characters on the address or numeric keys continuously, the shift key must be pressed first
each time an address or numeric key is pressed.
Pressing the shift key in the shift state releases the shift state.
Up to 78 characters can be entered at a time in the key input buffer.
2.1.4 Changing the contents of the key input buffer

(1) Inserting characters
The contents of the key input buffer are displayed on the CRT. When the next address or numeric key is
pressed, the corresponding character is inserted at the cursor position indicated by an underscore. Press
the or cursor key to move the cursor.
Move the cursor to the desired position, then enter the desired characters.
Example Contents of the key input buffer displayed: >N001X100.0Y200.0F100.0;_
To enter G90 after N001 in this case, perform the following:
1 Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the desired position:
>N001_X100.0Y200.0F100.0;
2 Enter G90 by pressing the corresponding address and numeric keys.
>N001G90_X100.0Y200.0F100.0;
3 Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the following position:
>N001G90X100.0Y200.0F100.0;_
(2) Deleting characters
Move the cursor to the position after the characters to be deleted, then press the <CAN> key. If the <CAN>
key is pressed in the shift state, all data in the key input buffer is deleted.
Example Contents of the key input buffer displayed: >N001X100.0Y200.0F100.0;_
To delete Y200.0, perform the following:
1 Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the desired position:
>N001X100.0Y200.0_F100.0;
2 Press the <CAN> key five times.
>N001X100.0_F100.0;
3 Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the following position:
>N001X100.0F100.0;_
29
2.1.5 Warning message

Data must be input in the specified format. If an attempt is made to input data that violates the specified format
in the key input buffer in order to execute some operations, a warning message is displayed.
The warning message is displayed in highlighted characters in the line above the key input buffer field. The
characters are displayed at higher intensity on the 9 monochrome CRT or in purple on the 14 color CRT.
When a warning message is displayed, the soft keys function as cancel keys. When the cancel key (soft key)
is pressed, the warning message is canceled. Change the format of the data in the key input buffer to the speci-
fied format. Then, the operations specified by the data can be executed again.
2.1.6 Soft key display

The 9 CRT/MDI panel has five soft keys. The 14 CRT/MDI panel has ten soft keys. This manual describes
the five soft keys on the 9 CRT/MDI panel. The soft keys are displayed as follows:

The plus sign in the rightmost frame indicates that there are other soft keys that do not fit on the CRT.
The same basic method for operating soft keys applies to both the 14 CRT/MDI panel with ten soft keys and
the 9 CRT/MDI panel with five soft keys. Obviously, it is not necessary to scroll the soft keys on the 14 CRT/
MDI panel.
When some soft keys for setting operations or operation guidance are pressed, processing is executed im-
mediately. These keys are underlined on the screen.

Underlined soft keys are displayed at higher intensity on the 9 monochrome CRT. They are displayed in green
on the 14 color CRT.
Some soft keys are displayed in parentheses on the screen.
When these soft keys are pressed, a message prompting the operator to enter the corresponding data is dis-
played.

2.1.7 When the soft keys are insufficient

As mentioned above, the 9 CRT/MDI panel is equipped with five soft keys and the 14 CRT/MDI panel is
equipped with ten. These soft keys may be insufficient for some applications. When the soft keys are used
as function selection keys, for example, up to seven functions can be selected. In this case, the plus sign (+)
is displayed in the rightmost frame of the bottom line on the 9 CRT/MDI CRT.
(1) When the soft keys are used as function selection keys
When the function menu key (leftmost key) is pressed while the plus sign is displayed in the rightmost frame
of the bottom line, the soft keys change to the function selection keys that do not fit on the screen.
(2) When the soft keys are used as operation selection keys
When the operation menu key (rightmost key) is pressed while the plus sign is displayed in the rightmost
frame of the bottom line, the soft keys change to the operation selection keys that do not fit on the screen.
(3) When the soft keys are used as chapter selection keys
When the chapter selection menu key (soft key) is pressed while the plus sign is displayed in the rightmost
frame of the bottom line, the soft keys change to the chapter selection keys that do not fit on the screen.
30
2.1.8 Changing soft keys

The soft keys are used as either function selection keys, chapter selection keys, operation selection keys, or
operation guidance keys.
The procedure for changing the function of the soft keys is as follows:
(1) Changing the soft keys to the function selection keys
Pressing the leftmost function menu key changes the soft keys to the function selection keys.
(2) Changing the soft keys to the chapter selection keys
(a) Selecting chapters in the function selection key state
The currently selected function key is displayed at higher intensity on the 9 CRT/MDI panel or in green
on the 14 CRT/MDI panel. Whenever the function key is pressed, new chapters can be selected in
sequence.
(b) Changing the soft keys from the function selection keys to the chapter selection keys
Pressing the <CHAPTER> soft key (rightmost soft key) changes the soft keys from the function selec-
tion keys to the chapter selection keys. Select the desired chapter by pressing the soft keys. To return
the soft keys to the function selection keys, press the function menu key. To return the soft keys to
the operation selection keys, press the operation menu key.
(c) Selecting chapters in the operation selection key state
To enable chapter selection when the soft keys are used as operation selection keys, use the soft keys
as both the operation selection keys and the chapter selection keys. To switch between these modes,
press the operation menu key. Pressing the chapter selection keys selects new chapters. To return
the soft keys to the operation selection keys, press the operation menu key.
(3) Changing the soft keys to the operation selection keys
(a) Pressing the rightmost operation menu key changes the soft keys to the operation selection keys in
whichever state the soft keys may be.
(b) Entering data in the key input buffer when the soft keys are used as the function selection keys is as-
sumed to be an attempt by the operator to execute an operation. The soft keys then automatically
change to the operation selection keys.
(4) Changing the soft keys to the operation guidance keys
(a) Changing the soft keys from the operation selection keys to the operation guide keys
Press the operation selection key.
The following block diagram shows how to change the soft keys through their various modes.
31
Changing chapters
After chapters
Chapter selection key
are changed
Changing chapters Same Chapter selection

(soft key)
Changing functions Different

Chapter menu key Function menu key
After chapters
are changed Function selection key
Function menu key
Next function Function selection

selection key (soft key)
Next operation selection key Key input Operation menu key
Operation menu key
Operation selection
(soft key)
Operation key
Not empty
<Is the key input buffer empty?>
Empty
Operation guidance
(soft key)
Key input
EXEC key
(soft key)
Execution
After execution
32
2.1.9 Outline of operations

1 Select the data to be displayed and the major item to be entered on the CRT/MDI panel with the function
selection key (soft key).
2 Each major item is divided into minor items (called chapters). Select a chapter with the chapter selection
soft key.
3 To perform a certain operation such as data input, select the operation with the operation selection soft key.
4 Pressing the operation selection key changes the soft key to the operation guide key. The executable op-
erations can be checked with the operation guidance key.
5 Pressing some operation guidance keys immediately executes the corresponding operation. However,
pressing other operation guidance keys displays a prompt for the operator to enter the data required for
starting the corresponding operation.
Operation guidance keys that immediately execute an operation are displayed in higher intensity on the
9 monochrome CRT or in green on the 14 color CRT. Operation guidance keys that display a prompt are
displayed in bluegreen.
6 When operation guidance keys that displays a prompt for the operator to enter the required data is pressed,
if the address that corresponds to the data has been determined, the system automatically enters the ad-
dress into the keyinput buffer. Otherwise, the operator determines the address and inputs the data.
7 When the necessary data is entered in the key input buffer, the soft key changes to the EXEC key which
starts execution.
8 Press the EXEC key after the necessary data is entered in the key input buffer. The corresponding opera-
tion is then performed. Set the functions to be displayed to parameter 2215.
2.1.10 Function selection keys

Function selection keys are classified into soft keys and the hard keys on the MDI panel. To select a function
with the soft key, press the function selection menu key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys,
then press the desired function selection key. To select a function with the hard key, press the desired function
selection key.
Functions can be selected in any mode.
Detailed function selection is performed with the chapter selection keys.
The following function selection keys are provided:
(Soft keys)

(Hard keys)

(1) [POSITION] soft key or <POS> hard key
Press this key to select the currentposition screen.
(2) [PROGRAM] soft key or <PROG> hard key
Press this key to select the partprogram screen.
33
(3) [OFFSET] soft key or <OFFSET> hard key

Press this key to select the tool offset screen or the screen for the offset from the workpiece reference point.
(4) [PRGCHK] soft key or <PCHECK> hard key
Press this key to select the program check screen.
(5) [SETTING] soft key or <SETTING> hard key
Press this key to select the setting screen.
(6) [SERVICE] soft key or <SERVICE> hard key
Press this key to select the parameter or diagnosis screen.
(7) [MESSAGE] soft key or <MESSAGE> hard key
Press this key to select the alarm or operator message screen.
(8) [OTHERS] hard key
Press this key to select the function screen other than the function screens described in items (1) to (7),
such as a graphic screen.
2.1.11 Chapter selection keys

The function selection keys are used to select major items. Each major item is divided into minor items called
chapters. The chapter selection keys are used to select the chapters.
To select a chapter, change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the desired chapter selection
key. Pressing the function selection hard key also enables chapter selection.
(1) Chapter selection keys on the position screen (function keys to select position chapters)
The chapter selection keys on the position screen are as follows:

(a) [OVERALL] key

Press this key to select the overallposition screen on the position screen.
(b) [RELATIV] key
Press this key to select the relativeposition screen on the position screen.
(c) [ABSOLUT] key
Press this key to select the screen for the positions in the workpiece coordinate system on the position
screen.
(d) [MACHINE] key
Press this key to select the screen for the positions in the machine coordinate system on the position
screen.
(2) Program chapter selection keys (function keys to select program chapters)
The program chapter selection keys are as follows:

(a) [TEXT] key

Press this key to select the program text screen.
(b) [DIR.MEM] key
Press this key to select the screen for the programs stored in the program memory (directory). This
screen displays the program numbers, program names, and other information.
34
(3) Offset chapter selection keys (function keys to select offset chapters)
The offset chapter selection keys are as follows:

(a) [WEAR] key

Press this key to select the tool offset screen.
(b) [WRK.ZER] key
Press this key to select the screen for the offset from the workpiece reference point.
(4) Commandvalue chapter selection keys (function keys to select PRGCHK chapters)
The commandvalue chapter selection keys are as follows:

(a) [CHECK] key

Press this key to select the screen that simultaneously displays programs, relative or absolute posi-
tions, continuousstate information, and PMC data.
(b) [LAST] key
Press this key to select the screen for the command value of the block preceding the currently
executed block and the continuousstate values of the issued G code, F code, and so on.
(c) [NEXT] key
Press this key to select the screen for the command value of the currently executed block and the con-
tinuousstate values of the issued G code, F code, and so on.
(5) Setting chapter selection keys (function keys to select setting chapters)
The setting chapter selection keys are as follows:

(a) [HANDY] key

Press this key to select the inputoutput setting screen.
(b) [GENERAL] key
Press this key to select the screen for the parameters that can be set.
(c) [OP.PANEL] key
Press this key to select the menu switch or software operator panel screen.
(d) [MACRO] key
Press this key to select the custom macro variable screen.
35
(6) Service chapter selection keys (function keys to select service chapters)

(a) [PARAM] key

Press this key to select the parameter screen.
(b) [PITCH] key
Press this key to select the pitch error compensation data screen.
(c) [DIAGNOS] key
Press this key to select the diagnosis screen.
(d) [DSP.MEM] key
Press this key to select the screen displaying the contents of the memory for CNC control software.
(7) Message chapter selection keys (function keys to select message chapters)
The message chapter selection keys are as follows:

(a) [ALARM] key

Press this key to select the alarm message screen.
(b) [OPERATOR] key
Press this key to select the operator message screen.
2.1.12 Operation selection keys

The possible operations vary according to the screens selected with function selection keys or chapter selec-
tion keys. To improve operability, only the names of the operations enabled on the displayed screen are dis-
played in the field for the operation selection (soft) keys.
To select an operation, change the soft keys to the operation selection keys, then press the desired operation
selection key.
For the operations of the operation selection keys, refer to the individual descriptions.
NOTE When the operation selection key is pressed while no data is entered in the key input buffer,
the soft keys change to the operation guidance keys. The operation guidance keys are used
to display information about the current operation or the possible operations.
Enter the necessary data in the key input buffer. When the desired operation selection key is
pressed, the corresponding operation is performed. This procedure reduces the number of
times keys are pressed when the operator understands the operation without using the
operation guidance keys.
Some operations cannot be performed unless the operation guidance keys are used.
This section describes how to use the operation guidance keys.
Example Setting offsets

Operation selection keys:

36
(1) When no data is entered in the key input buffer

(a) Pressing the INPUT key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.

(b) Pressing the (VALUE) key displays the message prompting the operator to enter the offset data.
(c) Entering the offset data changes the soft keys as follows:

(d) Pressing the EXEC key stores the data of the key input buffer in the memory corresponding to the off-
set number at the cursor.
(2) When the offset data is entered in the key input buffer
(a) Pressing the INPUT key stores the data of the key input buffer in the memory corresponding to the
offset number at the cursor.
2.1.13 Operation guidance keys

The possible operations vary according to the which operation selection keys are pressed. To improve oper-
ability, only the possible operations corresponding to the pressed operation selection key are displayed using
the corresponding operation guidance keys (soft keys).
Pressing some operation guidance keys immediately starts the corresponding operation while pressing others
displays a prompt for the operator to enter the necessary data.
Operation guidance keys that immediately execute an operation are displayed in higher intensity on the 9
monochrome CRT or in green on the 14 color CRT.
In this manual, these soft keys are underlined.
Entering data using the keys changes the soft keys as follows, irrespective of whether the operation guidance
keys are pressed:

Pressing the EXEC key executes the operation specified for the data in the key input buffer.
For the use of the operation guidance keys, refer to the individual descriptions.
37
2.1.14 Changing language of the display

The language of the CRT display is specified with a parameter. The following languages are available:
Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, and Swedish.
Japanese English
German French
Italian Swedish
Spanish
38
2.1.15 Arithmetic key (SHIFT and ALTER key)

The arithmetic key is a standard key and is used to evaluate the arithmetic expressions in the key input buffer
whose data is entered from the MDI panel.
(1) Operation
1 Enter data from the MDI panel. 100.0 + 10.0__
2 Press the SHIFT and ALTER key. [SHIFT] ; [ALTER CALC]
3 The expression is evaluated, and 110.0__
the result is stored in the key input
buffer.
(2) Arithmetic expressions
Enter the arithmetic expression in the same way as a general one.
1 An alphabetic or special character string other than a function name in the key input buffer is regarded
as the end code of an arithmetic expression. The use of some end codes enables multiple expres-
sions to be entered in the key input buffer. The CALC key evaluates of each expression.
Example 1
100.0/2;200.0/2;300.0/2__

50.0;100.0;150.0__
Example 2
X350.0*Y120.0/5;X20.0*3.5__

X1050.0Y24.0;X70.0__
(3) Types of numeric values
This function uses integers and real numeric values.
(a) Input format
Integers : Strings of numbers from 0 to 9
Example 10735
Real values : Strings of numbers containing a decimal point
Example 10.23
(b) Internal data format
Integers : Onebit sign and 31bit binary data
Real values : M*2E
M : Onebit sign and 31bit binary data
E : Onebit sign and sevenbit binary data
(c) Types of values obtained by calculation
i) A calculation involving integers and real values produces a real value.
ii) The result of a calculation is converted into a character string in the following range, then stored
in the key input buffer:
Integer : 99999999 to 99999999
Real value : 99999999.0 to .0000001
,.0
,.00000001 to 99999999.0
39
(4) Functions
The following functions are available:
No. Function Type Description

1 SIN Integer Sine (degrees)
2 COS 7 Cosine (degrees)
3 TAN 7 Tangent (degrees)
4 ATAN 7 Inverse tangent
5 SQRT 7 Square root
6 ABS 7 Absolute value
7 ACOS 7 Inverse cosine
8 ASIN 7 Inverse sine
9 LN 7 Natural logarithm
10 EXP 7 Exponent of e (= 2.718...)
NOTE The arguments of the ATAN function are specified as follows:

ATAN[<expression 1>][<expression 2>]

Example 1 ATAN[0] / [0] __ 0

Example 2 ATAN[1] / [0] __ 90.0
Example 3 ATAN[1] / [1] __ 45.0
Example 4 ATAN[-1]/ [-1] __ -135.0
(5) Priority of operations
(a) Function > multiplication/division > addition/subtraction
(b) The priority of operations can be changed with square brackets [ ].
Example SIN [ [ 10 + 15 ] * 0.1+0.5] * 10

The argument of SIN is obtained as the result of operation (4).

(6) Operational accuracy
The accuracy of real type data operation with this arithmetic function conforms to the operational accuracy
for custom macro operation commands.
(7) Syntax rules of the expressions
<numeric character>: The following characters are used:
0 , 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , and 9
<sign> : The following signs are used to indicate whether numbers are positive or negative:
+ or
<addition or subtraction operator> : <sign> is used to indicate addition and subtraction.
<sign>
40
<multiplication or division operator>: The following characters are used to indicate multiplication and
division, respectively:
* and (blank)
<unsigned integer>: <numeric character> string
<numeric character> ...
Example) 4567
<fraction part>: <numeric character> string
<numeric character> ...
Example) ...
<unsigned integer>: A decimal point is inserted between <unsigned integer> and
<fractional part>.
{<unsigned integer>}.{<fractional part>}
Example) 101.02
<function name 1>: The following character strings are used to represent the functions of sine, cosine,
tangent, square root, absolute value, inverse cosine, inverse sine, natural
logarithm, and exponent of e:
SIN, CON, TAN, SQRT, ABC, ACOS, ASIN, LN, and EXP
<function name 2>: The following character string is used to represent the inverse tangent function:
ATAN
<enclosed expression>: <expression> enclosed in square brackets [ ]
[<expression>]
<simple factor>: <unsigned number> and <enclosed expression>
Example) <unsigned number>: 12.34
Example) <enclosed expression>: [10.1 + 3.3]
<function call>: The following two types can be used:
i) Calling <function name 1>
The format is <function name 1> followed by <enclosed expression> to execute
the function of <function name 1> for <enclosed expression>.
ii) Calling <function name 2>
The format is <function name 2> followed by two <enclosed expression> units to
execute the function of <function name 2> for two divisional <enclosed
expression> units.
<function name 1><enclosed expression> and <function name 2><enclosed
expression><enclosed expression>
Example) SIN[30.0]
Example) ATAN[2.5] [5.0]
<factor>: <simple factor> and <function call>
Example) <simple factor>: [1.0 + 2.5 * 3.333]
Example) <function call>: SQRT[3.0 * 2.0]
<item>: <factor> and multiplication or division between <item> and <factor>
<factor> and <item><multiplication or division operator><factor>
Example) <factor>: ATAN[2.5] [5.0]
Example) <item><multiplication or division operator><factor>: 12.3 SIN[1.1 * 3.0]
<expression>: <item> with <sign> and addition or subtraction between <expression> and <item>
{<sign>}<item> and <expression><addition or subtraction operator><item>
Example) {<sign><item>: 2.2 * 5.1
Example) <expression><addition or subtraction operator><item>: 1.2 3.0 +
EXP[2.0]
41
2.2 Machine Operators Panel

The operators panel varies in functioning and switch arrangement between the different tools. Operations of
a typical operators panel are explained as shown Fig. 2.2. However, for details, refer to the manual issued by
the machine tool builder.
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
JOG & INCREMENTAL
MEMORY
INC +X +Y +Z
EDIT JOG
CYCLE START FEED HOLD MODE SELECT RAPID
X Y Z -X -Y -Z
25 50
LOW 100
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON
x10 x100
RAPID TRAVERSE x1 x1000
OVERRIDE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR
SINGLE OPTIONAL DRY RUN REFERENCE
BLOCK BLOCK SKIP RETURN
100 INCREMENTAL
OFF
DISPLAY MACHINE Y
LOCK LOCK OFF ON X Z x10 x1
EMERGENCY LOCK MODE MANUAL/ABSOLUTE 0 200 0 2000 HANDLE AXIS HANDLE

STOP FEEDRATE OVERRIDE JOG FEEDRATE MULTIPLIER
Fig. 2.2 An illustration for Operators panel
42
Table 2.2 Functions on the Operator Panel
Function Description
CYCLE START button To start automatic operation, select an executable program
and press this button. The lamp indicating automatic
operation is on during automatic operation.
FEED HOLD button To decelerate and stop the tool, press this button during
automatic operation.
Mode selector To select the mode according to the type of job, use this
selector.
RAPID button To move the tool at the rapid traverse feedrate, press this
button.
JOG & INCREMENTAL To carry out continuous manual feed or incremental feed,
buttons press these buttons.
Handle To move the tool in the desired direction, rotate the handle.
SINGLE BLOCK switch To perform automatic operation in units of blocks, turn
this switch on.
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP To skip optional blocks, turn this switch on.
switch
DRY RUN switch To perform a dry run, turn this switch on.
REFERENCE RETURN To return the machine to the reference position, turn this
switch switch on.
RAPID TRAVERSE To apply rapid traverse override to the machine, select the
OVERRIDE selector desired override.
INCREMENTAL To select the distance to be traveled per step during
selector incremental feed, use this selector.
EMERGENCY STOP Press this button when the machine must be stopped
button immediately.
LOCK MODE selector To select the display lock or machine lock mode, use this
selector.
MANUAL/ABSOLUTE This switch specifies whether the distance to be traveled
switch during manual operation is stored in the abusolute register
when the operator manually intervenes in the automatic
mode.
FEEDRATE OVERRIDE This dial specifies the override when the feedrate is
dial overridden during automatic or manual operation.
JOG FEEDRATE dial This dial specifies the continuous manual feedrate.
HANDLE AXIS selector This selector is used to select the axis along which the
machine is moved manually with the handle.
HANDLE MULTIPLIER This selector is used to select the multiplying factor of the
selector distance traveled per graduation during manual handle feed.
43
2.3 Tape Reader

The tape readers are classified into three types:
(1) Tape reader without reels
(2) Tape reader with reels
(3) Portable tape reader
2.3.1 Tape reader without reels
1) Names and descriptions of each section
3. Capstan 1. Light source
4. Control switch
AUTO
RELEASE
CNC tape MANUAL
2. Optical
reader
The belt is pulled up to

draw out the paper tape.
Belt for drawing out the paper
tape
Tape compartment
Fig. 2.3.1 (a) Names of Each Section

Table 2.3.1 Descriptions for each part
No. Name Functions
(1) Light Sources An LED (Light emitting diode) is mounted for
each channel and for the feed hole (9diodes
in total). A builtin Stop Shoe functions to
decelerate the tape. The light source is at-
tracted to the optical reader by a magnet so
that the tape will be held in the correct posi-
tion. This unit can be opened upward, by
turning the tape reader control switch to the
RELEASE position (this turns off the mag-
net).
(2) Optical Reader Reads data punched on the tape, through a
glass window. Dust or scratches on the
glass window can result in reading errors.
Keep this window clean.
(3) Capstan Roller Controls the feeding of tape as specifyed by
the control unit.
(4) Tape Reader Control Switch A 3position switch used to control the Tape
Reader.
RELEASE The tape is allowed to be
free, or used to open the light
source.
When loading or unloading
the tape, this position is se
lected.
AUTO The tape is set to fixed posi
tion by theStop Shoe. The
feed and
stop of the tape is controlled
operation or data input from
tape, the Light Source must
be closed and this position
must be selected.
MANUAL The tape can be fed in the
forward reading direction. if
another position is selected,
the tape feed is stopped.
(5) Tape Box A Tape Box is located below the Tape
Reader. A belt used to draw out a paper
tape is located inside the box. The paper
tape can easily be pulled out using this belt.
44
2) Tape reader handling

a) Tape loading
1 Open the front door of the tape reader.
2 Set the Tape Reader switch to the RELEASE position.
3 Lift the Light Source Unit, and insert an NC tape between the gap. The tape must be posi-
tioned as shown in the figure, when viewed looking downward.

4 Pull the tape until the top of the tape goes past the Capstan roller.
5 Check that the NC tape is correctly positioned by the Tape Guide.
6 Lower the Light Source.
7 Turn the switch to the AUTO position.
8 Suspend the top and rearend of the tape in the Tape Box.
b) Unloading the NC tape
2 Turn the switch to the RELEASE position.
3 Lift the Light Source and remove the tape.
4 Lower the Light Source.
5 Close the front door of the tape reader.
45
2.3.2 Tape reader with reels

(1) Names and description of each section
2. Optical reader
1. Light source
3. Capstan
6. Tension arm
4. Reel
4. Reel
5. Reel bose
5. Reel boss
12. REWIND
7. Control switch
button
8. AUTO lamp 11. STOP button
9. ALARM
lamp 10. FORWARD button
CNC tape
The belt is pulled up to draw

out the CNC tape.
Belt for drawing out

the paper tape
Tape compartment
46
Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section
No. Section Description

1 Light source Nine LEDs for channels and feed holes are installed in this sec-
tion. A builtin stop shoe stops the tape. The section is at-
tached to the optical reader with a magnet so that it also serves
as a tape retainer. The light source can be opened upward
when the control switch is turned to the RELEASE position
deactivate the magnet.
2 Optical reader This section reads the tape and has a glass window. If the win-
dow is dirty or is damaged, a reading error may occur. The
window must always be kept clean and free from defects.
3 Capstan This roller serves as a tape feeder and operates according to
the command from the control unit.
4 Reel This reel is used for fastforwarding and rewinding the tape. A
150 m tape can be used.
5 Reel boss This boss is used to accept the reel. The boss rotates the reel
and is driven by the reel motor according to the command from
the control unit.
6 Tension arm This arm adjusts the tension of the tape fed from the reel. The
arm absorbs the time delay in the tape transport when the reel
motor starts and stops.
7 Control switch This switch changes the operating modes of the tape reader.
The switch can be turn to one of the following positions:
RELEASE: Releases the tape so that it is free to move. The
light source can be opened upward. Before loading or unload-
ing the tape, turn the switch to this position.
REEL ON: Secures the tape with the stop shoe and activates
the reel motor. Before operating the tape reader with the tape
on the reel, turn the switch to this position.
REEL OFF: Secures the tape with the stop shoe, but does not
activate the reel motor. Before operating the tape reader with
the tape not on the reel, turn the switch to this position. Howev-
er, the reels must be used to rewind the tape.
When entering data from the tape by running it, be sure to close
the light source and turn the switch to the REEL ON or OFF
position.
8 AUTO lamp This lamp comes on while the tape reader is automatically op-
erated by the control unit. When the lamp is on, the manual
operation buttons of the tape reader such as FORWARD (10),
STOP (11), and REWIND (12) are ineffective.
47
Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section (contitnued)

9 ALARM lamp This lamp comes on when an alarm occurs in the tape reader.
When the lamp lights, eliminate the cause of the alarm and
turn the operation switch to the RELEASE position or press
the RESET button on the CRT/MDI panel. The lamp then
goes off.
The following table lists the causes of alarms and the correspond-
ing lamp states.
No. Lights Flashes Cause
Reel operation error

1. When the control
switch is at the REEL
ON position, the tape
1 ALARM
has reached the end
or has become loose.
2. When the operation
switch is at the REEL
OFF position, the re-
els are being used.
Tape reading error
1. The brightness ratio is
2 ALARM FORWARD not adjusted correctly.
2. Holes are punched in-
correctly.
Tape end
3 STOP The tape has reached the
end.
The tape does not stop

at the EOR when it
4 REWIND is rewound.
1. Defective stop magnet
2. Tape reading error
48
Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section (Continued)
No. Lights Flashes Cause
Data is read in the reverse direc-

tion when the control switch
is at the REEL OFF position.
1. During automatic opera-
tion
5 ALARM
REWIND The rewind command or
the command for read-
ing in the reverse direc-
tion is issued.
2. During manual operation
The REWIND switch is
pressed.
Serial data error

1. The baud rate is not
correct.
2. The stop bit is not cor-
ALARM rect.
6 FORWARD 3. The host does not
STOP stop transmitting data
REWIND
when CS is either off or
in the DC3 recep-
tion state. (The PTR
buffer is full.)
AUTO 1. Watchdog
ALARM
2. Abnormal power
7 FORWARD
STOP
REWIND
10 FORWARD button This button is used to feed the tape in the tape reading direc-
tion, i.e., forward. To feed the tape forward, press the FOR-
WARD button when the AUTO lamp is off and when the control
switch is at the REEL ON or REEL OFF position. When the
button is pressed, the tape continues to be fed until it stops
under one of the following conditions:
(i) When the STOP button is pressed
(ii) When ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) is read
(iii) When the RESET button is pressed on the
CRT/MDI panel
11 STOP button This button stops the tape that is currently being fed with the
FORWARD (10) or REWIND (12) button.
49
Table 2.3.2 (a) Descriptions of Each Section (Continued)

12 REWIND button This button feeds the tape at high speed in the opposite direc-
tion to the reading direction. Press this button when the AUTO
lamp is off and when the operation switch is at the REEL ON
position. When the button is pressed, the tape continues to be
fed until it stops under one of the following conditions:
(i) When the STOP button (11) is pressed
(ii) When an ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) is
read
(iii) When the RESET button is pressed on the
CRT/MDI panel
If the REWIND button is pressed when the control switch is at the

REEL ON position, an alarm occurs. This is because the tape
cannot be rewound without reels.
13 Tape compartment The tape compartment is installed at the bottom of the tape
reader. The belt for drawing out the paper tape is installed in
the tape compartment. Pulling up the belt enables the tape to
be easily drawn out of the tape box.
50
(2) Operation
(a) When no reels are used
The procedure for operating a tape reader with the reels removed is the same as that for operating
the tape reader with no reels. However, turn the control switch to the REEL OFF position in step (7).
(b) When reels are used
(i) Setting the tape
1 Set the tape in the reel.
Operation (1)
(i) Twist the reel in the directions of the

arrows. Then, the reel is separated.
(ii) Separated reel
paper tape
(iii) Set the tape in the reel.
Hub
(iv) Twist the reel in the directions of the

arrows so that the reel and tape are fas-
tened.
51
2 Open the front door of the tape reader

3 Turn the control switch to the RELEASE position.
4 Mount the reel containing the tape on the right reel boss and an empty reel on the left reel boss
when facing the front of the tape reader.
The right reel must be positioned so that the tape is fed in the counterclockwise direction as
shown below:
5 Draw the tape out of the reel.
6 Feed the tape around tape guide A.

7 Feed the tape over the tension arm.
52
8 Insert the tape under tape guides B. The tape is easy to insert if it is held taut.

9 Check that the tape passes under rear tape guide C as shown below:

10 Feed the tape at the left side in the same way as for the right side.
11 Wind the drawn tape leader onto the left reel and firmly roll the tape onto the reel several turns
so that the tape is secured to the reel.
53
12 Check that the tape is set as shown below when it is viewed from the top.

If the tape is not set as shown in the figure above, the orientation of the reel on the boss is
reversed.
13 Make sure that the tape is correctly set along the tape guides.
14 Close the light source to hold the tape.
15 Turn the control switch to the REEL ON position. The reel then rotates a little, and the tension
arm moves to tension the tape. If the reel continues to rotate, the tape is not secured to the
reel. If the lefthand reel is loose, repeat the procedure from step 11. If the righthand reel
is loose, repeat the procedure from step 5. If the reel boss continues to turn when the reel
is stopped, the reel is not firmly secured to the reel boss. In this case, repeat the procedure
from step 4.
(ii) Removing the tape
2 Press the REWIND button to rewind the tape. If ER (EIA code) or % (ISO code) is encoun-
tered, the tape stops. In this case, press the REWIND button again to rewind the whole tape.
When rewinding the tape is completed, press the STOP button to stop rewinding.
3 Turn the control switch to the RELEASE position.
4 Remove the reel from the boss.
54
2.3.3 Portable tape reader

(1) Names and descriptions of each section
3. capstan 11. Cable storage

7. handle
4. Control
13. Reader/punch
switch
interface adapter
2. Optical 1. Light
reader source
6. Metal A
8. Winder
9. Cover lock
12. Photoamplifier
10. Lowering
Lock
lever
5. Tape box

Table 2.3.3 (a) Description of Each Section

1 Light source
2 Optical reader
3 Capstan See the corresponding descriptions of the tape reader without reels.
4 Control switch
5 Tape compartment Can contain a 15 m tape.
Fastener
(usually kept open)
6 Metal A
Push
Insert
Paper tape
Paper tape
When removing the rolled tape, reduce the

internal diameter by pushing the fastener.
55
Table 2.3.3 (a) Description of Each Section (Continued)

7 Handle Used to carry the tape reader.
8 Winder Used to advance or rewind the tape.
Be sure to use the lock for fastening the cover before carrying the tape
9 Cover lock
reader.
When the tape reader is raised, the latch mechanism is activated to fix
the tape reader. Thus, the tape reader is not lowered. The latch is
locked with the lowering lock lever. The latch is therefore not unlocked
even when the tape reader is raised with the handle.
10 Lowering lock lever When the latch is locked, the lever is horizontal. To store the tape reader
in the box, push the lever to release the lock, then raise the tape reader
with the handle to unlock the latch.
When the latch is unlocked, the tape reader can be stored in the box.
When storing the tape reader, secure it with the cover lock.
11 Cable storage Used to store rolled power and signal cables. The cable length is 1.5 m.
12 Photoamplifier For the tape reader
Reader/punch in- 200 VAC input and 5 VDC output power and reader/punch interface
13
terface adapter adapter PCB
(2) Operation
The operating procedure is the same as that for the tape reader without reels. See Subsection 2.3.1.
Preparations for using the tape reader and how to store the tape reader are described below.
(a) Preparations
1 Unlock the cover locks (9). Raise the tape reader with the handle (6) until it clicks, then lower the
tape reader. The tape reader then appears and is secured.
Check that the lowering lock levers (10) are horizontal.
2 Take out the signal and power cables from the cable storage (11) and connect the signal cable
with the CNC reader/punch interface port and the power cable with the CNC power supply.
(b) Storage
1 Store the cables in the cable storage (11).
2 Push the lowering lock levers (10) at both sides down.
3 Raise the tape reader with the handle (6) to unlock the latch, then gently lower it.
4 Lock the cover locks (9) and carry the tape reader with the handle (6).
56
2.3.4 Note for handling tape reader

1) Precautions on tape loading
When the NC tape is loaded, the Label Skip function should be activated to read but skip data until first
End of Block code (CR in EIA code or LF in ISO code) is read. When loading an NC tape, the location within
the tape, from which data reading should be started must properly be selected and the NC tape should
be set as shown in the figure below.
Actually, the end of block code(;) is CR in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.
; ;
The program
which should be
Set the tape so that this section is under read
the glass window.
Actually, the end of block code (;) is
CR in EIA code or is LF in ISO code.
2) Disconnection and connection of tape reader connection cable

Dont disconnect or connect CNC tape reader connection cable (signal cable) without turning off the CNC
and tape reader power supply when using a separate tape reader, otherwise the PCB of the tape reader
and master PCB of CNC controller may be broken.
Turn off the CNC and tape reader power supply before disconnecting or connecting the connection cable,
accordingly.
57
2.4 FANUC PPR

FANUC PPR is an I/O device with paper tape reader, tape punch, and printer in one system. Interface is reader/
puncher interface.
Reel unit
Paper tape punch
Printer
Paper tape reader
Switch unit
Paper tape reader read speed : 150 ch/sec or more

Paper tape punch punching speed : 50 ch/sec
Printer characters per line : 40 ch. (dot impact method)
Printing speed : 1.2 line/sec
Fig. 2.4 FANUC PPR
See the FANUC PPR Operators Manual (B54584E) for the FANUC PPR Operation.
58
B62564E1/02 3. POWER ON/OFF
3. POWER ON/OFF
1) Turning on the power
1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. (For example, check that front door
and rear door are closed.)
2 Turn on the power according to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
3 Check that some data is being displayed on the CRT screen.
4 Check that the fan motor is rotating.
CAUTION When pressing the <POWER ON> key, do not touch any other CRT/MDI panel keys.Until
the positional or alarm screen is displayed, do not touch them. Some keys are used for the
maintenance or special operation purpose. When they are pressed, unexpected operation
may be caused.
2) Turning off the power

1 Check that the lamp indicating the cycle start is off on the operators panel.
2 Check that all movable blocks of the CNC machine tool is stopping.
3 Turn the tape reader operation switch to the RELEASE position.
4 If an I/O unit such as a tape punch unit is connected to the CNC unit , turn off the power to the I/O unit.
5 Continue to press the POWER OFF pushbutton for about 5 seconds.
6 Refer to the machine tool builders manual for turning off the power to the machine.
CAUTION Before connecting or disconnecting the RS232C interface cable of the I/O unit, be sure
to turn off the power to the I/O unit.
59
4. MANUAL OPERATION B62564E1/02
4. MANUAL OPERATION
4.1 Manual Reference Position Return

1 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the JOG position.
MDI
HANDLE
MEMORY
INC
EDIT JOG
MODE SELECT Switch
2 Turn on the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN switch.
OFF ON
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN Switch
3 Jog Feed to reference position direction by each axis Keep this switch on until the reference position is
reached.
+X +Y +Z
X Y Z
Continue to press switch ON until arrive at reference position.

The tool moves along the selected axis to the decelerated point at the rapid traverse rate,
then moves to the reference position at the FL speed .
A rapid traverse override is effective during rapid traverse motion.
60
B62564E1/02 4. MANUAL OPERATION
4 The machine stops at the reference position lighting the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLE-
TION LED.
X Y Z
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED
CAUTION For the distance (Not in the deceleration condition) to return the tool to reference position,
refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
NOTE 1 Once the REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED lights at the completion of
reference position return, the tool does not move unless the REFERENCE POSITION
RETURN switch is turned off.
NOTE 2 The REFERENCE POSITION RETURN COMPLETION LED is extinguished by either of the
following operations:
(i) Moving from the reference position.
(ii) Entering an emergency stop state.
61
4.2 Manual Continuous Feed

The machine tool can be continuously moved manually as follows.
1 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the JOG position.
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
MEMORY INC
EDIT JOG
MODE SELECT Switch
2 Select an axis to be moved.
+X +Y +Z
X Y Z
The selected axis moves in its direction.
NOTE 1 In manual operation, up to two axes can be simultaneously operated. If three axes are
simultaneously selected by switches, only the first two of them are operated.
NOTE 2 When the mode is switched to the JOG mode while power is on, axis will not move even if it
has already been selected. Axis selection must be performed again.
3 Select JOG feedrate
0 2000
JOG
FEEDRATE
mm/min
62
4 Rapid traverse
To execute the rapid traverse by manual mode, push RAPID TRAVERSE button, too.
RAPID TRAVERSE
It is possible to move the axis in the selected direction at rapid traverse while this button is pushed.
NOTE 1 Feedrate, time constant and method of automatic acceleration/ deceleration for manual rapid
traverse are the same as G00 in programmed command.
NOTE 2 When the stored stroke limit function is provided, rapid traverse is not executed along the axis
having the reference position return function if the [rapid] button is pressed under the following
condition: When the power has already been turned on, but the reference position return
function has not been executed. In this case, the tool is moved at the jog feedrate. This
prevents the tool from reaching the stroke end while traveling at the rapid traverse feedrate and
it necessary because the stored stroke limit function is validated only after the tool is manually
returned to the reference position.
63
4.3 Incremental Feed

1 Set MODE SELECT switch to INC position.
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
MEMORY INC
EDIT JOG
2 Select the desired amount of movement.
X100 X1000
X10000
X10
X100000
X1
Input system X1 X10 X100 X1000 X10000 X100000

Metric input 0.001mm 0.01mm 0.1mm 1mm 10mm 100mm
Inch input 0.0001inch 0.001inch 0.01inch 0.1inch 1inch 10inch
3 Select an axis
+X +Y +Z
X Y Z
When the JOG switch is pressed once, the axis moves by the amount specified in its direction.
Then when the switch is pressed after releasing it once, the axis moves by the specified amount.
NOTE 1 The feedrate is the same as the jog feedrate.

NOTE 2 The rapid traverse button is also effective. Rapid traverse override is effective during rapid
traverse.
NOTE 3 Multiplier X1 to X100000 depends on an individual machine tool.
64
4.4 Manual Handle Feed

The feedrate can be adjusted precisely by using the manual pulse generator.
1 Set the MODE SELECT switch to the HANDLE position.
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
MEMORY INC
EDIT JOG
2 Select an axis.
Y
X Z
Axis select switch
3 Rotate the handle of the manual pulse generator.
Manual pulse generator
Clockwise rotation ............... + direction

Counterclockwise rotation ... direction
(The direction varies with the machine tool builder.)
65
4 Select the movement amount

Some operators panels are provided with the following selector switch. X10 multiplies the movement
amount by 10; X100 by 100.
X10 (CAUTION 1)
X1 X100
Handle Multiplier
Input System
Input system X1 X10 X100(Note)
Metric input 0,001 m 0.01 mm 0.1 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.001 inch 0.01 inch
CAUTION 1 If the handle is rotated in excess of 5 turns/sec, there is a difference between the handle
rotation amount and the machine movement distance.
CAUTION 2 Rotating the handle too fast when such as X100 is selected moves the tool or table at a rate
as fast as the rapid traverse rate. A sudden stop gives the machine tool a shock.
When provided, the automatic acceleration/deceleration function is executed also for
movement when using manual handle feed so that the mechanical impact is reduced.
NOTE Other amount may be used depending on machine tool.
66
4.5 Manual Feed in a Specified Direction

The tool can be manually moved in a specified direction on a specified plane. The feedrate and the direction
and plane of feed can be changed at any time. Simple cutting can be manually executed on a plane.
(1) Selecting a plane
Specify external signals that indicate the first and second axes of the plane on which the tool is manual-
ly moved in a specified direction.
(2) Specifying the direction of feed
Enter an external input signal that indicates the direction in which the tool is to be manually moved.
The direction of feed can be specified in the range of 0 to 360 degrees in 1/16 degrees.
The angle is specified as shown below.
If an angle greater than 360 degrees is specified, the CNC unit repeatedly subtracts 360 from the angle
until it falls within the range of 0 to 360 degrees.
While the tool is being manually moved in the specified direction, the direction of feed can be changed
as required. When the direction is changed, the position check is not executed, but the move com-
mand in the new direction is immediately executed.

90
0

270
(3) Specifying a feedrate

Using the dial for specifying the jog feedrate, specify the feedrate (as a tangential velocity) at which
the tool is manually moved in the specified direction.
Parameter No. 1411 determines the feedrate when the dial is set to the 100% position.
(4) Starting and stopping manual feed in the specified direction
Manual feed in the specified direction is executed while the corresponding signals are on.
The signal that moves the tool in the specified direction and the signal that moves it in the opposite
direction are used in manual feed.
NOTE 1 When the mode of manual feed in the specified direction is selected, the tool can be moved
only on the selected plane determined by the selected axes.
NOTE 2 Automatic or manual operation cannot be switched when manual feed in the specified direction
is executed.
67
4.6 Manual Numeric Command

The data entered by MDI devices in the program format can be executed in the jog mode.
The manual numeric command can be executed whenever jog feed is allowed.
The following commands can be specified:
Positioning (G00)
Linear interpolation (G01)
Automatic reference position return (G28)
Second, third, or fourth reference position return (G30)
M, S, T, B (second miscellaneous functions)
Execute the command as described below:
(1) Select the mode of manual continuous feed (jog). The [reference return] switch must be set off.
(2) Press the [function menu] key.
(3) Press the [PROGRAM] key. The program screen is displayed.
(4) When the displayed program screen is not a program text screen, do either of the following:
(i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to [selection] keys, then press the [TEXT] key.
(ii) Repeatedly press the [PROGRAM] key until the program text screen is displayed.
(5) Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys into [OPERATION SELECTION] keys.
(6) Using the address keys and numeric keys, enter the command. The following commands can be en-
tered:
(i) G00 (Positioning)
Specify the traveling distance with numeric values following addresses such as X, Y, and Z.
Always specify the command with an incremental value, irrespective of whether G90 or G91 is
selected. The rapid traverse selector (RT) determines whether the tool is moved at the rapid tra-
verse feedrate or jog feedrate.
(ii) G01 (Linear interpolation)
Specify the traveling distance as described for G00 above. The tool is always moved at the dry
run feedrate. The feedrate cannot be specified with F. This does not depend on whether the dry
run switch is on or off.
(iii) G28 (Reference position return)
The G28 command automatically returns the tool to the reference position. Unlike automatic op-
eration, the specified traveling distance does not affect the operation. The tool is directly returned
to the reference position without passing through the intermediate point. The tool is returned to
the reference position only along the axis for which the move command is specified.
(iv) G30 (Second, third, or fourth reference position return)
Like G28, the G30 command returns the tool to the second, third, or fourth reference position.
Specify the number of the reference position with address P, as in automatic operation.
(v) M, S, T, and B
Enter as many addresses as required or as the system accepts. The addresses can be entered
one after another.
(7) Press the [input] key.
(8) Repeat steps (6) and (7) until all necessary commands are entered.
(9) After the all necessary commands are entered, the screen can be switched. Display the position
screen or another screen as required.
(10)Press the [cycle start] button once on the operators panel or the [start] key on the CRT/MDI panel.
The program is executed and the status display indicates STRM. In some machines, the cycle start
lamp goes on. (A parameter specifies whether the cycle start lamp goes on.)
68
(11)When the program terminates, the status display indicates STOP or HOLD again. The cycle start lamp
goes off. If one of the following occurs while the program is being executed, the program is stopped:
(i) Feed hold
(ii) Switching to a mode other than the manual continuous feed mode
(iii) Alarm
(iv) Reset or emergency stop
The remaining distance is canceled. The M, S, T, and B codes are retained unless the program
is stopped due to (iv).
NOTE 1 A manual numeric command can be executed whenever manual continuous feed is allowed.
It can be executed even if the feed hold function or another function stops the program
(automatic operation stop state) in the middle of a block. In this case, however, the command
is subjected to the following restrictions:
(i) While the M, S, T, or B code is being processed, the manual numeric command including
the M, S, T, or B code cannot be executed.
(ii) While the M, S, T, or B code is being processed, no manual numeric commands can be
specified in the following case: When the M, S, T, or B code was independently specified.
Alternatively, another function (move command, dwell command, etc.) specified in the
block containing the M, S, T, or B code has already been executed.
NOTE 2 The M, S, T, or B code cannot be used to call a subprogram or custom macro.
NOTE 3 The S code cannot be specified in the constant surface speed control mode.
69
4.7 Manual Absolute ON and OFF

This switch specifies whether the amout of manual movement is to be added to the absolute value.
1) When the he switch is ON.
Y axis
P2
Manual
operation
P1
0 Z axis
The coordinate values change by the amount of manual operation.

2) When the he switch is OFF.
Y1 Y2
P2
O2 P1
X2
O1 X1
The coordinate values do not change.

Example 1
When the following tape commands are specified :

G01G90X100.0Z100.0F010 ; (1)
X200.0Y150.0 ; (2)
X300.0Y200.0 ; (3)
a) When block (2) has been executed after manual operation (Xaxis +20.0, Zaxis +100.0) at the end
of movement of block (1)
Y
(120.0 , 200.0)
(220.0 , 250.0)
When the absolute switch is off

(200.0 , 150.0)
Manual operation
When the absolute switch is on
(100.0 , 100.0)
0 X
70
b) When the feed hold button is pressed while block (2) is being executed, manual operation (Yaxis +
75.0) is performed, and the cycle start button is pressed and released
When the absolute switch is off

(300.0 , 275.0)
(200.0 , 225.0)
(150.0 , 200.0)
Manual operation (300.0 , 200.0)
(200.0 , 150.0)
(150.0 , 125.0)
c) When the feed hold button is pressed while block (2) is being executed, manual operation (Xaxis
+75.0) is performed, the control unit is reset with the RESET button, and block (2) is read again
(300.0 , 275.0)
(200.0 , 225.0)
(150.0 , 200.0) When the absolute switch is off

(300.0 , 200.0)
Manual operation
(200.0 , 150.0)
(200.0 , 125.0)
(100.0 , 100.0)
d) When there is only one axis in the following command, only the commanded axis returns.
N1G01G90X100.0Y100.0F500 ;
N2X200.0 ;
N3Y150.0 ;
When the switch is on
Manual operation
N3
When the switch is off
N2
N1
71
e) When the tape commands are followed by an incremental command, they are executed in the same
manner as when the absolute switch is off.
CAUTION When the operator manually intervenes during cutter compensation, the tool moves as
described below:
1) Coordinates when the switch off and cutter compensation is being performed
Manual
operation
Cutter path
Program path
After manual operation is performed in the status of manual absolute switch is off, during cutter com-
pensation, automatic operation is restarted then the tool moves parallel to the movement that would
have been performed if manual movement had not been performed. The amount of separation equals
to the amount that was performed manually.
2) When the switch is on during cutter compensation
Operation of the machine upon return to automatic operation after manual intervention in the status
of manual absolute switch is on, during execution with an absolute command program in the cutter
compensation mode will be described. The center of the tool is directly moved to the top of the vector
at the beginning of the next block. After that point, the distance of manual movement is taken into con-
sideration when the vector is calculated. The same occurs when manual intervention is executed
while turning a corner.
If the INC bit in parameter No. 2402 is set to 1 when the program does not contain absolute commands
but incremental commands, the tool is moved in the same manner as when the switch is off. If the INC
bit is set to 0, even the incremental command is processed like the absolute command as described
below.
(a) When the operator manually intervenes while a block is being executed

VB2 VC1
VB1 VC2 After the operator has manually

intervened, the tool moves along
PB PC a path so that the center of the
tool moves straight to the top of
the next vector in the program.
PD
Path programmed by the
absolute command
PA
PH
Path of tool center Path of tool center before

manual intervention
Manual operation
PH'
72

VB2 VC1
VB1 VC2
PB PC
After the operator manually intervenes
white turning a corner in cutter compensation,
the tool moves along a path so that the
center of the tool moves straight to the
top of the next vector in the program, as
PA described in Example 1 above.
Path programmed by the

absolute command
PH
VA2 VA1
Manual operation
PH'VA1'
(b) When the operator manually intervanes affer a block is terminated by the signal block function.
VB2 VC1
VB1 VC2
Manual PB PC
operation
As described in (a) above, the tool moves

Path programmed by the along a path so that the center of the tool
PA
absolute command moves straight to the top of the next
Path of tool center vector in the program. when the operation
is stopped by the single block function,
PH intervention from the MDI panel is enabled.
In this case, the tool moves as when the
operator manually intervenes.
73
4.8 Effect of Manual Intervention

Section 4.7, Manual Absolute On and Off, describes the effect of manual intervention on the execution of the
remaining part of the program. This section describes in detail the relationship between manual intervention
and the INC bit (bit 1) in parameter No. 2402, the manual/absolute switch, and the G90 and G91 modes.
(1)

(1) When the manual/absolute switch is off: (1)

(2) When the manual/absolute switch is on:
(a) When the G90 mode is selected: (2)
(b) When the G91 mode is selected:
(i) When the INC bit in parameter No. 2402, is set to 1: (1)
(ii) When the INC bit is set to 0: (2)
74
4.9 ThreeDimensional Handle Feed

Threedimensional handle feed includes three special handle feed modes, a function for changing the tool
length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, and two screen display functions. The threedi-
mensional handle feed function is used to execute special handle feed for a fiveaxis diesinking machine.
These handle feed modes function even during manual handle interrupt.
Special handle feed modes
1 Mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool
2 Mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool
3 Mode of rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip
*These three modes are called as special handle feed modes.
Function for changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool
Function for specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool
Screen display functions
1 Function that displays the coordinate of the tool tip
2 Function that displays the number of pulses in a manual interrupt and the traveled distance
The following variables are used in expressions described in the subsequent sections:
Xp, Yp, Zp: Number of handle feed pulses for the axes (integrated value)
Hp : Number of specified handle feed pulses (integrated value)
A, B, C : Machine coordinate of the A, B, and Caxes
L : Distance from the center of rotation of the tool to the tool tip
4.9.1 Handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool

Select the mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool and rotate the handle of the manual pulse
generator. The tool rotates about the rotation axis, causing the slanted tool to move in the longitudinal direction
of the tool by the specified distance.
If the mode is selected in the manual handle interrupt mode in automatic operation, the longitudinal movement
by the manual pulse generator is superimposed on the movement by automatic operation.

When the handle interrupt is made in the longitudinal direction of the tool, the pulses are distributed to the axes
as described below:
75
(1) B and Caxes

Xp = Hp SIN( B ) COS( C )
Yp = Hp SIN( B ) SIN( C )
Zp = Hp COS( B )
If C is set to 0 (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is set to 1), the pulses are distributed as follows:
Yp = Hp SIN( B )
Zp = Hp COS( B )
(2) A and Caxes

Xp = Hp SIN( A ) SIN( C )
Yp = Hp SIN( A ) COS( C )
Zp = Hp COS( A )
If C is set to 0 (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is set to 1), the pulses are distributed as follows:
Yp = Hp SIN( A )
Zp = Hp COS( A )
76
(3) A and Baxes

Xp = Hp SIN( B )
Yp = Hp COS( B ) SIN( A )
Zp = Hp COS( B ) COS( A )
The pulses are distributed as described above.

Xp = Hp COS( A ) SIN( B )
Yp = Hp SIN( A )
Zp = Hp COS( A ) COS( B )
77
(4) A and Baxes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)

Xp = Hp COS( B )
Yp = Hp SIN( B ) SIN( A )
Zp = Hp SIN( B ) COS( A )
78
4.9.2 Handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool

Select the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool and rotate the handle of the manual pulse
generator. The tool rotates about the rotation axis, causing the slanted tool to move in the specified direction
perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the tool by the specified distance.
If the mode is selected in the manual handle interrupt mode in automatic operation, the transverse movement
by the manual pulse generator is superimposed on the movement by automatic operation.
A- and C- axes
B- and C- axes
Center of rotation
Tool
A&C , B&C
C
Transverse direction
of the tool(X-axis) Longitudinal direction
of the tool
Y
Transverse direction B
A
of the tool(Y-axis) X
Workpiece
When handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool is executed, the pulses are distributed as described
below:
79
(1) B and Caxes
<X direction> Z
Xp 0'
Zp
X
Hp (X direction)
B
C
X' C
Yp 0
Hpxy
Xp = Hp COS( B ) COS( C )
Yp = Hp COS( B ) SIN( C )
Zp = Hp SIN( B )
<Y direction>
X 0
C The XY plane is drawn because B- and
C-axes are specified and because rotation
about the B-axis, which is on the Y-axis,
Xp does not cause the tool to rotate about the
Y-axis at the tool tip. Suppose that the
0' Z-axis on this side of the XY plane is
positive.
Hp (Y direction)
Yp
C
Y' Y
Xp = Hp SIN( C )
Yp = Hp COS( C )
Zp = 0
80
(2) A and Caxes
<X direction> 0 Y
The XY plane is drawn because A- and

C-axes are apecified and because rotation
0' Yp C about the A-axis, which is on the X-axis,
does not cause the tool to rotate about
the X-axis at the tool tip. Suppose that
Hp (X direction) the Z-axis on this side of the XY plane
is positive.
C
Xp
X' X
Xp = Hp COS( C )
Yp = Hp SIN( C )
Zp = 0
<Y direction> Z
Hp (Y direction)
Hpxy
A Zp
Yp
Xp
X Y
Xp = Hp COS( A ) SIN( C )
Yp = Hp COS( A ) COS( C )
Zp = Hp SIN( A )
81
(3) A and Baxes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)
Z(+)
Feed in the Z direction
Z'(+)
Feed in the Z direction
Hp
A
Zz
X'(+)
B
Feed in the Y direction 0' Xz
Yz
Hp
Zy
X(+)
A
Yy
Y(+)
Y'(+)
When the tool is moved in the Y direction, the pulses are distributed as follows:
Xy = 0
Yy = Hp COS( A )
Zy = Hp SIN( A )
When the tool is moved in the Z direction, the pulses are distributed as follows:
Xz = Hp SIN( B )
Yz = Hp COS( B ) SIN( A )
Zz = Hp COS( B ) COS( A )
82
4.9.3 Rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip
Select the mode of rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip and rotate the handle of the manual
pulse generator. When the rotation axis (A, B, or Caxis) is moved, the X, Y, and Zaxes are adjusted
so that the movement of the rotation axis does not shift the tool tip.
If this mode is selected in the manual handle interrupt mode in automatic operation, rotation around the center
of the tool tip by the manual pulse generator is superimposed on the movement by automatic operation.
When the tool is rotated around the center of its tip, the traveled distance along linear axes (Xp, Yp, Zp) obtained
by the following expressions are output at the time the movement about the rotation axes is output. The tool
tip hardly moves. When rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip is executed, the pulses are dis-
tributed to the axes as described below:
CAUTION If the tool rotates about the rotation axes at high speed, the tool tip may move.
(1) B and Caxes

Traveled distance along the linear axes

Xp = L [ SIN(B+Bp) COS(C+Cp) SIN(B) COS(C) ]
Yp = L [ SIN(B+Bp) SIN(C+Cp) SIN(B) SIN(C) ]
Zp = L [ COS(B+Bp) COS(B) ]
Angular displacement of the rotation axis
Bp = Hp or Cp = Hp
83
(2) A and Caxes


Xp = L [ SIN(A+Ap) SIN(C+Cp) SIN(A) SIN(C) ]
Yp = L [ SIN(A+Ap) COS(C+Cp) SIN(A) COS(C) ]
Zp = L [ COS(A+Ap) COS(A) ]
Ap = Hp or Cp = Hp
84
(3) A and Baxes (when the longitudinal axis of the tool is in the X direction)
(A+Ap) , (B+Bp)
Z(+)
Rotation around the center of the tool tip, handle
interrupt, or handle feed
Zp
Pe
Ps
Ze
A, B Xe
Yp
Xp Ye
Ap,
Bp
Zs
L=Distance between tool tip position
X(+)
Ys
Xs
Tool tip position
Y(+)

Xp = L [ COS(B+Bp) COS(B) ]
Yp = L [ SIN(B+Bp) SIN(A+Ap) SIN(B) SIN(A) ]
Zp = L [ SIN(B+Bp) COS(A+Ap) SIN(B) COS(A) ]
Ap = Hp or Bp = Hp
85
4.9.4 Changing tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool
Select the mode of changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of tool when both the
following modes are selected: Mode of tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool (G43.1)
and mode of manual handle interrupt (MOVL and H are on). Then rotate the handle of the manual pulse genera-
tor. The tool length compensation is changed in the longitudinal direction of the tool.
The change is cleared to zero when a reset or the G49 command is executed or when the offset number is
changed.
4.9.5 Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal
direction of the tool
When this function is specified to perform tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, a
parameterset offset is added to the conventional tool compensation value and the sum is assumed as the tool
length to be used for compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool.
This function enables the user to separately specify the actual tool length and the machinespecific length be-
tween the center of rotation of the rotation axis and the position at which the tool is attached. The user need
not add the two lengths to specify a compensation value.
Do not change the value of the offset parameter (No. 7548) in the mode of tool length compensation in the longi-
tudinal direction of the tool. To change the value, first cancel the mode of tool length compensation in the longi-
tudinal direction of the tool.
Setting parameters DTHO and ETHO (No. 7540) to 1 enables the following:
1 With the function for specifying a tool holder offset for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction
of the tool, the tool tip coordinates are displayed according to the machine specific length, set with parame-
ter No. 7548.
2 The tool holder offset function can also be used for the tool length compensation function (G43), as well
as for tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool.
86
4.9.6 Notes on threedimensional handle feed

1) The threedimensional handle feed function is invalidated when the parallel axis control function is en-
abled.
2) A manual handle interrupt can be executed for threedimensional handle feed only when the manual han-
dle interrupt function is enabled.
3) Handle interrupt cannot be executed when a command related to the rotation axis is specified.
4) The axes of the machine are configured as shown below:
A- and C-axes
B- and C-axes
Center of rotation
Tool
A&C , B&C Z
C
Longitudinal
Y
B
A
X
Workpiece
A- and B-axes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)
A
B
Workpiece
Center of rotation
X
A
Tool
B
Longitudinal Y
5) Manual handle interrupt in threedimensional handle feed

When the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated in the following state, handle interrupt is
executed:
a. Mode
Automatic operation mode (tape, MDI, memory)
b. Operation status
Cutting feed mode (G01, G02, G03)
c. Handle interrupt is invalidated:
During an alarm or interlock state or when an operation for positioning is in progress.
87
6) If the HLB bit does not specify the A and C axes when the A and Caxes are selected, PLS alarm No.
011 occurs. The alarm occurs if the same applies to the B and Caxes or the A and Baxes.
7) The pulses of the first manual pulse generator are used.
The mode of threedimensional handle feed is validated when the following two conditions are satisfied:
The axis selected for the corresponding threedimensional handle feed mode is input in the manual handle
feed axis selection signal of the first manual pulse generator. The corresponding handle mode signal
(G156.0 to G156.3) is input.
8) The machine coordinates of rotation axes A, B, and C are read when the mode of handle feed in the longitu-
dinal direction of the tool or the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool is selected. If
the rotation axis is moved after either handle feed mode is selected, the new machine coordinates are ig-
nored.
9) When the function for changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool is
executed, the new tool length compensation becomes valid for the blocks read into the buffer.
4.9.7 Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip

The absolute coordinates of the tool tip and the actual speed are displayed when handle feed in the longitudinal
or transverse direction of the tool or rotational handle feed around the center of the tool tip is executed. Even
in the manual handle interrupt mode, the coordinate and the speed are displayed in the same manner.
When tool length L is specified, the absolute coordinates of the tool tip is calculated on the basis of the current
position along the axes and the calculated coordinates are displayed.
The screen displaying the tool tip coordinates can be selected in the following two ways:
(a) Pressing the [FUNCTION SELECTION] key
Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys. Press
the [POSITION] key in the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys, then select the screen displaying the tool
tip coordinates.
(b) Pressing the [CHAPTER SELECTION] key
Press the [function menu] key and select the position screen with the soft key. Press the [OPERATION
SELECTION] key on the position screen to switch the soft keys to the [CHAPTER SELECTION] keys.
Then select the tool tip position display.
(1) Expressions for calculating the tool tip position
When tool length L is specified, the tool tip position is calculated on the basis of the current position along
the axes as describe below and the calculated position is displayed:
(a) B and Caxes
Xd = X L SIN( B ) COS( C )
Xd = Y L SIN( B ) SIN( C )
Zd = Z L COS( B )
When C is set to 0, (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is 1), the tool tip position is calculated as follows:
Xd = X L SIN( B )
Xd = Y
Zd = Z L COS( B )
(b) A and Caxes
Xd = X L SIN( A ) SIN( C )
Xd = Y + L SIN( A ) COS( C )
Zd = Z L COS( A )
When C is set to 0, (the CCLR bit in parameter No. 7550 is 1), the tool tip position is calculated as follows:
Xd = X
Xd = Y + L SIN( A )
Zd = Z L COS( A )
(c) A and Baxes (Only for handle feed or handle interrupt in the longitudinal direction of the tool)
Aaxis master
Xd = X L SIN( B )
Xd = Y + L COS( B ) SIN( A )
Zd = Z L COS( B ) COS( A )
88
Baxis master
Xd = X L COS( A ) SIN( B )
Xd = Y + L SIN( A )
Zd = Z L COS( A ) COS( B )
The tool tip position is calculated as shown above.
A and Baxes (when the longitudinal direction of the tool is in the X direction)
Xd = X L COS( B )
Xd = Y L SIN( B ) SIN( A )
Zd = Z + L SIN( B ) COS( A )
where
Xd, Yd, Zd : Tool tip position
X, Y, Z : Current position along the axes (workpiece coordinate)
A, B, C : Current position from the origin of the workpiece coordinate system of the A, B, and
Caxes
L : Specified tool length
(2) Display formats
(a) On the 9inch CRT (b) On the 14inch CRT
TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001 TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001
(ABSOLUTE) (ABSOLUTE)
X 123.456 (MM) X 123.456 (MM)
Y 234.567 (MM) Y 234.567 (MM)
Z 56.789 (MM) Z 56.789 (MM)
B 78.898 (DEG.) B 78.901 (DEG.)
C 21.893 (DEG.) C 21.893 (DEG.)
ACT, F : 15 (MM/MIN) S: 0 (PRM) (ACTUAL SPEED)
F 15 S 0
(MM/MIN) (PRM)
TOOL HANDLE
TL_HEAD HDL_PLS HEAD PULSE
4.9.8 Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt and the traveled distance
The total number of pulses in handle interrupt and the total traveled distances along individual axes can be
displayed when the handle feed in the longitudinal or transverse direction of the tool, or the rotational handle
feed around the center of the tool tip is executed. Even in the manual handle interrupt mode, the number of
pulses and the distances are displayed in the same manner.
When bit 0 of parameter No. 2214 is set to 1, the pulses generated by a threedimensional handle interrupt
are not counted to update the displayed number of manual interrupt pulses.
The number of manual interrupt pulses (No. 4101) displayed on the diagnosis screen (coordinate system shift)
is, however, updated even if bit 0 of parameter No. 2214 is set to 1.
The screen displaying the number of pulses in the handle interrupt and traveled distances along individual axes
can be selected in the following two ways:
(a) Pressing the [FUNCTION SELECTION] key
Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys. Press
the [POSITION] key of the [FUNCTION SELECTION] keys, then select the screen displaying the num-
ber of pulses and the traveled distances along individual axes.
(b) Pressing the [CHAPTER SELECTION] key
Press the [function menu] key and select the position screen with the soft key. Press the [OPERATION
SELECTION] key on the position screen to switch the soft keys to the [CHAPTER SELECTION] keys.
Select the display of the number of pulses and traveled distances along individual axes.
89
(1) Display formats

(a) On the 9inch CRT (b) On the 14inch CRT
TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001 TOOL HEAD POSITION O0001 N00001
(PULSE) (DISTANCE) (PULSE) (DISTANCE)
X 0.000 X 1.234 X 0.000 X 1.234
Y 0.000 Y 2.098 Y 0.000 Y 2.098
Z 1.215 Z 3.789 Z 1.215 Z 3.789
B 0.000 B 4.123 B 0.000 B 4.123
C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
(TOOL)
TOOL : 0.789 L 0.789
ACT.F : 15 (MM/MIN) S 0 (PRM)
(ACTUAL SPEED)
F 15 S 0
(MM/MIN) (PRM)
TOOL HANDLE
TL_HEAD HDL_PLS HEAD PULSE
NOTE In the column of the number of pulses, the value next to axis X, Y, Z, B (or A), or C (or B) does
not indicate the number of pulses in the handle interrupt for each axis.
The indicated value depends on the special handle function as described below.
The axis in square brackets indicates the feed direction when the longitudinal direction of the
tool is in the X direction and the rotation axes are the A and Baxes.
1 Handle feed in the X [Y] direction in the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool:
The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the first axis.
2 Handle feed in the Y [Z] direction in the mode of handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool:
The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the second axis.
3 Mode of handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool: The number of pulses in the handle
interrupt is indicated next to the third axis.
4 Handle feed around the A and Baxes [Baxis] in the mode of rotational handle feed around the
center of the tool tip: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the fourth
axis.
5 Handle feed around the Caxis [Aaxis] in the mode of rotational handle feed around the center
of the tool tip: The number of pulses in the handle interrupt is indicated next to the fifth axis.
6 Changing the tool length compensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool: The number of
pulses in the handle interrupt (tool length compensation) is indicated next to L or T00L. (This is
indicated at the time the compensation is validated.)
90
4.10 Manual Interruption Function for ThreeDimensional Coordinate

Conversion
When the handle of the manual pulse generator is rotated in the threedimensional coordinate conversion
mode, this function adds the travel distance specified by the manual pulse generator to the travel distance dur-
ing automatic operation. This addition is performed for the new (converted) threedimensional coordinate
component (programmed coordinate system) in the direction of the axis selected for manual feed using the
manual pulse generator.
Z Z
Z'
Y Y
X'
Y'
X X
Coordinate system to be converted Converted coordinate system

(When the Z-axis is selected, the travel
distance is added to the Z'-axis as shown
in the figure above.)
Fig. 4.10 For the three basic axes
4.10.1 Interruption
This function performs interruption only when all the conditions in 1 to 8 are met.
1 During simultaneous manual and automatic operation mode (including manual interruption using the
manual pulse generator)
2 During threedimensional coordinate conversion (i.e. while blocks G68 to G69 are being executed.)
3 During cutting mode (i.e. while blocks from a G code for cutting, such as G01, G02, or G03, to G00 are being
executed.)
4 When parking along the feed axis is not enabled (i.e. when PKn for the feed axis is low.)
5 When the machine moves along the three axes selected for threedimensional coordinate conversion
6 When the axis for which the function performs interruption is a master axis under parallel axis control (in
this case, no slave axes are converted).
7 When feed in the tool axis direction or the direction perpendicular to the tool axis or rotation around the tool
tip center is not selected for the manual operation or the manual interruption using the manual pulse gener-
ator when the ALNGH, RGHTH, and RNDH input signals are all low.
8 While the playback function is not being executed
The result of adding the feedrate in the threedimensional coordinate conversion mode is not permitted to ex-
ceed the maximum cutting speed for each axis.
91
4.10.2 Manual interruption and the coordinate system

When this function is effective, the current position in the workpiece coordinate system does not depend on
the travel distance specified during manual interruption using the manual pulse generator. The current position
is therefore not updated even when the manual pulse generator is rotated. Each current position in the machine
coordinate system and in the relative coordinate system depends on the travel distance specified during manu-
al interruption. As shown in Fig. 1, the travel distance is added along the Zaxis. The travel distance is dis-
played using the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the coordinate system to be converted. The travel distance speci-
fied by this function can be monitored on the manual overlap screen. The DMK bit of parameter 2208 specifies
whether the travel distance is displayed on the manual overlap screen using the coordinate system before or
after threedimensional coordinate conversion.
92
B62564E1/02 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
5.1 Operation Mode
5.1.1 Operation in the tape mode

1 Load the program tape in the tape reader.
2 Set the mode selector to the TAPE position.
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
MEMORY INC
EDIT JOG
3 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

When this button is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start lamp goes on.
5.1.2 Operation in the MEMORY mode

1 Preload programs in memory. See Chapter 9 in Part III.
2 Select the program to be executed. See Section 5.2 in Part III.
3 Set the mode selector to the MEMORY position.
MDI
TAPE HANDLE
MEMORY INC
EDIT JOG
4 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

When this button is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start lamp goes on.
93
5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B62564E1/02
5.1.3 MDI operation

(1) Entering programs in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode
Multiple blocks of commands can be entered from the CRT/MDI panel to the buffer memory for operation
in the MDI mode. The capacity of the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode is 200 characters.
9 CRT unit
1 Set the mode selector to the MDI mode.
2 Press the function menu key to change
the soft keys to the function selection
keys.
3 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key Function Soft keys Operation
to display the program screen. menu key menu key
4 When the program screen is not a pro-
gram text screen 9 CRT function selection keys
POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +
(i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to
switch the soft keys to the chapter
selection keys. Then, press the 9 CRT operation selection keys
desired chapter selection key.
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_WRD BG_EDIT +
or
(ii) Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard
key repeatedly until the program 14 CRT unit
text screen appears.
5 Press the operation menu key to
switch the soft keys to the operation
selection keys.
6 Enter the number of the desired pro-
gram with the address keys and nu-
meric keys. The program is tempo- Function Soft keys Operation
menu key menu key
rarily stored in the key input buffer.
Press the [INSERT] key to transmit
the program in the key input buffer to 14" CRT function selection keys
POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE
the buffer memory for operation in
ON M CHECK G E E R
the MDI mode. The contents of the
buffer memory are then displayed on
14" CRT operation selection keys
the CRT.
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY
7 To enter more programs, repeat WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY
step 6.
(2) Editing the program in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode
The program in the buffer memory for operation in the MDI mode can be edited in the same way as for the
program stored in CNC memory.
The following editing is possible:
(a) Forward search (See Subsection 9.4.1.)
(b) Backward search (See Subsection 9.4.1.)
(c) Word change (See Subsection 9.4.2.)
(d) Word insertion (See Subsection 9.4.2.)
(e) Word deletion (See Subsection 9.4.2.)
(f) Program rewinding (See Subsection 5.2.2.)
94
5.2 Selecting a Program to be Executed
5.2.1 Searching for a program number or sequence number
1 To perform the operation in the MEMORY mode, set the mode selector to the MEMORY position.
To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the TAPE position.
Only searching for a sequence number is possible during the operation in the TAPE mode. Searching
for a program number is impossible.
2 Press the function menu key.
3 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen.
4 When the program screen is not a program text screen
(i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the
[TEXT] key.
or
(ii) Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key repeatedly until the program text is displayed.
5 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
6 Press the [FORE SEARCH] key.
7 (i) To search for a program number, 9" CRT function selection keys
press the [(PROG#)]key to enter 0 POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +
in the key inputbuffer. Then, the
system prompts the operator to
enter the number of the program to 9" CRT operation selection keys
be searched for. ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_WRD BG_EDIT +
(ii) To search for a sequence num-

ber, press the [(SEQ#)] key to en-
ter N in the input buffer. Then, the 14" CRT function selection keys
system prompts the operator to POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE
ON M CHECK G E E R
enter the number of the sequence
to be searched for.
8 Enter the number of the program or se- 14" CRT operation selection keys
quence to be searched for.
WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY
9 Press the [EXEC] key to search for the
program or sequence number.
95
5.2.2 Searching for a program by name

This operation is possible in the EDIT or MEM mode.
The procedure is as follows. The following figures are examples of the soft keys on the 9 CRT.
1 Press the function menu key and [PROGRAM] key to display the program screen.
2 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key a few times or press the [CHAPTER] key and the desired chapter
selection key to display the text screen.
* The above steps are the same as those in the procedure for searching for a program by number.
4 Press the [ID_SRCH] key.

5 Press the [(NAME)] key.

6 Enter the name of the program to be searched for.

The first 48 characters of the program name are used in the search.
There are two search methods: Entering the whole program name and entering part of the program name
and specifying a special character to represent an arbitrary character string (generally called a wild card).
The following characters can be used as wild cards:
*: Represents any character string including a null character.
?: Represents any character.
7 Pressing the [EXEC] key selects the program whose name matches the entered program name.

The following example describes the use of a wild card.

Assume that the following programs are already registered:
O0001(GEAR1000.MAIN)
O0002(SHAFT1000.MAIN)
O1000(GEAR1000.SUS)
Entering SHAFT* or SHAFT????.MAIN searches for program O0002. Either of the wild cards, aster-
isks or question marks may be entered anywhere.
Be sure to enter the partial program name and wild cards that uniquely identify the desired program.
If *1000* is entered, for example, all the programs are searched for, and the desired program is not
selected.
Remarks) To enter SP (null character) on the small CRT/MDI panel, press numeric key 1 while press-
ing the [SHIFT] key. To enter ? on the same panel, press numeric key 2 while pressing the [SHIFT]
key. These marks are not indicated on either of the numeric keys.
96
5.2.3 Rewinding a program
This subsection describes the procedure

for searching for the beginning of the pro- 9" CRT function selection keys
gram to be executed. POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER +
1 To perform the operation in the MEMORY

mode, set the mode selector to the 9" CRT operation selection keys
MEMORY position.
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_WRD BG_EDIT +
To perform the operation in the TAPE
mode, set the mode selector to the TAPE
position.
2 Press the function menu key. 14" CRT function selection keys
3 Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE
display the program screen. ON M CHECK G E E R
4 When the displayed program screen is

not a program text screen 14" CRT operation selection keys
(i) Press the [CHAPTER] key to change WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY
the soft keys to the chapter selection
keys, then press the [TEXT] key.
or
(ii) Press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key repeatedly until the program text is displayed.
5 Press the operation menu key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
6 Press the [REWIND] key. The program is rewound, and the beginning of the program is
searched for.
The operation selection keys remain displayed in the soft key display field.
97
5.3 Starting Automatic Operation

(1) Operation in the MEMORY mode
2 Select the program to be executed. See Section 5.2.
3 Press the [CYCLE START] button on the machine operators panel.
(2) Operation in the TAPE mode
1 Load the tape and set the mode selector to the TAPE position.
2 Select the program to be executed. See Section 5.2.
3 Press the [CYCLE START] button on the machine operators panel.
5.4 Executing Automatic Operation

While executing a block, the CNC usually calculates the next block to convert it into data in the executable form.
This is called buffering.
The number of blocks to be buffered has been extended to 2, and the two blocks are preread so far as time
permits. This prevents an interruption in the pulse distribution between two successive small blocks.
The XBUF bit in parameter No. 7616 determines whether the number of blocks to be buffered is extended to
2.
NOTE 1 To maintain the operational compatibility between Series 15B and conventional CNCs or
suchlike if there is no need to execute small blocks at high speed, specify 1 as the number of
blocks to be buffered by setting XBUF to 0.
NOTE 2 After changing the setting of XBUF in parameter No. 7616, be sure to turn the power off, then
on.
NOTE 3 When the multibuffer option is provided, the multibuffer function overrides this buffering
function, rendering this function ineffective.
NOTE 4 The block of a canned cycle, cutter compensation C, or suchlike is also regarded as a single
block.
After automatic operation is started, the following are executed:

1 A oneblock command is read from the specified program.
2 The block command is decoded.
3 The command execution is started.
4 The command in the next block is read.
5 Buffering is executed. That is, the command is decoded to allow immediate execution.
6 Immediately after the preceding block is executed, execution of the next block can be started. This is be-
cause buffering has been executed.
7 Hereafter, automatic operation can be executed by repeating the steps (4) to (6).
98
5.5 Stopping Automatic Operation

There are two means to stop the automatic operation. One is to command a stop command in a program where
the execution is to be stopped (See 5.5.1 5.5.3) and the other is to stop the operation at any time by pushing
an appropriate button on the operators panel (See 5.5.4 and 5.5.5).
5.5.1 Program stop (M00)

Cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all existing
modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The cycle operation can be restarted by
specifying an CNC start. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)
5.5.2 Optional stop (M01)

Similarly to M00, cycle operation is stopped after a block containing M01 is executed. This code is only effective
when the Optional Stop switch on the machine operators panel is set to ON.
5.5.3 Program end (M02, M30)

1) This indicates the end of the main program and is necessary to store NC commands from tape to memory.
2) Cycle operation is stopped and the NC unit is reset. (This differs with the machine tool builder.)
3) Only M30
Rewinding is used in both the MEMORY and TAPE modes to search for the beginning of the program. The
tape is not rewound in the reelless tape reader in the TAPE mode. When using the tape reader with reels
in the TAPE mode and when many programs are recorded on the tape, the tape is always rewound to the
beginning of the tape, indicated by the ER or % code. When the tape is rewound may vary according to
the machine tool builder. Some machines instruct tape rewinding with M02.
5.5.4 Feed hold

When Feed Hold button on the operators panel is pressed during automatic operation, the tool decelerates
to a stop at a time.
1 Press the feed hold button.
Feed hold lamp

lights
Feed hold button
When pressed, the feed hold lamp lights and the cycle start lamp turns off.
Turns off
Cycle start
At this time,
i) Feeding stops if the tool is moving.
ii) Dwell execution stops, if executing.
iii) M, S, T or B operation continues up to the end of the block.
99
5.5.5 Reset
Automatic operation can be stopped and the system can be made to the reset state by using reset button on
the CRT/MDI panel or external reset signal. When reset operation is applied to the system during a tool moving
status, the motion is slowed down then stops.
5.5.6 Singleblock stop according to the comparison between sequence numbers

When the program contains a block having the same sequence number as the preset sequence number while
the program is being executed, the block is executed, then the system enters the singleblock stop state.
(1) Specifying the desired sequence number
Set the mode selector to the MDI position and specify the sequence number for the singleblock stop.
Setting: 1 to 9999
Initial setting: 0 (immediately after the power is turned on)
When a sequence number agrees with the specified one or when the system is reset, the sequence num-
ber is changed to 0.
(2) Conditions for singlelock stop
1 When the specified sequence number agrees with the sequence number assigned to the clock con-
taining an instruction processed only in the CNC control unit, the system does not enter the single
block stop state.
Example
N1 #1 = 1 ;
N2 IF[ #1 EQ 1 ] GOTO8 ;
N3 GOTO9 ;
N4 M98P1000L3 ;
N5 M99 ;

If the sequence numbers match in case of the block shown in the example above, the system does
not enter the singleblock stop state. In addition, the preset sequence number is not changed.
2 When the program contains multiple blocks whose sequence numbers are the same, the block whose
sequence number agrees with the specified one first in the execution order is executed, then the sys-
tem enters the singleblock stop state.
3 Stopping at the block for which the number of times the block is executed is specified
When the sequence number of this block agrees with the preset sequence number, the block is
executed the specified number of times, then the system enters the singleblock stop state.
Example
N1 G91 ;
N2 G81X1000Y1000R5000Z2000F100 ;
N3 Z1000Y1000L3 ;

G80 ;
In this example, the cycle of block N3 is executed three times, then the system enters the singleblock
stop state.
100
5.6 Restarting Automatic Operation

This function is used to restart machining at the specified block when the tool is damaged or after suspending
machining over a holiday.
A sequence number or block number is used to specify the block at which machining is to be restarted.
(1) Specifying the sequence number to restart machining at the desired block
Specify the sequence number of the block at which machining is to be restarted, the number of the program
containing the sequence number, and the number of times the block with the sequence number is to be
executed.
The following data can be specified:
(a) Sequence number only
(b) Sequence number and the number of times the block is to be executed
(c) Sequence number and program number
(d) Sequence number, the number of times the block is to be executed, and the program number
(2) Specifying the block number to restart machining at the desired block
Machining can be restarted at a block that is not assigned a sequence number.
When the CNC is stopped, the number of blocks that have been executed is displayed on the program
screen or program restart screen. The operator references the block number displayed on the CRT to
specify the number of the block at which machining is to be restarted.
The displayed number indicates the number of the blocks that have been completed when the CNC is
stopped. To restart machining at the block in which the CNC stopped, therefore, specify the displayed
block number plus one.
The block number is not lost when the power is turned off.
The number of the blocks is counted from the block at which machining starts. One block refers to a cluster
of commands at which a singleblock stop is allowed among blocks in executable form converted from
the CNC program.
Example 1
CNC program Number of blocks

O0001; 1
G90G92X0Y0Z0; 2
G01X100.F100; 3
G03X0I50.F50; 4
M30; 5
Example 2
CNC program Number of blocks

O0002; 1
G90G92X0Y0Z0; 2
G90G00Z100.; 3
G81X100.Y0.Z120.R80.F5 4, 5, 6
0; 6
#1=#1+1; 6
#2=#2+1; 6
#3=#3+1; 7
G00X0Z0; 8
M30;
The canned cycle is counted as three blocks. Macro statements are not counted as blocks.
101
5.6.1 Program restart

This function specifies Sequency No. of a block to be restarted when a tool is broken down or when it is desired
to restart machining operation after a day off, and restarts the machining operation from that block. It can
also be used as a highspeed tape check function.
(1) Restarting machining when a tool is damaged (P type)
Use the following procedure:
(a) Press the Feed Hold button to escape the tool, and replace it with a new one. Modify the offset amount
if it varies.
(b) Turn on the program restart switch on the machine operators panel.
(c) Searching for the beginning of the program
(i) In the MEMORY mode
2 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys. Then,
press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen.
3 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the function operation keys. Then,
press the [REWIND] soft key.
(ii) To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, position the tape in the tape reader at the beginning
and set the mode selector to the TAPE position.
(d) Switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys for the program screen. Then press the
[RESTART P] operation selection key.
(e) Specify the block at which machining is to be restarted.
(i) Specifying the block by its sequence number
1 Press the [PSQ#] soft key and enter the sequence number of the block at which machining
is to be restarted, the program number, and the number of times the block is to be executed
with numeric keys.
2 Press the [EXEC] soft key to search for the block with the specified sequence number.
When the same sequence number is used many times or when it is desired to search for the
block with a specific sequence number in a program, specify the block with the sequence
number in the following way. To search for a subprogram that is called several times for the
block with the desired sequence number, specify the desired number of times the subpro-
gram is called, enter a comma (,), specify the sequence number, enter another comma, then
specify the desired program number beginning with O. To search for the block with sequence
number 999 when the subprogram is called five times from program 1000, for example, enter
P5,999,O1000, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
P5,999,O1000[EXEC]
The desired number of times the subprogram is called and/or program number can be omitted
when the number is 1 and/or when it is not necessary to specify a program number.
(i) Sequence number only
P999[EXEC]
(ii) Sequence number and the desired number of times the subprogram is called
P5,999[EXEC]
(iii) Sequence number and program number
P999,O1000[EXEC]
(iv) Sequence number, the number of times the subprogram is called, and program number
P5,999,O1000[EXEC]
102
(ii) Specifying the block by the block number

1 Press the [PBK#] soft key and the number of the block at which machining is to be restarted
with numeric keys. To specify the 100th block, for example, enter 100.
PB100[EXEC]
2 Press the [EXEC] soft key. Then, the block with the specified block number is searched for.
(f) When the desired block has been found, the CRT screen changes to the screen for restarting a pro-
gram.
(START POSITION): Displays the position where machining is restarted.

(REMAINING DISTANCE): Displays the distance from the current tool position to the position where
machining is restarted.
M : If the M codes consist of two digits, displays the last 35 M codes issued. If the M codes
consist of more than two digits, displays the number of M codes that fit on the screen.
No negative M codes are displayed.
T : Displays the last two T codes issued.
S : Displays the last S code issued.
B : Displays the last B code issued.
BC : Displays the block number.
(g) Turn off the program restart switch.
(h) If the M, S, T, and/or B codes that are to be output are displayed on the screen, set the mode selector
to the MDI position and output the codes from the MDI. In this case, the codes are not displayed on
the program restart screen.
(i) For operation in the MEMORY or TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the desired position.
When the distance displayed in the REMAINING DISTANCE field is correct or when the tool is moved
to the position where machining is restarted, check that there is no danger of the tool bumping into the
workpiece or anything. If there is such a danger, manually move the tool to a safe position then press
the [CYCLE START] button. The tool then moves to the machining restart position in the dry run mode
along each axis in the order of axes specified in parameter No. 7110, then restarts machining.
(2) When machining is restarted after the following events (applicable to programs of type Q)
(i) The power is turned off then on.
(ii) The automatic operation is suspended to change the coordinate systems.
For example,
(a) The G92 command is issued from the MDI panel.
(b) The coordinate system is shifted.
(c) The coordinate system is automatically determined by reference position return.
(d) The [ORIGIN] key is pressed.
(e) The coordinate systems are changed by resetting the system.
103
(a) When the power is turned on, all the necessary operations including reference position return
are performed.
(b) Manually move the tool to the program start point, that is, the machining start point. This operation
sets the same continuousstate data and coordinate system as those when machining started.
(c) Specify or change the offset if necessary.
(d) Set the program restart switch on the machine operators panel to the on position.
(e) Search for the beginning of the program.
(i) In the MEMORY mode
2 Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.
Then, press the [PROGRAM] soft or hard key to display the program screen.
3 Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the function operation keys.
Then, press the [REWIND] soft key.
(ii) To perform the operation in the TAPE mode, position the tape in the tape reader at the begin-
ning and set the mode selector to the TAPE position.
(f) Switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys for the program screen. Then, press the
[RESTART P] operation selection key.
(g) Specify the block at which machining is to be restarted.
(i) Specifying the block by its sequence number
1 Press the [QSQ#] soft key and enter the sequence number of the block at which ma
chining is to be restarted, the program number, and the number of times the block is to
be executed with numeric keys.
2 Press the [EXEC] soft key to search for the block having the specified sequence number.
When the same sequence number is used many times or when it is desired to search
for the block with a specific sequence number in a program, specify the block with the
sequence number in the following way. To search for a subprogram to be called several
times for the block with the desired sequence number, specify the desired number of
times the subprogram is called, enter a comma (,), specify the sequence number, enter
another comma, then specify the desired program number beginning with O. To search
for the block with sequence number 999 when the subprogram is called five times from
program 1000, for example, enter Q5,999,O1000, then press the EXEC soft key.
Q5,999,O1000[EXEC]
The desired number of times the subprogram is called and/or program number can be
omitted when the number is 1 and/or when it is not necessary to specify a program num-
ber.
(i) Sequence number only
Q999[EXEC]
(ii) Sequence number and the desired number of times the subprogram is called
Q5,999[EXEC]
(iii) Sequence number and program number
Q999,O1000[EXEC]
(iv) Sequence number, the number of times the subprogram is called, and program number
Q5,999,O1000[EXEC]
(ii) Specifying the block by the block number
1 Press the [QBK#] soft key and the number of the block at which machining is to be re-
started with numeric keys. To specify the 100th block, for example, enter 100.
QB100[EXEC]
2 Press the [EXEC] soft key. Then, the block with the specified block number is searched
for.
(h) When the desired block has been found, the CRT screen changes to the screen for restarting a
program.
(i) Turn off the program restart switch.
104
(j) If the M, S, T, and/or B codes that are to be output are displayed on the screen, set the mode selec-
tor to the MDI position and output the codes from the MDI. In this case, the codes are not displayed
on the program restart screen.
(k) For operation in the MEMORY or TAPE mode, set the mode selector to the desired position.
When the distance displayed in the REMAINING DISTANCE field is correct or when the tool is
moved to the position where machining is restarted, check that there is no danger of the tool bump-
ing into the workpiece or anything. If there is such a danger, manually move the tool to a safe posi-
tion then press the [CYCLE START] button. The tool then moves to the machining restart position
in the dry run mode along each axis in the order of axes specified in parameter No. 7110 then re-
starts machining.
CAUTION In general, the tool cannot be returned to the correct position if one of the conditions occurs:
(i) The tool is manually moved when the manual absolute mode is ineffective.
(ii) The tool is moved in the machine lock state without considering the movement along the
Zaxis.
(iii) The mirror image function is used.
(iv) No coordinate system is specified at the beginning of the program during incremental
programming.
(v) The tool is manually moved while it is being automatically returned along the axes.
(vi) The machine lock state is released after the command for restarting the program is
issued in that state.
(vii) Restarting the program is specified in a block between the block for skip cutting and the
subsequent absolute command block.
(viii)The coordinate system is set, changed, or shifted after the block is searched for.
In the case of (iii), the tool can be returned by a block in the program of type P if the block
follows the last block for specifying whether the mirror image function is effective. In this
case, the mirror image signal must be kept in the same state as when the interruption
occurred.
Care must be taken because no alarm occurs under any of the above conditions.
NOTE 1 A program of type P cannot be restarted under the following conditions:

(i) When automatic operation is not performed after the power is turned on
(ii) When automatic operation is not performed after the coordinate system is set, changed,
or shifted (Shifting the coordinate system refers to changing the offset from the external
workpiece reference point.)
If there are blocks that follow the block in which the coordinate system is set or changed
last while machining is suspended, the blocks can be restarted normally by restarting the
program of type P.
NOTE 2 Whenever the tool is moved along each axis to the machining restart position in both programs
of types P and Q, a singleblock stop is valid after the tool has moved along one axis. In this
case, however, manual intervention from the MDI panel is not possible.
The tool can be manually moved. When the tool is already returned along an axis, however,
it is not moved manually along the axis.
NOTE 3 When searching for a block, unless the conditions such as the input signals and offsets are the
same as those when machining was performed last, the tool does not return to the correct
restart position. Searching for the block is not stopped even when the [SINGLE BLOCK] switch
is turned on or when the mode selector is switched between the MEMORY and TAPE positions.
NOTE 4 If one of the following conditions occurs, retry the operations for restarting the program from
the beginning:
The [FEED HOLD] switch is turned on while the block is searched for.
The system is reset while or after the block is searched for.
NOTE 5 If the [CYCLE START] button is pressed when the program restart switch is turned on, the
operation is ignored, and a warning message is displayed.
NOTE 6 Manual operation must be performed in the manual absolute mode irrespective of whether it
is performed before or after machining.
NOTE 7 After the block is searched for, the move command cannot be issued from the MDI to move the
tool along the axes.
105
NOTE 8 After the command for restarting the program is issued, the character string PRSR is displayed
at the bottom of the CRT screen while the tool is being returned along the last axis.
NOTE 9 Notes on restarting the program for which macro variables are used:
(i) Common variables
The previously specified values are used as the common variables when restarting the
program. The variables are not automatically preset. The necessary common variables
are therefore initialized to the values used for the previous automatic operation
immediately before the program is restarted.
(ii) DI/DO
While the program is restarted, DI data can be read from the corresponding system
variables, but DO data cannot be output.
(iii) Clock
While the program is restarted, the clock time can be checked with the system variable,
but the time cannot be preset.
(iv) Tool offset and offset from the workpiece reference point
While the program is being restarted, offsets can be read from the corresponding system
variables, but offsets cannot be changed except for programs of type Q.
NOTE 10 When the program specifies machining at high speed
When a program contains a block for highspeed machining, the program cannot be restarted
from the block. However, the program can be restarted from any block other than one for
highspeed machining.
NOTE 11 The number of blocks is not lost when the power is turned off.
The recorded number of blocks is cleared when the [CYCLE START] button is pressed after
the system is reset. The number of blocks is recorded every 60 seconds during automatic
operation.
NOTE 12 The number related to blocks displayed on the program screen indicates the number of block
currently being executed. However, in the following cases, the number of blocks which have
been executed is displayed:
When all of the blocks have been executed
When the system is reset
When the singleblock stop button is pressed
In other words, the number related to the blocks is displayed as follows when the CNC program
is stopped or suspended under to the conditions below:
When the [FEED HOLD] button is pressed, the number of block currently being executed
is displayed.
When the system is reset, the number of executed blocks is displayed.
When the [SINGLE BLOCK] switch is turned on, the number of executed blocks is
displayed.
When the system is reset while block 10 is being executed, for example, the currently displayed
number of blocks are changed from 10 to 9.
NOTE 13 Suppose the operator manually intervenes in system operation from the MDI panel after
turning on the [SINGLE BLOCK] switch during program execution. The number of issued CNC
command blocks is added to the number of blocks.
5.6.2 Program restart function and output of M, S, T, and B, codes

The program restart function enables the following operations after searching for the block to be restarted:
(1) Before moving the tool to the machining restart position
1 The program restart function automatically outputs the last M, S, T, and B codes to the PMC.
If the last S code is the S code (maximum spindle speed) specified in the block containing G92, the
program restart function outputs this S code as the maximum spindle speed signal (MR0 to MR15).
If the S code is the other S code (specified spindle speed), it is output as the specified spindle speed
signal (R0 to R15).
106
Only the S code specified last is displayed on the program restart screen regardless of whether it is
in the same block as a G92.
2 While searching for the block to be restarted, the program restart function automatically outputs all the
sampled M codes and the last S, T, and B codes to the PMC. The function can sample up to 35 M
codes. When the number of M codes sampled exceeds 35, the function outputs the latest 35 M codes
to the PMC.
Specify whether the function performs operation 1 or 2 with the MOAL bit (bit 6 of parameter 7620).
(2) Before the machining restart position is reached.
On the program restart screen, M, S, and B codes can be specified from the MDI for output to the PMC
while the system is still in the MEM or TAPE mode.
Outputting the last M, S, T, and B codes
When the MOPR bit (bit 3 of parameter 7620) = 1, press the cycle start button after searching for the block to
be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart function then automatically outputs the last
M, S, T, and B codes to the PMC before moving the tool to the machining restart position.
In the single block stop state, press the cycle start button again after the program restart function outputs the
last M, S, T, and B codes. The tool then starts moving to the machining restart position.
Outputting all the M codes and the last S, T, and B codes
When the MOAL bit (bit 6 of parameter 7620) = 1, press the cycle start button after searching for the block to
be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart function then automatically outputs all the
M codes and the last S, T, and B codes to the PMC before moving the tool to the machining restart position.
Example When M10, M11, M12, M13, M14, T0101, S1000, and B10 are already sampled: The pro-
gram restart function outputs these codes in the following program format before moving the
tool to the machining restart position:
M10 T0101 S1000 B10 ;
M11 ;
M12 ;
M13 ;
M14 ;
Outputting the M, S, B codes on the program restart screen
When the MOPR bit (bit 3 of parameter 7620) = 1, enter M, S, and B codes from the MDI in the MEM or TAPE
mode until the tool completes moving to the machining restart position after searching for the block to be re-
started with the program restart function. The program restart function then outputs these codes to the PMC.
[Operation]
1 Search for the block to be restarted with the program restart function. The program restart screen is dis-
played. On this screen, the operation soft keys OVRSTR and CLEAR are displayed for the 9inch CRT,
and OVERSTORE and CLEAR are displayed for the 14inch CRT.
PROGRAM RESET O0030 N00020

(DESTINATION)BC: 00123456
X 60. 114 M 03 10 20 25 40
Z 60. 113 51 55 41 63 26
** ** ** ** **
** ** ** ** **
** ** ** ** **
(DIST TO GO) ** ** ** ** **
X 30. 000 ** ** ** ** **
Z 30. 000
T 0101 0202
S 2000
B 13
ACT. F: 0(MM/MIN) S: 100 (RPM)
MEN *** PRSR **** *** *** *** *** ***
INPUR CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER
Displays for the 9inch CRT

2 The program restart function enters the overstore mode to display the overstore field on the screen when
the OVRSTR soft key is pressed before the machining restart position is reached.
107
To set the overstore mode while the tool is moving to the machining restart position, temporarily stop the
restart operation with the feed hold function, then press the OVRSTR soft key.
Enter the M, S, and B codes to be output in the overstore field from the MDI. On this screen, plus (+) and
minus () signs are not displayed if they are entered.
Example To enter M10, S1000, and B20 in the overstore field
Enter M10 from the MDI.
Press the INPUT key.
Enter S1000 from the MDI.
Enter B20 from the MDI.
PROGRAM RESET O0030 N00020

(DESTINATION)BC: 00123456
X 60. 114 M 03 10 20 25 40
Z 60. 113 51 55 41 63 26
** ** ** ** **
** ** ** ** **
** ** ** ** **
(DIST TO GO) ** ** ** ** **
X 30. 000 ** ** ** ** **
Z 30. 000
(OVER STORE)
M 10
S 1000 B 20
ACT. F: 0(MM/MIN) S: 100 (RPM)
MEM *** PRSR **** *** *** *** *** ***
INPUT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER
Displays for the 9inch CRT

3 After the codes have been entered in the overstore field, press the cycle start button. The codes in the
overstore field are output to the PMC, then they are cleared from the field.
4 To clear the M, S, B codes entered in the overstore field, press the CLEAR soft key. All the entered codes
are cleared.
5 To cancel the overstore mode, press the OVRSTR soft key or reset key in the overstore mode.
After the OVRSTR soft key or reset key is pressed, the program restart screen is restored to the initial state
shown in item (1).
6 To continue the restart operation, cancel the overstore mode and press the cycle start button.
NOTE 1 When M, S, B codes are entered and output to the PMC in the overstore mode, these codes
are not displayed on the program restart screen.
NOTE 2 When the operation mode is changed to a mode other than the MEM or TAPE mode in the
overstore mode, the overstore mode is not canceled, but no code can be entered in the
overstore field.
5.6.3 Block restart

The block restart function is used to restart an automatic operation that was interrupted because of a damaged
tool or some other problem. Automatic operation can be resumed at the start point of the interrupted block or
at an intermediate point in it.
(1) Block restart operation sequence
The block restart operations must always be performed in the sequence shown below. The block return
switch is provided on the machine operators panel for use with this function.
108
(1) An abnormality occurred.
(2) Stop automatic operation by The block restart function cannot be used if the reset or
pushing the feed hold button emergency button has been pressed and the system has
or switching the mode. entered the reset state.
(3) Retract the tool menually

and
take the necessary actions.
(4) Set the offset value again

if necessary.
(5) Turn on the block return switch The message RSTR blinks at
in the continuous manual mode. the bottom of the screen.
In the cutter compensation

(6)-1 Move the tool menually as (6)-2 Move the tool toward the mode, a vector is formed
close to the point where the starting point manually. perpendicular to the programmed
automatic operation was The tool automatically path in the interrupted
interrupted as possible stops when it reaches the block at the start point, and
while observing the tool start point. the tool is returned to the tip
movement carefully. of the vector.
(7) Return to the mode selected The message RSTR may be

prior to the interruption of displayed constantly or
the automatic operation, and start blinking at the bottom
turn on the block return of the screen depending on
switch if it is off. the condition set up.
(8) Push the cycle start button

while the block return
switch is on.
(9) When the cycle start lamp

lights the automatic
operation is restarted,
turn off the block return
switch.
Of the above operations, the following operations apply only to the restart function:
(6)2 Manual operation with the block return switch turned on
(8) Restart of automatic operation with the block return switch turned on
109
(a) Manual operation with the block return switch turned on

Move the tool in the continuous manual feed mode toward the start point of the interrupted block while
the block return switch is on. The tool automatically stops at the start point. When the start point is
reached for all axes, the message RSTR disappears from the bottom of the screen.
If the block return switch is turned on in the continuous manual feed (JOG) mode, the distance
between the current position of the tool and the start point of the interrupted block is calculated.
The start point of the interrupted block refers to the point calculated as follows:
Absolute coordinate of the programmed start point
+
Previously compensated tool value
+
Newly calculated tool length compensation value
=
Newly calculated cutter compensation value perpendicular to the interrupted block at the start
point
If the tool offset value is changed, the new compensation value (vector) is calculated based on
the new offset value for the tool length compensation (G43 and G44) of the fixed compensation
axis (parameter 6000L x Y = 0) and the cutter diameter compensation (G41 and G42). However,
the compensation value for the tool length compensation of an arbitrary compensation axis (pa-
rameter 6000L x Y = 1) and the tool offset (G45 to G48) remain unchanged. The calculated dis-
tance to the start point is displayed on the CRT screen using the [POSITION] function selection
key and the [RESTART (B)] chapter selection key. In general, when the block return switch is
turned on in the continuous manual feed mode, the screen for restarting operation (referred to as
the restart screen) appears automatically.
The restart screen contains the following displays:
BLOCK RESTART O1234 N5678
(DESTINATION) (ABSOLUTE)
X 100.000 X 0.000
Y 200.000 Y 100.000
Z 100.000 Z 200.000
A 200.000 A 100.000
B 0.000 B 200.000
(MACHINE) (DISTANCE TO GO)

X 0.000 X 100.000
Y 100.000 Y 100.000
Z 200.000 Z 300.000
A 100.000 A 100.000
B 200.000 B 200.000
**** JOG RSTR **** *** *** *** *** ***
(i) (DESTINATION): Absolute coordinates of the tool center at the start point of the interrupted block
(ii) (DISTANCE TO GO): Distance from the current position (ABSOLUTE) of the tool to the start point
(DESTINATION) of the interrupted block
110
(iii) Status of RSTR display
Various conditions (mode, cutter compensation, etc.) RSTR is displayed continuously.

Continuous manual feed (JOG) mode RSTR blinks.
When the outer corner is being
Automatic operation compensated in the cutter RSTR blinks.
((MEMORY,, TAPE,, or MDI)) compensation mode.
Other than the above RSTR is displayed continuously.
RSTR does not appear regard-
Reset state less
of what the current mode is.
CAUTION When returning the tool to the start point of the block by a manual operation using the block
restart function, the tool is returned to the tip of the vector vertical to the block at its start point.
Therefore, if the start point of the interrupted block is inside the corner, the workpiece may
be cut when the tool returns to the start point.
Manual operation
Automatic operation is
stopped at this point.

Programmed path

When the tool moves to the The tool should be returned
start point, it may cut the manually to an arbitrary
workpiece. point in the block.
In this case, return the the tool to an appropriate position while watching it, rather than to the
start point.
111
NOTE If the tool movement is interrupted during a canned drilling cycle and is restarted, the tool
always returns to the positioning point, regardless of whether the current mode is the initial level
return (G98) mode or pointR level return (G99) mode.
The point to which the tool is returned by the

block restart function, regardless of whether the
current mode is the initial level return (G98) mode
Initial point or point-R level return (G99) mode
Point R
Point of interruption
Point Z
On the second or subsequent drilling cycle, the tool returns to either of the following two
positions according to the G98 or G99 mode.
Point returned to by the

block restart function
Initial point
Point returned to by the
block restart function
Point R Point R
Point of interruption Point of interruption
Point Z Point Z
For initial level return For Point-R level return
(G98 mode) (G99 mode)
112
(b) Restart of automatic operation with the block return switch turned on
If the cycle start button is pressed while the block return switch is on, the tool length compensation
value and the cutter compensation value are recalculated, and automatic operation is restarted toward
the compensated end point from the current position.
The tool is retracted to this

position so the tool can be Path after automatic
replaced. operation is restarted
Newly calculated end point
Target end point prior

to interruption
Path prior to interruption
The tool moves toward the recalculated end point from its current position regardless of whether it has been
returned to the start point of or an arbitrary point in the interrupted block prior to pushing the cycle start button.
CAUTION The tool may cut the workpiece when it is being moved toward the end point of the
interrupted block. In this case, an alarm is displayed and the the tool is inhibited from moving
to the end point. This function is referred to as the block restart interference check.
Manual operation
Point at which automatic

Point at which automatic operation is interrupted
operation is restarted
Correct path End point of interrupted
block

The workpiece will be cut when
automatic operation is restarted
Programmed path
Tool center path
If the tool will cut the workpiece when automatic operation is restarted, press the cancel key to reset the alarm.
Then move the tool to a proper position manually while watching it, and perform the restart operation again.
The block restart interference check is performed based on the value that is set in parameter No. 7651 (d: error
limit at the start of block restart). If the distance between the normal path and the point where the block is re-
started is d or longer, an interference check alarm is issued.
113

The block restart interference check function can be enabled and disabled using bit 7 of parameter No. 7605.
However, the interference check is not performed in the following cases even if it has been enabled:
When the tool is moved manually to the start point of the interrupted block while the block return switch
is on.
When the interrupted automatic operation is restarted with the cutter compensation mode canceled.
When no vector is available for cutter compensation at the start point of the block in which the tool move-
ment was interrupted. (Start up of cutter compensation)
(2) Notes on the block restart function
(a) The command for automatic reference point return (G28 and G30) in the cutter compensation mode
does not return the tool to the correct position even when the restart operation is performed within the
block.
(b) The restart operation cannot be performed in the block for which a dwell (G04) has been specified.
(c) The compensation value must be set prior to turning on the block return switch.
(d) In the threedimensional cutter compensation mode with zero value, suppose the tool movement is
interrupted, the compensation value is changed, and the operation is restarted. In this case, the vector
for the cutter compensation is not recalculated.
Note that if the compensation values are changed excessively, the accuracy for vector calculation may
deteriorate.
(e) When the block return switch is on, if the message RSTR does not appear on the CRT screen, the
cycle start command is ignored.
(f) Operating the block return switch during continuous manual feed stops the tool.
(g) Operation must not be restarted in a block without a move command.
(h) After a singleblock is stopped, operation is restarted at the block after the block that has already been
executed by the singleblock function.
114
5.6.4 Tool retraction and recovery

The tool retraction and recovery function retracts a broken tool from a workpiece so that the tool can be replaced
or the machining checked. The function also returns the replaced tool efficiently to the correct location to restart
machining.
The tool retraction and recovery function is divided into the following four basic operations:
(1) Retraction
When the TOOL RETRACT switch on the machine operators panel is pressed while automatic operation
is started, stopped, or held, the tool is retracted by the distance specified in the program. The position to
which the tool retracts is called the retraction position. When retraction is completed, the RETRACT POSI-
TION lamp on the machine operators panel comes on. When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on
while automatic operation is started, if a block is being executed, the tool is retracted after the block is sus-
pended. When retraction ends, the machine enters the automatic operation hold state. The clearance and
direction can be specified by the program. If these values are not specified by the program, the tool is not
retracted. When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on while automatic operation is stopped or held
the tool is retracted, and the machine is placed again in the automatic operation stop or hold state.
When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on, the machine enters the tool retraction mode, and the TOOL
RETRACTING lamp on the machine operators panel comes on.
(2) Manual retraction
In the manual mode, when it is necessary to replace the tool or measure workpieces, the tool can be moved
manually, such as by continuous manual feed, manual incremental feed, or manual handle feed. This op-
eration is called manual retraction. The path along which the tool retracts is automatically stored in the
control unit.
(3) Recovery
After the control unit has reentered the automatic mode, when the TOOL RECOVER switch on the machine
operators panel is turned on, the control unit returns the tool automatically to the retraction position along
the same path that the tool was moved by manual operation. This operation is called recovery. When the
tool has been returned to the retraction position, the RETRACT POSITION lamp comes on.
(4) Repositioning
When the cycle is started at the retraction position, the tool is first returned to the position where the TOOL
RETRACT switch was turned on. This operation is called repositioning. When repositioning is complete,
the TOOL RETRACTING lamp comes on to indicate the end of the tool retraction mode. The operations
performed differs according to the status of automatic operation when the machine entered the tool retrac-
tion mode.
(i) When the machine enters the tool retraction mode while automatic operation is started, the automatic
operation that has been held is resumed after the tool is repositioned.
(ii) When the machine enters the tool retraction mode while automatic operation is stopped or held, the
machine returns to the same mode after the tool is repositioned. If the cycle is restarted, automatic
operation is resumed.
115
:Position where the tool retraction switch is turned on

:Programmed retraction position
:Position to which the tool is retracted by menual operation
:Path along which the tool is retracted

:Manual operation
(path along which the tool is retracted manually)
:Return path Z
:Repositioning
(a) General operating procedure

1 Specify the axis along which the tool is to be retracted and distance beforehand using command G10.6
IP__.
489The following sample program specifies that in block N20, the retraction axis is the Xaxis and the
distance is 50 mm.
(Sample program)
N10 G91 Z-50. ;
N20 G10.6 Z-50. ;
N10 N30 G01 X150. F500. ;
N30
116
2 When block N30 is being executed, turn on the TOOL RETRACT switch on the machine operations
panel at point A, for example.
TOOL RETRACTING RETRACT

POSITION
A TOOL TOOL
RETRACT RECOVER
N30
3 When the machine enters the tool retraction mode, the TOOL RETRACTING lamp on the machine
operators panel comes on. At the same time, automatic operation is held and the tool is retracted by
the distance specified by program. If point A is the end of the block, the tool is retracted after automatic
operation is stopped.
The retraction operation is interpolated linearly and executed at the dry run speed.
When the tool has been retracted, the RETRACT POSITION lamp on the machine operators panel
comes.
Point E TOOL RETRACTING RETRACT

POSITION
TOOL TOOL
A RETRACT RECOVER
N30
117
During retraction, the following displays appear:

(i) PTRR blinks at the location where otherwise the
ACTUAL POSITION
automatic mode is indicated.
(RELATIVE COORDINATES)
(ii) *** is displayed at the location where otherwise the
X 207.438MM
Y 402.083MM manual mode is indicated.
Z 133.561MM (iii) STRT is displayed at the location where otherwise
(i) (ii) (iii) the automatic operation state is indicated.
PTRR* * *STRT
If retraction is not specified by G10.6, the tool is not retracted, execution of the block in the automatic
mode is suspended, and automatic operation is held or stopped.

If the single block switch is turned on during the start of automatic operation or if the TOOL RETRACT
switch is turned on after a feed hold to hold or stop automatic operation, the tool is retracted and the
machine returns to the automatic operation hold or stop state after the completion of retraction.
During retraction, feed hold is disabled. The RESET switch is effective, and retraction is stopped im-
mediately when the RESET switch is pressed. If an alarm occurs during the retraction, retraction is
stopped immediately.
It is possible to shift from the retract end state to step 6 (repositioning) without retracting or recovering
the tool.
4 Enter the manual mode. Either jog feed, incremental feed, handle feed, and manual numeric value
command is possible in this mode. (Manual arbitraryangle feed is impossible.)
5 Manually move the tool along an axis. This operation is called manual retraction. Be sure to select
only one axis for this operation. Do not issue a signal for two or more axes at one time.
NOTE Simultaneous automatic/manual operations are impossible in the tool retraction mode. If they
are selected, manual operation such as jog feed, incremental feed, or handle feed is not
performed in the tool retraction mode.
In the tool retraction mode, if an attempt is made to move the tool along two or more axes at
one time using a manual numeric value command, P/S alarm No. 183 is issued.
118
6 If each axis is specified by manual operation, the control unit stores up to ten positions on the traced
route.
When another axis is specified after one axis is specified, the position where the axes are switched
is stored. Up to ten such positions are stored. Subsequent positions are discarded.
Resetting the machine deletes the stored position data and cancels the retraction mode.

7 When the retraction ends and the tool is replaced, it is necessary to return the tool to the original re-
tracted position.
First return to the automatic mode. Then, turn on the TOOL RECOVER switch on the machine opera-
tors panel, and turn it off again. The tool then returns to the original retracted position at the dry run
speed, irrespective of whether the dry run switch is on or off.
During recovery, the following displays appear:
(i) PTRR blinks at the location where otherwise
ACTUAL POSITION
the automatic mode is indicated.
(RELATIVE COORDINATES)
(ii) ***is
displayed at the location where other-
X 207.438MM
Y 402.083MM wise the manual mode is indicated.
Z 133.561MM (iii) MSTR is displayed at the location where
(i) (ii) (iii) otherwise the automatic operation state is in-
PTRR* * *MSTR dicated.
If the path along which the tool is retracted exceeds 10 positions, the tool first moves to the 10th posi-
tion, then sequentially to the 9th and 8th and so on, and finally returns to the original position.
119

During recovery, the single block switch is effective. Keeping the switch in the off position enables the
recovery operation to continue. Keeping it in the on position causes the tool to stop at each stored
position. To resume recovery, turn on the TOOL RECOVER switch, then turn it off.
If an alarm condition occurs during recovery, the tool stops. During recovery, feed hold is ineffective.
When the tool has returned to the original retracted position, the RETRACT LAMP is lit.
8 When cycle is started while the tool remains in the retracted position (point E in the following figure),
that is while the RETRACT POSITION lamp is on, the tool returns to the position from which it was
retracted, that is, the position where the TOOL RETRACT switch was turned on. This operation is
called repositioning. During repositioning, feed hold is effective.

120
The operation to be performed after repositioning depends on the automatic operation state when the
TOOL RETRACT switch was turned on.
(i) During the start of automatic operation
After repositioning, execution of the interrupted block is resumed. Namely, the remaining part of
block N30 is executed.
NOTE Bit 1 (TRS) of parameter No. 7614 can be set so that if the single block switch is on, the tool
stops immediately when repositioning is completed and the remaining part of block N30 is
executed when the cycle is started once again.
(ii) When automatic operation is held or stopped

When repositioning is completed, the tool stops, and the machine returns to the automatic opera-
tion hold or stop state. Then, restarting the cycle resumes the automatic operation. When reposi-
tioning is completed, the tool retraction mode is canceled, and the TOOL RETRACTING lamp is
turned off. This is the end of the general procedure of tool retraction and recovery.
(b) Procedure for retraction and recovery in thread cutting
1 The tool retraction and recovery function is also effective for thread cutting.
The following is a sample program for thread cutting.
X 01234
D N4 A N0 G10.6 X40. ;
N1 G91 G00 X-50. ;
N3 N1 N2 G33 Z-100. ;
Z N3 G00 X50.;
N4 Z100. ;
M02 ;
C N2 B
2 Let us assume that while thread cutting programmed in block N2 is being executed, the TOOL RE-
TRACT switch is turned on.
D A Machine operator's panel
N1 TOOL RETRACTING RETRACT

POSITION
C N2 F B
TOOL TOOL
RETRACT RECOVER
121
3 The tool is retracted at 45 to the thread cutting block.

In this example, the thread is cut along the 2axis, and the tool is retracted 40 mm each along the X
axis and Zaxis. The Xaxis is called the retraction axis. However, if the tool is retracted 40 mm along
the Zaxis, the tool may overrun thread cutting end point depending on when the TOOL RETRACT
switch was turned on. After the thread cutting end point on the Zaxis is reached, the tool will be moved
only along the retraction axis (the Xaxis) to the specified position. If the tool does not reach the end
point on the Zaxis when it has reached the retraction position on the retraction axis, the tool is moved
to the thread cutting end point.

If the program specifies the axis along which the thread is cut as the retraction axis, the tool is not re-
tracted irrespective of whether the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on. In addition, P/S alarm No.
215, ESCAPE ERROR (PTRR), is issued after the tool stops at the position where a block other than
the thread cutting block terminates.
4 After retraction is completed, the tool stops after the next block, not the thread cutting block, is
executed.

122
5 The tool is repositioned so that it comes back to the thread cutting end position (point D in the following
figure) specified by the program.
N4
D
(c) Procedure for retraction and recovery in a canned drilling cycle

1 When the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on in a canned drilling cycle, how the tool is retracted de-
pends on the operation being performed at that time.
Motion 1 Positioning along the X- and Y-axes

Motion 2 Rapid traverse to point R
Motion 3 Actual drilling
Motion 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole
Motion 5 Retraction to point R
Motion 6 Rapid traverse to initial point
Motion 1
Initial point
Motion 2 Motion 6
Point R
Motion 3 Motion 5
Motion 4
(i) If the switch is turned on during motion 1, the tool is moved retracted by the distance specified by
G10.6, as in ordinary retraction.
(ii) If the switch is turned on during motion 2, the motion is suspended and the tool moves to the initial
point and stops there.
(iii) If the switch is turned on during motion 3, the motion is suspended, cycle motions 4, 5, and 6 are
executed from that position. After motion 6, the tool stops at the initial point.
123
(iv) If the switch is turned on during motion 4, 5, or 6, the motion is continued until the tool reaches
the initial point.
During motions 2 to 6, turning on the TOOL RETRACT switch does not retract the tool as specified
by G10.6. However, when the switch is turned on and the tool reaches the initial point, the ma-
chine enters the tool retraction mode.
When the canned cycle is in its second or subsequent operation, if the switch is turned on during
motions 2 to 6, the retraction position differs according to G98 or G99.
G98 (initial level return): The tool moves to the initial level.
G99 (pointR level return): The tool moves to point R.
2 A canned repositioning cycle is performed by starting the cycle at the retraction position.
(i) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 1
As in ordinary repositioning, automatic operation is resumed after completion of repositioning.
(ii) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 2
Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2.
(iii) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 3
Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2.
(iv) Repositioning when the TOOL RETRACT switch is turned on during motion 4, 5, or 6
Operation is resumed from canned cycle motion 2 with the same hole position.
124
(d) Combining the block restart function and the retraction and recovery function
The procedure for combining the tool retraction and recovery and block restart functions is shown follow-
ing. See Item 5.6.2 for the block restart function.
If the tool breaks, for example, after automatic operation is suspended, the tool is replaced, and the offset
value is changed, the operation is resumed from the start point of or an intermediate point in the interrupted
block.
(1) Start of automatic operation
(2) When a problem occurs and the TOOL RETRACT switch is

turned on, the tool is retracted and the automatic operation
is held. The mechine enters the tool retraction mode.
Move the tool manually and replace the tool or take an appropri
(3) ate action.
(4) Change the tool offset value if necessary.
Return to the automatic Turn on block return switch

(5)
mode, and return the tool and move the tool to the
to the retraction position start point by continuous
by turning on the TOOL manual feed. The tool
RETURN switch then automatically stops at the
turning it off again. start point.
(6) Return to the automatic mode and turn on the block return switch.
When the block return switch is on, executing the block can be
resumed by restarting it at an arbitrary position. The position may
not always be the retraction position.
(7) Start the cycle with the block return switch turned on.
When automatic operation is resumed, the tool retraction mode is

(8) canceled. Turn off the block return restart switch.
125
Cautions and Note on use of the tool retraction and recovery function
CAUTION 1 The retraction axis specified by G10.6 and the distance the tool is retracted need to be
changed in the necessary block according to the figure to be machined. If correct retraction
is not specified, the tool or the workpiece may be damaged.
CAUTION 2 If the origin, preset, and work offset are changed after the retraction position is specified by
an absolute G10.6 command, the retraction position does not change. After the operation
or the work offset is changed, specify the retraction position again using G10.6.
CAUTION 3 When retracting the tool by manual operation in the tool retraction mode, do not use the
machine lock or mirror image function.
NOTE The manual numeric value command option is necessary for tool retraction.
5.6.5 Retrace
The retrace function enables the tool to retrace the path of movement so far. It also returns the tool along the
same path once again. When the tool returns to the point where it started retracing its path, it continues machin-
ing as directed by program.
The retrace function can be triggered by the trace switch on the machine operators panel. It can also be auto-
matically triggered (without the operators intervention) when a damaged tool is detected. Refer to the appropri-
ate manual issued by the machine builder to check what conditions cause the tool to retrace its path and to
return to the machining position. The control switch directs the tool to retrace or trace its path according to a
retrace on/off signal received from the machine.

When the trace signal is turned on, the tool retraces the path covered so far. When the trace signal is subse-
quently turned off, the tool returns along the retraced path to the machining position.
RVRS blinks on the CRT screen during retracing, and RTRY blinks when returning along the retraced path.
RTRY continues blinking until normal operation is resumed after the tool returns to the block where retracing
was started. When there are no more blocks to retrace, message RVED blinks to indicate the end of the current
retrace.
The maximum number of blocks that can be retraced is between 40 and 80 blocks executed in an automatic
mode such as memory, tape, or MDI operation.
The retraction speed is set by a parameter (No.1494).
126
NOTE 1 Starting retracing or returning at the end of a block

Retracing or returning can be started at a block such as rapid traverse (G00) in the automatic
mode (memory, tape, or MDI operation), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02
or G03), dwell (G04), skip cutting (G31), or an auxiliary function block. However, it does not
begin as soon as the retrace signal changes, but only after the completion of the movement,
dwell, or auxiliary function block.
NOTE 2 Starting retracting and returning after feed hold stop
During rapid traverse (G00), linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02 or G03), or
skip cutting (G31), if the retrace signal is switched for restart after a feed hold stop, the tool starts
retracing or returning immediately from that position. However, this does not apply during dwell
(G04) or when executing an auxiliary function. If retracing starts after a feed hold stop in a
certain block, the space between the beginning of that block and the point where the hold stop
has been specified is considered as one block. Therefore, if returning starts with the single
block switch on, it will be canceled as soon as the program has returned to the point where the
current retrace was initiated.
Feed hold stop

- Retrace signal on
- Cycle start
Feed hold stop
- Retrace signal off
- Cycle start Starts retrace.
Ends retrace and starts returning.
NOTE 3 Starting retracing and returning after a single block stop

At the end of a single block, switching the trace signal for restart immediately triggers retracing
or returning.
NOTE 4 o activate retracing after a feed hold stop or single block stop, if a manual intervention has been
made after the stop, it is necessary to first return to the original position and then turn on the
retrace signal.
NOTE 5 Tool path for retracing or returning in rapid traverse (G00)
The path the tool retraces depends on the rapid traverse path selected by the LRP bit of
parameter No. 1400. The retrace and return paths are the same in linear interpolation
repositioning. However, they are different in nonlinear interpolation repositioning.
NOTE 6 During retrace and return, a dwell command is executed just as in ordinary operation.
NOTE 7 Tool path for retracing and returning in skip cutting (G31)
The distance the tool retraces and returns is not the programmed one but the distance actually
traveled during the first execution of the block before the skip signal is turned on. The skip
signal is ignored in skip cutting during retrace and return.
Starts retracing.
Retrace signal on
Ends retracing and starts returning.
Retrace signal off
(Skip cutting)
127
NOTE 8 Refer to the appropriate manual issued by the machine tool builder for the operations of the
M, S, T, and second auxiliary function (B function) performed during retrace.
NOTE 9 The blocks created internally in the control unit are included in the retrace path.
In the following figure, four blocks of move commands are created instead of the two
programmed blocks. In this case, the singleblock stop positions may differ between retrace
and return.
3
2 4

1 2

NOTE 10 The blocks executed are stored as long as memory is available. Eighty or more blocks can
be retraced in some cases.
NOTE 11 A programmed entry (G10) of a tool compensation value is ignored during retrace and return.
NOTE 12 If a coordinate system setting command (G92) appears during retrace, the display of the
current position during return may differ from the actual position. However, the machine
position is not changed.
NOTE 13 The tool retraces its path through blocks in the programmable mirror image mode (G50.1 or
G51.1) in mirror image. Blocks that have been mirrorimaged by a data setting command or
a machine signal are memorized without mirror image. The mirror image set by the data setting
command or machining signal is valid in both retrace and return.
NOTE 14 If the cutter compensation or tool length offset data is changed during retrace or return, the
original data stays valid until ordinary operation is resumed after the machine has returned to
the machining position.
NOTE 15 Retracing in a block containing any of the following commands is invalid. If any of them appear
during retrace, the retrace is immediately terminated, and the message RVED appears on the
CRT screen.
Inch/millimeter conversion (G20, G21)
Reference point return function (G28, G29, G30)
Thread cutting (G33)
Remote buffer (G05)
NOTE 16 When any of the following functions is being executed, retrace is invalid. If any of them appear
during retrace, the message RVED appears on the CRT screen.
Circular threading B (G02.1, G03.1)
Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1)
Cylindrical interpolation (G7.1)
Highspeed machining (G10.3, G11.3)
Exponential function interpolation (G02.3, G03.3)
NOTE 17 The following function disables this function.
Multibuffer
NOTE 18 Use of the twoblock readahead function (set when bit 1 (XBUF) of parameter No. 7616 is
1) disables the this function.
128
5.7 Manual Interrupt during Automatic Operation

For details of this operation, refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder.
5.7.1 Manual handle interrupt

In automatic operation, this function allows a move command generated by the manual pulse generator to be
superimposed on a programmed move command. As a result, the actual tool path deviates from the pro-
grammed path by the amount by which the operator turns the manual pulse generator. Therefore, this function
can give the operator an additional margin in machining.
[Interrupt operation]
(1) A manual handle interrupt can be accepted in modes other than the rapid traverse mode (such as G00).
Even in a block that does not move the tool or when automatic operation is in the stopped state, a manual
handle interrupt can be accepted unless the rapid traverse mode is effective.
NOTE Even if the feedrate override signal is set to 0%, a manual handle interrupt is accepted.
(2) The axis subject to a manual handle interrupt is determined by the manual handle selection signal. Only
one axis is selected for each manual pulse generator.
(3) The feedrate for manual handle interrupt must be determined so that when it is added algebraically to the
feedrate observed on the axis in the uninterrupted state, the result of addition must not exceed the upper
limit of the cutting feedrate for that axis.
Example Suppose that the upper limit of the cutting feedrate on a given axis is 5 m/min. If the tool is
moving along that axis in the positive direction at 2 m/min, the manual pulse generator can
be turned to set up to 3 m/min. When the same movement is interrupted by turning the gener-
ator in the negative direction, up to 7 m/min is possible.
If the manual pulse generator is turned in beyond the limit, the excess pulses generated from
the generator are discarded. Consequently, the reading of the pulse generator disagrees with
the actual traveled distance made by the interrupt.
(4) The magnification used in the manual handle interrupt depends on the states of signals MP1, MP2, and
MP4.
(5) If the direction of movement is reversed as a result of a manual handle interrupt, backlash compensation
is applied. In this case, pitch error compensation is applied to the position set after the interrupt.
For a manual handle interrupt, the application of acceleration/deceleration is based both on the time constant
for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1622) and that for jog feed acceleration/deceleration
(parameter No. 1624). When bit 0 of parameter No. 1604 is set to 1, however, the time constant for jog feed
acceleration/deceleration is disabled, so that the application of acceleration/deceleration for a manual handle
interrupt is based only on the time constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration.
129
[Manual handle interrupt and coordinate systems]

(1) The workpiece and local coordinate systems are shifted by the magnitude of a manual handle interrupt.
Therefore, when an absolute command is specified in a workpiece or local coordinate system, the end
point is shifted by the magnitude of the interrupt.
All workpiece and local coordinate systems are shifted by the same amount at the same time regardless
of which coordinate system has been selected when the interrupt is performed.
(2) A manual handle interrupt does not change the basic machine coordinate system. Therefore, the end
points of an absolute command (G53) and automatic reference position return (G28) issued in the machine
coordinate system are not affected by the manual handle interrupt.
(G90G54)
Programmed path Manual handle interrupt
Shift by manual
Path after interrupt handle interrupt
(Workpiece and local coordinate systems before interrupt)
(G90G53)
(Workpiece and local coordinate systems after interrupt)
(Basic machine coordinate system)
(3) Current position display in a workpiece coordinate system

The displayed position does not include the movement caused by a manual handle interrupt.
Current position display in the machine coordinate system and relative coordinate system
The displayed position includes the movement caused by a manual handle interrupt.
(4) It is possible to display only the amount of movement caused by a manual handle interrupt on the manual
interrupt screen indicating the current position.
130
5.7.2 Simultaneous automatic and manual operation

When the simultaneous automatic and manual selection signal is set to on and an automatic mode (tape opera-
tion, MDI operation, or memory operation or part program editing) and a manual mode (manual continuous feed
or incremental feed) are selected, automatic operation and manual operation can be performed simultaneous-
ly. In the simultaneous automatic and manual mode, for example, cutting along an axis can be interrupted to
change the depth of cut on that axis, or the next workpiece can be set up during automatic operation.
(1) Operation
(a) Selecting a mode
The following table shows how to select a simultaneous automatic and manual operation mode:
Mode selection input signal

T D MEM EDT MOVL H S J AJG
One of these signals is
Simultaneous automatic set to 1, J and H are set
One of these signals set to 1 1 0
and manual operation to 1, or S and H are set
to 1.
(0: Signal low, 1: Signal high)

(b) Manual operation during simultaneous automatic and manual operation
There are two types of simultaneous automatic and manual operation.
(i) Interrupt type
An interrupt can be made for an axis whose park signal is low.
A move command for manual continuous feed or incremental feed can be superimposed on a
move command being executed in automatic operation. Thus, this function becomes equivalent
to the manual handle interrupt.
The interrupt type is enabled or disabled by the setting of the EMI bit (bit 6) of parameter No. 1000.
(ii) Setup type
For an axis whose park signal is high, movement by manual continuous feed or incremental feed
can be performed during automatic operation.
In this way it is possible to set up the next workpiece or perform a similar operation during automat-
ic operation.
For an axis whose park signal is high, automatic operation cannot be performed. If automatic op-
eration is attempted for such an axis, an alarm occurs.
1 When the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is selected (strictly speaking, when the
manual mode of the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is selected)
Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled immediately the manual mode is
selected.
2 When the park signal is changed
Even in automatic operation, the time when the interrupt type is switched differs slightly be-
tween singleblock operation and continuous operation.
[For singleblock operation]
Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled from the block following the current block.
[For continuous operation]
Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled from the block two blocks ahead of the current
block.
[When the system is reset]
Simultaneous automatic and manual operation is enabled immediately after the system is reset.
131
(2) Performance
Automatic operation in the simultaneous automatic and manual mode is the same as normal automatic
operation. Therefore, the following explains manual operation only.
(a) Simultaneous automatic and manual operation (in relation to automatic operation)
Interrupt type Setup type

In the positioning mode (*1) Not possible Possible
In the cutting mode
Possible Possible
(G01, G02, G03, etc.)
In the threading mode Possible Possible
As indicated in the above table, the setup type is not affected by automatic operation. For the interrupt
type, interrupts are possible in modes other than the positioning mode.
NOTE In the positioning mode, the tool is moved at the rapid traverse feedrate. Therefore, blocks
containing G28 and G29 are also included.
(b) Feedrate and acceleration/deceleration time constant

The following lists the traveled distance, feedrate, and acceleration/deceleration time constant:
Interrupt type Setup typ

Traveled distance Same as normal manual Same as normal manual
operation operation
Feedrate Same as normal manual
(*1)
operation
Time constant Same as normal manual
(*2)
operation
NOTE 1 (*1) The feedrate along the axis subject to an interrupt is the result of superimposition of the
feedrate by the manual interrupt on the feedrate in automatic operation. If the resultant
feedrate exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate for that axis, it is clamped at the maximum
cutting feedrate.
NOTE 2 (*2) For interrupt type, the application of acceleration/deceleration is based both on the time
constant for cutting feed acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1622) and that for jog feed
acceleration/deceleration (parameter No. 1624). When bit 0 of parameter No. 1604 is set to
1, however, the time constant for jog feed acceleration/deceleration is disabled, so that the
application of acceleration/deceleration is based only on the time constant for cutting feed
acceleration/deceleration.
(c) Relationship with signals

The operation is related to signals as listed below:

Absolute on/off Not affected Affected
(always off)
Interlock Affected. If the signal is on, operation is not carried out.
Machine lock Affected. If the signal is on, operation is not carried out.
Mirror image Not affected. Even if the signal is on, a positive
command moves the machine in the positive direction.
(d) Indication
The indication is as follows:

Absolute coordinates Not updated Updated
Relative coordinates Updated Updated
Machine coordinates Updated Updated
132
5.8 Override Playback

It is possible to store the cutting feedrate override and spindle speed override set at program execution. When
that program is executed again, the stored override values can be used.
Storing overrides is called override teaching. Using the taught overrides is called override playback.
Teaching is possible only when the memory is operating. When override teaching is performed during memory
operation, an override value having the following format is inserted immediately after the current block in
memory. The override value is then stored.
(Current block)
,L1F R S ;
,L1: Indicates that the following F, R, and S are commands of override values.
F : Cutting feedrate override (0 to 254, unit: 1%)
R : For linear machining, the distance along the axis to the end point. (Unit: Least input increment of
the basic axis. For circular machining, the center angle up to the end point. If the basic axis is ISA, the
unit is 0.01 degree. If it is ISB, the unit is 0.001 degrees.)
In playback, if the remaining distance of the axis has reached the value specified by R or a smaller value,
or if the remaining center angle of an arc has reached the value specified by R or a smaller value, the speci-
fied feedrate override value becomes valid.
S : Spindle speed override (15 to 120, unit: 1%)
In playback, the specified spindle speed override value becomes valid from the start of the target block.
In general override playback, set the feedrate and spindle override switches on the operators panel of the ma-
chine to 100%. If an override switch on the operators panel of the machine is set to other than 100%, the pro-
grammed override value is multiplied by the override value set by that switch.
(1) Teaching procedure
Teaching can be performed by using the MDI keys or by using the switches and buttons on the operators
panel of the machine.
(a) Using the MDI keys
2 Press the <SETTING> key.
3 Press the <SETTING> key several times or press the <TEACH> key to select the override play-
back screen.
4 The override playback screen has five function selection keys, <TCHON>, <TCHOFF>,
<FEDMEM>, <SPNMEM>, and <F/SMEM>.
To enable teaching, press the <TCHON> key. When teaching is enabled, TEACHING MODE
= ON is displayed.
To disable teaching, press the <TCHOFF> key. When teaching is disabled, TEACHING MODE
= OFF is displayed.
5 Select the memory operation mode to activate the memory.
133
6 (i) To store a feedrate override value, press <FEDMEM> with a desired override position set.
(ii) To store a spindle speed override, press <SPNMEM> with a desired override position set.
(iii) To store both a feedrate override and spindle speed override, press <F/SMEM>.
(b) Using the switches on the operators panel of the machine

1 Turn on the override teaching mode switch.
3 Press the feedrate override teaching switch with the desired feedrate override position set. Alter-
natively, press the spindle override teaching switch with the desired spindle speed override posi-
tion set.
When only a feedrate override is taught, L1F R is inserted at the end of the block being executed.
When only a spindle override is taught, L1S is inserted to the end of the block.
When both feedrate and spindle speed overrides are stored, ,L1F R S is inserted.
If override teaching is performed more than once while a block is being executed, the last override
value is inserted in the command program.
Teaching is enabled in memory operation but not in part program or MDI operation.
(2) Playback procedure
When a program is executed after override teaching has been performed, the taught feedrate override and
spindle speed override can be used for operation (playback).
1 Set the feedrate override switch and spindle speed override switch on the operators panel of the ma-
chine to 100%.
2 To cancel the override teaching mode, press the <TCHOFF> key if the MDI keys are used, or turn
off the override teaching mode switch if the switches on the operators panel of the machine are used.
4 If .L1F R ; is specified in the command program, the following takes place:
For linear machining, when the distance along the axis to the end point of the block has reached the
value specified by R, the override value specified by F becomes valid. For circular machining, when
the center angle to the end point has reached the value specified by R, the override value specified
by F becomes valid. If ,L1S ; is specified in the program, the spindle speed override
specified by S becomes valid from the start point of the block.
The specified override value remains valid until a new override value is specified.
5 If M02 or M30 is specified, the override values effective at that time are canceled and assumed to be
100%.
134
NOTE 1 An override value added to the end of a block can be edited together with the other commands
in the part program storage and edit mode. This means that override values can be inserted,
changed, and deleted.
NOTE 2 In override playback, the override switches on the operators panel can also be used. If the
override switch on the operators panel is set to 70% when a feedrate override of 80% is
specified by ,L1F80R ;, for example, an override of 56% is applied to the specified
feedrate.
NOTE 3 Override playback is enabled in every automatic operation (memory operation, part program
operation, and MDI operation).
NOTE 4 If M02 or M30 is specified during override playback, the override values effective at that time
are canceled and assumed to be 100%. If a program number is searched for, the effective
override values are also canceled and assumed to be 100%. If a reset operation is performed,
whether to cancel the override values to 100% can be selected by the NCM bit of parameter
No. 2401.
NOTE 5 If the override value specified by F exceeds 254%, 254% is assumed. If the override value
specified by S is less than 50%, 50% is assumed, and if it is more than 120%, 120% is
assumed.
NOTE 6 If teaching is performed when the cutting feedrate override cancel switch is set on, 100% is
stored as the feedrate override value.
NOTE 7 If teaching is performed twice for the same program, an override value is stored as follows:
When teaching is specified again, the override value currently played back is multiplied by the
override value set by the override switch, and the result is inserted in the program. In addition,
the override value set by the override switch at that time is recorded by the control unit. When
an override is specified later in the program, it is multiplied by the recorded override value, and
the result is inserted as a new override value.
NOTE 8 Whether teaching is enabled for programs O8000 to O9999 is determined depending on by
the NE8 and ND8 bits of parameter No. 0011 and the NE9 and ND9 bits of parameter No. 2201.
If teaching is attempted during execution of these programs when these parameters indicate
NO EDITING (NE8 = 1 or NE9 = 1) or NO DISPLAY (ND8 = 1 or ND9 = 1), a warning is issued.
(WRITE PROTECT in the former case and INVISIBLE PROGRAM in the latter.) Teaching is
not performed for the block, and operation continues.
NOTE 9 When one of the following functions is being executed, override teaching is disabled
regardless of the parameter settings. If teaching is attempted, it is performed at the first block
immediately after the function terminates. In blocks in which teaching is disabled, never insert
override values in the part program storage and edit mode.
Only teaching of a feedrate override is disabled.
Blocks other than cutting feed blocks
Dry run operation
Teaching of both feedrate and spindle speed overrides is disabled.
Canned cycle
Multiple repetitive canned cycle
Highspeed machining
Blocks internally generated for corners in cutter compensation C
NOTE 10 When one of the following functions is being executed, override playback R is invalid
regardless of the parameter settings. In this case, the specified feedrate override becomes
valid when the block starts to be executed:
Drilling canned cycle
Skip function
Chamfering/corner rounding
Direct drawing dimension programming
NOTE 11 If feed hold or reset is specified for the same block after teaching, the taught values are
canceled.
NOTE 12 Teaching is not valid unless movement along the target axis is in progress.
NOTE 13 For a block executed repeatedly, do not specify override values through teaching or in the part
program storage and edit mode.
The following blocks may be executed repeatedly:
(1) Blocks in a subprogram called repeatedly by M98 or G65.
(2) Blocks in a main program executed repeatedly by M99.
(3) Blocks repeated in a WHILE statement and GOTO statement
135
6. TEST OPERATION B62564E1/02
6. TEST OPERATION
6.1 All Axes Machine Lock

This function is used to check a program. Although the tool does not move, it is displayed as if it were actually
operating.

Display lock/machine lock switch
NOTE 1 When a G27, G28 or G30 command is specified, the tool does not go to the reference position
and the reference position return completion led does not go on.
NOTE 2 The M, S, T, and second miscellaneous functions (B) are executed.
6.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis

When this machine lock switch is set to an axis in advance, movement along the axis is suppressed during
manual or automatic operation. The position display is updated as if the tool were actually moving along the
axis.

NOTE During manual/automatic simultaneous operation, manual operation is executed without the
tool being locked.
6.3 Auxiliary Function Lock

When the Auxiliary function lock switch is turned on, on the machine operators panel, M, S, T, and B function
operations are locked. This switch is used to check a program together with a machine lock switch.
NOTE M00, M01, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are executed as usual.
136
B62564E1/02 6. TEST OPERATION
6.4 Dry Run

If this switch is set to ON in the Cycle Operation, the feedrate specified by the program is ignored and becomes
as follows:

Dry run
Rapid
p traverse button Positioningg type
yp Programmed command
(RT signal)
i l) (#LRP of parameter No.1400) For rapid traverse For cutting feed(*2)
The dry run feedrate (parameter
Rapid traverse rate No. 1410) is overridden by the
RT=ON LRP=0/1
(parameter No. 1420) maximum manual feedrate over-
ride value (parameter No. 2016).
Jog feedrate (parameter The dry run feedrate (parameter

LRP=0
RT=OFF No. 1423)(*1) No. 1410) is overridden by the
manual feedrate override value
LRP=1 Same as for cutting feed (*1) (*JV0 to *JV15 signals).
NOTE 1 For rapid traverse, the indicated feedrates are valid only when RDR of parameter No.1400 is 1. If
RDR is 0, the rapid traverse rate is used in the same way as when the rapid traverse button is set
to ON.
NOTE 2 The dry run feedrate does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No.1422).
(The feedrate is clamped at the maximum cutting feedrate.)
6.5 Single Block

The single block function stops the tool after one block of a program has been executed.
(1) Turn on the single block switch.

Single block
One block of the program is executed, and then the execution is stopped. If the cycle start button is
pressed, the next block is executed and then the execution is stopped again.
NOTE 1 If G28 to G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at an intermediate point.
NOTE 2 In a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of (1) , (2) , and (6) shown below.
When the single block function is effective at points (1) or (2) , the feed hold lamp lights.
137
(1)
(2)
(6)

(3) (5)
(4)
NOTE 3 Single block stop is not performed in blocks containing M98P_;. M99;and G65, G66, G67.
However, single block stop is even performed in a block with M98P_ or M99 command, if the
block contains an address other than O, N or P.
138
6.6 RETRACE PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION

This function checks a machining program while executing it in the test mode. If it finds an error in the program,
the error can be corrected the error at that time and the corrected program can be executed immediately. It
can be used to check and correct a machining program without stopping operation.
To make this function effective, set parameter (REV, 2005) to 1 and turn on power again.
1 While the tool was moving according to the N03 block, an error was found in the tool path.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
N01 G90 G00 X20. Y20. ; 20

Forward N03
N02 G01 X0. Y20. F500 ;
N03 G02 X20. Y0. R20. ; operation
-20 0
N04 G01 X20. Y10. ; X
N04
2 The tool is stopped and reverse operation is started immediately.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
N01 G90 G00 X20. Y20. ; 20

Reverse N03
N02 G01 X0. Y20. F500 ;
-20 0
N04 G01 X20. Y10. ; X
N04
3 After the N03 block to be corrected is executed in reverse, the tool is stopped and the program is edited.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
N01 G90 G00 X20. Y20. ; 20

N03
N02 G01 X0. Y20. F500 ;
N03 G03 X20. Y0. R20. ; -20 0
N04 G01 X20. Y10. ; X
N04
4 When operation is restarted, the corrected program is executed.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) N02
N01 G90 G00 X20. Y20. ; 20

Second forward N03
N02 G01 X0. Y20. F500 ;
-20 0
N04 G01 X20. Y10. ; X
N04
139
6.6.1 Modes
This function can be executed only in the test mode.
The test mode is enabled when both the memory mode signal and test mode signal (G02.2) are high.
When the TSKY bit (bit 2 of parameter 2004) is set to 1, the test mode can be selected by pressing the [TEST
ON] soft key. This is an operation selection key for the program text screen and program check screen in
memory mode.
After the test mode is selected, the mode status indication changes to TEST.
6.6.2 Operation
(1) Basic Procedure for Retrace Editing
1 Select the test mode.
or

MEMORY+TEST MEMORY then
Mode selection Mode selection Soft key
2 Start the operation.
Cycle start
3 Perform a singleblock stop or feedhold stop in the block in which a program error is detected.
OFF ON
or
Feed hold Single block
4 Set the reverse signal high.
OFF ON

or
Reverse
Soft key
140
5 Start reverse operation.

6 After required blocks are executed in reverse, perform a singleblock stop or feedhold stop and terminate
reverse operation.

7 After reverse operation is terminated, correct subsequent parts of the program.
G01X0. Y20. ;
G02 X10. Y0.
:
:
>G03
NOTE The program cannot be edited when the STL signal is high.
8 Set the reverse signal low.

141
9 Restart forward operation. Operation is started from the last block executed in reverse operation.
Cycle start
Corrected block N02

20
Reverse operation is
terminated, the tool is
N03 stopped, the program
is edited, and forward
operation is restarted.
Reverse operation
is started.
-20
X
0
N04
Number of blocks that can be executed in reverse operation

This function can execute up to 15 blocks in reverse. In reverse operation, one block is counted as one
movement. If a canned cycle or other single command specifying two or more movements is included,
the number of blocks that can be executed in reverse will not agree with the number of programmed blocks.
Status indication during reverse operation
During reverse operation, the REVS indication blinks on the CRT screen. When no more blocks can be
executed in reverse, the RVED indication blinks to indicate that reverse operation is terminated.
Blocks that can be edited
When operation is stopped or halted (STL signal is low) in the test mode, the system can edit blocks which
have not yet been executed and blocks which have been executed during reverse operation.
Block from which forward operation is restarted and the position of the cursor
Only after the program is edited (modification, insertion, deletion) after reverse operation, forward opera-
tion is restarted from the block in which reverse operation is terminated. The block from which operation
is restarted does not depend on the position of the cursor in the program.
If the program is not edited after reverse operation, or if the cursor is moved during forward operation, op-
eration is restarted from the block where the cursor is located.
142
(2) Starting Reverse Operation and Subsequent Forward Operation after the Reverse Signal is Switched Dur-
ing Execution
Reverse operation and subsequent forward operation can be started in rapid traverse (G00), linear inter-
polation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), dwell (G04), skip cutting (G31) or in a miscellaneous func-
tion in test mode. However, reverse operation and subsequent forward operation are not started immedi-
ately after the reverse signal is switched. They are started after the block is completed, that is, after the
move, dwell, or miscellaneous function is completed.
(3) Starting Reverse Operation and Subsequent Forward Operation after a FeedHold Stop
If the reverse signal is switched after a feedhold stop is made in rapid traverse (G00), linear interpolation
(G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03) or skip cutting (G31), the reverse operation or subsequent forward
operation can be started at that point.
This operation cannot be executed when a dwell (G04) or miscellaneous function is executed.
When reverse operation is started after a feedhold stop, the movement from the start point of the block
to the position at which the feedhold stop is made is stored as a block.
Feed-hold stop
Reverse signal, high
Feed-hold stop Cycle start
Reverse signal, low
Cycle start
Point at which the

feed-hold stop is made
Breakpoint
between blocks
Reverse operation is terminated
and subsequent forward operation
is started.
(4) Starting Reverse Operation and Normal Operation after a SingleBlock Stop
If the reverse signal is switched after a singleblock stop, reverse operation or forward operation can be
started at that point.
Single-block stop
Reverse signal, high
Single-block stop Cycle start
Reverse signal, low
Cycle start
Reverse operation is terminated

and subsequent forward operation
is started.
143
6.6.3 Display
(1) The program screen in the test mode is different than in other modes with regard to the following points:
1 During operation in the test mode, the cursor is moved over text to indicate the current block.
(See Fig. 6.6.3(a))
<Current block>
14inch CRT: Lightblue cursor
9inch CRT: Dim cursor
<Block in the preread state>
Same as the conventional system
14inch CRT: Yellow cursor
9inch CRT: Highlighted cursor
2 Executed and preread blocks can be discriminated from blocks to be executed.
<Executed or preread blocks>
14inch CRT: Green characters
9inch CRT: Highlighted characters
<Blocks to be executed>
14inch CRT: White characters
9inch CRT: Normal characters
3 When a program that contains blocks that do not fit on one page is executed, the screen can be scrolled.
A new page contains the last three lines on the previous page. (On a 9inch CRT screen, a new page
contains the last two lines on the previous page.) (See Fig. 6.6.3(b))
4 When the screen is scrolled by pressing the , , , or key, a new page contains the last three lines
on the previous page. (On a 9inch CRT screen, a new page contains the last two lines on the previous
page.)
(2) During reverse operation, the REVS indication blinks on the CRT screen. When no more blocks can be
executed in reverse, the RVED indication blinks.

TEST***REVS****MTN*** 09:28:06 LSK
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK FRWRD BKWRD REVERS TEST REWIND +
WORD EDIT SEARCH SEARCH OFF OFF

TEST***RVED**** *** *** 09:28:06 LSK
WORD EDIT SEARCH SEARCH OFF OFF
144
(3) When a figure is drawn on graphic display A during machining, a parameter can be used to specify the color
in which reverse movement is indicated.
PROGRAM(MEMORY) O0001 N00015

O0001 N01 G91 G28 X0. Y0. ; N19 X0.676 Y0.009 ;
N02 G90 G00 X100. Y50. ; N20 X0.697 Y0.003 ;
N03 T0101 ; N21 X3.789 Y0.123
N04 G42 G01 X50. F2000 D17 ; N22 X5.787 Y0.312 ;
N05 G91 X10. ; N23 X8.892 Y0.434 ;
N06 X2. Y3.5 ; N24 X9.787 Y0.232 ;
N07 X1.343 Y2.45 ; N25 X10.934 Y0.145 ;
N08 X2.34 Y1.898 ; N26 X7.898 Y20.901 ;
N09 X0.786 Y0.432 ; N27 X6.768 Y22.234 ;
N10 X0.214 YO.339 ; N28 X3.789 Y17.890 ;
N11 X0.123 Y0.278 ; N29 X2.894 Y13.645 ;
N12 X0.356 Y0.232 ; N30 X1.896 Y7.768 ;
N13 X2.384 Y7.623 ; N31 X0.899 Y5.656 ;
N14 X3.545 Y9.903 ; N32 X0.076 Y0.878 ;
N15 X4.544 Y5.984 ; N33 X0.892 Y3.376 ;
N16 X3.789 Y3.567 ; N34 X2.983 Y14.092 ;
N17 X2.567 Y2.789 ; N35 X3.443 Y23.898 ;
N18 X1.89 Y0.899 ; N36 X5.892 Y32.937 ;
TEST***STAT****MTN*** 09:28:06 LSK
WORD EDIT SEARCH SEARCH ON OFF
Fig. 6.6.3(a) Program Screen Display During Operation in Test Mode
N19 X0.676 Y0.009 ; N31 X0.899 Y5.656 ;

N20 X0.697 Y0.003 ; N32 X0.076 Y0.878 ;
N21 X3.789 Y0.123 ; N33 X0.892 Y3.376 ;
N22 X5.787 Y0.312 ; N34 X2.983 Y14.092 ;
N23 X8.892 Y0.434 ; N35 X3.443 Y23.898 ;
N24 X9.787 Y0.232 ; N36 X5.829 Y32.937 ;
N25 X10.934 Y0.145 ; N37 X6.343 Y17.653 ;
N26 X7.898 Y20.901 ; N38 X5.892 Y13.788 ;
N27 X6.768 Y22.324 ; N39 X3.732 Y8.783 ;
N28 X3.789 Y17.890 ; N40 X2.902 Y3.892 ;
N29 X2.894 Y13.645 ; N41 X0.334 Y1.434 ;
N30 X1.896 Y7.768 ; N42 X0.233 Y0.876 ;
N31 X0.899 Y5.656 ; N43 X0.097 Y0.074 ;
N32 X0.076 Y0.878 ; N44 X0.345 Y0.782 ;
N33 X0.892 Y3.376 ; N45 X0.123 Y0.234 ;
N34 X2.983 Y14.092 ; N46 X0.344 Y0.782 ;
N35 X3.443 Y23.898 ; N47 X0.399 Y0.789 ;
N36 X5.829 Y32.937 ; N48 X0.213 Y0.349 ;
TEST***STAT****MTN*** 09:34:45
FRWRD BKWRD REVERS TEST REWIND ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE

SEARCH SEARCH ON OFF WORD

Fig. 6.6.3(b) Scrolling the Screen
6.6.4 Note
1) Manual intervention
When manual intervention is made after a feedhold stop or singleblock stop, cancel the manual interven-
tion before starting reverse operation. Then set the reverse signal to high.
2) Tool paths when the rapid traverse command (G00) is executed in reverse operation and subsequent for-
ward operation
The tool path in reverse operation depends on the path of rapid traverse selected by the LRP bit (parameter
1400). When the tool is positioned using linear interpolation, the path in reverse operation is the same as
in subsequent forward operation. When the tool is positioned using nonlinear type positioning, the tool
paths do not agree with each other.
3) Dwell command
The dwell command is executed in reverse operation and subsequent forward operation, just as in the nor-
mal operation.
4) Tool paths when the skip cutting (G31) command is executed in reverse operation and subsequent forward
operation
The distance traveled in reverse operation or subsequent forward operation does not agree with the pro-
145
grammed distance. It is equal to the distance by which the tool actually travels until the skip signal goes
high when the block is first executed. When the skip cutting command is executed in reverse operation
or subsequent forward operation, the skip signal is ignored.
5) Operation using miscellaneous functions
Miscellaneous functions specified by the M and S codes may cause different movements during reverse
and forward operation. To prevent this, these miscellaneous functions must be nested or machine opera-
tion must be reversed when the reverse signal is high.
O1 2 3 4 ;
N1 ;
N2 S 1 0 0 0 ;

Machining program

N1 0 S 1 0 0 0 ;
N1 1 S 2 0 0 0 ;

Machining program

N2 0 S 2 0 0 0 ;
6) The block created by the control unit is treated as a reverseoperation block.
3
4
2 Tool path after
compensation
Programmed
5
tool path
1
(2)
(1)
Tool path after cutter

compensation C
Although two blocks are programmed for the example shown above, four movecommand blocks are
created for actual machining.
7) Tool compensation entered by the program is ignored during reverse operation.
8) Command for specifying the coordinate system (G92) during reverse operation
If the command for specifying a coordinate system (G92) is executed during reverse operation, the current
position displayed may be different from the corresponding position displayed during forward operation.
However, the actual tool positions are the same.
9) Mirror image
When a block created using mirrorimage programming (G50.1, G51.1) is executed in reverse operation,
the tool follows the actual mirrored path.
A block created for mirror images using settings or machine signals is stored in its original state (not mir-
rored). The mirror image created using settings or machine signals is valid during both reverse and subse-
quent forward operation.
10)Changing an offset value
If the cutter compensation or tool length offset is changed during reverse operation or subsequent forward
operation, the tool is moved according to the original offset value specified when the block was first
executed. The new offset value becomes valid when normal operation is started after subsequent forward
operation is completed.
11) Commands that cannot be executed during reverse operation.
Blocks containing the following commands cannot be executed during reverse operation. When the sys-
tem encounters one of these commands during reverse operation, the system stops reverse operation at
that point and indicates RVED.
146
Inch/metric conversion command (G20, G21)

Reference position return command (G28, G29, G30)
Threading command (G33)
Binary command (G05)
12)Optional functions that cannot be executed during reverse operation
When any of the following optional functions are executed, reverse operation cannot be started. When
the system encounters a block containing one of these functions, the system stops reverse operation at
that point and indicates RVED.
Circular threading B (G02.1, G03.1)
Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1)
Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1)
Highspeed machining (G10.3, G11.3)
Exponential interpolation (G02.3, G03.3)
Figure copy (G72.1, G72.2)
Spline interpolation (G06.1)
Involute interpolation (G02.2, G03.2)
13)The following functions are invalid in test mode:
Multibuffer
Macro compiler
Fiveblock preread function
14)Switching modes
If the mode is switched to the test mode before all preread blocks in the former mode are processed, a
startreject warning is made when operation is started. Perform a reset before starting operation in the
test mode. Otherwise, execute all preread blocks in singleblock mode before switching to test mode.
Do the same when switching from the test mode to another mode.
15)Subprogram
Subprogram calls (M98, including subprogram calls with M, S, T, or B codes) and returns to the main pro-
gram (M99) can be executed during reverse operation. During reverse operation, subprogram calls and
returns the subprograms can be executed up to four times.
16)Custom macros
Macro calls (G65, G66, G66.1, G67, including macro calls with G or M codes) and returns to the main pro-
gram (M99) can be executed during reverse operation. During reverse operation, macro calls and returns
from macros can be executed up to four times, including subprogram calls and returns from subprograms.
Operation commands executed during reverse operation are not subjected to inverse operation. Suppose
the initial value of local variable #1 in the following block is 1.0 and the value is changed to 3.0 after forward
operation. After the block is executed in reverse operation, the value of variable #1 remains 3.0. After the
block is executed in subsequent forward operation, the value is changed to 5.0.
#1 = #1 + 2.0;
If a program including a macro operation command is executed in subsequent forward operation after re-
verse operation, the initial forward operation may not be reproduced. This may occur with the following
blocks:
Block of control command (IF, WHILE, etc.)
Block of move command including a macro variable (Y [#1 #5], X [#1 + #2], etc.)
If local variables are used only as arguments to macro calls in a program, subsequent forward operation
after reverse operation of the program including macro calling and return from the macro reproduces the
initial forward operation. An example is shown below:
Main program Macro
G66 P9082 R70.Z30.X2. ; 09082 ;
X100. ; G00 Z#18 ;
M06 ; G01 Z#26 ;
Y50. ; G04 X#24 ;
G00 Z [ROUND [#18] +ROUND [#26] ]
M99 ;

147
7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS B62564E1/02
7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
7.1 Emergency Stop

If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operators panel, the machine movement stops in a mo-
ment.

This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the machine tool builder, the button can usually
be unlocked by twisting it.
CAUTION Causes of trouble must be removed before the button is released.
NOTE 1 EMERGENCY STOP interrupts the current to the motor.

NOTE 2 The CNC enters the reset or alarm status. (Whether the CNC enters the reset or alarm status
is specified by the ENR bit in parameter No. 2001.)
7.2 Overtravel
When the tool moves beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, an error code (0T001 to 0T008)
is displayed and the tool slows down and stops. This also happens when the tool enters the prohibited area
defined by the stored stroke limit specified by the program or setting data. If the tool stops (Refer to II19), press
the reset button to release the alarm and manually move the tool in the opposite direction. For the exact opera-
tion of overtravel, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
148
B62564E1/02 7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
7.3 PreTravel Stroke Limit Check Function

When a block which moves the tool starts to be executed, the pretravel stroke limit check function checks the
endpoint coordinate according to the current position of the tool and the traveled distance. This function also
checks whether the tool enters the prohibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2. If the block causes the
tool to enter the prohibited area, the function stops the tool immediately after the tool has started moving and
displays the alarm.
CAUTION Manual numeric commands are checked.
NOTE 1 This function checks whether the endpoint coordinate of the move command in each block
is in the prohibited area but does not check the halfway path of the command. In addition, an
alarm occurs when the tool passes the prohibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2.

149
7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS B62564E1/02

Prohibited area of stored stroke

limit 1 or 2

End point

Start point
Stored stroke limit 1 or 2 stops
the tool at point a.

Prohibited area of stored stroke
limit 1 or 2

End point

Start point Pre-travelstrokelimitcheckstopsthetool
immediately after the tool starts to move.
NOTE 2 If the machine lock switch is on when movement in the block starts, the pretravel stroke limit
check function is not executed.
NOTE 3 If stored stroke limit 2 is invalid (in the G23 mode), the prohibited area defined by stored stroke
limit 2 is not checked.
150
B62564E1/02 7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS
7.4 Stored Stroke Limit Check in Manual Operation

When an attempt is made to move the tool such that stored stroke limit 1 is exceeded during manual operation
(manual rapid traverse, manual jog feed, manual handle feed, or manual incremental feed), a warning message
is displayed instead of an alarm. Also, the tool does not move such that stored stroke limit 1 will be exceeded.
A warning message is displayed if the tool attempts to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke limit 1.
The warning message is automatically cleared when the tool is backed out in the reverse direction.
This function can be enabled or disabled according to the setting of parameter No. 5201 (SSLWRN). When
this function is disabled, the specifications of stored stroke limit 1 are the same as those set conventionally.
CAUTION This function is disabled when the tool attempts to enter an area set as inhibited by stored
stroke limit 1 as a result of a manual interrupt operation such as an interrupttype
manualautomatic simultaneous operation or manual handle interrupt. In such a case, an
alarm is output. This function is enabled for setuptype manualautomatic simultaneous
operation.
NOTE 1 This function is enabled from the point when reference position return is completed, in the same
way as for the conventional specifications.
NOTE 2 If another warning message is already being displayed when the tool attempts to enter an
inhibited area, the original message remains as is and the warning message for this function
is not displayed.
NOTE 3 Warning messages for this function can be cleared by changing the screen, resetting, or
pressing the CANCEL soft key, in exactly the same way as for all other warning messages.
WARNING
The warning messages as following is displayed, and machine is stopped.
Messages Explanation
+OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored
stroke limit 1 during manual movement in the positive direction.
Backing out the tool in the negative direction automatically clears this
warning message.
OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored
stroke limit 1 during manual movement in the negative direction.
Backing out the tool in the positive direction automatically clears this
warning message.
151
8. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS B62564E1/02
8. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS

Check the following items when operation is not normal:
(1) When an error code is displayed on the CRT
If an error code is displayed, check the cause of the error according to Appendix 11 List of Error Codes.
In particular, PSfffindicates a program or data setting error. Correct the program or setting.
(2) When no error code is displayed on the CRT
The tool appears to stop when the system is operating. Refer to Section 4.4 CNC Status Display in the
Maintenance Manual.
(3) Refer to Chapter 4 Troubleshotting in the Maintenance Manual.
152
B62564E1/02 (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
9. STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (INCLUDING PROGRAM

REGISTRATION)
9.1 Preparations for Storing and Editing Part Programs

To store or edit part programs as described below, it is necessary to establish the status in which a part program
can be edited according to the following preparations.
(1) Set the I/O devices. 9" CRTunit

(2) Set data on the I/O devices. (See
Section 10.3.)
(3) Turn on the data protection key
(KEY3). Some systems may not
have this key.
(4) Set the operation mode to the EDIT Function Softkeys Operation
menukey selectionkey
mode.
(5) Press the function menu key to 9" CRTfunctionselectionkeys
switch the soft keys to operation
POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +
selection keys.
(6) Press the PROGRAM soft or hard
key to display the program screen.
If the text of programs is not dis- 14" CRTunit
played on the screen, perform one of
the following:
(i) Press the CHAPTER key to
switch the soft keys to chapter
selection keys and press the de-
sired chapter selection key.
(ii) Press the PROGRAM soft or Function Softkeys Operation
hard key repeatedly until the menukey selectionkey
program text is displayed.
14" CRTfunctionselectionkeys
ON M CHECK G E E R
153
9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION) B62564E1/02
9.2 Registering Part Programs
9.2.1 Registering a part program from the tape

This section explains the following operations:
1 Registering all part programs
2 Registering one part program
3 Registering a part program when the current program number is changed or a new program number is as-
signed
(1) Establish the status in which part programs can be edited. (See Section 9.1.)
(2) To add a new part program to the programs that are already registered, search for the last program
number. (See Section 5.2.1.)
9" CRToperationselectionkeys
Ojjj DELETE
CONDENS READ PUNCH VERIFY +
FILE
9" CRToperationguidancekeys
SearchthisAddanew
A L L 1-PROGRAM (PROG#) (FILE#)
program program
number. tothis
position.
CONDEN DELETE READ PUNCH VERIFY COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +
SE FILE
14" CRToperationguidancekeys
A L L PROG (PROG (FILE
RAM #) #)
(3) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.
(4) When the READ key is pressed, the soft keys function as operation guidance keys.
(5)
When one part program is registered

When all part programs are When one part program is when the current program number is
registered registered changed or a new program number is
assigned.)
(5)1 (5)1 (5)1
Press the ALL key. Press the 1PROG key. Press the (PROG#) key.
(5)2 (5)2
(i) For new registration, Enter a program number from the
press NEW. CRT/MDI panel and press the EXEC
(ii) For addition, press key.
ADD.
(6) To stop part program registration, press the STOP key. When this key is pressed, however, registration
of the remaining part programs cannot be restarted.
(7) When part program registration terminates, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection
keys.
154
9.2.2 Registering part programs from CRT/MDI panel
(1) Establish the status in which part pro- 9" CRToperationselectionkeys

grams can be edited. (See Section ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT-WRD BG-EDT +
9.1.)
(2) Press the operation menu key.
(3) Use address and numeric keys to
enter the program to be registered. 14" CRToperationselectiomkeys
The enter program is temporarily ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY
WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY
stored in the key input buffer.
When the INSERT key or INPUT/IN-
SERT hard key is pressed, the pro-
gram is loaded into memory.
(4) To enter additional programs, repeat
step (3).
155
9.3 Deleting Part Programs

Part programs that are protected from being edited are not
deleted.
When the NE8 bit in parameter No. 0011 is 1, part programs O8000 to O8999 are not deleted.
When the NE9 bit in parameter No. 2201 is 1, part programs O9000 to O9999 are not deleted.
(1) Establish the status in which part pro- 9" CRT operation selection keys
grams can be edited. (See Section ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT-WRD GB-EDT +
9.1.)
(2) Press the operation menu key to switch
the soft keys to operation selection
9 CRT soft keys displayed when DELETE is pressed
keys.
WORD ~EOB ~(WORD) PROGRAM
(3) Press the DELETE key.
(4) Press the PROGRAM key.
(5) 9" CRT soft keys displayed when PROGRAM is pressed
When deleting all part programs A L L THIS (PROG#)
(5)1 Press the ALL key.

All the registered part 9" CRT soft keys displayed when ALL is pressed
programs are deleted
CANCEL EXEC
except those protected from
being edited. The soft
keys are switched to the
operation selection keys.
(5)2 Press the EXEC soft key. All
part programs are deleted. 14" CRT soft keys displayed when ALL is pressed
CAN EXEC
When the CANCEL soft key CEL
is pressed, deletion of all the
part programs is cancelled
and the system is restored 14" CRT operation selection keys
to the status in 1 in which ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY CHAPTE
part programs can be WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY R
edited.
When deleting the currently se-
14" CRT soft keys displayed when DELETE is pressed
lected program
WORD ~EOB ~(W PROG
ORD) RAM
(5)1 Press the THIS key.
The currently selected
program is deleted and the 14" CRT soft keys displayed when PROGRAM is pressed
soft keys return to operating A L L THIS (PROG
as the operation selection #)
keys.
When deleting the specified part
program
(5)1 Press the (PROG#) key.
(5)2 Enter the program number
and press the EXEC key.
(5)2 To delete multiple programs
at a time, delimit the upper
and lower program numbers
with commas (, ).
Example When 0100,0200 is en-
tered and the EXEC key is
pressed, programs 0100
to 0200 are deleted.
156
9.4 Editing Part Programs

Editing part programs means inserting or deleting data in part programs or otherwise altering them. Part pro-
grams in memory can be edited as follows:
(1) Establish the status in which part programs can be stored and edited. (See Section 9.1.)
(2) Search for the part program to be edited. (See Section 5.3.) This step is not necessary if the part program
to be edited has already been selected.
(3) Move the cursor to the position to be edited.
(4) Edit the part program.
Steps (3) and (4) are described in detail below.
9.4.1 Moving the cursor to the position to be edited
(1) Press the operation menu key. 9" CRToperationselectionkeys

(2)
FW_SRCH BW_SRCH REWIND DIR.MEM
When the position to be edited is
after the cursor
9" CRToperationguidancekeys displayed
(2)1 Press SEARCH.
REPEART BOTTOM (WORD) (PROG#) NXT_PRG
When the position to be edited is
before the cursor
TOP REPEAT (WORD) (PROG#) PRV_PRG
(2)1 Press BW_SRCH.
Backward search does
not apply to words in the
same block.
When returning the cursor to the ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK FRWRD BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY MULTI
beginning of the part program WORD EDIT SEARCH SEARCH MEMORY EDIT
14" CRToperationguidancekeys displayed

(3) (2)1 Press REWIND. REPEAT BOTTOM (WORD) (PROG#) NEXT
When searching for a word or PRGRAM
address
TOP REPEAT (WORD) (PROG#) PRVIOS
(3)1 Press (WORD). PRGRAM
(3)2 Enter the address (such

as N) or word (such as
N100) to be searched for
and press the EXEC key.
The address or word is
searched for in the
specified direction,
starting at the current
cursor position. When the
search is completed, the
cursor moves to the
located address or word.
When moving the cursor to the end in forward search or beginning of the part program in backward
search
(3)1 To move the cursor to the end of the part program in forward search, press the BOTTOM soft
key.
(3)1 To move the cursor to the beginning of the part program in backward search, press the TOP
soft key.
157
9.4.2 Repeat search

Once a search function is used, the repeat search function enables the search function to be triggered simply
by pressing the REPEAT key.
(1) EXAMPLE OF USE
O1000 ; 1 This example searches for G01 several times
when the program at the left is being edited, as-
*1 suming that the cursor is initially set at position *1.
N01 G00 G90 Z100. C0 ;
2 At the first search, press: F_SRCH G01 EXEC
N02 G04 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ; The cursor will move to position *2.
N03 G07. 1 C57299 ; 3 At the second and subsequent searches, press:

*2 F_SRCH and REPEAT.
N04 G90 G01 G42 Z120. D01 F250 ;
The cursor will move to position *3, then to posi-
N05 C30. ; tion *4. The search condition is displayed during
the search.
N06 G02 Z90. C60. R30. ;
*3 4 To change the search condition, use the same
N07 G01 Z70. ; operation as with the previous version: F_SRCH
(condition) EXEC
N08 G03 Z60. C70. R10. To repeat the search with the new condition, press:
*4 F_SRCH and REPEAT.
N09 G01 C150. ;

(2) Search conditions and CNC states for which the repeat search function can be used
(a) The repeat search function can be used with the forward and backward search functions for the
CNC states (modes and screens) listed below.
Mode Screen Remarks
Edit Program, Directory
Memory Program
Tape Program
MDI Program
Test Program FS15- B only
BACK GROUND Program, Directory
(b) Once a forward or backward search is performed under a certain condition with a certain mode
and screen, the search can be repeated under the same search condition even with other modes
and screens provided that the new modes and screens are those to which the repeat function is
applicable (Example 1). If the search condition is one not displayed with the operation guide key,
however, the warning message FORMAT ERROR or CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS DIF-
FERENT) will be issued (Examples 2 and 3) .
(c) For words, sequence numbers, and program numbers, the forward and backward search func-
tions are not distinguished from each other (Example 4) .
Example 1 After a word is searched for on the edit mode program screen, the same word can be
searched for on the MDI mode program screen.
Example 2 A word search is not available on the tape mode program screen. If the repeat search function
is used on the tape mode program screen even for the same word that was searched for on
the edit mode program screen, the warning message FORMAT ERROR will be issued.
Example 3 After executing _SRCH BOTTOM, if you try to execute B_SRCH REPEAT, the warning mes-
sage CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS DIFFERENT) will be issued.
Example 4 After making a forward search using F_SRCH G01 EXEC, you can perform a backward
search by pressing B_SRCH REPEAT.
(3) Caution
If you try to use the repeat search function before using the forward and backward search functions,
the warning message CAN NOT REPEAT (BUFFER IS EMPTY) will be issued.
158
9.4.3 Editing part programs

Part programs can be edited as follows:
(i) Alteration
Changing one word to another word
Changing one word to two or more words
hanging one word to two or more blocks
(ii) Insertion
Inserting one word
Inserting two or more words
Inserting two or more blocks
(iii) Deletion
Deleting one word
Deleting the words from the cursor position to the end of block (EOB)
Deleting the words from the cursor position to the specified word (entered from the keyboard)
(1) Establish the status in which part pro-
grams can be edited. (See Section 9.1.)
(2) Move the cursor to the position to be 9" CRT operation selection keys
edited.
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT-WRD BG-EDIT +
(3) Press the operation menu key.
(4)
To change data
(4)1 Press the ALTER soft or ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY
hard key. WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY
(4)2 Press the (WORD) key.

(4)3 9" CRT operation guidance keys displayed
when the ALTER/INSERT key is pressed
i) To change one word to anoth-
er, enter the new word. (WORD) (PROG #)
ii) To change one word to two or

more words, enter the new 9" CRT soft keys displayed
words. when the DELETE key is pressed
iii) To change one word to two or WORD ~EOB ~(WORD) PROGRAM
more blocks, enter the blocks.
(4)4 Press the EXEC key. 14" CRT operation guidance keys displayed
The word indicated by the when the ALTER/INSERT key is pressed
cursor is replaced with the (WOR (PROG
D) #)
new data, and the cursor
moves to the last word
14" CRT soft keys displayed
entered. The soft keys when the DELETE key is pressed
return to operating as the WOR ~EOB ~(WO PROG
operation selection keys. D RD) RAM
159
To insert data
(4)1 Press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key.
(4)2 Press the (WORD) key.
(4)3
i) To insert one word, enter the new word.
ii) To insert two or more words, enter the new words.
iii) To insert two or more blocks, enter the blocks.
(4)4 Press EXEC key.
The entered word(s) are inserted immediately after the word containing the cursor.
The cursor is moved to the last inserted word.
Each soft key returns to an operation selection key.
To delete data
(4)1
i) To delete only one word, press the DLTWRD soft key or the DELETE hard key.
ii) To delete two or more words, press the DELETE soft key and perform the following:
(4)2
i) When the (WORD) key is pressed, the word indicated by the cursor is deleted. The soft keys re-
turn to operating as operation selection keys.
ii) When the ~EOB key is pressed, the words from the cursor position to the end of block (EOB) are
deleted. The soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.
iii) To delete the words from the cursor position to the specified word,
1) press the (WORD) key,
2) enter the word, and
3) press the EXEC key.
The words from the cursor position to the specified word are deleted. The soft keys return to the
operating as the operation selection keys.
160
9.5 MULTIEDIT FUNCTION

The multiedit function allows two programs to be edited at the same time by displaying them in the left and
right halves of the program text screen.
9.5.1 Operation and Display Transition
PROGRAM 01234 N12345

The screen can be divided into left and right
01234 ; ................ ;
areas for multiediting only when the
.................... ; ........... ; program text screen is displayed.
The screen can be divided into left and right
........... ; .................... ;
................ ; ........ ;
........ ; ............... ;

areas regardless of whether it is also divided
into upper and lower areas. The screen can

be divided into left and right and upper and

lower areas at the same time.


ON M CHECK G E E R
<Operation menu key>

<Function menu key>
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK SEARCH BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY MULTI
WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY EDIT
<MULTI EDIT>

<MULTI END>
Press the MULTI EDIT key. Enter Oxxxx
PROGRAM 01234 N12345
from the MDI panel, then press the EXEC
01234 ; 05678 ;
.................... ; ........... ;
key. (This is the same operation as for
........... ; .................... ; starting background editing.)
................ ; ........ ;
........ ; ............... ; In this example, O5678 is entered.

When the multiedit mode starts, the

screen is divided into left and right areas for
displaying two programs at the same time.

The program to be edited is displayed in

green. (Initially, the program on the right
is indicated as the target program). A
rogram on the left can be made the target
MULTI RIGHT
END /LEFT program by pressing the RIGHT/LEFT key.
Each program can be edited as usually,
except that it is displayed on only half the
screen.
161

Press the operation menu key a few times.
Until the soft keys for extended part

program editing appear.

Copy and move operations can now be
<Operation menu key> performed between both the left and right
COPY MOVE MERGE CHANG programs.
E
Merge and replacement operations
<COPY> conform to the standard extended part
<MOVE> program editing specifications.
When the COPY or MOVE key is pressed,
TO KEY TO PRO the soft key indications change (same as
BUFFER GRAM
standard indications).

When the <TO PROGRAM> key is
(Not displayed <TO PROGRAM>
pressed, the soft key indications change
when MOVE is
pressed) (same as standard indications).
Copying into the keyin buffer (TO KEY
BUFFER) conform to standard extended
(Not displayed when part program editing specifications.
MOVE is pressed)

CUR ~CUR ~BOT ALL RIGHT

SOR~ SOR TOM /LEFT
<RIGHT/LEFT>

<RIGHT/LEFT>
Pressing the RIGHT/LEFT key switches
PROGRAM 01234 N12345 the program to be edited (the source of copy
01234 ; 05678 ; and move operation).
.................... ; ........... ;
........... ; .................... ; The program to be edited is displayed in
................ ; ........ ;
........ ; ............... ; green and the other program is displayed in

white.

CUR~ ~CUR ~BOT ALL RIGHT

SOR SOR TOM /LEFT
<CURSOR ~> Move the cursor to the start point, then

press the CURSOR ~ key. The soft key

indications change.
162
CUR~ ~CUR ~BOT ALL RIGHT

SOR SOR TOM /LEFT
A A

Move the cursor to the end point, then press
PROGRAM 01234 N12345 the ~ CURSOR key. To specify the end
01234 ; 05678 ; point as the end of the program, press the
.................... ; ........... ;
........... ; .................... ; ~ BOTTOM key.
........ ;
............... ;
To copy the entire program, do not specify
the start point. Simply press the ALL key.

As shown in this example, when the target

program to be edited is changed to the other

program after the COPY or MOVE key was

pressed, the other program automatically
becomes the target program (the
destination program for copy or move
EXEC (PROG RIGHT operation).
#) /LEFT
To change the destination program for copy

and move operations to the other program,

press the RIGHT/LEFT key.
Each time the CONFIRM key is pressed,
PROGRAM 01234 N12345 the cursor moves alternately to the start
01234 ; 05678 ; point and end point of the copy or
.................... ; ........... ;
........... ; .................... ; movement source range. This is done so
........ ;
............... ;
that the user can check the range before
starting a copy or move operation.
Move the cursor to the target destination

position, then press the EXEC key.

To create a separate program from the
specified copy or movement source range
and register it, press the PROG# key, enter
a program number, then press the EXEC
COPY MOVE MERGE CHANG key.
E
The screen to the left shows that area A of
program 01234 has been copied or moved to
program 05678.
9.5.2 Remarks
(1) The <RIGHT/LEFT> key enables the user to select the target program from the two programs displayed
during multiediting. When the target program is switched after the <COPY> or <MOVE> key is pressed,
the target program is switched automatically after the range is specified i.e., the target program is switched
to the program selected as the target program when a copy or move was specified.
(2) When multiediting is terminated, and the normal screen mode is restored, the program on the left is dis-
played regardless of which program was been selected as the target program.
To execute a program created and selected in the right area in the memory mode, it must be selected and
displayed in the left area of the screen.
(3) The program directory screen is automatically switched to the program text screen after a program search
terminates on the program directory screen.
163
9.6 Collating Programs
(1) Establish the status in which part pro- 9" CRT operation selection keys
grams can be edited. (See Section CONDENS DELFILE READ PUNCH VERIFY +
9.1.)
(2) Press the operation menu key to
9" CRT operation guidance keys displayed
switch the soft keys to the operation
when the VERIFY key is pressed
selection keys.
A L L 1-PRGRM CURSOR~ (FILE#)
(3) Press the VERIFY key.
(4)
i) To collate all the part programs
on the tape with the programs in CONDENDELETE READ PUNCH VERIFY COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +
memory, press the ALL key. SE FILE
ii) To collate one part program on

14" CRT operation guidance keys displayed
the tape with the programs in when the VERIFY key is pressed
memory, press the 1PRGRM ALL I_PROG CURSOR HERE (FILE
key. RAM #)
iii) To start collation from the charac-

ter indicated by the cursor in the
currently selected memory pro-
gram, press the CURSOR~ key.
The CURSOR~ key, however,
can only be used when collating
programs a second time because
the previous collation failed.
(5) To cancel program collation, press the STOP key. When this key is pressed, collating the remaining part
programs with the programs in memory cannot be restarted.
(6) When program collation terminates, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.
(7) If program collation is unsuccessful, the message and the CANCEL soft key are displayed. Pressing the
CANCEL key releases the alarm.
(8) To restart program collation using the CURSOR~ key, perform the following:
i) Select the program screen without cancelling the alarm. The contents of the tape buffer are displayed.
The block where a collation mismatch occurred is displayed on the first line.
ii) Cancel the alarm and reselect the program screen. The memory contents are displayed, starting at
the block where the collation mismatch occurred.
iii) The cursor is positioned at the word where the collation mismatch occurred.
iv) Move the cursor to the beginning of the next block. (If a collation mismatch occurs in the word immedi-
ately before EOB, move the cursor to the next block but one.)
v) Press the CURSOR~ key.
vi) For the data buffer, program collation is automatically restarted at the beginning of the next block.
164
B62564E1/02 9. (INCLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION)
9.7 Part Program Output

This section explains the following operations:
1 Outputting all the part programs
2 Outputting the currently selected part program
3 Outputting the specified part program
(1) Establish the status in which part 9" CRT operation selection keys
programs can be edited. (See CONDENS DELFILE READ PUNCH VERIFY +
Section 9.1.)
(2) Set whether to use the EIA or
ISO code as the punch code. 9" CRT soft keys displayed when the PUNCH key is
(See Section 10.3.) pressed
A L L THIS (PROG#) (FILE#)
(3) Press the operation menu key to
switch the soft keys to the opera-
tion selection keys.
(4) Press the PUNCH key.
CONDEN DELETE READ PUNCH VERIF COPY MOVE MERGE INS_TIM CHANGE +
(5) SE FILE
i) When outputting all the part

programs
14" CRT soft keys displayed when the PUNCH
Press the ALL key.
key is pressed
Outputting all the part pro- ALL THIS (PROG CUSSOR (FILE
grams is started. #) ~ #)
ii) When outputting the cur-

rently selected part program
Press the THIS key.
Outputting the currently se-
lected part program is
started.
iii) When outputting the specified part program
Press the (PROG#) key, enter the program number, then press the EXEC key.
Outputting the specified part program is started.
iv) Press the CURSOR ~ key to output the specified part program from the position where the cursor
is located.
(6) To cancel part program output, press the STOP key. When this key is pressed, outputting the remain-
ing part programs cannot be restarted.
When the PAUSE key is pressed, the end of block (EOB) code is output, part program output tempo-
rarily stops, and the following soft keys are displayed:
EXEC EX-SNGL %-FEED
When the %FEED key is pressed, the end of record (EOR) code and feed codes are output and
part program output is terminated.
When the EXSNGL key is pressed, part program output is continued until the EOB code is en-
countered.
When the EXEC key is pressed, part program output is restarted.
Feed code output can be terminated by pressing the NOFEED key when an unpunched feed
code is being output to the beginning or end of the tape.
When part program output terminates, the soft keys return to the operating as operation selection
keys.
165
9.8 Background Editing

If the operation mode is other than the EDIT mode, part programs can be stored and edited in the background
at any time.
Alarms or warnings that occur when part programs are being stored or edited in the background do not affect
the foreground operations at all. Conversely, alarms that occur in the foreground do not affect part program
storage and editing in the background.
1 Starting background editing
(1) Establish the status in which
part programs can be stored
and edited. (See Section 9.1.)
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT-WRD BG-EDIT +
An operating mode other than
the EDIT mode, however,
must be selected.
9" CRT operation guidance keys (operation selection keys)
Also set the I/O inter-
(PROG #) PRV-PRG
face for back-
ground. (See Section 10.3.)
(2) Press the operation menu key
to switch the soft keys to op-
eration selection keys. WORD EDIT SEARCH MEMORY
(3) Press the BGEDIT key or

BACK EDIT soft key to switch
the soft keys to the operation 14" CRT operation guide keys
(PROG PRVIOS
guidance keys.
#) PRGRAM
(4) To select the part program
previously edited in the back-
ground, press the PRVPRG
key. The program previously
edited in the background is
displayed and the soft keys
return to operating as the op-
eration selection keys. Step
(5) is not necessary.
(5) To select a part program, press the (PROG#) key, enter its program number, then press the EXEC key.
The selected program is displayed and the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection
keys.
PROGRAM (BGEDIT), indicating that part programs can be stored and edited in background, is dis-
played at the top right corner of the CRT.
(6) For the exact operations of part program storage and editing, see each item.
2 Terminating background editing
(1) Press the operation menu key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
(2) Press the BGEND key to terminate background editing.
166
9.9 Number of Programs that can be Registered

The maximum number of programs that can be registered is either 100, 400, or 1000, depending on the length
of part program storage.
9.10 Length of Part Program Storage

Any of the following part program storage lengths can be selected:
80 m, 160 m, 320 m, 640 m, 1280 m, 2560 m, and 5120 m
NOTE Depending on what option is specified, the part program storage length may decrease.
(1) Custom macro common variables
Table 9.10 (a) Custom Macro Common Variables and Part Program Storage Length that Decrease
Part program storage

Common variable Remarks
length that decreases
Common variable A 0m #100 to #149, #500 to #540
Common variable B 0m #100 to #199, #500 to #599
Common variable C 2.2m #100 to #199, #500 to #699
Common variable D 7.4m #100 to #199, #500 to #999
(2) Number of offset pairs
Table 9.10 (b) Offset Pairs and Part Program Storage Length that Decreases
Part program storage

Offset memory Number of offset pairs Remarks
length that decreases
32 0m
99 0m
G
Geometry andd wear are
A 200 1.5m
not distinguished.
499 4.4m
999 10.3m
32 0m
99 1.5m
G
Geometry and
d wear are
B 200 3.7m
distinguished.
499 10.3m
999 22.0m
32 0m
99 3.7m Geometry and
G d wear are
C 200 8.1m distinguished
distinguished.
Cutter diameter and tool
499 22.0m length are distinguished.
999 44.7m
(3) Tool life management

The part program storage length is reduced by 5.9 m. When the number of tool life management pairs is
512, the part program storage length is reduced by 45 m.
(4) Tool offsets using tool numbers
The part program storage length is reduced by 14 m.
(5) Addition of the number of work coordinate system pairs
The part program storage length is reduced by 4.4 m.
167
9.11 Extended Part Program Editing

The extended part program editing function performs the following operations on the programs in memory
through the MDI panel:
(1) Copying or moving all or part of a program into the program buffer or keyin buffer
(2) Merging two programs into one
(3) Changing the word or address specified in the program
The extended part program editing function simplifies creation of a new identical program with the original pro-
gram being left as is, and hence is useful when creating a program containing similar parts. This function can
also be used to change the program command sequence, command values, addresses, and other items.
Extended part programs can be edited only on the program screen or program list display screen in the EDIT,
MDI, or background editing mode. Note, however, that the program list display screen cannot be used in the
MDI mode.
COPY MOVE MERGE CHANGE
TO-BUFF TO-PROG
WORD ~EOB
CURSOR~ ~CURSOR BOTTOM ALL
(PROG#)
EXEC
STOP
* In the MDI mode, a program can be copied only into the keyin buffer.
* When the program list screen is displayed, a program can be copied only into another program.
168
9.11.1 Copying and moving a program

(1) Changing the 9 CRT soft keys during operation
The 9 CRT soft keys change as shown in the figure below. The arrow () indicates the sequence in which
the soft keys change. (The arrows in the figures on the next and subsequent pages have the same mean-
ing.)
1 Coping a program (COPY)
TO-BUFF TO-PROG
WORD ~EOB
(PROG#)
EXEC
STOP
169
2 Moving a program
TO-BUFF TO-PROG
WORD ~EOB
(PROG#)
EXEC
STOP
170
(2) Copying or moving one program into another

1 Copying the whole program
Press the soft keys [COPY], [TOPROG], [ALL], and [(PROG#)] in that order, then enter the program
number and press the soft key [EXEC].
XXXX
A A

Program XXXX is copied into new program ****. The copied program is the same as the original pro-
gram but with a different program number.
2 Copying or moving part of a program
Press the soft keys [COPY] or [MOVE], [TOPROG], [CURSOR~], [~CURSOR] or [~BOTTOM], and
[(PROG#)] in that order, then enter the program number and press the soft key EXEC.
XXXX XXXX
A A
B
B B

C C
Program part B of program XXXX is copied into new program ****.

That is, the portion from the start point to the end point of program XXXX is copied into O****.
The program in which an editing range is specified does not change before or after it is copied.
XXXX XXXX
A A
B

C
Program part B of program XXXX is deleted and moved to new program ****.
That is, the portion from the start point to the end point in program OXXXX is moved to O****.
The moved portion of the program in which an editing range is specified disappear after movement.
171
Press the soft key (PROG#) or numeric key 0, then enter the number of the new program to be created
using copying and movement. When numeric key 0 is pressed or when program number 0 already exists,
however, a warning is issued.
When the soft key [CURSOR~] is pressed, the cursor position is set as the start point of the editing range.
When [~CURSOR] is pressed, the cursor position is set as the end point of the editing range. When
[~BOTTOM] is pressed, the end of the program is set as the end point of the editing range.
NOTE 1 [CURSOR~] can be used to set the start point of the editing range any number of times before
the end point of the editing range is set by [~CURSOR] or [~BOTTOM].
NOTE 2 If the end point of the editing range is set without the start point being set, a warning is issued.
NOTE 3 If the program number position is specified although the start point of the editing range is after
the end point, a warning issued during execution.
NOTE 4 The set start and end points of the editing range are effective until they are cancelled.
The start and end points are cancelled in the following cases:
When editing (except for word search, rewind and search bottom) is performed during
insertion, deletion, or alteration after the start or end point has been set. Or when a
program merge position is specified after the start or end point has been set
When the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys after the start and
end points have been set. However, if the soft keys return to operating as the operation
selection keys after only the start point has been set, the start point is not cancelled.
NOTE 5 If the area becomes insufficient when a program is being copied, a warning occurs, and
copying is suspended.
NOTE 6 In background editing, it is only possible to copy a whole program provided the program is
selected in foreground editing and it is not in the reset or rewind status. Otherwise, a warning
is issued.
NOTE 7 In the MDI mode, a program can be copied and moved into the keyin buffer only.
NOTE 8 Copying or moving part of a program is possible only when there are three or more remaining
registered programs.
NOTE 9 If the power is turned off while copying or moving part of a program, the source program may
be divided into two and the program number of the latter half may become 0. In this case,
change the number 0 to another number and merge the programs.
(3) Copying or moving a program into the keyin buffer

1 Copying or moving the word indicated by the cursor
Press the soft keys [COPY] or [MOVE], [TOBUFF], and [WORD] in that order.
2 Copying or moving the words from the cursor position to the end of block (EOB)
Press the soft keys [COPY] or [MOVE], [TOBUFF], and [EOB] in that order.
NOTE 1 The program is always copied or moved into the keyin buffer in units of words. Words longer
than the keyin buffer length cannot be copied and moved.
NOTE 2 The program is always copied or moved into the keyin buffer in the addition format. If words
are already set in the keyin buffer, the program must be copied or moved one word at a time.
NOTE 3 The program list screen cannot be used to copy or move a program into the keyin buffer.
172
9.11.2 Merging programs (MERGE)

(PROG#)
CURSOR> BOTTOM
DLT-ORG CPY-ORG
STOP
(2) Merging programs by copying the source program

Press the soft keys [CHANGE] and [(PROG#)] and enter the program number. Then press the soft keys
[CURSOR~], [BOTTOM], and [CPYORG] in that order.
OXXXX O**** OXXXX O****
A A
Merge B B
position
C
Move
B
Program XXXX and program **** are merged. O**** does not change before or after the programs are
merged.
173
(3) Merging programs by deleting the source program

Press the soft keys [MERGE], [(PROG#)], [CURSOR>] or [BOTTOM], and [DLTORG] in that order.
XXXX XXXX
A A

B
C
B
Program XXXX and program **** are merged.

O**** disappears after the programs have been merged.
When [CURSOR>] is pressed in (2) or (3) above, the position immediately after the cursor is set as the
merge position. When [BOTTOM] is pressed, the end of the program is set as the merge position.
NOTE 1 If the soft key [MERGE] is pressed after the source program number has been set in the keyin
buffer, programs must always be merged according to (2) Merging programs by copying the
source program.
NOTE 2 If program number 0 already exists, a warning is issued.
NOTE 3 If the area becomes insufficient when programs are being merged, a warning is issued, and
merging the programs is suspended.
NOTE 4 For merging programs by copying the merge source program, at least four remaining
registered programs are needed. For merging programs by deleting the source program, at
least three remaining registered programs are needed.
NOTE 5 If the power is turned off when programs are being merged, the source program may be divided
into two and the program number of the latter half may become 0. In this case, change the
number 0 to another number and merge programs.
NOTE 6 Programs cannot be merged in the MDI mode.
174
9.11.3 Changing words and addresses (CHANGE)

(WORD) (ADRES)
(WORD) (ADRES)
EXEC EX-SNGL
STOP
* When the soft key [EX-SNGL] is pressed, the soft keys

automatically change after the search.
EXEC EX-SNGL SKIP STOP
(2) Changing words

1 Changing one word to either another word or multiple continuous words
2 Changing multiple continuous words to either one word or multiple continuous words
Press the soft keys [CHANGE], [(WORD)], [(WORD)], and [EXEC] or [EXSNGL] in that order.
Enter the word or words to be changed at the first (WORD) and enter the new word or words at the
second (WORD).
175
(3) Changing addresses

Press the soft keys [CHANGE], [(ADRES)], [(ADRES)], and [EXEC] or [EXSNGL] in that order.
Enter the address or addresses to be changed at the first (ADRES) and enter the new address or address-
es at the second (ADRES).
In (2) and (3), the first comma encountered after the first character is regarded as the delimiter between
the word or address to be changed and the new word or address. Examples are given below.
X100, Y100 : X100 is changed to Y100.
X1Y0, C10 : X1Y0 is changed to ,C10.
, C10,Y100 : ,C10 is changed to Y100.
,,, C10 : , is changed to ,C10.
When [EXEC] is pressed, all the specified words or addresses after the cursor are replaced. When [EX
SNGL] (single block change) is pressed, the first specified word or address after the cursor is searched
for and the tool stops. After the tool has stopped, change or no change can be selected.
NOTE 1 If two or more words to be changed include the end of block (EOB) and are followed by other
words, they cannot be changed. (E.g.: X100;N10,X200;N20 caused a warning to be issued.)
NOTE 2 If [CHANGE] is pressed after the word or words to be changed have been set in the keyin
buffer, singleblock change is applied.
NOTE 3 When changing words or addresses terminates normally, the total number of changed words
or addresses is displayed at the beginning of the keyin buffer display line.
NOTE 4 The program list display screen cannot be used to change words or addresses.
176
9.11.4 Automatically inserting sequence numbers

In the part program storage and edit mode (including the background edit mode), a sequence number can be
automatically inserted in each block in a fixed increment when a program is created using the MDI panel. When
the INSERT key is pressed after the end of block (EOB) has been entered, the sequence number obtained by
adding a fixed increment to the current sequence number is automatically inserted into memory with address
N. The sequence number, however, is automatically inserted following EOB only when EOB is inserted at the
end of the program (i.e., when the cursor is positioned before %).
If EOB is inserted at the middle of the program, a sequence number is not automatically inserted.
1 To automatically insert a sequence number when a program is created using the MDI panel, first set the
SEQ bit (bit 1) of parameter No. 0010 to 1. Next set the initial value of the sequence number in parameter
No. 0031 and then the increment in parameter No. 0032.
2 Select the part program storage and edit (EDIT) mode or set the status in which a part program can be
edited in the background.
3 Enter the program number and press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key.
4 Enter EOB and press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key. EOB is loaded into memory.
If 10 is set as the initial value, N10 is simultaneously inserted into the next line and displayed.
5 Insert data of either one block or two or more blocks in the format in which the data is delimited by EOB.
6 Enter EOB and press the INSERT soft key or the INPUT/INSERT hard key. EOB is loaded into memory.
If 2 is set as the increment, N12 is simultaneously inserted into the next line and displayed.
7 To not insert N12 into the next block in step 6, press the DELETE key to delete N12.
177
NOTE 1 When data of two or more blocks is inserted, the sequence number is inserted only next to the
EOB code of the last block.
NOTE 2 If the sequence number to be automatically inserted exceeds 99999, it returns to the initial
value.
NOTE 3 Even if an EOB code (M30, etc.) is inserted at the end of the program, a sequence number is
automatically inserted. Use the DELETE key to delete the sequence number.
NOTE 4 To change a sequence number, move the cursor to the last sequence number of the program
(immediately before %), enter the sequence number to be changed, and press the ALTER key.
Subsequently, this sequence number plus an increment is automatically inserted. When N120
is entered and the ALTER key is pressed, for example, the sequence number is changed to
N120 and subsequently updated, such as 122, 124, 126, ...
178
The values in the following examples are valid for part program editing but cannot be used as the first digits
of the subsequent sequence numbers to be automatically inserted:
Example 1 N123456 ALTER: Digit overflow (more than five digits)
Example 2 N1234X100 ALTER: There is data other than the N command.
Example 3 N100 N1234 ALTER: There is data other than the N command.
Example 4 N100 ALTER: There is data other than numeric characters after the N command.
NOTE 5 As shown in the figure below, the first digit of the sequence number to be automatically inserted
can also be changed by deleting the last sequence number and inserting a new sequence
number.
NOTE 6 Leave an allowance of at least six characters at the end of the keyin buffer.
179
9.12 Playback
When the playback option is selected, teaching in the job mode and teaching in the handle mode become avail-
able. In these modes, the tool position obtained through manual operation can be loaded into memory as the
program position and a program can be created.
To load words (O, N, G, R, F, M, S, T, P, Q, and EOB, etc.) other than axis names into memory, execute the same
load operations as in the EDIT mode.
The tool position can be loaded into memory as follows:
1 Select teaching in the jog mode or teaching in the handle mode.
2 Move the tool to the desired position.
3 Press a soft key to select the program.
4 Enter address X.
5 Press the soft key INSERT to load the tool position of the Xaxis into memory.
Example X10.521 (when the absolute position is entered in mm)
X10.521 (contents loaded into memory)
6 Likewise, enter Z and press INSERT. The tool position of the Zaxis is loaded into memory.
NOTE 1 When a value is entered and INSERT is pressed after an axis address (X, Y, or Z, etc.) has been
entered, the tool position plus the entered value is loaded into memory. This operation is used
to compensate the tool position using keys.
If the entered value exceeds the maximum value, the tool position cannot be loaded into
memory.
If the entered value includes a decimal point and is less than the least input increment,
it is rounded to the least input increment.
Example The tool position is assumed to be 0. (Least input increment: 1/1000)
Entered value Value loaded
Z123456.78 Cannot be loaded
Z1.2345678 Z1.235
NOTE 2 All the coordinates loaded into memory in this operation are treated as absolute coordinates.
A value with a decimal point is loaded as a coordinate. If the coordinate to be loaded is 0,
however, no decimal point is assigned to it.
Example Coordinate Value loaded
X000.000 X0
X000.987 X0.987
X12345678 X12345.678
NOTE 3 To load the commands inserted before and after the tool position into memory, execute the
same load operations as in the EDIT mode.
NOTE 4 Numeric keys cannot be used to load values consisting of more than eight digits into memory.
NOTE 5 On the 9 CRT, up to 79 characters can be edited at a time. On the 14 CRT, up to 74 characters
can be edited at a time. If the number of characters exceeds these limits, clear all the keyed
in data once.
NOTE 6 Do not edit macro statements in the playback mode. For example, in the macro statement
#1=#1XOR #2, the exclusiveOR (XOR) instruction is processed as address X.
NOTE 7 Playback cannot be applied to the pararell axes.
180
Example of Operation
(Example) 01234 N1 G92X___

Z___ ; P0
N2 G00G90X___
Z___ ;P1
N3 G01Z___F30
0;
X
N4 M02 ;
P0
P2
P2
The program in the above example can be loaded into memory as follows:
1 Select teaching in the handle mode.
2 Use the manual pulse generator to position the tool at P0.
3 Select the program to be loaded.
4 Load the program number into memory.
5 Enter address N and the value 1, then press INSERT.
6 Enter address G and the value 29, then press INSERT. G92 is loaded into memory.
7 Enter in address X and press INSERT. Likewise, enter address Z and press INSERT. Then press EOB.
The P0 tool position is loaded into memory.
8 Use the manual pulse generator to position the tool at P1.
9 Enter address G and the value 00, the press INSERT. Then enter address G90, press INSERT, enter ad-
dress X, press INSERT, and enter address Z and EOB in that order. The P1 tool position is loaded into
memory.
10 Position the tool at P2.
11 Enter address G and the value 01, then press INSERT. Then enter address Z, press INSERT, and enter
address F, the value 300, and EOB in that order. Block 3 is loaded into memory.
12 Load N4 into memory. Enter address M, the value 02 and EOB to load the last block of N4M02; into
memory. This completes loading the entire program into memory.
The program in memory can be checked in the TEACH IN mode in the same way as in the EDIT mode.
Also as in the EDIT mode, pressing INSERT for each word is not always needed. For example, the key-
strokes N, 1, G, 9, 2, X, Z, EOB, INSERT can be substituted for steps 5 to 7.
181
9.13 Format Guidance
9.13.1 NC format guidance

As a part programming guide using the NC format, the following two types of guidance are available:
1) Guidance to list of G codes
2) Standard format guidance to one block for G code
1) Guidance to list of G codes
To use the programming guide by displaying the guidance to the list of G codes on the CRT, the operation
is as follows.
1 Select the program display screen.
2 Enable the part program storage and edit operation by either selecting the program edit (EDIT) mode
or assuming the background edit state.
3 Keyinput G, and then depress the
<HELP> key.
O1234 N10 ;
In the program display screen, the N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ;
<HELP> key has a role to display the N30 X150. Z182. ;
guidance too.
>G
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
ALTER INSERT DELETE DLT_HRD BG_EDIT +
4 The guidance to the list of G codes is dis-

played in the lower half of the program
O1234 N10 ;
display pattern. N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ;
Five G codes and the meaning of each of N30 X150. Z182. ;
them are displayed at once. %
(G CODE GUIDANCE)
G00 : POSITIONING
G01 : LINEAR IPL.
G02 : CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CW
G03 : CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CCW
G04 : DWELL
>G
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
5 It is a possible to turn the page of the

guidance to the list of G codes by de-
O1234 N10 ;
pressing the <> key or the <> key. N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ;
The screen shown at the right is dis- N30 X150. Z182. ;
played when the <> key is depressed %
once from the state 4. (G CODE GUIDANCE)
G09 : EXACT STOP
G10 : DATA SETTING
G10.1: DATA SETTING(PC)
G17 : XY PLANE
G18 : ZX PLANE
>G
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
182
2) Standard format guidance to one block for G code

To use the programming guide by displaying on the CRT the standard format guidance to one block for
a certain G code, the operation is as follows.
2 Enable the part program storage and edit operation by either selecting the program edit (EDIT) mode
or assuming the background edit state.
3 Keyinput the G code, and then depress
the <HELP> key.
O1234 N10 ;
To display the standard format guidance N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ;
to one block for G02, for example, key N30 X150. Z182. ;
input <G>, <0>, <2>, and then depress
the <HELP> key.
>G02_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
4 The standard format guidance to one

block for the input G code is displayed in
O1234 N10 ;
the lower half of the program display N20 G00 G97 T0808 S360 M42 ;
screen. N30 X150. Z182. ;
Shown at the right is the standard format %
guidance to one block for G02 being dis- (G02 : CIRCULAR/HERICAL IPL. CW)
played. G02 X Y I J F ; (XY PLANE)
G02 X Z I K F ; (ZX PLANE)
G02 Y Z J K F ; (YZ PLANE)
IF HERICAL IPL.,SPECIFY ONE MORE AXIS
RADIUS CAN BE SPECIFIED BY R
>G02_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
183
3) Example of NC format guidance operation

Described below is an example of part programming using the NC format guidance function.
1 Suppose that you have inserted up to
G40 by the part program edit operation
O1234 N10 ;
(see the illustration at the right), and that N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;
you became aware at the very moment to N30 S3000 M03 ;
program the drilling cycle that you have %
forget the G code. In such a case, keyin-
put <G>, and depress the <HELP> key.
>G_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
2 The guidance to the list of G codes is dis-

played in the lower half of the program
O1234 N10 ;
display screen. N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;
N30 S3000 M03 ;
N40 %
(G CODE GUIDANCE)
G09 : EXACT STOP
G10 : DATA SETTING
G10.1: DATA SETTING(PC)
G17 : XY PLANE
G18 : ZX PLANE
>G_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
3 Search for the G code of the drilling cycle

by depressing the <> key or the <> key
O1234 N10 ;
a number of times. N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;
It is known from the guidance to the list of N30 S3000 M03 ;
G codes shown at the right that the G N40 %
code of the drilling cycle is G81. (G CODE GUIDANCE)
G73 : DRILLING(DEEP HOLE)
G74 : TAPPING(COUNTER)
G76 : BORING(FINE)
G80 : CANNED CYCLE CANCEL
G81 : DRILLING
>G_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
4 Keyinput <8>,<1>.
Depress the <HELP> key to display the
O1234 N10 ;
standard format guidance to the G81 N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;
block. N30 S3000 M03 ;
If you know that the G code of the drilling N40 %
cycle is G81 and have forgot the G81 for- (G CODE GUIDANCE)
mat, omit steps (1)(3), and just depress G73 : DRILLING(DEEP HOLE)
the <HELP> key after inputting <G>, G74 : TAPPING(COUNTER)
G76 : BORING(FINE)
<8>,<1>. G80 : CANNED CYCLE CANCEL
G81 : DRILLING
>G81_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
184
5 The standard format guidance to the G81

block is displayed in the lower half of the
O1234 N10 ;
screen. N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;
N30 S3000 M03 ;
N40 %
(G81 : DRILLING)
G81 X Y Z R F L ;
Z:Z POINT
R:R POINT
L:REPETITION TIMES (L0:DATA SET ONLY)
>G81_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
6 Keyinput while referring to the guid-

ance.
O1234 N10 ;
N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;
N30 S3000 M03 ;
N40 %
(G81 : DRILLING)
G81 X Y Z R F L ;
Z:Z POINT
R:R POINT
L:REPETITION TIMES (L0:DATA SET ONLY)
>G99G81X150.Y250.Z173.R100.F100;_
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***
7 Keyinput the data of one block, and

then depress the soft key <INSERT>,
O1234 N10 ;
and it will be inserted into the program. At N20 G90 G00 X100. Y200. ;
the same time the guidance display will N30 S3000 M03 ;
disappear. N40 G99 G81 X150. Y250. Z173. R100.
F100
%
EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** *** ***

NOTE 1 The guidance to the list of G codes does not include some G codes which are generally less
frequently used, for example G31.2 (multistep skip).
NOTE 2 In the standard format guidance to one block for each G code, an absolutely standard format
is displayed. In some cases, therefore, it may not be necessary to program according to the
guidance.
NOTE 3 In the standard format guidance to one block for each G code, some word addresses have
comments to explain the meaning. However, those the function of each of which is clear, such
as the dimension word addresses X, Y, Z, etc., the feed rate F, the auxiliary function M, the
spindle function S or the tool function T, etc., do not have comment.
185
9.13.2 Format guidance with figure

The guidance to the standard format of each G code can be displayed with a figure on the CRT screen and
used as a guide to the preparation of part program.
The operation procedure is the same as that for the NC format guidance.
Proceed in the sequence below.
1 Set the mode selector switch on the operators panel to the tape memory/edit (EDIT) mode or the back-
ground edit mode.(Refer to III, 9.8)
i) Press the function menu key to change the soft key to the function selection key.
ii) Press the PROGRAM key to display the program.
If the screen is not the one for displaying the program text, press the CHAPTER key to change the soft
key to the chapter selection key, and press the TEXT key.
Otherwise, press the PROGRAM key repeatedly until the text is displayed.
3 Press the operation menu key to change the soft key to operation selection key.
4 To use the format guidance with a figure for G87, for example, press the HELP key after input the G87.
The description for the input G code is displayed in the upper right half of the program display screen, and
the standard format guidance is displayed in the lower right half of the screen.
The following drawing shows the state with the description for G87 displayed.

O1111 ; G87(G98) G87(G99)
N001 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
N002 G90 G00 Z250.0 T11 M6 ; R
R
N003 G43 Z0 H11 ;
N004 S30 M3 ; Z Z
N005 %
(I, J)

Z

R
(G87 : BORING(MANUAL))
G87 X Y Z R Q F L ;
Z:Z POINT Q:SHIFT(TIPE 2)

R:R POINT
L:REPETITION TIMES(L0:DATA SET ONRY)
>G87_
EDIT***STOP**** *** 03:16:16 LSK
ALTER INSERT DELETE DELETE BACK BKWRD BKWRD REWIND DRCTRY

WORD EDIT SEARCH SEARCH MEMORY
(5) While observing the format guidance, key in the data in one block and then, press the INSERT key. The
data is inserted into the program, and the guidance display disappears.
When the CAN key is pressed, the formyat guidance display disappears and the display is returned to the
tape memory/edit or the background edit program screen.
NOTE 1 The function of format guidance with figure can be added when a 14 CRT is used.
NOTE 2 Nothing is drawn for some G codes.
When nothing is drawn for the G code, the message THIS G CODE HAS NO PICTURE is
displayed.
186
9.14 Program Encryption

The types of program protection described below are enabled by setting a code specific to each machine tool
builder in the system parameters.
(1) Encryption
After the parameters for encryption are set, the operations listed below cannot be performed for the pro-
grams in the specified protection range.
(1) Program input (read)
(2) Program output (punchout)
(3) Program display
(4) Program editing
Encryption enables a custom macro program developed by a machine tool builder to be protected against
inadvertent editing or alteration by end users.
In addition, complete security is provided because the contents of such a program are never displayed.
(2) I/O of encrypted programs
A program stored in memory can be encrypted before it is punched out. A program encrypted and punched
out can also be loaded into memory.
An encrypted program is indecipherable when it is punched out. Therefore, the programs that require se-
curity, such as custom macro programs of a machine tool builder, can be encrypted and punched out, and
the punched out data can be shipped with the machine to the end user as maintenance data. Such a
punched out custom macro program enables FANUC service staff or end users rather than the service staff
of the machine tool builder to restore the contents of the Bubble Memory if destroyed for some reason.
(a) Parameters
Data No. Data
2210 Code(PSW)
Set a code.
When a value other than 0 is set here, the programs are
locked and the display goes blank.
Setting: 0 to 99999999
Data No. Data
2211 Key(KEY)
When the same value as the code is set here, the programs
are unlocked. The data set here is not displayed.
Setting: 0 to 99999999
Data No. Data
2212 Lower value of the program protection range (PMIN)
2213 Upper value of the program protection range (PMAX)
Programs whose numbers lie within the range of values set

here are locked. Set a desired upper and lower program
numbers.
Setting: 0 to 9999
[Example]
When parameter No. 2212=7000 and parameter
No. 2213=8499, programs whose numbers are
from O7000 to O8499 are locked.
187
(i) Code (PSW) setting

This parameter can be set when PSW = 0 or PSW = (KEY).
For security, no code set is displayed. To unlock the programs, set KEY to the same value as the
set code. Be careful not to forget the value set as a code, otherwise the programs cannot be un-
locked.
If you forget the set code, it becomes necessary to clear all the programs whose numbers lie within
the protection range, as described later.
This operation sets PSW to 0 to release the locked state. In this case, all programs in the protec-
tion range are cleared, thus providing security.
(ii) Key (KEY) setting
This parameter can be set at any time. The value set is not displayed.
This parameter is internally set to 0 when the power is turned on.
(iii) Setting the lower value (PMIN) and upper value (PMAX) of the program protection range
These parameters can be set when PSW = 0 or PSW = (KEY).
When PMIN = 0 is specified, PMIN = 9000 is assumed.
When PMAX = 0 is specified, PMAX = 9999 is assumed.
Set values so that PMAX > PMIN.
NOTE 1 Punching out and reading parameters

The four parameters described above cannot be punched out or read.
NOTE 2 Clearing parameters
The four parameters described above are not cleared even when the parameter file is cleared
during IPL state.
NOTE 3 Display
The contents of PSW and KEY are not displayed. However, note that when PSW = 0, the value
0 is displayed to indicate that the programs are unlocked state.
NOTE 4 Setting PSW and KEY
When setting PSW or KEY, pressing <+INPUT> does not add the value to the previous value,
but overwrites the previous value.
Example When KEY = 99, pressing 1 together with <+INPUT> sets KEY to 1, not 100
(= 99 + 1).
(b) The locked and unlocked states

(i) The unlocked state
Setting PSW to 0 or KEY releases the programs from the locked state.
(ii) The locked state
Setting PSW to other than 0 or KEY sets the program in the locked state.
188
(c) Relationships between program I/O and parameters

(i) Punching out programs
Type of operation Parameter state Results

All programs outside the specified protec-
PSW KEY tion range are punched out in the normal
PSW 0 way.
P
Punchout
h (all)
( ll) All programs in the specified protection
PSW = KEY
range are encrypted and punched out.
All programs are punched out in the
PSW = 0
normal way.
All programs outside the specified protec-
tion range are punched out in the normal
way. For the programs in the specified
PSW KEY
protection range, only percent signs (%)
are punched out, and a warning message
PSW 0 is output.
Punch out
Punchout
(by program number) All programs outside the specified protec-
tion range are punched out in the normal
PSW = KEY
way. The programs in the specified protec-
tion range are encrypted and punched out.
The specified programs are punched out in
PSW = 0
the normal way.
(ii) Reading from tape containing encrypted programs
Operation Parameter state Password on tape Results

PSW = password on tape The tape is read normally.
PSW 0
PSW password on tape P/S alarm No. 580 occurs.
The ppassword on tape p is set in
N l operation
Normal i
PSW and d th
the ttape iis read.
d
PSW = 0 When the tape has been read
or reading
g the tape
p is canceled,,
the
h programs are locked.
l k d
NOTE 1 Password on punchedout tape

Encrypted programs punched out onto tape include the encrypted code set for PSW. This
encrypted code is called the password.
NOTE 2 When punching out the programs on tape after encryption, set the EIA bit in parameter No. 0
to 0 to specify ISO for the punching code. If the programs are punched out with the EIA bit set
to 1, P/S alarm No. 581 occurs.
NOTE 3 Tape containing encrypted programs cannot be read by specifying 1 PROGRAM ADD for
registering additional programs.
NOTE 4 Programs outside the protection range cannot be read.
NOTE 5 Tape containing encrypted programs can be read normally even in the locked state. At this
time, the REP bit in parameter No. 2200 is referenced.
If an attempt is made to register a program that has a program number already registered, the
REP bit specifies the following operations:
REP = 0: An alarm occurs.
REP = 1: The existing program is deleted and the new program with the same number
is registered.
(d) Verification of tape containing encrypted programs

In normal tape verification, the programs in memory are checked against the encrypted programs on
tape. However,
note that the contents of the tape being verified are not displayed when PSW KEY.
189
(e) Program display

Locked programs are not displayed. Only unlocked programs are displayed.
NOTE Locking and unlocking programs do not change the display immediately. The display
conforms to the program protection only after another operation, such as program search, is
performed.
(f) Program editing and deletion

Locked programs cannot be edited or deleted, except according to the following special procedure
for deleting locked programs.
[Deleting locked programs]
1 Turn on power while holding down both the <0> and <CAN> keys.
2 The message ALL LOCKED PROGRAMS DELETE OK? appears.
Enter Y. All locked programs are deleted and PSW is set to 0, producing the unlocked state.
When N is entered, the locked programs are not deleted.
190
9.15 Time Stamp Function

When a program is executed, the time the machining specified by the main program is executed is displayed
on the program time display screen. The machining times of up to 10 main programs are displayed in hours,
minutes, and seconds. When more than 10 programs are executed, the machining times are discarded in the
order of execution.
The time from the initial start after a reset in the memory operation mode until another reset is monitored. If
no reset occurs during operation, the time from the start until M02 or M30 is monitored. The time does not in-
clude the time during which operation is suspended, but does include the time spent waiting for the M/S/T/B
function to complete.
The displayed machining time data can be stamped, i.e. inserted, as a comment in a program stored in
memory after the program number.
Instead of the program tape length data (amount of memory used), it is possible to display the machining time
inserted after a program number on the program directory screen. Whether to display the machining time or
tape length is specified by a parameter. The machining time of each program can therefore be used as refer-
ence information when planning processes in the factory.
Machining time calculation and display
1 Select the memory operation mode, and press the <reset> key.
2 Select the program screen, and select the program for which machining time is to be calculated.
3 Execute the program and perform the actual machining.
4 If the graphic drawing screen is available, select it. The machining time is then displayed, continually being
updated, together with a machining path.
5 When the <reset> key is pressed or M02 or M30 is executed, monitoring the machining time terminates.
When the machining time display screen is selected, the elapsed machining time is displayed together with
the number of the main program executed. The machining time displayed on the graphic drawing screen
is reset to 0 when the operation is terminated.
191
6 If the machining time needs to be calculated for additional programs, repeat steps (1) to (5). Then the ma-
chining time display screen sequentially displays the program numbers and machining times of the main
programs executed.
Note, however, that the machining time cannot be displayed for more than 10 main programs. If this num-
ber is exceeded, the machining times of earlier programs are discarded.
The screens below show the change in the display of the machining time. The lefthand screen displays
the machining times for 10 main programs (O0020, O0040, ..., 00200). When the machining time is calcu-
lated for an additional program (O0220), the display changes to the righthand screen.
Stamping the machining time (inserting the machining time in a program as a comment)
1 Before the elapsed machining time can be inserted as a comment in the program, the machining time of
the program must be displayed on the machining time display screen. The machining time display screen
must first be checked to see if the program number for which the machining time is to be stamped is dis-
played.
2 After setting the part program storage and edit mode or the background editing mode, select the program
screen, then select the program in which machining time is to be inserted.
Suppose that the machining time of program number O0100 is displayed on the machining time display
screen.
3 Press the <operation menu> key, and switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys. Then, press
the <INSTIM> key. The program is rewound, and the machining time of the program is inserted after the
program number.
192
4 The machining time is inserted into a program after an existing comment, if any, in the block containing the
program number.
5 When bit TIM of parameter 0011 is set to 1, the machining time inserted as a comment in a program can
be displayed instead of the amount of memory used. The data is displayed on the program directory
screen listing the program numbers and program names.
NOTE 1 When a program is stopped due to an alarm, the machining time continues to be monitored until
the alarm is reset.
NOTE 2 If the bit for M30 in parameter No. 2400 is set to 1, the FIN completion signal is returned without
resetting the control unit with M30. This enables a program to be executed repeatedly from
the beginning. In this case, the machining time stops to be monitored when the FIN signal is
returned.
NOTE 3 The machining time of a program cannot be inserted in a program with the <INSTIM> key
unless the machining time is displayed on the machining time display screen.
NOTE 4 When the machining time inserted in a program is displayed on the program directory screen,
if the comment after the program number consists only of the machining time, the machining
time is displayed in the program name field as well as the machining time display field.
NOTE 5 If machining times are inserted in programs as shown in the examples below, the program
directory screen does not display the machining times.
193
Example 1 When the program name exceeds 16 characters
Example 2 When more than one machining time is inserted

194
Example 3 When the format of the inserted machining time is changed from the valid format
hhhHmmMssS (a threedigit number followed by H, a twodigit number followed by M, and
a twodigit number followed by S)
NOTE 6 If the machining time is calculated erroneously, for example, by pressing the <reset> key during
program execution, calculate the correct machining time by reexecuting the program. When
two or more machining times are displayed for a program on the machining time display screen,
the latest machining time is inserted in the program.
195
9.16 Simple Conversational Programming

This function helps the user to develop an NC machining program by selecting menu items displayed on the
CRT screen and entering data according to menu screens, instead of by programming in the NC format. For
example, the screen displays menu items such as the position and depth of drilling. The user can create a
program simply by entering desired values in response to the menu items.
For detailed information about this function, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder.
NOTE This function can only be used with the 9 CRT/MDI, not with the 14 CRT/MDI.
This section first explains the procedure by which users create a program using this function. This section then
explains the procedure for machine tool builders to create a machining menu incorporating their proprietary
machining expertise by using tools such as custom macros, and thus to implement their own conversational
functions.
(1) Outline of simple conversational programming
1 Select the part program storage and edit mode (EDIT).
2 Select the simple conversational schedule screen.
Schedule machining by selecting machining menu

items in the order of machining.
3 Select the simple conversational data input screen.
Enter data for each machining menu item.
4 Select the memory command mode. Execute the machining program.
196
(2) Configuration of simple conversational programming

Programs that can be developed by simple conversational programming, (hereafter referred to as simple
conversational programs,) are configured as follows.
(a) Number of programs
Up to four simple conversational programs can be held in memory.
(b) Number of blocks
Each simple conversational program can contain 16 blocks.
Each machining menu item prepared by a machine tool builder constitutes one block. This block can
be considered as being equivalent to an NCformat program block starting and ending with EOB
codes.
(c) Number of words
Each block can contain up to 16 words.
Each machining menu item requires several data input items for machining. Suppose that data items
such as hole depth and spindle speed are provided for the menu item, tapping. In this case, each data
item constitutes one word. This word can be considered as being equivalent to an NCformat program
word such as X or Y.
04
03
02
01
MENU PROGRAM
N01 INITIAL SET

N02 DRILLING
N03 BOLT HOLE CIRCLE
N04 TAPPING
.. ........
.. ........ N04 TAPPING
N015 END PROGRAM

N016 01 DEPTH =

02 SPINDLE RPM =

..
..
15 =
16 =
197
(3) Simple conversational schedule screen

Select the part program storage and edit mode (EDIT) and press the soft key <MNU_PRG>. Then, the
simple conversational schedule screen shown below appears. The righthand side of the screen displays
a menu listing drilling, tapping, and so forth. To schedule the machining, select from the menu those items
that are required for machining in the order of machining.
Simple conversational
program number
Block numbers Machining menu
(a) Program selection

Enter a number from 1 to 4 to select the desired simple conversational program, then press the soft
key <SRC_PRG>.
Example When the simple conversational program having number 01 is currently selected, and the
program having number 02 is to be selected
(Operation 1)
1 Enter 2, then press the soft key <SRC_PRG>.
INSERT DELETE SRC-PRG BLK-DAT
(Operation 2)
1 Press the soft key SRC_PRG.
2 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <NXT_PRG>.
(PROG#) NXT-PRG
(Operation 3)
1 Press the soft key <SRC_PRG>.
2 Enter 2.
3 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <EXEC>.
EXEC
198
(b) Block selection

Each simple conversational program can contain up to 16 blocks. The blocks are numbered N01,
N02, ..., N16 in the order of machining. A block is currently selected when the cursor is placed over
the block. The desired block is selected by pressing the cursor keys <> or <>.
One screen displays the first eight blocks (block numbers N01 to N08) and the other screen displays
the last eight blocks (block numbers N09 to N16). To change screens, position the cursor at the last
block on the screen (N08 or N16) and press the cursor key <>. The other screen appears with the
cursor positioned at the first block (N09 or N01). Alternatively, position the cursor at the first block on
the screen (N01 or N09) and press the cursor key <>. The other screen appears with the cursor
positioned at the last block (N08 or N16).
The screen can also be switched using the page keys <> or <>. (On the compact 9 CRT/MDI, press
the cursor keys <> and <> at the same time, or press <> and <> at the same time.)
(c) Positioning the cursor at the first block
When the <reset> key is pressed, the cursor moves to the first block (N01) regardless of on which
block number the cursor is positioned.
(d) Machining menu display
Up to 16 machining menu items can be set. The number of prepared menu items depends on the ma-
chine tool builder. Each menu item is numbered. Menu item numbers 01 to 08 are displayed on one
screen and menu item numbers 09 to 16 are displayed on another screen. The screens are switched
using the <> and <> keys.
(e) Block editing
(i) Deletion of all blocks
1 Press the soft key <DELETE>.

2 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <ALL>.

3 The contents of all blocks from numbers 01 to 16 are deleted, and the blocks become empty.
(ii) Deletion of one block
1 Move the cursor to the block to be deleted.
2 Press the soft key <DELETE>.

3 The soft key display changes as shown below. Press <THIS>.

4 The contents of the block where the cursor is positioned are deleted. Subsequent blocks are
shifted upward by one block.
199
(iii) Insertion of one block

1 Move the cursor to a block where the new block is to be inserted.
2 Enter the machining menu item number to be inserted using the numeric keys.
3 Press the soft key <INSERT>.

4 When the block where the cursor is positioned contains no data, the machining menu item
entered in step (2) is set in the block.
When the block where the cursor is placed already has a machining menu item set, that block
and subsequent blocks are shifted backward by one block. The machining menu item en-
tered in step (2) is then set in the block.
When a machining menu item number is entered in step (2), the cursor position remains un-
changed if the machining menu item is not followed by an EOB code. If an EOB code is en-
tered after the machining menu item number, the cursor moves to the next block after block
insertion.
200
(iv) Insertion of two or more blocks

1 Move the cursor to the block where new blocks are to be inserted.
2 Enter the machining menu item numbers to be inserted in the desired order.
Separate each machining menu item number with an EOB code. To insert machining menu
item numbers 01, 03, and 07 successively in that order, for example, enter 01 EOB 03 EOB
07. When the last number is not followed by an EOB code, the cursor is positioned over the
last block inserted. When the last number is followed by an EOB code, the cursor is posi-
tioned over the block immediately after the last block inserted.
3 Press the soft key <INSERT>.

4 If no machining menu item is set in the block at which the cursor is positioned or in any subse-
quent blocks, the machining menu items entered in step (2) are set successively starting at
the first empty block.
When a machining menu item is already set in the block where the cursor is positioned or in
any subsequent blocks, that block and the subsequent blocks are shifted backward by the
number of inserted blocks. Then, the machining menu items entered in step (2) are set
successively starting at the block where the cursor is positioned.
201
(v) Block replacement

When a block already containing a machining menu item is to be replaced with another machining
menu item, use the procedure below.
1 Move the cursor to the block that is to be replaced.
2 First, delete the block according to the procedure in item (ii) above.
3 Then, enter a new machining menu item number, and insert the menu item at the block ac-
cording to the procedure in item (iii) above.
Example Change the machining menu item in block number N03 from 06:BOLT HOLE CIRCLE to
07:LINE AT ANGLE.
(1) Position the cursor over block number N03.
Press the soft key <DELETE>, then press
the soft key <THIS>.
(2) Enter 07, then press the soft key <INSERT>.
(3) The machining menu item of block number

N03 has been changed.
202
(4) Simple conversational data input screen

The simple conversational data input screen is used to enter data for each machining menu item set on
the simple conversational schedule screen.
(a) Switch to the simple conversational data input screen
One of two methods can be used. One method sets all required machining menu items at a time in
the order of machining on the simple conversational schedule screen, then enters data for the machin-
ing menu items. The other method sets one machining menu item at a time on the simple conversa-
tional schedule screen, then enters data for that machining menu item. This step is repeated for all
machining menu items.
In both methods, the procedure below is used to switch from the simple conversational schedule
screen to the simple conversational data input screen.
1 On the simple conversational schedule screen, place the cursor over the block containing the ma-
chining menu item for which data is to be entered. Then, press the soft key <BLKDAT>.
2 The simple conversational data input screen for the machining menu item of the block appears.
Simple Conversational Data Input Screen

(b) Data menu item selection
Each machining menu item allows up to 16 data menu items to be set. The number of data menu items
depends on the machining menu item and the specifications laid down by each machine tool builder.
The cursor is positioned over the data field of the currently selected data menu item, indicating that
data can be entered in that field. The desired data menu item can then be selected using the cursor
keys <> or <>.
One screen can display eight data menu items, numbered from 01 to 08. Data menu items numbered
from 09 to 16 are displayed on another screen. When a data menu item on the next screen is selected
with the cursor keys, the screen display is automatically changed. The screen display can also be
switched using the page keys.
203
(c) Data input

1 Move the cursor to the data menu
item for which data is to be entered.
Enter a numeric value, then press the
soft key <INPUT>.
2 Data is entered.
If the entered numeric value is not
followed by an EOB code, the cursor
position is not changed.
If the entered numeric value is followed
by an EOB code, the cursor moves
to the next data menu item.
Multiple data items can be entered at a time. In this case, separate the data items with EOB codes.
When the soft key <EMPTY> is pressed for a data menu item for which data has been entered,
the data input field is cleared.
(d) Return to the simple conversational schedule screen

After entering all data required for a machining menu item, press the soft key <END> to return to the
simple conversational schedule screen.
Simple Conversational Data Input Screen Simple Conversational Schedule Screen
204
(5) Simple conversational program execution

1 Select the simple conversational program to be executed according to the procedure in item (3)(a) in
this section.
2 Select the memory command mode.
3 Turn on the switch for menu program operation on the machine operators panel.
4 Turn on the <start> button on the machine operators panel to start operation.
NOTE Steps 3 and 4 may vary according to the machine. Refer to the relevant manual of each
machine tool builder.
(6) Menu registration

The function of simple conversational programming is basically implemented with custom macros and so
forth prepared by the machine tool builder. The machine tool builder determines required machining menu
items and the required data menu items. The procedure for the machine tool builder to perform simple
conversational programming is described below.
First, the procedure of registering machining menu items and data menu items is explained.
The G10 function (programmable data input function) is used to register machining menu items and data
menu items. A program for registering menu item names must be created as indicated below. By execut-
ing this program, the menu item names are stored in the memory of the control unit. In subsequent opera-
tion, the machining menu items and data menu items are displayed according to this program.
O9859 ;
G10L60P01 ( INITIAL SET ) ; Registration of the machining menu item INITIAL SET, and its data
menu items
G10L61P01Q01 ( Z SAFETY LIMIT ) ;
G10L61P01Q02 ( X START POINT ) ;
G10L61P01Q03 ( Y START POINT ) ;
G10L61P01Q04 ( Z START POINT ) ;
G10L60P02 ( DRILLING ) ; Registration of the machining menu item DRILLING, and its data
menu items
G10L61P02Q01 ( WORK SURFACE ) ;
G10L61P02Q02 ( DRILL DEPTH ) ;

G10L61P02Q ( ) ;
G10L60P03 ( TAPPING ) ; Registration of the machining menu item TAPPING, and its data
menu items
G10L61P03Q01 ( WORK SURFACE ) ;
G10L61P03Q02 ( DRILL DEPTH ) ;

G10L61P03Q ( ) ;

M30 ;
205
(a) Machining menu item registration

A machining menu item is registered using the following command:
G10L60P02 (DRILLING)
Machining menu item name (not exceeding 16 characters)
Machining menu item number (01 to 16)
(b) Data menu item registration

A data menu item is registered using the following command:
G10L61P02 Q01 (WORK SURFACE)
Data menu item name (not exceeding 16 characters)

Data menu item number (01 to 16)
Machining menu item number (01 to 16)
(c) Specification of menu item names

There are several ways to specify the character strings defining machining menu item names and data
menu item names.
(i) Alphanumeric characters, hyphens (), periods (.), and spaces
Uppercase letters (A to Z), numeric characters (0 to 9), hyphens, periods, and spaces can be di-
rectly entered.
Example G10L60P (FANUC)
(ii) Katakana and special symbols
Katakana characters and the special symbols that cannot be directly entered can be specified
using internal codes. The characters included in the internal code list below can be specified.
Specify a string of internal codes, each code consisting of two hexadecimal characters, between
two at marks (@).
Example G10L60P (@ CC A7 C5 AF B8 @);
is displayed.
(iii) Kanji and hiragana
Kanji and hiragana characters that cannot be directly entered can be specified using internal
codes.
The characters included in the internal code list for kanji and hiragana characters in Appendix 8
can be specified. Specify a string of internal codes, each code consisting of four hexadecimal
characters, between two at marks (@).
Example G10L60P (@8177 646A 822E 8559@);
is displayed.
An internal code starting with a character from 6 to 8 is assumed to be an internal code for
a hiragana character.
When counting the number of kanji or hiragana characters, treat one character as two alpha-
numeric characters.
206
Internal code list
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 0 0 0 0 @ P
0 0 0 1 1 ! 1 A Q
0 0 1 0 2 2 B R
0 0 1 1 3 # 3 C S
0 1 0 0 4 $ 4 D T
0 1 0 1 5 % 5 E U
0 1 1 0 6 & 6 F V
1 1 1 1 7 7 G W
1 0 0 0 8 ( 8 H X
1 0 0 1 9 ) 9 I Y
1 0 1 0 A * : J Z
1 0 1 1 B + ; K [
1 1 0 0 C , < L
1 1 0 1 D = M ]
1 1 1 0 E . > N ^
1 1 1 1 F / ? O _
207
(7) Procedure for executing simple conversational programs

To develop programs for machining workpieces, the programmer selects the required items from a pre-
pared machining menu in the order of machining. The programmer then enters data for each item, and
starts operation. The workpiece needs to be machined in the programmed sequence and according to
the entered data. For this purpose, a program such as that indicated below is developed and stored in
memory. This program serves as a main program for simple conversational program execution.
O9240 ;
N1 #6091 = 01 ;
N2 1F[#6000 EQ 0] GOTO 7 ;
N3 M98 P[#6000 +9500] ;
N4 #6091 = #6091 +1 ;
N5 1F[#6091 GT 16] GOTO 7 ;
N6 GOTO 2 ;
N7 M30 ;
The main program above includes two new custom macro system variables. These system variables are
explained below together with the specification of each block.
(a) Block N1
System variable #6091 is used to specify the block number of a simple conversational program. Block
N1 specifies 01 as the current block number of the simple conversational program. In addition, when
a numeric value is assigned to #6091 by specifying #6091 = n, the number of the machining menu
item set with the specified block number of the menu program is substituted into system variable
#6000. Furthermore, the 16 data menu items entered for the machining menu item of that block num-
ber are substituted into system variables #6001 to #6016.
In other words, system variable #6000 identifies the machining menu item of the block number speci-
fied by #6091, and #6001 to #6016 identify the contents of the data menu items. If a block number
specified by #6091 has no machining menu item set, 0 is set in #6000 and null characters are set in
#6001 to #6016 for the data menu items that have no values set.
(b) Block N2
If the specified block number has no machining menu item set, this block branches control to block
N7 to terminate execution.
(c) Block N3
This block calls a subprogram with the M98 command. The called program equals 9500 plus the ma-
chining menu item number. Suppose that the following machining menu has been created.
01: INITIAL SET
02: DRILLING
03: TAPPING
04: BORING

Machining menu item name
Machining menu item number
208
If the specified block number has the machining menu item (tapping) set, the value of #6000 is 03.
Therefore, program number O9503 is called. This means that a program for the machining menu item
(tapping) must already have been created having program number O9503. In other words, when the
example of the machining menu above is used, the machine tool builder needs to create programs
having the following program numbers for the machining menu items in advance:
O9501 : Program for INITIAL SETTING
O9502 : Program for DRILLING
O9503 : Program for TAPPING
O9504 : Program for BORING

When a program for a machining menu item is called, the contents of the data menu items are as-
signed to system variables #9001 to #9016. Therefore, the created program needs to be able to per-
form the desired machining by referencing #6001 to #6016. A program for a machining menu item
can include conventional custom macro common variables. In general, a program for a machining
menu item ends with M99 to return to the main program.
(d) Block N4
When the machining menu item of the specified block number has been executed, operation needs
to proceed to the machining menu item of the next block number. For this purpose, block N4 incre-
ments system variable #6001 by 1 to proceed to the next block number.
(e) Block N5
If the specified block number exceeds 16, this block branches control to block N7 to terminate execu-
tion.
(f) Block N6
This block returns control to block N2 to repeat execution for the next block number.
(g) Block N7
This block marks the end of the program.
When the operator executes a simple conversational program, the main program (09420 in the exam-
ple above) for executing the simple conversational program is first executed, then the programs devel-
oped by the machine tool builder for machining menu items are called for machining.
To execute a simple conversational program, the program for executing it must be selected as the
main program in memory operation. If another program is selected as the main program in memory
operation, only the selected program is executed. The simple conversational program is not
executed.
For this reason, it is necessary to provide a switch on the machine operators panel for simple con-
versational program operation. When the switch is turned on, the system starts memory operation
after searching for the program number of the main program for executing a desired simple conversa-
tional program by using the function of workpiece number search or external data input.
(8) Additional custom macro system variables
As mentioned in Item (7) above, some custom macro system variables have been added for simple con-
versational programs. The table below summarizes the system variables.
System variable Function

Holds the number of the machining menu item set with
#6000
the block number held in #6091.
Hold values set for the 16 data menu items for the
machining menu item of the block number held in
#6001A#6016
#6091. (The data menu item number matches the
lower two digits of the corresponding system variable.)
#6091 Specifies a block number.
209
10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA B62564E1/02
10.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
10.1 Offset Values
10.1.1 Display and setting

Turn on the data protection key (KEY1) when setting the offset values.
1 Press the <function menu> key.
2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key.
Either of the following screens is displayed:

210
B62564E1/02 10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA
Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFF-

SET> soft key to switch between the
screens.
9" CRT unit
Switching between the screens can
also be performed in the following
way:
Press the <CHAPTER> key to
change the soft keys to the chapter
selection keys.
Pressing the <TOOL> key displays <Function menu> key <Operation menu> key
the tool offset screen. <Soft> keys
3 Position the cursor on the desired off-
set number in either of the following
ways: 14" CRT unit
(1) Move the cursor to the desired
offset number using the page
keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys
( [] [] [] [] ).
(2) 1. Press the <operation menu>
key to change the soft keys to
the operation selection keys.
<Function menu> key <Operation menu> key
2. Press <INPNO.>, type the <Soft> keys
offset number to be displayed or
set, and press the <EXEC> key.
4 Press the <operation menu> key to 9" CRT function selection keys
change the soft keys to the operation POSITIONPROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +
selection keys.
5
To set the entered value as the offset 9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
value (absolute input) WEAR WRK.ZER
Press <INPUT>.
To add the entered value to the off-
set value already set (incremental in-
put) 9" CRT operation selection keys
INPUT +INPUT ORIGIN COUNTER INP-NO +
Press <+INPUT>.
6 Type the offset value.
To enter offset values for several
consecutive items at once, delimit
the values with the <EOB> key. 14" CRT function selection keys
POSI PROG OFF CHAPTE SETT ID CHAP
EOB (end of block) is represented by
TION RAM SET R ING SERRCH TER
; on the CRT.
Example: 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0
The cursor automatically proceeds 14" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
to the next item when ; is found. WORK
TOOL ZERO
(Same as when the cursor key [] is
pressed)
7 Pressing the <EXEC> key sets the
entered offset value in the offset 14" CRT operation selection keys
memory location pointed to by the INPUT +IN MEASURE PUNCH INOUT ALL
PUT NUMBER CLEAR
cursor. The soft keys are changed to
211
10.1.2 Clearing all tool offset values 9" CRT function selection keys
1 Press the <function menu> key to POSITIONPROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER

change the soft keys to the function +
selection keys.
2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFF- 9" CRT operation selection keys
SET> soft key. ALL-CLR PUNCH MEASURE
3 Press the <operation menu> key to

change the soft keys to the operation
selection keys.
9" CRT operation guide keys
4 Press the <ALLCLR> key to
change the soft keys to the operation ALL GEOMTRY WEAR
guidance keys.
5 To clear all tool offset values to 0,
press the <ALL> key. To clear all ge-
14" CRT function selection keys
ometry offset values to 0, press the
POSI PROG OFF PROGRAM SETT SERV MESSAG CHAP
<GEOM> key. To clear all tool wear TION RAM SET CHECK ING ICE E TER
offset values to 0, press the
<WEAR> key.
6 Pressing the <ALL>, <GEOM>, or
<WEAR> key clears the correspond- 14" CRT operation selection keys
INPUT +IN MEASURE PUNCH INPUT ALL CHAP
ing tool offset values to 0. The soft PUT NUMBER CLEAR TER
keys are changed to the operation
selection keys.

ALL GEOMET WEAR
RY
212
10.2 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point

Turn on the data protection key (KEY1) when setting the offset values.
1 Press the <function menu> key.
One of the following screens is displayed:
(Tooloffset) (Standardworkpiece (Additionalworkpiece

coordinatesystem) coordinatesystem)
Pagekeys
OFFSET

OFFSET
213
Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFF- 9" CRT function selection keys
SET> soft key to switch between the POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +
screens.
Switching between the screens can
also be performed in the following 9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
way: WEAR WRK.ZER
Press the <CHAPTER> key to

change the soft keys to the chapter 9" CRT operation selection keys
selection keys.
INPUT +INPUT ORIGIN COUNTER INP-NO. +
Pressing the <WRK.ZER> key dis-
plays the screen for the offset from
the workpiece reference point.
3 Position the cursor on the desired off-
ways:
POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE
(1) Move the cursor to the desired ON M CHECK G E E R
offset number using the page

keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys
14" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
( [] [] [] [] ).
TOOL WORK
(2) 1. Press the <operation menu> ZERO
key to change the soft keys to

2. Press <INPNO.>, type the INPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL_INP INPUT PUNCH CHAPTE
number of the workpiece coordi- NUMBER R
nate system to be displayed or

set (0: Workpiece coordinate
system to be specified external-
ly, 1 to 6: Workpiece coordinate
systems corresponding to G54
to G59), and press the <EXEC>
key.
4 Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
5
To set the entered value as the offset To add the entered value to the off-
value (absolute input) Press <IN- set value already set (incremental in-
PUT>. put) Press <+INPUT>.
6 Type the offset value.
To enter offset values for several consecutive items at once, delimit the values with the <EOB> key.
The EOB (end of block) is represented by ; on the CRT.
Example: 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0
The cursor automatically proceeds to the next item when ; is found. (Same as when the cursor key []
is pressed)
7 Pressing the <EXEC> key sets the entered offset value in the offset memory location pointed to by the cur-
sor. The soft keys are changed to the operation selection keys.
(1) Select the displayed axis in workpiece zero point offset setting menu screen
On the workpiece zero point offset setting menu, axes can be specified separately for a display of the offset
to be specified, using a parameter. The offset can be specified only for these axes on the workpiece coordi-
nate setting menu.
The same parameter is also used to select axes for a display on the workpiece zero point offset setting
menu of the multi-submenus.
214
Example In a configuration with the X-, Y-, A-, and B-axes, to omit the A-and B-axis displays, specify
with bit 4 of parameter No. 1009 as follows: X=0, Y=0, A=1, B=1, Z=0
With this setting, the A-and B-axes will not be displayed on the workpiece offset setting menu.
(Shown below is an example of displays on the 9-inch CRT.)
WORK ZERO OFFSET O1234 N00000

NO. 00 (COMMOM) NO. 02 (G55)
X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
NO. 01 (G54) NO. 03 (G56)

X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
(MM)
MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 12:40:15 LSK
Example of displays on the 9-inch CRT
215
10.3 Settings
There are two types of data to be set here. Turn on the data protection key (KEY2) when setting data.
(1) Data related to input/output
(2) Parameters set by the user
1 Enter the MDI mode.
2 Press the <function menu> key to change the soft keys to the function selection keys.
3 Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times.
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER +
SETTING
9" CRT SETTING chapter selectionkeys
HANDY GENERAL OP.PANEL MACRO

SETTING SETTING
ON M CHECK G E E R
14" CRT SETTING chapter selection keys

HANDY GENE OPERAT MACRO TOOL CHAPTE
REL PANEL VAR. LIFE R
SETTING
There are two ways to display the setting screen.

(i) Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times until the setting screen is dis-
played.
(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.
a) To display data related to input/output
Press the <HANDY> key.
b) To display the parameters that can be set by the user
Press the <GENERAL> key.
216
For data related to input/output For parameters that can be set by the user
4 Move the cursor to the item to be Position the cursor on the parameter number to be set in either
set using the cursor keys ( [] of the following ways:
[] ). a) Move the cursor to the desired parameter number using the
page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] [] [] ).
b)
i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft
keys to the operation selection keys.
ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the parameter number to be
displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key.
5 Press the <operation menu> key. 9" CRT operation selection keys
(when the <GENERAL>key is pressed)
6 Set data in either of the following
ways: INPUT +INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP-NO. +
a) To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key. 9" CRT operation selection keys
To set 0, press the <OFF: 0> key. (when the <HANDY> key is pressed)
b) To set data other than 1 or 0: INPUT +INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP_NO. +
i) Press the <INPUT> key.

ii) Type the data to be set. To (when the <GENERAL> key is pressed)
enter values for several con- INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT CHAPTE
secutive parameters at PUT NUMBER R
once, delimit the values with 14" CRT operation selection keys
the <EOB> key. (when the <HANDY> key is pressed)
Example 100 ;200 ;300 INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT CHAPTE
PUT NUMBER R
The cursor automatically
proceeds to the next param-
eter when ; is found.
iii) Press the <EXEC> key.
217
10.4 Custom Macro Variables

Local variables, group 1 common variables, and group 2 common variables can be displayed.
Group 1 common variables and group 2 common variables can be set.
#1 to #33: Local variables
#100 to #199: Group 1 common variables (Common variables whose values are not retained when the
power is turned off)
#500 to #699: Group 2 common variables (Common variables whose values are retained when the power
is turned off)
1 Enter the MDI mode.
3 Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times.

SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER
SETTING


ON M CHECK G E E R
SETTING SETTING

HANDY GENERA OPERAT MACRO TOO CHAPTE
L PANEL VAR. LIFE R
SETTING
There are two ways to display the macro variables screen.

(i) Press the <SETTING> key or <SETTING> soft key several times until the macro variables screen is
displayed.
(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press the MAC-
RO key.
4 Position the cursor on the macro variable number to be set in either of the following ways:
a) Move the cursor to the desired macro variable number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys
( [] [] ).
b)
i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the macro variable number to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC>
key.
INPUT +INPUT ALL-CLR EMPTY INP-NO. +

IN +IN ALL INPUT INPUT CHAPTE
PUNCH
PUT PUT CLEAR EMPTY NUMBER R
218
6 To set the entered val- To add the entered value to To set a null value in To clear the variable values
ue as the variable value the variable value already set the variable
(absolute input) (incremental input)
(6) 1 Press <INPUT> (6) 1 Press <+INPUT>. Press the Press the <ALLCLR> key
and type the variable val- (6) 2 Type the incre- <EMPTY> key. to change the soft keys to
ue.(To enter values for sev- ment and press the <EXEC> the operation guidance
eral consecutive variables key. keys.
at once, delimit the values To clear all group 1 and
with the <EOB> key group 2 common variables
Example 100.0 ;200.0 to 0, press the <ALL> key.
;300.0;400.0 To clear only the group 1
The cursor au-
common variables, press
tomatically
proceeds to the <COMMON 1> key.
the next vari- To clear only the group 2
able when ; is common variables, press
found.) the <COMMON 2> key.
(6) 2 Press the
The soft keys are changed
<EXEC> key.
to the operation selection
keys.
ALL COMMON 1 COMMON 2

COMMON COMMON
ALL
NONVOL VOL
NOTE UNDER FLOW is displayed when the value of a custom macro is in either of the following
ranges:
0 < Macro variable value < +0.0000001: +UNDER FLOW

0 > Macro variable value > 0.0000001: UNDER FLOW
219
10.5 Read/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common Variables

The values and names of the common variables (#200 to #999) retained after the power is disconnected can
be output to an output device in custom macro statement form.
As shown in the following example, output is in program format. Variable data can be set by executing this pro-
gram.
Example %
;
#500=25600*65536/16777216; . . . . . . For a normal value
#501=#0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the value is empty
#502=0; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When the value is 0
#503= .....................;
.............................;
SETVN500[ABC,DEF,,,...] ; . . . . . . . . . For variable names
M2;
%
When this custom macro statement program is executed, values and names are set for the common variables.
As shown in #500 in the above example, the values of variables are generally expressed as mathematical ex-
pressions. Since macro variables are handled in floatingpoint form in the control unit, such mathematical ex-
pressions are used to accurately express the values stored internally. The user need not by concerned with
this format.
(1) Outputting the values and names of common variables
1 Press the function menu key to display the function selection keys as soft keys.
2 Press the <SETTING> key several times until the screen for outputting the values of custom macro
variables appears.
An alternate method is to press the <CHAPTER> key to display chapter selection soft keys, then press
the <MACRO> key.
3 Press the operation menu key several times until the <PUNCH> soft key appears.
4 Press the <PUNCH> key to display operation guidance soft keys.
5 Press the <COMMON NONVOL> key. (For 9inch CRT display, press the <COMMON2> key.)
6 The values and names of common variables are output to the output unit selected in the foreground,
and the <STOP> soft key is displayed.
7 To stop outputting common variable values and their names, press the <STOP. key. Once the
<STOP> key is pressed, output of the remaining common variable values and names cannot be re-
sumed. To perform output again, return to step 3.
8 When all the values and names of common variables have been output, the operation selection soft
keys are displayed again.
Function selection keys on a 9-inch CRT display
1, 2 SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE CHAPTER
Chapter selection keys displayed by pressing

SETTING on a 9-inch CRT display
2 HANDY GENERAL MACRO
Operation selection keys displayed by pressing

MACRO on a 9-inch CRT display
3, 4 PANCH
220
Operation guidance keys (PUNCH) on a 9-inch CRT display
5 COMMON2 (FILE#)
6, 7 STOP NOFEED
Function selection keys on the 14-inch CRT display
POSI PRO OFF PRO SET SER MES CHAP

GRAM
1, 2 TION GRAM SET CHECK
TING VICE SAGE TER
Chapter selection keys displayed by pressing

SETTING on the 14-inch CRT display
HAN GEN MACRO CHAP
2 TIME
DY ERAL VAR. TER
Operation selection keys displayed by pressing

MACRO on the 14-inch CRT display
INPUT
IN IN ALL INPUT PUN CHAP
3, 4 NUM
PUT PUT+ CLEAR EMPTY CH TER
BER
Operation guidance keys (PUNCH) on the 14-inch CRT display

COM (FILE
5 MON
NONVOL #)
NO
6, 7 STOP
FEED
The values and names of the common variables can be output in any mode as long as automatic operation
is in the stopped state.
When the values and names of the common variables are output to a FANUC floppy disk, the file name in the
file list is COMMON.NONVOL.
(2) Inputting the values and names of common variables
Input the values and names of the common variables using one of the following methods:
(i) The output of the values and names of common variables is read as a program in the edit mode, then
the program is executed in the memory mode.
1 Before registering the program in memory, perform steps (1) to (6).
(1) Select the EDIT mode.
(2) Display the program screen using the soft keys.
(3) Press the operation menu key to display the READ soft key.
(4) Press the READ soft key.
(5) Press (FILE#), and enter the file number. (Search for the file storing the program was output
to the FANUC disk.)
(6) Press (PROG#), enter a program number, then press EXEC.
The program number can be any number that is not currently being used.
221
2 After the above input operation is completed, the program created by outputting the values and
names of the common variables is displayed on the screen.
3 Change the mode to memory mode. Press the cycle start button to execute the program. The
values and names of the common variables are then input to the custom macro memory area in
the CNC.
4 Select the screen for displaying custom macro variable data. Check the display to ensure that
the values and names of the common variables are set properly.
(ii) The program created by outputting the values and names of the common variables is executed in tape
mode to directly input the values and names.
1 Set the program tape in the tape reader.
2 Select the TAPE mode.
3 Press the cycle start button. The common variables and names are input to the custom macro
memory area in the CNC.
4 Select the screen for displaying custom macro variable data. Check the display to ensure that
the values and names of the common variables are set properly.
NOTE 1 If the write protect function (parameters 7031 and 7032) is enabled for common variables,
release the protection before inputting the values and names of the common variables.
NOTE 2 Variable names are output in the following format:
SETVN 500 [ , , , ... , ] ;
Variable Variable Variable Variable

name name name name
for #500 for #501 for #502 for #519
For macro variables which have no names, nothing is output.

Example Variable No. Variable name Variable No. Variable name
#500 ABC #510 TOOLPT
#501 COUNTER #511 (Not assigned)
#502 (Not assigned) #512 (Not assigned)
#503 POINTER #513 (Not assigned)
#508 START #518 (Not assigned)
When variables are named as shown above, these names are output in the following program
form:
SETVN 500 [ABC,COUNTER,,POINTER,,,,,START,,TOOLPT,,,,,,,,,, ] ;
222
10.6 Parameters
Parameters are used for adjusting the CNC according to the characteristics and functions of motors or ma-
chines connected to the CNC. The settings of the parameters depend on the machine. Setting parameters
incorrectly may cause the machine to malfunction. Generally, the user must not change the parameters.
2 Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key.
9" CRT SERVICE chapter selection keys

PARAM PITCH DIAGNOS DSP.MEM CHAPTER

ON M CHECK G E E R

PARA PITCH DIAG DISPLAY CHAPTE
MATER ERROR NOSIS MEMORY R
When the parameter screen is not displayed, there are two ways to display the parameter screen.
(i) Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key several times until the parameter screen is dis-
played.
(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press <PA-
RAM>.
3 Position the cursor on the parameter number to be set in either of the following ways:
a) Move the cursor to the desired parameter number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( []
[] ).
b)
i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the parameter number to be displayed or set, and press the <EXEC> key.
This completes the operation for displaying a parameter. To set a parameter, follow the steps be-
low.
4 Enter the MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button to enter the emergency stop state.
5 Set 1 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to enable the setting of parameters. See section 10.3 for how
to set the parameters.
6 Set data in either of the following 9" CRT operation selection keys
ways:
INPUT + INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP-NO.
a) To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key.
To set 0, press the <OFF: 0>
key.
INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT READ PUNCH CHAPTE
b) To set data other than 1 and 0, PUT NUMBER R
press the <operation menu> key

to change the soft keys to the op-
eration selection keys.
223
To set the entered value as the parameter value To add the entered value to the parameter value
(absolute input) already set (incremental input)
6 1 Press <INPUT> and type the parameter 6 1 Press <+INPUT>.
value. 6 2 Type the increment and press the
(To enter values for several consecutive <EXEC> key.
parameters at once, delimit the values
with the <EOB> key.
Example 100.0 ;200.0 ;300.0 ;400.0
The cursor automatically proceeds
to the next parameter when ; is
found.)
6 2 Press the <EXEC> key.
7 When the setting of parameters is completed, set 0 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000, to disable setting
of parameters.
224
10.7 Pitch Error Compensation Data

Pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the machines connected to the CNC.
The compensation data settings depend on the machine. Changing the settings reduces the precision of the
machine.
Generally, the user must not change pitch error compensation data.
2 Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key.


PARAM PITCH DIAGNOS DSP.MEM

ON M CHECK G E E R

PARA PITCH DIAG DISPLAY
MATER ERROR NOSIS MEMORY
When the screen for the pitch error compensation data is not displayed, there are two ways to display the
screen.
(i) Press the <SERVICE> key or <SERVICE> soft key several times until the screen for the pitch error
compensation data is displayed.
(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys and press <PITCH>.
3 Position the cursor on the number of the pitch error compensation data to be set in either of the following
ways:
a) Move the cursor to the number of the desired pitch error compensation data using the page keys ( []
[] ) or cursor keys ( [] [] ).
b) i) Press the <operation menu> key to change the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the number of the pitch error compensation data to be displayed or set,
and press the <EXEC> key.
This completes the operation for displaying pitch error compensation data. To set pitch error com-
pensation data, follow the steps below.
4 Enter the MDI mode. Alternatively, press the emergency stop button to enter the emergency stop state.
5 Set 1 in bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to enable the setting of parameters. See section 10.3 for how to
set the parameters.
7 Press the <INPUT> key and type the compensation data.
(To enter values for several consecutive compensation data items at once, delimit the values with the
<EOB> key.
Example 1 ; 2 ; 3 ; 4 9" CRT operation selection keys
The cursor automatically proceeds INPUT + INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 INP-NO
to the next compensation data item
when ; is found.)
8 Press the EXEC key.
9 When the setting of pitch error com- 14" CRT operation selection keys
pensation data is completed, set 0 in INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT READ PUNCH
PUT NUMBER
bit PWE of parameter No. 8000 to en-
able the setting of parameters.
225
For bidirectional pitch error compensation, another 1280 points (10000 to 11279) can be used for pitch
error compensation data, in addition to the conventional 1280 points. The data for the additional points
can be exchanged with an external device, modified using G10, and input/output using the PMC window,
in the same way as conventional data.
226
10.8 Data Protection Key

Data protection keys can be installed on the machine to protect data in the CNC. The following three keys are
available according to the type of the data to be protected:
(1) KEY1
Enables and disables entering tool offset values and offset values from the workpiece reference point.
(2) KEY2
Enables and disables entering data on the setting screen and presetting the absolute coordinates.
(3) KEY3
Enables and disables entering and editing part programs.
See the manual issued by the machine tool builder for the installed keys and their locations on the machine.
227
10.9 Measuring the Tool Length

(1) When the tool offset function using tool numbers is not provided
Either of the following screens is displayed:
POSITIONPROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +
OFFSET

ON M CHECK G E E R
OFFSET
Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key to switch between the screens.
Switching between the screens can also be performed in the following way:
Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.
Pressing the <TOOL> key displays the tool offset screen.
3 Position the cursor on the desired off- 9" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
two ways: WEAR WRK.ZER
(a) Move the cursor to the desired off-

set number using the page keys
( [] [] ) or cursor keys ([] [] []
INPUT +INPUT ORIGIN COUNTER INP-NO. +
[] ).
(b)
(i) Press the <operation menu>
key to change the soft keys to ALL-AXS (AXIS)

(ii) Press <INPNO.>, type the 14" CRT OFFSET chapter selection keys
offset number to be displayed TOOL WORK
or set, and press the ZERO
<EXEC> key.
4 Press the <MEASURE> key and type
the name of the axis along which the INPU +IN MEASURE PUNCH INPUT ALL CHAPTE
T PUT NUMBER CLEAR R
tool length is to be measured.
5 Press the <SELECT> key. The axis 14" CRT operation guide keys
specified in 4 is effective until a new
ALL- (AXIS)
axis is specified. AXS
6 Select the reference tool and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for measuring
the tool length.
7 Press the <MEASURE> key.
8 Press the <ORIGIN> key to clear the counter to 0. The soft keys are changed to the operation guid-
ance keys.
9 Select the tool to be measured and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for mea-
suring the tool length.
The offset (difference between the traveled distance of the reference tool and that of the tool to be mea-
sured) is displayed as the relative position.
10 Pressing the <MEASURE> key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.
228
11 Pressing the <INPUT> key sets the offset displayed as the relative position in the memory location
pointed to by the cursor.
12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 for each tool to be measured.
CAUTION Bit LXY in parameter No. 6000, specifies that tool length compensation is always performed
along the Z axis. If this bit is set to 0, the Z axis is set as the axis along which the tool length
is measured when the power is turned on.
(2) When the tool offset function using tool numbers is provided
2 Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key. Either of the following screens is displayed:
OFFSET OFFSET
OFFSET

POSI PRO OFF PRGRAM SET SER MES CHAP
TION GRAM SET CHECK TING VICE SAGE TER
Press the <OFFSET> key or <OFFSET> soft key to switch between screens.
Switching between screens can also be performed in the following way:
Press the <CHAPTER> key to change the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.
Pressing the <TL.DATA> key displays the screen for the tool offset function using tool numbers.
229
3 Move the cursor to the desired offset number using the page keys ( [] [] ) or cursor keys ( [] []
[] [] ).
4 Press the <MEASURE> key and type the name of the axis along which the tool length is to be mea-
sured.
5 Press the <SELECT> key. The axis specified in 4 is effective until a new axis is specified.
WEAR WRK.ZER TL.DATA
PUNCH MEASURE
INPUT ORIGIN (AXIS)

WORK MEAS_ TOOL
TOOL
ZERO TL DATA

DE SEAR MEA CHAP
INPUT INSERT PUNCH
LETE CH SURE TER
INPUT ORIGIN (AXIS)
6 Select the reference tool and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for measuring
the tool length.
7 Press the <MEASURE> key.
8 Press the <ORIGIN> key to clear the counter to 0. The soft keys are changed to the operation guide
keys.
9 Select the tool to be measured and manually move the tool until it stops at the reference point for mea-
suring the tool length.
The offset (difference between the traveled distance of the reference tool and that of the tool to be mea-
sured) is displayed as the relative position.
10 Pressing the <MEASURE> key changes the soft keys to the operation guidance keys.
11 Pressing the <INPUT> key sets the offset displayed as the relative position in the memory location
pointed to by the cursor.
12 Repeat steps 9 to 11 for each tool to be measured.
230
10.10 Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Workpiece Reference

Position
10.10.1 Class B measurement of the tool length

The procedures for class B measurement of the tool length are simplified, enabling the tool length to be mea-
sured easier and in a shorter time than using the general measurement procedure.
The tool length compensation value is generally defined using the two methods described below. The basic
idea, however, is the same: The difference between the coordinate at the tip of a tool and that at the tip of the
reference tool is defined as the tool length compensation value.
(1) Method 1
Method 1 uses the actual tool length as the tool length compensation value. The reference tool in this meth-
od is a virtual tool whose tip has the same Z coordinate as the machine zero point when the machine is
at the machine zero point. The tool length compensation value is the difference between the Z coordinate
of the tip of each tool and that of the tip of the reference tool, that is, the distance measured along the Z
axis from the machine zero point to the tip of each tool when the machine is at the machine zero point.
Reference tool
Tool Tool Tool
Machine zero point T01 T02 T03
(Z coordinate of the
tip of the reference tool)
OFSL01 OFSL03
OFSL02
OFSL01 : Tool length compensation value for tool T01

231
In class B measurement of the tool length, a tool is moved by manual feed until the tip of the tool touches
the top of the workpiece or reference block. This surface is called the measurement surface. The top of
the table on the machine cannot be actually used as the measurement surface because the table will be
damaged. Assume, however, that the top of the table is used. Distance L from the machine zero point
to the top of the table is a value specific to the machine. Set L in a parameter. If the Z coordinate of the
tool tip when it touches the top of the table (Zt) is known, the tool length compensation value OFSL can
be easily calculated from L and Zt. However, because the top of the table cannot be used as the measure-
ment surface, tool length compensation value OFSL is actually obtained in the following way: Define the
top of the table as the reference measurement surface and set the distance from the reference measure-
ment surface to the actual measurement surface, that is, the height of the workpiece or reference block
(Hm). OFSL is calculated using the formula shown below.
Machine zero point

(Z coordinate of the
tip of the reference tool) OFSL Tool OFSL Tool
01 T01
Zm
Zt Zm
L Measurement
surface
Measurement
surface
Workpiece Hm
Reference Reference
measurement block Hm
surface Table on the machine Table on the machine
L : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the reference measurement
surface (Z coordinate of the reference measurement surface in the machine coordinate system)
Hm : Distance from the reference measurement surface to the actual measurement surface
Zm : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the tool to be measured to the measurement surface
(Zt : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the tool to be measured to the reference
measurement surface)
OFSL : Tool length compensation value (OFSL = Zm - Hm - L)
This method of setting the actual tool length as the tool length compensation value has the advantage that
subsequent remeasurement is not necessary when the workpiece is changed, provided there is no wear.
Another advantage is as follows. When machining several workpieces at once, it is only necessary to as-
sign workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 to the workpieces and set the offset from each workpiece
reference position. Resetting the tool length compensation value is not necessary.
232
(2) Method 2
Method 2 uses the distance from the position of the tool tip when the machine is at the machine zero point
to the workpiece reference position as the tool length compensation value. The basic idea is the same
as in method 1: The difference between the length of a tool and that of the reference tool is defined as the
tool length compensation value. The reference tool in method 2, however, is a virtual tool whose tip has
the same Z coordinate as the workpiece reference position when the machine is at the machine zero point.
Machine
zero point
Tool
T01
Tool
Tool T03
T02
Reference
tool
OFSL01
OFSL03
OFSL02
Workpiece
reference
position
Workpiece

In this method, the reference measurement surface is a surface containing the workpiece reference posi-
tion. Because the tip of the reference tool is on the same surface, distance L from the tip of the reference
tool to the reference measurement surface is 0. Set 0 in the parameter for L. Generally, the actual mea-
surement surface is the same as the reference measurement surface containing the workpiece reference
position. When the top of the reference block is used as the measurement surface or the workpiece refer-
ence position is not on the top of the workpiece (for example, shifted from the top by the cutting allowance),
set the distance from the reference measurement surface to the actual measurement surface in Hm. Tool
length compensation value OFSL is calculated using the same formula as in method 1.
233
Machine
zero point Tool Tool
T01 T01
Zm
Zm OFSL
OFSL
Measurement
surface
Hm
Workpiece reference position
( reference measuremnt surface)
Hm
Workpiece
Reference
block
Table on the machine Table on the machine
L : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the
reference measurement surface (= 0)
Hm : Distance from the reference measurement surface to the
actual measurement surface
Zm : Distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the
tool to be measured tothe measurement surface
OFSL : Tool length compensation value(OFSL = Zm - Hm - L)
In method 2, the reference tool is a virtual tool whose tip has the same Z coordinate as the workpiece refer-
ence position when the machine is at the machine zero point. Therefore, it is generally necessary to mea-
sure the tool length compensation value again when the workpiece is changed. The same compensation
value, however, can be used by setting one of G54 to G59 to the distance along the Z axis between the
reference position for the new workpiece and that for the workpiece used when the compensation value
was measured as an offset value.
Thought of in another way, this method sets the offset from the workpiece reference position as the tool
length compensation value of each tool.
234
Procedures for measuring the tool length compensation value

1 Move the machine to the tool change position by manually returning to the reference position.
2 Select the manual handle feed or continuous manual feed mode.
3 Turn on the TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT switch on the operators panel on the machine. The con-
trol unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to that for measuring the tool length compensation
value, shown on the next page. The OFST status display blinks at the bottom of the screen to indicate that
the preparation for measuring the tool length compensation is completed.
The screen for measuring the tool length compensation value differs depending on the type of the tool com-
pensation memory. The screen for tool compensation memory A is shown on the next page. See Note
1 for tool compensation memory B and tool compensation memory C. In memory B, geometry compensa-
tion values and wear compensation values are stored separately. In memory C, geometry compensation
values and wear compensation values are stored separately, as are cutter compensation values and tool
length compensation values.
4 Set the distance between the reference measurement surface and actual measurement surface by enter-
ing the value with numeric keys and pressing the <HM_INP> soft key.
5 Select the tool whose length compensation value to be measured. When the screen for measuring the
tool length compensation value is selected and the OFST status display is blinking at the bottom of the
screen, T commands or M commands can be specified on this screen even in the manual handle feed or
continuous manual mode. Entering Ttttt and pressing the cycle start button on the machine operators pan-
el or CRT MDI panel executes the Ttttt program command and selects the tool to be measured. Generally,
enter M06 to move the tool to the position of the spindle. The tool whose length compensation value to
be measured is set at the position of the spindle. Position the cursor at the tool length compensation num-
ber assigned to the compensation value for the tool.
6 Move the tool by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the measurement surface
of the workpiece or reference block.
7 Press the <MEASURE> soft key. The tool length compensation value is set in tool compensation memory
according to the abovementioned formula. For tool compensation memory B or C, the tool length com-
pensation value is set as the tool geometry compensation value and 0 is set in the tool wear compensation
value. The cursor remains on the same tool compensation number. Pressing the <MEASUR+> soft key
automatically moves the cursor to the next number after setting is completed.
When the tool length compensation value is set, the tool automatically moves to the tool change position.
8 The procedure for measuring the tool length compensation value for a tool is now completed. Repeat the
operations from step 5 for each subsequent tool.
When the tool length compensation values for all the tools are measured, turn off the TOOL LENGTH COM-
PENSATION switch on the operators panel on the machine. When the switch is turned off, the OFST sta-
tus display at the bottom of the screen goes off.
235
NOTE 1
i. Screen for measuring the tool length compensation value for tool compensation memory B
ii. Screen for measuring the tool length compensation value for tool compensation memory C
NOTE 2 Generally, a tool is moved along the Z axis because a tool is mounted in parallel with the Z axis.
Some machines, however, has the W axis which is parallel with the Z axis. It may be convenient
for such machines to move a tool along the W axis for measuring the tool length compensation
value. There are also machines which have an attachment for mounting a tool in parallel with
an axis other than the Z axis. On such machines, the tool length compensation value can be
measured along an arbitrary axis. When the tool length compensation value can be measured
along an axis other than the Z axis, note the following:
Set the distance from the initial position of the tip of the reference tool to the reference
measurement surface (L) in a parameter for each axis along which it is possible to measure
the tool length compensation value, not only for the Z axis. The distance from the reference
measurement surface to the actual measurement surface (Hm) must be measured along each
axis. After moving the tool along an axis until it touches the workpiece or reference block, enter
the name of the axis before pressing the <MEASURE> or <MEASUR+> soft key. When
measuring along the W axis, for example, enter W before pressing the <MEASURE> or
<MEASUR+> soft key.
NOTE 3 The operator selects the tool length compensation number assigned to the compensation
value for the tool to be measured by positioning the cursor on the number. Some machines,
however, automatically position the cursor when the tool is selected. Refer to the manual
issued by the machine tool builder for details.
236
10.10.2 Class B measurement of the workpiece reference position

The offset from the workpiece reference position can be easily measured using the methods described in this
section. The offset from the workpiece reference position along the longitudinal tool axis (the Z axis) can also
be easily measured. The offset from the workpiece reference position along the X axis or Y axis can also be
easily measured whether the workpiece reference position is on a surface of the workpiece or at the center of
a machined hole.
(1) Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis
(a) Method 1
In method 1, the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is the distance
from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis.
Machine
zero point
OFSL Tool
OFSWG54
ZmG54 OFSWG55 ZmG55
Workpiece
Workpiece reference position
reference position (G55)
Workpiece(G55)
(G54) Workpiece(G54)
OFSL : Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference
position is measured
ZmG54 : Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position
of G54 when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL
OFSWG54 : Offset from the workpiece reference position of G54
OFSWG55 : Offset from the workpiece reference position of G55
The above figure shows that the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z
axis is calculated using the following formula:
OFSW = Zm OFSL
where
OFSW: Offset from the workpiece reference position
OFSL: Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference position
is measured
Zm: Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position when
measured with a tool whose length is OFSL
237
(b) Method 2
As mentioned previously, the tool length compensation value measured in method 2 equals the offset
from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis. The setting of the offset from the
workpiece reference position is therefore not necessary. The setting of the offset from the workpiece
reference position, however, can substitute for subsequently measuring the tool length compensation
value in the following case: When the workpiece is changed after the tool length compensation value
is measured for a workpiece or when workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 are assigned for ma-
chining several workpieces at once.
Machine
zero point
Tool
ZmG55
OFSL
Workpiece
reference position
(G55)
Workpiece
reference position OFSWG55
Workpiece(G55)
(G54)
Workpiece(G54)
OFSL : Tool length compensation value measured with workpiece G54

OFSWG55 : Offset from the workpiece reference position of G55 (The offset from the workpiece
reference position of G54 is 0.)
In method 2, the offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is calculated
using the same formula as in method 1.
OFSW = Zm OFSL
where
OFSW : Offset from the workpiece reference position
OFSL : Tool length compensation value when the offset from the workpiece reference position
is measured
Zm : Distance traveled from the machine zero point to the workpiece reference position
when measured with a tool whose length is OFSL
238
(2) Offset from the workpiece reference position measured along the X or Y axis
The offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis can be easily measured whether
the workpiece reference position is on a surface of the workpiece or at the center of a machined hole.
(a) When the workpiece reference position is on a surface
+Y
Workpiece
+X
Workpiece
Offset from the workpiece reference position
reference position measured
along the Y axis
Offset from the workpiece

reference position measured
Machine along the X axis
zero point
The above figure shows the case when the workpiece reference position is on a side of the workpiece.
The basic idea for measuring the offset along the X or Y axis with the workpiece reference position
on a surface of the workpiece is the same as for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference
position along the Z axis described in item (1). What is different is that the offset from the workpiece
reference position along the X or Y axis is measured considering the cutter diameter, whereas the off-
set along the Z axis is measured considering the tool length.
+Z
+X
Tool
Workpiece
OFSR
Xm
OFSW
Machine zero point Workpiece reference position
OFSR :Cutter compensation value when the offset from the workpiece
reference position is measured
Xm :Traveled distance from the machine zero point to the workpiece
reference position when measured with a tool whose length is OFSR
OFSW:Offset from the workpiece reference position
The above figure shows that the offset from the workpiece reference position measured is calcu-
lated with the following formula:
OFSW = Xm OFSR
Be careful of the sign of cutter compensation value OFSR.
The sign of OFSR is negative when the measurement surface is located in the positive direc-
tion from the center of the tool.
239
(b) When the workpiece reference position is at the center of a machined hole
+Y
Workpiece
+X
Offset from the workpiece

reference position measured Workpiece
along the Y axis reference position
Machine Offset from the workpiece

zero point reference position measured
along the X axis
The above figure shows the case when the workpiece reference position is at the center of a machined
hole in the workpiece. In this case, measure the positions of three points on the inside wall of the hole
using a measuring probe with a sensor on the tip. The three points uniquely define the circle on which
they lie, enabling the workpiece reference position for the X and Y axes to be determined as the center
of the circle.
+Z
Measuring probe with a sensor
+X
+Y
+X
240
(3) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position
(a) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the Z axis
1 Set a tool at the position of the spindle. Select the tool with an MDI instruction. The tool length
compensation value of the selected tool must be already measured.
3 Turn on the switch for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position on the opera-
tors panel on the machine. The control unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to that
for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. The WOFS status display blinks
at the bottom of the screen to indicate that the preparation for measuring the offset from the work-
piece reference position is completed.
4 Enter the tool length compensation value of the selected tool with the numeric keys and press the
TL_INP soft key. (The following is the screen when the parameter is set so that the measurement
is not made according to the reference hole.)
5 Position the cursor on an offset value from G54 to G59 for the workpiece to be measured. The
cursor can be on an offset value other than one along the Z axis.
6 Move the tool by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the top of the
workpiece.
7 Enter the axis (Z), press the <MEASURE> soft key, and press the <INPUT> soft key. The offset
from the workpiece reference position measured along the Z axis is set according to the abo-
vementioned formula. The cursor is located on the set offset value. When a parameter is set so
that the offset from the workpiece reference position is measured only along the Z axis, the axis
(Z) need not be entered.
When the workpiece reference position is not on the top of the workpiece (for example, shifted
from the top by the cutting allowance), enter the shift amount (S in the following figure) with the
numeric keys and press the <MEASURE> soft key.
S

8 To measure the offset for the next workpiece, move the tool away from the current workpiece and
repeat the operations from step 5.
241
(b) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis using
a reference surface
Procedures when the workpiece reference position for the X or Y axis is on a surface of the workpiece
is basically the same as for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the Z
axis, excluding step 4. In step 4, enter the cutter compensation value of the selected tool on the screen
for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. Enter the value with the numeric keys
and press the <TL_INP> soft key. When entering the cutter compensation value, be careful of the sign
of the value.
Prefix the value with when the measurement surface is located in the positive direction from the tool.
Prefix the value with + when the measurement surface is located in the negative direction from the tool.
(c) Procedures for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X or Y axis using
a reference hole
1 Attach the measuring probe with a sensor to the spindle.
3 Turn on the switch for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position on the opera-
tors panel on the machine. The control unit then automatically changes the CRT screen to that
for measuring the offset from the workpiece reference position. The WOFS status display blinks
at the bottom of the screen to indicate that the preparation for measuring the offset from the work-
piece reference position is completed.
4 Position the cursor on an offset value from G54 to G59 for the workpiece to be measured. The
cursor can be on an offset value other than one along the X or Y axis.
5 Move the measuring probe by manual handle feed or continuous manual feed until it touches the
inside wall of the hole. The probe can be moved only along one axis at a time.
6 When the sensor detects that the probe has touched the wall, the probe stops moving. The posi-
tion where the probe stops is stored as the first measurement point. The machine coordinates
of the stored measurement point are displayed at the bottom right of the CRT screen as shown
in the figure below.
7 Move the probe to the second measurement point. At this time, the control unit inhibits the probe
from moving in the direction it was moved immediately before. For example, when moving the
probe after moving it in the +X direction until it touches the current measurement point, move-
ments in the X, +Y, and Y directions are allowed but movement in the +X direction is inhibited
until the probe moves away from the inside wall of the hole. This also applies after the probe
touches the second measurement point.
8 After making the probe touch the third measurement point, press the MEASURE soft key then the
<CENTER> soft key.
The coordinates of the center are calculated from the coordinates of the three measured points,
and the offset from the workpiece reference position along the X axis or Y axis is set. To stop the
measurement midway and restart the operation, reset the control unit. Resetting the control unit
clears all stored coordinates of the measurement points.
242
10.11 Menu Switch

1 Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.
2 Press the <SETTING> hard or soft key.
One of the following screens is displayed.
SETTING
SETTING SETTING
SETTING
(Menu switch screen)

There are two ways to display the menu switch screen.
1) Press the <SETTING> hard or soft key several times.
2) Press the <CHAPTER> key and then the <OP.PANEL> key.
3 Move the cursor to the item to be set using the cursor keys ( < > <> ).
4 Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
5 To set 1, press the <ON: 1> key. To set 0, press the <OFF: 0> key. The soft keys remain as the operation
selection keys.
INPUT ON:1 OFF:0
243


GEN OPERAT MACRO TOOL
HANDY
ERAL PANLE VAR LIFE
INPUT ON:1 OFF:0
NOTE Ignoring the Zaxis means that the third axis is in the machine lock state even if the third axis
is not the Zaxis.
244
10.12 Tool Life Management Data
10.12.1 Displaying and modifying a tool group

Tool group data registered in the area for storing and editing a part program can be displayed and modified in
the same way as ordinary part program editing. The modified program, however, must be executed as de-
scribed in item 11.2.(1) in Programming. Otherwise, the program will not be stored in the tool life data area.
10.12.2 Displaying tool life data while executing a machining program

Tool life management data is displayed on the CRT as follows:
Press the <SETTING> key until tool life data is displayed in any mode. Alternatively, press the <CHAPTER>
key and then the <TOOL LIFE> key on the setting screen. The previously displayed page is displayed. (How-
ever, the first group is displayed immediately after the power is turned on.)
The number of groups that can be displayed on a page depends on the parameter settings and the CRT type
as shown in the following table (see Figure 10.12.5 for the display format):
Table 10.12.2 Number of groups that can be displayed on a page
Maximum Maximum Size of grouop

Number of
number number
tooll groups 9inch 14inch
of tools of groups
2 128 5 groups/page 14 groups/page
2 6
256
12
512
32 64 1 group/page 2 groups/page
On the 9 screen, up to 7 numbers of the groups for which tool change signals are issued are displayed at the
bottom of the screen. On the 14 screen, up to 15 numbers are displayed. If there are more than 7 groups on
the 9 screen or 15 groups on the 14 screen, an arrow appears.
If the option for 1024 tool life management groups is used, up to 6 numbers of the groups for which tool change
signals are issued are displayed along the bottom of the tool life screen (13 numbers when the 14 screen is
being used).
For information on a specified group, enter the group number and press <INPNO.>. The page on which the
group starts is displayed. (When the specified group is already displayed, the cursor moves to the life counter
for the group.)
Press <> or <> for information on the previous or next group.
Pressing <> or < >moves the cursor to the life counter for the previous or next group. When the cursor
is on the first or last group on the screen, the page changes.
10.12.3 Presetting a tool life counter

To change the value of a life counter, enter the MDI mode, set the value, and press <PRESET>. The life counter
for the group at cursor position is preset. Other data on the group does not change.
10.12.4 Clearing execution data

Specify the number of a group generating a tool change signal and press <CANCEL>. All execution data for
the group up to the point is cleared. This is equivalent to tool reset for a group(Note 1). (See 10.12.7.)
NOTE <CANCEL> is accepted only in the RESET status. (It is not, however, accepted during the
RESET process.)
245
10.12.5 Display format of tool life data

The following figure shows the display format on a 9 CRT.
TOOL LIFE DATA 01234 N01234

SELECTED GROUP
GROUP 001 : LIFE 4300 COUNT 0240
*0100 *0110 *0120 *0130
#0140 *0150 @0160 0170
*0200 *0210 #0220 *0230
*0240 #0250 *0260 0270
*0300 *0310 0320 0330
0340 0350 0360 0370
GROUP TO BE CHANGE
002 005 013 027 055 060 062
Fig. 10.12.5 Display format
(1) The first line is the title line.

(2) The second line displays the number of the group for which commands are currently executed. If there
is no such group, *** is displayed instead.
(3) The third to fifth lines display the tool life data for the group. (The number of displayed lines varies depend-
ing on the maximum number of tools. In this example, the maximum number of tools is 8.)
The third line displays the group number, the set tool life, and the current tool use count. A parameter speci-
fies whether the tool life is counted as duration of use or number of times used. (See II11.2.)
The fourth and fifth lines display the tool numbers. In this example, the tools are selected in the order of
0100, 0110, 0120, 0130, 0140, 0150, 0160, and 0170.
The special characters have the following meanings:
* : Indicates that the life of the tool has expired.
# : Indicates that a skip command is specified.
@ : Indicates that the tool is currently being used.
The value of the tool life counter corresponds to that for the tool marked @.
* is displayed the next time commands are executed for the group the tool belongs to.
(4) The sixth to eleventh lines display the life data for group 2 and group 3.
(5) The thirteenth line displays the numbers of the groups for which tool changes signals are issued.
The group numbers are displayed in ascending order. If all group numbers cannot be displayed on a
screen, an arrow is displayed at the end. Otherwise, *** is displayed at the end.
246
10.12.6 Tool change signal

Each time the life of a tool expires, the next tool in the group is selected. When the life of the last tool in a group
expires, a tool change signal is output. When the tool life is in terms of the duration of use, the signal is output
when the time elapses even during machining. The machining, however, continues. When the tool life is in
terms of the number of times used, this signal is output when the CNC is reset by M02/M30 after the set value
has been reached. When all tools in a group have expired, the group is displayed on the CRT and a tool change
signal is output. If the group is specified again without resetting the signal (see 10.12.7), the last tool is used.
10.12.7 Resetting a tool change signal

A tool change signal can be reset and hence automatically terminated in either of the following ways:
(1) With a tool change reset signal
Replace the tools in the group and input a tool change reset signal by externally specifying the group.
Then, the tool life counter, the * and @ marks, and other related data are cleared. Perform this operation
for all groups whose life expires. A tool change signal continues to be output while there is at least one
group whose life has expired. Parameter No. 7400 (RAG) allows all groups to be cleared without externally
specifying a group. When the allclean signal is issued, the data for either all groups or only groups whose
life has expired is cleared, depends on a parameter setting.
(2) From the MDI panel
The MDI panel can be used to reset the data for all groups whose life has expired (see III10.12.4).
NOTE The reset operation is valid only when the CNC is in the reset status (excluding during the reset
process). When the group which has been reset is specified again, the first tool is selected.
10.12.8 New tool selection signal

When a new tool in a group is selected, a new tool selection signal is output together with the T code of the tool.
This signal can be used to automatically measure the compensation value for the new tool.
10.12.9 Tool skip signal

Tools whose life has not expired can be forcibly replaced in either of the following ways. Set the SNG bit of
parameter No. 7400 to specify whether the signal is valid only when tools subject to tool life management are
used or also when tools not subject to tool life management are used.
(1) Externally specify the group to which the tool belongs and input a tool skip signal. The next T code selects
the next tool in the specified group.
(2) Input a tool skip signal without specifying a group number. When tools subject to tool life management are
used, it is assumed that the current group is specified. When tools not subject to tool life management are
used but a parameter specifies that the signal is valid also for that case, it is assumed that the group last
used is specified. The next T code selects the next tool in the specified group.
When a tool skip signal is input for the last tool, a tool change signal is output irrespective of whether the
tool life is in terms of duration of use or number of times used. A tool skip signal is not accepted during
the reset process.
247
10.12.10 Expanded tool life management

It is possible to display details of tool management data, edit the data via the MDI, and override the tool life in
terms of the duration of use.
(1) Displaying the details of tool life management data
The details of tool life management data can be displayed by positioning the cursor on the group whose
data is to be displayed and pressing the <EDIT> soft key on the ordinary tool life management screen.
(Expanded tool life management screen)
EDIT LIFE DATA GROUP: 005 01234 N01234

NEXT GRP:006
TYPE : 1(1:C 2:M) USE GRP :008
LIFE : 4300 SLCT GRP:008
COUNT: 2000
NO. STATE TCODE HCODE DCODE
01 * 10001 1 2
02 * 10002 10 12
03 # 10003 11 13
04 @ 10004 20 25
NEXT GRP: Number of the group whose tool life starts to be monitored when the next M06 command
is executed
USE GRP: Number of the group whose tool life is currently being monitored
SLCT GRP: Number of the group whose tool life is currently being monitored or was monitored last
TYPE: 1 (when the tool life is in terms of the number of times the tool is used)
2 (when the tool life is in terms of the duration of use)
LIFE: The life of the tool
COUNT: The elapsed life of the tool
STATE: The state of the tool
Tool state Used Not used
Usable @ Blank
Skipped # # The underscore indicates that the special
character is displayed in reverse.
The tool life
@ / * (Note) *
has expired
NOTE The EMD bit of parameter No. 7401 determines whether the asterisks is displayed when the
next tool is used or when the tool life has expired.
TCODE: Tool number

HCODE: H code
DCODE: D code
The following information is added also to the ordinary tool life management screen:
1 Displaying NEXT GRP and USE GRP
2 Displaying the type of tool life data (M: Duration of use, C: No. of times) for each tool group
3 Displaying the state of a tool as on the expanded tool life management screen
(2) Editing tool life management data
Tool life management data can be edited when the CNC is stopped, paused, or reset (excluding while the
resetting signal is on) in the MDI mode.
Data cannot be edited while the program is setting data.
The following alterations can be made when editing data:
248
1 Setting a tool life

2 Setting an elapsed tool life
3 Adding, changing, or deleting a tool number (T code)
4 Setting an H code or D code
5 Setting the type of life data
6 Setting the state of a tool
NOTE 1 Do not edit a group whose tool life starts to be monitored when the next M06 command is
executed or a group whose tool life is currently being monitored.
An attempt to edit such a group forcibly terminates the tool management for the group.
NOTE 2 Editing tool life data may turn on or off a tool change signal.
1 A tool change signal is turned on in the following cases:

i) When the tool state is skipped for the last tool
ii) When deleting a tool number leaves only tools whose life has expired (including skipped
tools) in the tool group
2 A tool change signal is turned off in the following cases:
i) When a tool whose life has not expired is added to the tool group
ii) When a tool state is cleared
A tool change signal is not turned off if there is another group whose tool life has expired.
(3) Editing tool life data
(a) Selecting the editing screen for expanded tool life management
Position the cursor on the group to be edited and press the <EDIT> soft key on the ordinary tool life
management screen to select the expanded tool life management screen.
(b) Selecting the ordinary tool life management screen
Press the <END> soft key to return to the ordinary tool life management screen.
(c) Setting the tool life, the elapsed tool life, the type of tool life data, the tool number, and the H and D
codes

1 Position the cursor on the item to be changed, press the <INPUT> soft key, enter the value, and
press the <EXEC> soft key.
2 Position the cursor on the item to be changed, enter the value, and press the <INPUT> soft key.
NOTE 1 Changing the tool life or the elapsed tool life does not affect the state of the tool or tool change
signal.
NOTE 2 When the type of tool life data is changed, reset the tool life value and the elapsed tool life.
249
(d) Adding a tool group or tool number

1 Adding a tool group

To add data to a group where no data has been set yet:
Press the <INSERT> soft key, enter the tool number, and press the <EXEC> soft key. The type
of tool life data is set according to the current parameter (the LTM bit of parameter No. 7400) and
the tool life and elapsed tool life are set to 0.
NOTE The cursor does not move until the tool number is set.
2 Adding a tool number

A tool number can be added in either of the following ways:
i. Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) before the position where
a tool number is to be added, press the <INSERT> soft key, enter the tool number, and press
the <EXEC> soft key.
ii. Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) before the position where
a tool number is to be added, enter the tool number, and press the <INSERT> soft key.
Example Adding tool number 1500 between No. 01 and 02
Position the cursor on 20 in the DCODE column, press the <INSERT> soft key, enter 1500,
and press the <EXEC> soft key.
NO. CONDITION TCODE HCODE DCODE

01 * 1320 10 20
02 # 1400 30 40
NO. CONDITION TCODE HCODE DCODE

01 * 1320 10 20
02 1500 0 0
03 @ 1400 30 40
NOTE The H and D codes are set to 0.
(e) Deleting a tool group or tool number

250
1 Deleting a tool group

Press the <DELETE> soft key, the <GRP> soft key, then the <EXEC> soft key.
2 Deleting a tool number
Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be deleted, press the
<DELETE> soft key, and press the <CRSR> soft key.
NOTE 1 Deleting all tools in a tool group is equivalent to deleting a group.

NOTE 2 When a tool being used (prefixed by @) is deleted, the previous tool whose life has expired
or which is skipped is indicated by @.
(f) Setting the state of a tool

1 Skipping a tool
Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be skipped, press the <STATE>
soft key, then press the <SKIP> soft key.
2 Clearing tool life data (resetting the life)
Position the cursor on the tool data (tool number or H or D code) to be cleared, press the <STATE>
soft key, then press the <CLEAR> soft key.
(4) Overriding the elapsed tool life
When the life of the tools in a group is in terms of duration of use, the elapsed tool life can be overridden.
The override factor is specified by a switch on the machine operators panel.
The override factor ranges from 0 to 99.9. When 0 is specified, the tool life is not monitored.
Set the LFV bit of parameter No. 7401 to enable the override switch.
Example When the override factor is 0.1 and it takes ten minutes to cut the workpiece, one minute is
added to the elapsed tool life.
NOTE The elapsed tool life is not updated when the actual cutting time is less than four seconds.
However, when the TRV bit of parameter No.7401 is set to 1, outting time loss than four
seconds is counted as four seconds (two or three seconds are counted as four seconds).
251
10.13 Software Operators Panel

Many operations performed on the machine operators panel can also be performed on the software operators
panel (the CRT/MDI panel).
The following operations are possible on the CRT/MDI panel:
(a) Group 1: Mode selection
(b) Group 2: Selection of the jog feed axis and jog rapid traverse
(c) Group 3: Selection of the feed axis for the manual pulse generator and selection of the manual pulse
factor from X1, X10, and Xn (where n is set by a parameter)
(d) Group 4: Selection of the jog feedrate, feedrate override, and rapid traverse override
(e) Group 5: Optional block skip (block deletion), single block operation, machine lock, and dry run
(f) Group 6: Memory protection
(g) Group 7: Feed hold
(h) Group 8: Generalpurpose switches (Eight generalpurpose switches are provided. A name consisting
of up to eight characters can be assigned to each switch.)
Whether to use the CRT or machine operators panel is determined by parameter No. 7603 for each group.
(1) Settings such as mode selection
1 Press the [function menu] key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.
2 Press the <SETTING> soft or hard key several times to select the menu switch screen.
3 Press one of the page keys several times to display the software operators panel screen.
The screen for generalpurpose switches is shown above. The user can allocate eight signals on this
screen. A name consisting of up to eight characters can be assigned to each signal by a parameter.
252
4 Position the cursor (represented by a solid box) on the desired switch using the cursor keys (<>
<>).
5 Position the cursor on the desired status using the cursor keys (<> <>). (The selected statuses
are displayed in reverse.)
(2) Jog feed (available only for the small 9 CRT/MDI unit)
1 Display the software operators panel screen using the soft keys.
2 Select the JOG mode.
3 Perform jog feed by pressing one of the arrow keys.
Pressing the key together with an arrow key jogs the machine at

the rapid traverse feedrate.

t
EOB

CAUTION When the CRT displays a screen other than the software operators panel screen, jog feed
is disabled.
NOTE The axis and direction corresponding to each arrow key are set by parameters No. 2020 and
2021.
(2) Generalpurpose switches

As an extension of the software operators panel, an additional eight switches can be arbitrarily specified.
The eight switches are assigned a name consisting of up to eight characters by a parameter. Refer to the
manual issued by the machine tool builder for the function of each switch.
(3) Displaying software operators panel by function
The unused switches can be deleted from the software operator panel by setting parameter OPND (bit 6
of parameter No.7601).
NOTE 1 The unused switches refer to those which specified as unused by bits 0, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6
of parameter No.7603.
NOTE 2 General-purpose switches 1 to 8 are assumed to be unused when all corresponding bits of
parameter Nos. 2311 to 2318, 2321 to 2328, . . . , and 2381 to 2388 (parameters to name
switches) are 0.
Example The screens when the parameters shown in Table 1 are set are shown on the following pages:
253
Table 1 Example of Setting of Parameters for Software Operators Panel
Parameter no. Value Meaning

7601#6 1 Unused switches are not displayed.
7603#0 1 Mode selection is done.
7603#2 1 Axis and multiplier selection of manual pulse generator is done.
7603#3 0 Jog feed, override and rapid traverse override are not executed.
7603#4 0 Optional block skip, Single block and Machine lockand Dry run are not
executed.
7603#5 1 Memory protect is done.
7603#6 1 Feed hold is done.
2311 83 Name of G.P.switch 1, 1st character (S)
2312 73 Name of G.P.switch 1, 2nd character (I)
2313 71 Name of G.P.switch 1, 3rd character (G)
2314 78 Name of G.P.switch 1, 4th character (N)
2315 65 Name of G.P.switch 1, 5th character (A)
2316 76 Name of G.P.switch 1, 6th character (L)
2317 32 Name of G.P.switch 1, 7th character ( )
2318 49 Name of G.P.switch 1, 8th character (1)
2321 to 2328 0 Name of G.P.switch 2
2331 to 2338 0 Name of G.P.switch 3 G. P. switch=General
2341 to 2348 0 Name of G.P.switch 4 Purpose switch
By the above setting, the following switches are not displayed:

Rapid traverse override switch
Jog feedrate switch
Feedrate override switch
Optional block skip switch
Single block switch
Machine lock switch
Dry run switch
General purpose switches 2 to 8
OPERATORS PANEL O1234 N00000
MODE : EDT MEM TAP MDI JOG REF HND INC

HANDLE AXIS : X Y Z
HANDLE MULTI : *1 *10 *100
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)

X 10.000 Y 123.400
Z 12.100
ACT F : 0 (MM/MIN) S: 0 (RPM)

EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** 00:46:32 LSK
Fig. 1 Software Operators Panel Display Example 1st page (9 CRT)
254
MEMORY PROTECT : PROTECT RELEASE

FEED HOLD : OFF ON

X 10.000 Y 123.400
Z 12.100

EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** 00:46:32 LSK
Fig. 2 Software Operators Panel Display Example 2nd page (9 CRT)
SIGNAL 1 : OFF 0N

X 10.000 Y 123.400
Z 12.100

EDIT *** STOP **** *** *** 00:46:32 LSK
Fig. 3 Software Operators Panel Display Example 3rd page (9 CRT)
255
10.14 Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers
10.14.1 Selecting the tool data screen

1 Press the [function menu] key.
2 Press the <OFFSET> soft or hard key several times to display the following screen.
After pressing the <OFFSET> key, press the <CHAPTER> key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection
keys. Pressing the <TOOL> key displays the tool data screen.
WEAR WRK.ZER TL.DATA


WORK TOOL
TOOL
ZERO DATA
256
(a) The numbers displayed in the NO. column are called display numbers. The display numbers are used
for editing or searching for tool data.
The display numbers, however, may change when tool data is deleted or inserted.
(b) The 3digit number preceded by E: on the second line of the above example indicates the display
number of the tool data for which compensation is currently enabled (after an M06 command).
The 3digit number preceded by S: indicates the display number of the selected tool data (before an
M06 command).
When machining is executed or there is no selected tool, *** is displayed.
(c) * is displayed before a pot number when the same pot number is set.
(d) Data positions which are not set become blanks.
(e) When there is no registered data or before about 15 seconds elapse after the power is turned on, dis-
play number 001 is *** and other data positions are blanks.
(f) On a 14 CRT, the above example is displayed on the left, the items related to (b) are in the center,
and the current position (relative coordinates) is on the right.
10.14.2 Setting tool data

(1) Entering and changing data
1 Position the cursor at the data to be entered or changed using the page keys (<> <>) or cursor keys
( <> <> <> <> ).
2 Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys to the following:
INPUT INSERT DELETE SEARCH

IN IN DE SEAR MEA CHAP
PUNCH
PUT SERT LETE CH SURE TER
3 Enter or change data as follows:

i) Press the [operation menu] key.
ii) Press the <INPUT> key.
iii) Enter the data to be set.
iv) Press the <EXEC> key.
NOTE Step i) can be omitted.

(VALUE)

EXEC
257

IN IN DE SEAR MEA CHAP
PUNCH
PUT SERT LETE CH SURE TER

(VAL
UE)

EXEC
(2) T codes
1 Press the [operation menu] key.
2 A new T code can be inserted under the current cursor position using the insert command.
Press the soft keys <INSERT>, <(T#)>, then <EXEC>.
VINSERTWT1030VEXECW
3 After pressing <(T#)> (or entering T), enter the T code to be inserted. A warning is issued when 300
data sets are already registered or the same T code exists.
258
4 When <EXEC> is pressed without entering a T code number (only T is entered), a T code is not set
but only the area is allocated.
Example T1234, <EXEC>: 1234 is inserted in the T_CODE column.
T, <EXEC>: Only the area is inserted leaving the T_CODE column blank.
9" CRT operation selectionkeys

(T#)

EXEC

IN IN DE SEAR MEA
PUNCH
PUT SERT LETE CH SURE

(T#)

EXEC
259
(3) Deleting registered data

(a) Method 1 for deleting a line
ii) Press the <DELETE> key.
iii) Enter the display number of the line to be deleted.
(b) Method 2 for deleting a line
ii) Move the cursor to the line to be deleted.
iii) Press the <DELETE> key.
iv) Press the <CRSR> key.
(c) Deleting consecutive lines
ii) Press the <DELETE> key.
iii) Enter the starting display number (M) and end display number (N).
iv) Press the <EXEC> key. The lines from display number M to N are deleted.

(No.) <CRSR>

EXEC , (No.)

EXEC

IN IN DE SEAR MEA
PUNCH

<CRS
(No.)
R>

EXEC ,(No.)

EXEC
260
(4) Searching for data

(a) Searching for a display number
ii) Press the <SEARCH> key.
iii) Enter the display number to be searched for.
(b) Searching for a T code
iii) Enter T and the T code number to be searched for.
(c) Searching for a POT number
iii) Enter P and the POT number to be searched for.
To search for the same POT number which appears next:
v) Press the <SEARCH> key.
vi) Enter P.
vii) Press the <EXEC> key.
(d) Searching for the last registered data
iii) Press the <BOTTOM> key.

(NO.) (T#) (P#) BOTTOM

EXEC

IN IN DE SEAR MEA
PUNCH

BOT
(NO.) (T#) (P#)
TOM

EXEC
261
10.15 Setting the Floating Reference Position

The floating reference position is set as follows:
1 Select the currentposition screen.
The currentposition screen may be the overall position display, relative position display, or current posi-
tion display in a work coordinate system.
2 Move the machine to the floating reference position by manual jog feed or a similar operation.
3 Press the [operation menu] key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
4 Press the [MEMFRP] key. The soft keys are switched to the operation guide keys.
5
51 To store the coordinates on all axes as a floating reference position, press the [ALLAXS] key.
52 To store the coordinate along a specified axis as a floating reference position, enter the name of the
axis (X, Y, etc.) and press the <EXEC> key. Multiple axis names can be specified at a time.
Example Enter XYZ and press the <EXEC> key.
6 Setting the FPC bit of parameter No. 1200 presets the relative position display to 0 and stores the floating
reference position.
9" CRT POSITOIN operation selection keys
ORIGIN PRESET MEM-FRP
9" CRT MEM-FRP operation guide keys
ALL-AXE (AXIS)
14" CRT POSITION operation selection keys

ORI PRE MEM
GIN SET -FEP
14" CRT MEM-FRP operation guidance keys

ALL
AXIS
AXE
NOTE 1 The floating reference position is stored when the power is turned off.
NOTE 2 The stored floating reference position (machine coordinates) can be checked on the parameter
screen. (The data is stored in parameter No. 1244.)
262
10.16 Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens and Spindle Monitor
Screen
The servo setting screen, servo adjustment screen, spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and
spindle monitor screen have been added to the screens which can be displayed by pressing the <SERVICE>
hard key or the <SERVICE> function selection soft key. The servo motor and spindle motor can thereby be
easily set or adjusted.
10.16.1 Servo screens

(1) Servo setting screen
This screen displays the parameters necessary for the initial standard setting of the servo motor.
This setting screen is valid only for servo axes. It cannot be used for spindle positioning axes or Cs contour
control axes.
SERVO SETTING O1000 N0000
X AXIS Z AXIS
INITIAL SET BITS 00000011 00000011
MOTOR ID NO. 12 12
AMR 00011111 00011111
CMR 2 2
FEEDGEAR N 2 2
(N/M) M 3 3
DIRECTION SET 111 111
VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8000 8000
POSITION PULSE NO. 8000 8000
REF. COUNTER 8000 8000
MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSK

SERVO SPINDLE CHAPTER+
The correspondence between the items on the screen and the parameters are as follows:
INITIAL SET BITS : Parameter No. 1804
MOTOR ID NO. : Parameter No. 1874
AMR : Parameter No. 1806
CMR : Parameter No. 1820
FEEDGEAR N : Parameter No. 1977
(N/M) M : Parameter No. 1978
DIRECTION SET : Parameter No. 1879
VELOCITY PULSE NO. : Parameter No. 1876
POSITION PULSE NO. : Parameter No. 1891
REF. COUNTER : Parameter No. 1896
NOTE The servo setting screen is available only to the servo axes. It is not available to the spindle
positioning axis and Cs contouring control axis.
263
(2) Servo adjustment screen

This screen displays the parameters and status monitors necessary for basic adjustment of the servo mo-
tor.
SERVO MOTOR TUNING O1000 N0000
X AXIS
(PARAMETER) (MONITOR)
FUNC. BIT 00110100 ALARM 1 00110100
LOOP GAIN 3000 ALARM 2 00110100
TUNING ST. 1 ALARM 3 00000000
SET PERIOD 50 ALARM 4 00000000
INT. GAIN 251 LOOP GAIN 3000
PROP. GAIN 2460 POS ERROR 100
FILTER 2450 CURRENT % 5
VELOC. GAIN % 150 SPEED(RPM) 50
MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSK

The correspondence between the items on the screen and parameters are as follows:
FUNC. BIT : Parameter No. 1808
LOOP GAIN : Parameter No. 1825
SET PERIOD : Parameter No. 1972
INT. GAIN : Parameter No. 1855
PROP. GAIN : Parameter No. 1856
FILTER : Parameter No. 1895
VELOC.GAIN % : (LDINT 1) 100

256
(NOTE LDINT : Parameter No. 1875)
TUNING ST. : When 1 is set, the digital servo is automatically adjusted.
The following monitors are provided:
ALARM 1 : Data for diagnosis of a servo alarm
LOOP GAIN : Displays the loop gain obtained from the output pulse and position deviation.
POS ERROR : Displays the magnitude of the error for each axis.
CURRENT % : Displays Actual current 100

Parameter No.1979
SPEED (RPM): Displays the actual speed for each axis.
264
10.16.2 Spindle screens

(1) Spindle setting screen
This screen displays the parameters necessary for the initial standard setting of the spindles.
SPINDLE SETTING O1000 N0000
GEAR SELECT :1
SPINDLE :S11
(PARAMETER)
GEAR RATIO 50
MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000
MAX CS AXIS SPEED 100
MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000
MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSK

GEAR SELECT : Displays one of the following modes depending on the states of control input
signals CTH1 and CTH2.
CTH1 CTH2 Mode Display
0 0 HIGH GEAR 4
0 1 MIDIUM HIGH GEAR 3
1 0 MEDIUM LOW GEAR 2
1 1 LOW GEAR 1
SPINDLE : Displays which spindle is being adjusted.

S11 : Main spindle of the first spindle amplifier
S12 : Subspindle of the first spindle amplifier
S21 : Main spindle of the second spindle amplifier
S22 : Subspindle of the second spindle amplifier
PARAMETER : Displays one of the following parameter numbers according to the gear
selection.
HIGH M.H M.L LOW
Gear ratio 3056 3057 3058 3059
Maximum rotation
3020 3020 3020 3020
speed of the motor
Maximum rotation
3021 3021 3021 3021
speed of C axis
MAX SPINDLE SPEED : Displays the value obtained from the gear ratio and maximum
rotation speed of the motor. The cursor does not move to this item.
265
(2) Spindle adjustment screen

This screen displays the parameters and status monitors necessary for basic adjustment of the spindles.
SPINDLE TUNING O1000 N0000
OPERATION :SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL

GEAR SELECT :1
SPINDLE :S11
(PARAMETER)
PROP. GAIN 2460 MOTOR 100
INT. GAIN 251 SPINDLE 150
LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERR S1 100
MOTOR VOLT 30 POS ERR S2 50
ZRN GAIN % 300 SYN.ERROR 128
REF. SHIFT 300
MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSK

OPERATION : Displays one of the following according to on the spindle setting.

1 Normal operation 3 Synchronous control 5 Orientation
2 CS control 4 Rigid tapping 6 (Blank)
PARAMETER : Displays one of the following parameter numbers according to the gear selection
and operating mode.
<During normal operation>
HIGH M.H M.L LOW
Proportional gain 3040 3040 3041 3041
Integrated gain 3048 3048 3049 3049
Motor voltage 3083 3083 3083 3083
Generative power 3080 3080 3080 3080
<During CS control>
HIGH M.H M.L LOW
Loop gain 3069 3070 3071 3072
Motor voltage 3086 3086 3086 3086
ZRN gain (%) 3092 3092 3092 3092
Reference position shift 3135 3135 3135 3135
266
<During synchronous control>

HIGH M.H M.L LOW
Loop gain 3065 3066 3067 3068
Motor voltage 3085 3085 3085 3085
Acceleration/
3032 3032 3032 3032
deceleration constant
<During rigid tapping>

HIGH M.H M.L LOW
Loop gain 3065 3066 3067 3068
Motor voltage 3085 3085 3085 3085
ZRN gain (%) 3091 3091 3091 3091
<During orientation>
HIGH M.H M.L LOW
Loop gain 3060 3061 3062 3063
Motor voltage 3084 3084 3084 3084
ORAR gain (%) 3064 3064 3064 3064
Stop position shift 3077 3077 3077 3077
MONITOR: Displays one of the following according to the operating mode:
Normal operation CS control Synchronous control Rigid tapping Orientation

Motor speed- Motor speed- Motor speedSpindle Motor speedSpindle Motor speedSpindle
Spindle speed FeedratePosi- speedPosition devi- speedPosition devi- speedPosition devi-
tion deviation S1 ation S1 ation S1 ation S1
Position deviation S2 Position deviation Z
Synchronous error Synchronous error
Motor speed : Displays the speed of the spindle motor. (Unit: RPM)
Spindle speed : Displays the speed of the spindle. (Unit: RPM)
Feedrate : Displays the feedrate of the spindle. (Unit: DEG/MIN)
Position deviation S1 : Displays the spindle position deviation for the first unit.
Position deviation S2 : Displays the spindle position deviation for the second unit.
Synchronous error : Displays the instantaneous value of the synchronous position deviation be-
tween the spindle and Z axis during rigid tapping.
Displays the instantaneous value of the synchronous position deviation be-
tween the main spindle and subspindle during synchronous control. Peak
hold values can be displayed by setting the PKHD bit of parameter No. 5820.
NOTE When the second spindle is displayed during orientation or CS control, position deviation S2
is displayed.
267
(3) Spindle monitor screen

This screen displays various information on the spindles.
SPINDLE MONITOR O1000 N0000
ALARM :AL27(PC DISCON. )

OPERATION :SP.CONTOURING CONTROL
FEED.SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN
MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM
0 50 100 150 200(%)
LOAD METER
===========
CONTROL INPUT :MRDY *ESP ORCM
CONTROL OUTPUT:ORAR SST
MDI *** STOP **** *** 14:48:20 LSK

ALARM : Displays one of the following according to the spindle alarm number:
No. Display No. Display

01 MOTOR OVERHEAT 25 SERI.TRANS.STOP
02 SPEED ER.EXCESS 26 CVEL.DISCON.
07 OVER SPEED 27 PC DISCON.
09 HEATSINK OVERHEAT 28 CPOS.DISCON.
10 LOW VOLTAGE 29 OVERLOAD
11 DC LINK OVER VOLT 30 INPUT OVER CUR.
12 DC LINK OVER CUR. 31 PG DISCON
13 MEMORY ABNOR. 32 SERI.RAM ABNOR.
18 SUM CHECK ER. 33 DC LINK LOW VOLT
19 U PHASE OFFSET 34 PARA. SET ABNOR.
20 V PHASE OFFSET 35 GEAR RATIO SET ER
24 SERI.DATA ABNOR. 36 ER.COUNT.OVERFLOW
LOAD METER : Displays the load (%) of the spindle motor.
268
CONTROL INPUT: Displays up to ten of the following signals when they are on.
Symbol Name Symbol Name

TLML Torque restrict command LOW *ESP External stop instruction
TLMH Torque restrict command HIGH SPSL Spindle select command
CTH1 Clutch/gear ratio MCFN Power line switching complete signal
CTH2 Clutch/gear ratio SOCN Soft start/stop cancel
SRV Reverse rotate command RSL Output switching request signal
SFR Forward rotate command RCH Power line status check signal
ORCM Orientation command INDX Orientation stop position change
MRDY Machine tool ready ROTA Orientation stop rotation direction
ARST Alarm reset signal NRRO Orientation shortpa
CONTROL OUTPUT: Displays up to ten of the following signals when they are on.
Symbol Name Symbol Name

ALM Alarm signal TLM5 Torque restricting signal
SST Speed zero signal ORAR Orientation completion signal
SDT Speed detected signal CHP Power line switching signal
SAR Speed reached signal CFIN Spindle switching complete signal
LDT1 Load detected signal 1 RCHP Output switching signal
LDT2 Load detected signal 2 RCFN Output switching complete signal
269
10.16.3 Operations
The servo setting screen, servo adjustment screen, spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and
spindle monitor screen have been added to the screens which can be displayed by pressing the <SERVICE>
hard key or the <SERVICE> function selection soft key.
1 Press the [function menu] key.
2 Press the <SERVICE> soft or hard key.

3 Pressing the <SERVO> key displays the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen.
Pressing the <SPINDLE> key displays the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindle
monitor screen.
9" CRT SERVICE selection keys
PARAM PITCH DIAGNOS DSP.MEM CHAPTER +
MAP-SRV SYSTEM CHAPTER +
SERVO SPINDLE CHAPTER +

Select screens in either of the following ways:

a) Servo setting screen and servo adjustment screen
i) Press the <SERVICE> key until the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen is displayed.
ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key then the <SERVO> key.
After the servo setting screen or servo adjustment screen is displayed, the servo setting screen
or servo adjustment screen for each axis can be displayed using the page keys.
b) Spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and spindle monitor screen
i) Press the <SERVICE> key until the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindle
monitor screen is displayed.
ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key then the <SPINDLE> key.
After the spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, or spindle monitor screen is dis-
played, pressing a page key changes the screen to either the spindle setting screen, spindle ad-
justment screen, or spindle monitor screen.
4 Pressing the [operation menu] key or entering data changes the soft keys to the following keys:
Press the <CHAPTER> key to return to step 3.
270
a) Servo setting screen and servo adjustment screen

9" CRT SERVO operation selection keys
INPUT +INPUT ON:1 OFF:0 CHAPTER +
SV-SET SV-TUN CHAPTER +
Press the <SV_SET> key to select the servo setting screen. Press the <SV_TUN> key to select the
servo adjustment screen.
b) Spindle setting screen, spindle adjustment screen, and spindle monitor screen
9" CRT SPINDLE operation selection keys
INPUT +INPUT CHAPTER +
SR-SET SP-TUN SP-MON CHAPTER +
Press the <SP_SET> key to select the spindle setting screen. Press the <SP_TUN> key to select the
spindle adjustment screen. Press the <SP_MON> key to select the spindle monitor screen.
271
10.17 Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens

At times, the operator may want to see the data of two or more CNC screens at a time. For example:
When the operator wants to check the current position simultaneously on both the screen for cutter com
pensation and the screen for the offset from the workpiece reference point
When the operator wants to check the current program on the graphic screen
This function displays subscreens on the current screen (main screen).
The current position, current program, cutter compensation value, alarm, and other data can be displayed on
a subscreen. (For details, see Subsecs 10.17.2 10.17.4) There are very few restrictions on the data items
that can be displayed on a subscreen and on the position and size of the subscreen. Simple input and editing
are permitted for data on a subscreen. (On the position subscreen, for example, the origin/preset operation
is permitted. On the cutter compensation subscreen, a compensation value can be input. Program editing and
other complicated operations are not allowed.)
Multiple subscreens are displayed as shown below:
TOOL OFFSET O0010 N00005

NO. DATA NO. DATA 2 : PROGRAM 1 : POSITION
001 1.500 017 1.500 O0010 ; (ABSOLUTE)
002 0.000 018 0.000 G90 G55 ; X 0.000
003 0.000 019 0.000 G00 X0 Y0 ; Y 0.000
004 0.000 020 0.000 Z50. ; Z 50.000
005 2.000 021 0.000 G43 H1 ;
006 0.000 022 0.000 G42 X50. Y10. D5 ; (MACHINE)
007 0.000 023 0.000 Z20. ; X 10.000
008 0.000 024 0.000 G01 Y20. D1 F100 ; Y 20.000
009 0.000 0 4 :MODL X10. ; Z 50.000
010 0.000 0 G90 G54
011 0.000 0 G00 3 ;WORK OFFSET
012 0.000 0 G17 NO.02 (G55) NO.03 (G56)
013 0.000 0 G40 X 10.000 X 0.000
014 0.000 0 D 5 H 1 Y 20.000 Y 0.000
015 0.000 0 F 100 Z 0.000 Z 0.000
016 0.000 0 S 200
> MEM***STRT**** *** *** 08:40:00 LSK
POSI- PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG GRAPHI

TION M CHECK G E E C
Fig. 10.17 Multiple subscreens
On a single main screen, up to five subscreens can be displayed. Information describing a displayed sub-
screen (data items, displayed position, and size) is stored. These items need not be specified each time the
power is turned on. (Information on subscreens for up to all 30 main screens can be stored.)
10.17.1 Subscreen states

There are three subscreen states:
1 Nosubscreen state
No subscreens are displayed. Data can be edited (page keys, cursor keys, and soft keys can be used)
only on the main screen.
2 Subscreen/display state
Subscreens are displayed, but only data on the main screen can be edited.
3 Subscreen/edit state
Subscreens are displayed and data on subscreens can be edited. The page keys, cursor keys, and soft
keys can be used on subscreens.
272
(1) No-subscreen state (2) Subscreen display state
PROGRAM(MEMORY) O0100 N00002 PROGRAM(MEMORY) O0100 N00002

O100 ; O100 ; 3 :WORK OFFSET
N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; NO. 02 (G55)
N2 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 ; N2 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 X; 10.000
N3 Y10. ; N3 Y10. ; Y 20.000
N4 S9 N4 Z 30.000
The frame is
displayed in white.
S8
> >
EDIT EDIT
Soft keys for the main screen Soft keys for the main screen
Sn
RETURN
Sn MAIN
DELETE (3) Subscreen edit state

SCREEN
O100 ; 3 :WORK OFF-
N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; SET
NO. 02 (G55)
N2 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 X; 10.000
N3 Y10. ; Y 20.000
N4 Z 30.000
The frame is
displayed in green.
By pressing the following keys, the
subscreen state can be changed. For
details, see the next section.
Sn >
Subscreen
EDIT
operation keys Soft keys for the subscreen

S8 S9
DELETE RETURN Soft keys for

SCREEN MAIN the subscreen
10.17.2 Subscreen operations

(1) Subscreen number
Up to five subscreens can be displayed on a single main screen. The five subscreens have numbers (sub-
screens 1 to 5). This number is indicated in the top left corner of each subscreen.
Example Subscreen 3 is displayed as shown below.
Subscreen number
3 :WORK OFFSET
NO. 02 (G55)
X 10.000
Y 20.000
Z 30.000
273
(2) Subscreen operation keys (Sn)

Subscreen selection keys
After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter <1> to display subscreen 1.
Any subscreen from 1 to 5 can be displayed and data on the subscreen can be edited.
Subscreen deletion key (<S8>)
After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter 8 to delete all subscreens from the current main screen.
Subscreen redisplay key (<S9>)
After pressing the <SHIFT> key, enter 9 to redisplay subscreens deleted with the subscreen deletion
key.
(3) Soft keys for the subscreen
In the subscreenedit state, the soft keys for the subscreen are displayed as shown below:
INPUT + INPUT MOVE/ RETURN DELETE SELECT

INPUT NO. ENLARG MAIN SCREEN SCREEN
1 2 3 4
Subscreen edit (input) keys Subscreen operation keys
The five soft keys on the left are displayed according to the data displayed on the subscreen (position, tool
compensation, etc.). (Shown above are the soft keys displayed for the subscreen for the offset from the
workpiece reference point.) The four soft keys on the right are used for subscreen operation. Use the sub-
screen operation keys as described below:
1 <MOVE/ENLARG>
When this key is pressed, the subscreen can be moved, enlarged, or reduced. After this key is
pressed, the following soft keys are displayed.
SET
END
Keys for moving the subscreen Keys for enlarging or Key for
(displayed in yellow) reducing the subscreen terminating setting
(displayed in red)
<> Moves the subscreen to <> Reduces the subscreen by one

the left by one column. unit in the horizontal direction.
<> Moves the subscreen to <> Enlarges the subscreen by one
the right by one column. unit in the horizontal direction.
<> Moves the subscreen down <> Enlarges the subscreen by one
by one row. unit in the vertical direction.
<> Moves the subscreen up <> Reduces the subscreen by one
by one row. unit in the vertical direction.
<SET END> Terminates setting.
The unit by which the subscreen is enlarged or reduced depends on the data displayed on the sub-
screen.
274
2 <RETURN MAIN>
After this key is pressed, subscreens are still displayed, but data in them cannot be edited. Only data
on the main screen can be edited. The soft keys for the subscreens are substituted by the soft keys
for the main screen.
3 <DELETE SCREEN>
When this key is pressed, the subscreen is erased. Subsequently, only data on the main screen can
be edited. The soft keys for the subscreen are substituted by the soft keys for the main screen. This
key erases only a subscreen in the edit status. To delete all subscreens, press the <SHIFT> key and
enter 8 as described above.
4 <SELECT SCREEN>
When this key is pressed, the data to display on a subscreen can be selected. After this key is pressed,
the subscreen menu is displayed as shown below.
GRAPHIC(GRAPH) O0100 N00005

Y 0:MENU
01: POSITION
5000.000 02: PROGRAM
03: TOOL OFFSET
2500.000 04: WORK OFFSET
5:PROGRAM 05: MODAL
O100 ; 06: DI/DO
N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ; 07: SERVO ERROR
N2 C90. ; 08: ALARM MESSAGE
N3 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 ; 09: OPERATOR MESSAGE
N4 Y20. ;
> N5 X0 ;
N6 G40 Y0 ;
N7 M30 ;
%
MEM***STRT**** *** *** 08:40:00 LSK
INPUT MOVE/ RETURN DELETE SET

NO. ENLARG MAIN SCREEN END
Select an option by using the cursor keys (<> , <>, <>,<> ) and pressing the <SET END> soft
key. Selected data is displayed on the subscreen.
275
10.17.3 Data displayed on the subscreen

(1) POSITION subscreen
Indicates the current position. The following data can be displayed:
(RELATIVE) : Relative coordinates
(ABSOLUTE) : Absolute coordinates
(MACHINE) : Machine coordinates
(RESIDUAL) : Remaining travelling distance
(MANUAL) : Degree of manual interrupt (only when the manual pulse interrupt and simultaneous
manual/automatic operation functions are available)
By enlarging or reducing the subscreen, the number of data items for indicating the position on a screen
can be changed.
Changing position data displayed on a subscreen
1:POSITION
(RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE)
*X 5.678 *X 15.678 To change the absolute coordinates shown in the
Y 21.000 Y 31.000
Z 100.000 Z 110.000
right half of the left screen to machine coordinates,
C 90.000 C 9.000 follow this procedure:
To select the right half of the screen, press the <>
<> key
cursor key.
1:POSITION
(RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE)
*X 5.678 *X 15.678 (The title of the selected part is displayed in yellow
Y 21.000 Y 31.000 reverse video.)
Z 100.000 Z 110.000
C 90.000 C 9.000
To change the type of position data, press the <>
<> key
page key.
1:POSITION
(RELATIVE) (MACHINE)
*X 5.678 *X 5.678
Y 21.000 Y 21.000
Z 100.000 Z 110.000
C 90.000 C 9.000
To select the part to be changed, press the cursor keys (<> , <>, <> , <> ).
To select the type of position data, press the page keys ( <>, <> ).
If the subscreen is in the edit status, the origin/preset operation can be performed for position data to be
changed as well as for position data on the main screen.
(2) PROGRAM subscreen
Indicates the current program. The subscreen can be enlarged or reduced. The program cannot be edited
on the subscreen.
1:PROGRAM
O100 ;
N1 G90 G00 X0 Y0 Z100. ;
N2 C90. ;
N3 G42 G01 X10. F1000 D1 ;
N4 Y20. ;
> N5 X0 ;
N6 G40 Y0 ;
N7 M30 ;
%
(3) TOOL OFFSET subscreen

Indicates tool compensation data. When the subscreen is enlarged, more sets of tool compensation data
can be displayed on a single screen. In the subscreen edit state, data can be entered using the page keys,
cursor keys, and soft keys.
276
1 With tool compensation memory A
1:TOOL OFFSET
001 1.234
002 5.678
003 0.000
2 With tool compensation memory B
1:TOOL OFFSET
NO. GEOMETRY WEAR
001 1.234 5.678
002 10.000 20.000
3 With tool compensation memory C
1:TOOL OFFSET
(LENGTH) (RADIUS)
NO. GEOMETRY WEAR GEOMETRY WEAR
001 1.234 2.345 3.456 4.567
002 10.000 20.000 30.000 40.000
(4) WORK OFFSET subscreen

Displays the offset from the workpiece reference point. When the subscreen is enlarged, more sets of data
can be displayed on a single screen. In the subscreen edit state, data can be entered using the page keys,
cursor keys, and soft keys.
1:WORK OFFSET
NO.00 (COMMON) NO.01 (G55)
X 0.000 X 10.000
Y 0.000 Y 20.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
NO.01 (G54) NO.01 (G56)
X 1.234 X 30.000
Y 5.678 Y 40.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
(5) MODAL subscreen

Displays continuousstate information. Continuousstate information includes the G, H, D, F, and S
codes. This subscreen cannot be enlarged or reduced.
1:MODAL
G90 G54
G01 G80
G17 G64
G40 G43
D10 H20
F 10.
S 100
(6) DI/DO subscreen

Lists DI/DO signals. When this subscreen is enlarged, more bytes can be displayed on a single screen.
1:DI/DO
000 00110011 003 00100000
001 00000011 004 00101000
002 00000000 005 00000000
(7) SERVO ERROR subscreen

Displays servo position errors. This screen cannot be enlarged or reduced.
1:SERVO ERROR
X 55
Y 0
Z 0
C 0
277
(8) ALARM MESSAGE subscreen

Displays alarm messages. When this subscreen is enlarged, more lines can be displayed on a single
screen. This subscreen cannot be enlarged or reduced horizontally.
1:ALARM MESSAGE
PS010 IMPROPER GCODE
(9) OPERATOR MESSAGE subscreen

Displays operator messages. This subscreen is used only when one of the following options is added:
Custom macro
NC window
External data input/output
When this subscreen is enlarged, more lines can be displayed on a single screen. This subscreen cannot
be enlarged nor reduced horizontally.
1:OPERATOR MESSAGE
MC012 ALARM OCCURS
10.17.4 Subscreen operations

(1) To display multiple subscreens as shown in the first example in Fig. 10.17, follow the procedure below:
1) Display the TOOL OFFSET screen as the main screen.
2) Following the steps described below, display the current position on subscreen 1:
Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <1>.
Press the <MOVE/ENLARG> soft key.
Press the < (yellow) and < (yellow)> soft keys to change the size of the subscreen.
Press the < (red)> soft key to move the subscreen to the right.
Press the <SET END> soft key.
Press the <> page key, <> cursor key, and <> page key in this order to display the absolute
coordinates and machine coordinates of the current position.
3) Following the steps described below, display the current program on subscreen 2:
Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <2>. (The default for subscreen 2 is TOOL OFFSET. The TOOL
OFF SET subscreen is displayed initially.)
Press the <SELECT SCREEN> soft key. The subscreen menu is displayed.
Press the cursor key to move the cursor to 02: PROGRAM. Then, press the <SET END> soft key.
Press the <MOVE/ENLARG> soft key.
Press soft keys as many times as necessary to display the subscreen at the desired position with
the desired size.
Press the <SET END> soft key.
4) Following the procedures described above, display the offset from the workpiece reference point in
subscreen 3 and modal information in subscreen 4.
5) Finally, press the <RETURN MAIN> soft key.
(2) To delete subscreen 1, follow the procedure below:
1) Press the <SHIFT> key and enter <1>.
2) Press the <DELETE SCREEN> soft key.
(3) To redisplay subscreen 1, follow the procedure below:
2) Press the <RETURN MAIN> soft key.
278
NOTE When a subscreen is deleted, the displayed data, position, and size of the subscreen are
stored. The subscreen is redisplayed as it was before deletion.
(4) To change the value of G56 on the WORK OFFSET subscreen or subscreen 3, follow the procedure below:
2) Press the page keys and cursor keys to move the cursor to a desired position.
3) Enter a value and press the <INPUT> key.
4) Press the <RETURN MAIN> soft key.
(5) To delete all subscreens, do the following:
(6) To redisplay subscreens, do the following:
Setting input
(1) This function can be used with a 14inch or 10inch CRT (it cannot be used with a 9inch CRT).
(2) This function can be used with the M or T system (it cannot be used with the TT system).
(3) When the current program is displayed on the main screen, the program subscreen cannot be displayed.
279
10.18 RS232C Parameter Setting Screen

The user is required to set parameters necessary for data communication via the RS232C, RS422, and remote
buffer interfaces. An improvement enable setting these parameters on one menu.
10.18.1 Selecting RS232C Screen

Either of the following two methods can be used for menu selection.
(a) Press the SETTING function selection key several times.
(b) Press the SETTING function selection key, then the RS232C chapter selection key.
10.18.2 Details of Screens

(1) 14 CRT Screen
SETTING(RS232C) O0000 N00000

TV CHECK = OFF
TV(COMMENT) = ON
IN/OUT CODE = ASCII
EOB CODE = LF/CR/CR PUNCH
F.G. INPUT DVC = 1 RS232C CHANL1 RS232C CHANL3
DVC TYPS = 8 DVC TYPS = 8
OUTPUT DVC= 1 STOP BITS= 2 STOP BITS= 2
BAUD RATE= 9600 BAUD RATE= 4800
B.G. INPUT DVC = 2
RS232C CHANL2 RS422
OUTPUT DVC= 2 DVC TYPE = 8 DVC TYPE = 8
STOP BITS= 1 STOP BITS= 1
BAUD RATE= 4800 BAUD RATE=19200
By SELECT +/SELECT key please select OFF/ON
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 21:37:00
SELECT SELECT CHAPTE

+ R
Press page key <> <> to change the screen.

SETTING(RMTBUF) O0000 N00000
RS422 RS232C
DVC TYPE = 1 DVC TYPE = 7
STOP BITS = 1 STOP BITS = 1
BAUD RATE =86400 BAUD RATE =19200
PROTOCOL = A PROTOCOL =EXT_B
5000 CNV REV CDC ETC TCC ECH 422

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
5070 86400
FLOPPY CASSETTE, PROGRAM FILE MATE, HANDY FILE (Remote mode)
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 21:37:50 LSK

+ R
NOTE 1 The information related to the RS232C and RS422 channels is displayed only when the reader/
punch interface B option has been specified.
NOTE 2 Page 2 is displayed only when the remote buffer interface option has been specified.
280
(2) 9 CRT Screen

TV CHECK =OFF TV(COMMENT)=ON
I/O CODE =ISO
EOB CODE =LF/CR/CR PUNCH
F.G. INP DVC = 1 RS232C DVC TYPE = 8
OUT DVC = 1 CHANL1 STOP BITS= 2
B.G. INP DVC = 2 BAUD RATE= 9600
OUT DVC = 2 RS232C DVC TYPE = 8
CHANL2 STOP BITS= 1
BAUD RATE=19200
By SELECT +/ Key, please select

OFF/ON.
MDI *** RSET **** IMG 13:30:32 ALM

SELECT+ SELECT CHAPTER
Press page key <><> to change the screen.

I/O CODE =ISO
EOB CODE =LF PUNCH
F.G. INP DVC = 1 RS232C DVC TYPE = 8
OUT DVC = 1 CHANL3 STOP BITS= 2
B.G. INP DVC = 2 BAUD RATE= 4800
OUT DVC = 2 RS422 DVC TYPE = 8
STOP BITS= 2
BAUD RATE=19200
By SELECT +/ Key, please select

baud rate.
MDI *** RSET **** IMG 13:33:08

Press page key <><> to change the screen.

SETTING(RMTBUF) O0001 N00000
RS422 RS232C
DVC TYPE = 8 DVC TYPE = 7
STOP BITS= 1 STOP BITS= 1
BAUD RATE=86400 BAUD RATE=19200
PROTOCOL = A PROTOCOL =EXT_B
5000 CNV RSV CDC ETX TCC ECH 422

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
5070 86400
FLOPPY CASSETTE, PROGRAM FILE MATE

HANDY FILE (Remote mode)
MDI *** RSET **** IMG 13:34:34 ALM

NOTE 1 Page 2 is displayed only when the reader/punch interface B option has been specified.
NOTE 2 Page 3 is displayed only when the remote buffer interface option has been specified.
281
(3) Specification method

Move the cursor to the desired item and select the value to be specified using the SELECT+ or SE-
LECT key.
NOTE 1 Only the values that fall in the following valid setting range can be selected.
NOTE 2 The parameters can be specified regardless of what the current mode is.
(4) Valid setting range

(a) It is possible to select whether to turn the TV check on or off.
(OFF: No TV check is made. ON: A TV check is made.)
(b) It is possible to select whether to turn the TV (comment) on or off.
(ON: Characters are counted for a TV check during control out.)
(c) For the input/output code system, ISO, EIA, or ASCII can be selected.
(d) For the EOF code, an LF/CR/CR or LF output can be selected.
(e) For input/output devices, item 1, 2, 3, 10, or 13 can be selected.
Setting Channel used Interface used Connector

1 Channel1 RS232C JD5A of main CPU board
2 Channel2 RS232C JD5B of main CPU board
3 Channel3 RS232C JD5J of main CPU board
10 Channel10 Remote buffer JD5C or JD6A of option 1 board
RS232C or RS422
(*Select by parameter 500#0)
13 Channel13 RS422 JD6D of sub board
(f) The following number can be specified for device specification:
1 RS232C or RS422 except for remote buffer:
Number Device Specification
1 Tape reader with serial interface (Control codes DC1-DC4 are used)
2 Tape reader with serial interface (Control codes are not used)
3 Personal computer (Control codes DC1-DC4 are used)
4 Personal computer (Control codes are not used)
5 Tape reader with rewinding function
6 FANUC PPR, Handy file (local mode)
7 FANUC cassette (bubble cassette)
8 FANUC Floppy cassette, Handy File (Remote mode)
FANUC Program File Mate
2 RS232C or RS422 for Remote Buffer

Number Device Specification
0 Personal computer
7 FANUC Cassette (bubble cassette)
8 FANUC Floppy cassette, Handy File (Remote mode)
FANUC Program File Mate
*Specification number 7 is used for RS232C only.

(g) Number of stop bits is 1 or 2.
(h) The following value can be selected for baud rate:
282
1 Other than remote buffer

RS232C RS422
1200 1200
2400 2400
4800 4800
9600 9600
19200 19200
2 Remote buffer
RS232C RS422
1200 1200
2400 2400
4800 4800
9600 9600
19200 19200
38400
76800
86400
(i) For the remote buffer, protocol B, extended protocol B, or protocol A can be select.
NOTE 1 Extended protocol A is included in protocol A.

NOTE 2 Switching between protocol A and extended protocol A is controlled according to the <SET>
parameter.
* See the supplementary descriptions of the remote buffer for details.

(5) Parameters
Setting items Corresponding parameter/ bit no. Setting value

TV check Parameter 0000#0 (TVC) On: (0) Off: (1)
TV (comment) Parameter 0000#1 (CTV) On: (0) Off: (1)
Input/Output code Parameter 0000#2 (ISP) EIA : #4 =1
Parameter 0000#4 (EIA) ISO : #4/#2 =0,0
ASCII : #4/#2 =0,1
EOB code Parameter 0000#3 (NCR) LF/CR/CR punch (0)
LF punch (1)
Input device Parameter 0020 for forground * * * *
Parameter 0022 for background 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 13, 15, 16
Output device Parameter 0021 for forground
* : Set on parameter screen
Parameter 0023 for background
Device specification Parameter no. 5110, 5120, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
5130, 5140,
5150, 5160
Stop bits Parameter no. 5111, 5121, 1, 2
5131, 5141,
5151, 5161
Baud rate Parameter no. 5112, 5122, 1, 12
5132, 5142,
5152, 5162 Set 1 to 7 on parameter screen.
283
Setting items Corresponding parameter/ bit no. Setting value

Device RS422 : Parameter no.5071 RS422 : 0, 8
specification RS232C : Parameter no.5081 RS232C : 0, 7, 8
Stop bits RS422 : Parameter no.5072 1, 2
R RS232C : Parameter no.5082
e
m Baud rate RS422 : Parameter no.5073 RS422 : 1, 15
o RS232C : Parameter no.5083
t Set 1 to 7 on parameter screen.
e
RS232C : 1, 12
b
u Set 1 to 7 on parameter screen.
f Protocol RS422 : Parameter no.5074 B : (1)
f RS232C : Parameter no.5084 Extended B : (2)
e A : (3)*1
r *1 Extended protocol is also in-
cluded.
Set HDLC (5) on parameter
screen.
10.18.3 Notes
(1) The device specification, stop bit, and baud rate parameters for RS232 channels 1 to 3 are determined
according to parameter Nos. 5001 to 5003, and those for the RS422, according to parameter No.5013.
If a value other than 1 to 6 is specified for parameter No.5001, 5002, 5003, or 5013, the device specifica-
tion, stop bit, and baud rate corresponding to the parameter is blanked. If the cursor is placed at the blank,
the following message corresponding to each channel appears in the simplified help message frame below
the menu.
Channel 1:
Set 1 to 6 value to parameter 5001.
Channel 2:
Channel 3:
RS422:
1) 14 CRT

TV CHECK = OFF
TV(COMMENT) = ON
IN/OUT CODE = ASCII
EOB CODE = LF/CR/CR PUNCH
F.G. INPUT DVC = 1 RS232C CHANL1 RS232C CHANL3
DVC TYPE = DVC TYPE =
OUTPUT DVC= 1 STOP BITE= STOP BITE=
BAUD RATE= BAUD RATE=
B.G. INPUT DVC = 2
RS232C CHANL2 RS422
OUTPUT DVC= 2 DVC TYPE = DVC TYPE =
STOP BITE= STOP BITE=
BAUD RATE= BAUD RATE=
Please set the parameter 500 2 to 16
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 23:57:40

+ R
284
2) 9 CRT

I/O CODE =ISO
EOB CODE =LF/CR/CR PUNCH
F.G. INP DVC = 1 RS232C DVC TYPE =
OUT DVC = 1 CHANL3 STOP BITS=
B.G. INP DVC = 2 BAUD RATE=
OUT DVC = 2 RS422 DVC TYPE =
STOP BITS=
BAUD RATE=
Please set the parameter 5013 to 16.
MDI *** RSET **** IMG 15:24:55 ALM

(2) If protocol A is selected for the remote buffer, or if the protocol is switched from A to B or extended B, the
power must be switched off and on again.
Similarly, if the stop bit or baud rate for the RS232C or RS422 for the remote buffer, or parameter No.5070
is changed with protocol A selected, the change becomes effective only after the power is switched off and
on again.
10.18.4 Help Message

When the cursor is placed at a menu item, the corresponding help message appears below the menu, as
shown below.
Example TV check: Select off or on using the SELECT+ or SELECT- soft key.
285
10.19 Screen for Specifying HighSpeed and HighPrecision Machining

The parameters for highspeed and highprecision machining can be specified on this screen. Since data is
entered in the parameter fields according to the units of measurement displayed on the screen, it is unneces-
sary to specify the units used for each parameter.
These parameters can be easily specified using the automatic setting function and automatic tuning function.
10.19.1 Screen configuration

The screen for specifying highspeed and highprecision machining is accessed by pressing the <SERVICE>
function key.
One way to display this screen is to press the <SERVICE> soft key several times. Otherwise, press the <SER-
VICE> soft key followed by the <CHAPTER> soft key to display soft keys for each <SERVICE> screen, then
press the <HPCC> soft key.
This screen consists of two pages: Tuning and setting
The parameters required to use highspeed and highprecision machining are displayed on the setting
screen.
The parameters for machining precision are displayed on the tuning screen. Data can be specified in these
parameters for each type of machining on this screen.
To display the operation soft keys, press the < > key to the right of the soft keys.
The above operations can also be used to display other screens.
The first page is used for tuning. HPCC (TUNING) is displayed on the top left of the tuning screen.
The second page is used for setting. To display the setting screen, press the <SETTING> operation soft key
on the tuning screen.
The parameters for highprecision contour control and RISC can be set on the tuning and setting screens.
When the highprecision contour control and RISC options are not provided, asterisks (*) are displayed in the
entry fields for these parameters. When the RISC option is supported by software but the RISC board is not
installed, asterisks are also displayed in the entry fields to indicate the option is unavailable.
Tuning screen (for the 14-inch CRT)
HPCC(TUNING) O0001 N00000

FINE
MEDIUM ROUGH
FINE LEVEL 1 6 20
ACC/DEC LEVEL(5..0..5) 0 0 0
MAX FEED (MM/MIN) 4000 4000 4000
TCONST FOR BIPL (MSEC) 150 100 100
TCONST FOR AIPL (MSEC) 24 40 40
CORNER FEED (MM/MIN) 600 1000 1200
CLAMP BY ACC (MSEC) ******(1) ****** ******
(CIRCLE FEED CLAMP)

RADIUS (MM) 10.000 10.000 10.000
MAX FEED (MM/MIN) 3460 4000 3460
MIN FEED (MM/MIN) 100 100 100
FEED FOWARD (%) 97.65 95.65 94.00
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK
INPUT SLCT AUTO AUX HPCC HPPC CHAPTE

ACTIVE TUNE TUNE SET R
*1 Asterisks are displayed in the entry field for a parameter dedicated to high-precision
contour control or RISC.
286
(Message window displayed on the tuning screen)

FINE
MEDIUM ROUGH
FINE LEVEL 1 6 20
AIPL LEVEL(5..0..5)
ACC/DEC IS MIN DATA 0 0 0
MAX FEEDFOWARD
FEED IS(MM/MIN)
MAX DATA 4000 4000 4000
CLAMP BY ACC PUSH [AUX]KEY
(MSEC) ******(1) ****** ******
(CIRCLE FEED CLAMP)

RADIUS (MM) 10.000 10.000 10.000
MAX FEED (MM/MIN) 3460 4000 3460
MIN FEED (MM/MIN) 100 100 100
FEED FOWARD (%) 97.65 95.65 94.00
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK

(Parameter guidance displayed on the tuning screen

by pressing the <AUX> key)

FINE MEDIUM ROUGH
FINE LEVEL 1520 1540 1560
ACC/DEC LEVEL(5..0..5) 1521 1541 1561
MAX FEED (MM/MIN) 1520 1540 1560
CLAMP BY ACC (MSEC) ****** ****** ******
(CIRCLE FEED CLAMP)

RADIUS (MM) 1526 1546 1566
MAX FEED (MM/MIN) 1527 1547 1567
MIN FEED (MM/MIN) 1528 1548 1568
FEED FOWARD (%) 1529 1549 1569
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK

Setting screen (for a 14-inch CRT)
HPCC(SETTING) O0001 N00000

HPCC MODE ON
G05.1 MODE AUTO ON/OFF OFF
OVERRIDE BY ZAXIS DOWN(ZAG) ON
IGNORE FEED AT PROGRAM OFF
FEED FOWARD ON
MAX FEED(HPCC) 3000 (MM/MIN)
OVERRIDE AT AREA2(ZAG) 90 (%)

HPCC FUNCTION AVAILABLE OR NOT
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 12:34:56 LSK
INPUT ON/OFF AUTO HPCC HPPC CHAPTE

SET TUNE SET R
*1 The 9-inch CRT display does not contain simple help messages at
the bottom of the setting screen.
287
10.19.2 Setting screen

The HPCC (SETTING) screen is called the setting screen.
The parameters required to use highspeed and highprecision machining can be set on the setting screen.
Some parameters cannot be set on this screen. These parameters do not usually need to be changed and
are therefore specified by pressing the <AUTO SET> key.
(1) Operation
To move the cursor, press the cursor keys on the CNC operators panel.
To enable or disable parameters, move the cursor to the corresponding field where ENABLED/DISABLED
is displayed and press the <ON/OFF> soft key.
Whenever the <ON/OFF> soft key is pressed, the parameter is toggled between the enabled and disabled
states.
(2) Automatic Setting
To perform automatic setting, press the <AUTO SET> key, then press the <EXEC> key.
To set the parameters required for highspeed and highprecision machining, be sure to perform automat-
ic setting once before machining.
During automatic setting, the following parameters are set. For details of the functions of the parameters
below.
Parameter No. Setting Function Remarks

0000#5 1 Disables highspeed pulse distribution. A
1009#0 1 Specifies axis control by RISC. B
1601#0 1 Enables acceleration clamp during circular interpolation. B
7559#1 1 Enables deceleration at corners A
7565#0 1 Enables highprecision contour control. A
7565#4 1 Enables feedrate override according to the Zaxis A
descent angle. A
7567 Same setting as Maximum feedrate under highprecision contour control. A
parameter 1422
A
7591 90 Override in area 2 (ZAG)
A
A
1808#3 1 PI control
C
1811#2 1 Enables advance feedforward.
1883#1 1 Enables feedforward.
1884#4 1 Enables high speed reading of feedrate feedback.
1962 50 Feedforward feedrate factor (50%)
1518 9400 Lower limit of feedforward for automatic calculation
(94%)
The parameters corresponding to A in the remark fields are set only after the highprecision contour control
or RISC option has been specified.
The parameters corresponding to B in the remark fields are set only after the RISC option has been specified.
After the parameter corresponding to C in the remark field is changed, the power must be turned off then on
again. Otherwise, an alarm occurs.
The automatic setting function transfers the above settings to the relevant parameters. If the automatic setting
function is performed after data is specified for parameters, the settings specified by the function are overwritten
by these settings.
The automatic setting function can be disabled with the NAS bit of parameter 1517.
288
10.19.3 Tuning screen

The HPCC (TUNING) screen is called the tuning screen.
(1) Operation
On the 14inch CRT three sets of parameters corresponding to three machining types are displayed on
a single screen. On the 9inch CRT, these parameters are displayed separately for each machining type.
In this case, change the current machining type (finishing (FINE), semifinishing (MEDIUM), and roughing
(ROUGH)) with the <PAGE> key.
(2) Transferring Parameters
The three types of parameters for finishing, semifinishing, and roughing are displayed on the tuning
screen.
When one of these parameter sets is selected, these settings are automatically used for the corresponding
machining.
The parameter settings vary according to the type of machining.
Of the three sets of parameters, the parameters of the currently enabled machining type are called active
parameters.
The title of the machining type (FINE, MEDIUM, or ROUGH) of the active parameters is displayed in re-
verse video.
The settings of active parameters are transferred to the parameters which the CNC actually processes dur-
ing machining. These parameters are called execution parameters.
When active parameters are input, the parameters modified on the setting screen and the execution pa-
rameters are rewritten. For instance, the difference in feedrate at corners is specified in parameter 1478.
This valve is also specified in parameter 1524 for FINE, parameter 1544 for MEDIUM, or parameter 1564
for ROUGH. When parameters for FINE are active and the difference in feedrate at corners for FINE is
input, the value is specified in parameter 1524 and parameter 1478. When the difference in feedrate at
corners for MEDIUM or ROUGH is input, the value is only specified in parameter 1544 or 1564, because
the parameters for MEDIUM and ROUGH are inactive.
FINE
Parameter 1524
Execution parameter

MEDIUM Parameter 1478
Parameter 1544

ROUGH
Parameter 1564
Fig. 10.19.3 When the Difference in Feedrate at Corners Is Input in Each Mode
(FINE Parameters are Active)
(3) [INPUT]
When parameters for each axis, including the parameter for the time constant after interpolation, are set
on the screen, these values are converted so that they conform to the units of measurement for each axis,
then they are input for each axis.
To set parameters separately for each axis, enter data in parameters on the parameter screen.
Press the <AUX> key to display parameter numbers. It is possible to change the screen page according
to the displayed parameter number for the necessary parameter setting.
(4) [AUX]
When the <AUX> key is pressed, parameter numbers are displayed. To cancel this state, press the <AUX>
key again. The previous screen is redisplayed.
When the automatic tuning function is used, a window may be opened to display a message for a calculation
result. While the window is open, all operations are disabled. Press the <AUX> key to close the window.
Changing the screen clears parameter numbers and closes any open message window.
289
(5) [AUTO TUNE]

When the <AUTO TUNE] key is pressed, parameters for a certain level of cutting (FINE LEVEL) can be
automatically calculated and set.
To make automatic adjustments, press the <AUTO TUNE> key then press the <FINE>, <MEDIUM>, or
<ROUGH> soft key.
Before automatic tuning, the following values must be specified in each mode.
FINE LEVEL
Maximum feedrate (Same setting regardless of the mode)
Time constant before interpolation
Loop gain for the servo (parameter 1825) (Same setting regardless of the mode)
All values except for the servo loop gain can be specified on the tuning screen. When the above parame-
ters are not set, a message window is opened to indicate that calculation is not impossible.
Messages concerning the results of automatic calculation may also be displayed.
Press the <AUX> key to close the window.
The automatic setting function can be disabled with the NAS bit of parameter 1517.
CAUTION The automatic tuning function is only used to set standard values. Actual error is a slightly
different from the error calculated during setting due to servo system delay.
(6) FINE LEVEL

FINE LEVEL refers to the degree of finishing. The degree of finishing has no unit of measurement. When
FINE LEVEL is specified as 1, the CNC calculates to obtain a precision of 10 microns. When FINE LEVEL
is specified as 10, the CNC calculates to obtain a precision of 100 microns.
(7) SLCT ACTIVE
To select active parameters, press the <SLCT ACTIVE> key and press the <FINE>, <MEDIUM>, or
<ROUGH> soft keys. The title of the selected mode is displayed in reverse video. The settings of all the
parameters recorded in each mode are transferred to the execution parameters.
(8) Specifying Values in Parameters for Each axis
To specify values in parameters separately for each axis, press the <AUX> key to display parameter num-
bers. Enter data in parameters on the parameter screen.
When different values are specified in parameters for each axis, asterisks (*) are displayed in the corre-
sponding fields on the setting screen.
To transfer the values entered in active parameters to the execution parameters, specify the active param-
eters as active although they are already active.
Active parameters need not be selected to only rewrite the settings of execution parameters. When the
settings of the execution parameters are rewritten in this way, the display of the settings on the setting
screen remains unchanged.
(9) Increment System Conversion
When setting parameters, one must be aware of the increment system being used. However, on the high
precision contour control (HPCC) screen, data is always specified in parameters using the increment sys-
tem. For example, to specify a maximum speed of 4000 mm/min, 400 is specified when the increment
system is 0.001 mm (ISB) and 4000 is specified when the increment system is 0.0001 mm (ISC). How-
ever, on the HPCC screen, 4000 is entered.
(10)Correspondence to Execution Parameters
The following table shows the correspondence between the parameter numbers for each mode on the tun-
ing screen and the numbers of execution parameters. When active parameters are selected or entered,
the contents of the active parameters are transferred to the execution parameters with the following num-
bers. The execution parameters are the conventional parameters for each function.
290
Execution
FINE MEDIUM ROUGH
parameter No.
FINE LEVEL 1520 1540 1560 None
ACC/DEC LEVEL 1521 1541 1561 None
MAX FEED 1630 1640 1660 1630
TCONST FOR BIPL 1523 1543 1563 1631
TCONST FOR AIPL 1522 1542 1562 1635(*1)
1482(*2)
1622(*3)
CORNER FEED 1524 1544 1564 1478
CLAMP BY ACC(*4) 1525 1545 1565 1643
(CIRCLE FEED CLAMP)
RADIUS 1526 1546 1566 1492
MAX FEED 1527 1547 1567 1490
MIN FEED 1528 1548 1568 1491
FEED FORWARD 1529 1549 1569 1985
*1 When feedforward is enabled

*2 When feedforward is disabled and HPCC is enabled
*3 When feedforward and HPCC are disabled
*4 Displayed only when the highprecision contour control and RISC options are provided
(11)Settings on the Adjustment Screen
[FINE LEVEL] Enter the level of finishing.
When the finishing level is specified as 1, the CNC calculates to obtain a precision
of approx. 10 microns.
Valid data range: 1 to 100 (approx. 10 microns to 1 mm)
[ACC/DEC LEVEL] Specify the degree of acceleration/deceleration that corresponds to the following
levels.
The current acceleration can be changed according to the following ratio.
Level 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5
Coefficient 2.00 1.67 1.43 1.25 1.11 1.00 0.90 0.80 0.70 0.60 0.50
[MAX FEED] This parameter determines the rate of the acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation.
The acceleration/deceleration before interpolation depends on this parameter and
the time constant.
Acceleration is calculated by dividing [MAX FEED] by [TCONST FOR BIPL].
Because of this, it is not necessary to specify the maximum feedrate in this parameter.
This parameter is common to all three machining modes.
[TCONST FOR BIPL] This parameter determines the rate the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.
The parameter specifies the time that elapses until [MAX FEED] is obtained.
[MAX FEED] is common to the three machining modes (FINE, MEDIUM, and
ROUGH). The degrees of acceleration in each mode can be checked with the setting
of the [TCONST FOR BIPL] parameter.
[CORNER FEED] When the difference in the feedrate between two blocks is greater than the feedrate
specified in this parameter, the tool decelerates to this feedrate.
The smaller the setting of this parameter, the higher the precision. Although this
reduces potential damage to the machine, more time is required for machining.
[CLAMP BY ACC] This parameter is enabled only when the highprecision contour control and RISC
options are provided. When an acceleration greater than the acceleration specified
in this parameter is applied to blocks, the tool decelerates to the specified acceleration
or slower.
The greater the setting of the parameter, the smaller the allowable acceleration.
291
This enables high precision machining and reduces potential damage to the machine.
This parameter has a default value of the same acceleration as for acceleration/
deceleration before interpolation during automatic tuning.
[RADIUS] This parameter is used to clamp the feedrate according to the radius of an arc.
The acceleration is calculated with [MAX FEED] according to the radius specified in
the parameter.
[MAX FEED] Specify the maximum allowable feedrate for the radius specified in the above
parameter.
The default value of the maximum feedrate is calculated during automatic tuning so
that the same acceleration as that for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is
applied to the tool.
[MIN FEED] Specify the minimum feedrate at which the feedrate is clamped.
[FEED FORWARD] Specify a feedforward factor.
Do not change this parameter in a state other than the emergency stop state.
The following shows notes on using the setting screen:
CAUTION 1 Specifying a feedforward factor on the tuning screen

The feedforward factor is transferred to the servo only when the power is turned on or when
the system enters the emergency stop state. Be sure to specify the feedforward factor in
the emergency stop state. Active parameters can be selected only in the emergency stop
state.
CAUTION 2 When the deceleration ratio for the rotation axis is too high
An overflow occurs in the servo software during calculation for feedforward. An alarm may
also occur for the rotation axis immediately after automatic tuning, indicating an incorrect
digital parameter. In this case, set the bit of the following parameter to 1 for the axis.
Parameter number 1804 Bit number 4
For the description of the parameter, refer to the servo maintenance manual.
CAUTION 3 When the machine vibrates after automatic setting

When the machine is operated after automatic setting, it may vibrates along an axis. In this
case, set the bit of the following parameter to 0. When this bit is 1, it is possible that the
machine may vibrate.
Parameter number 1884 Bit number 4
NOTE 1 Conditions for enabling data to be entered on the setting screen

Data can be entered on the setting screen when the following conditions are met:
When bit 0 (PWE) of parameter 8000 = 1:
1. In the MDI mode: Data can be entered with keys.
2. In the emergency stop state
NOTE 2 This screen can be erased by setting bit 2 of parameter No. 15#2 to 1.
NOTE 3 If a lower limit for the feedforward factor for automatic adjustment (parameter No. 1518) has
been set, this lower limit is always used for the feedforward factor when a higher finish level
than a predetermined level is specified. In this case, the time constant after interpolation and
other items that are calculated from the feedforward factor are all the same value for different
cases. As a result, the same result may be calculated automatically for different finish levels.
If such a problem occurs, set parameter No. 1518 to 0, then retry automatic adjustment.
292
10.19.4 Example of the procedure for using the tuning screen

The following is a flowchart showing an example of how to use the tuning screen.
This flowchart starts in a state in which nothing is specified and ends in a state in which highprecision contour
control is enabled.
In this example the parameters for FINE are specified as active.
Press the<SERVICE> soft key several times to display the HPCC (TUNING) screen.
Press the key < >to display the operation soft keys, then press the <HPCC SET> soft key.
The HPCC (SETTING) screen is displayed.
Press the <AUTO SET> soft key,

(At this time, a power-off alarm may occur.)
then press the <EXEC> soft key.
Press the <HPCC TUNE> soft key to redisplay the HPCC

(TUNING) screen.
Set the following parameters for FINE:

Specify 1 in the FINE LEVEL field. (This setting indicates the highest
level of finishing.)
Specify the maximum feedrate in the MAX FEED field.
Specify the time constant in the T-CONST FOR BIPL field.
Check whether the title ("FINE" or any other title) is

being displayed in reverse video.
Title "FINE" Other title
Press the <SLCT ACTIVE> soft key

and press the <FINE> soft key.
Press the <AUTO TUNE> soft key A message indicating that calculation
and press the <FINE> soft key. is not possible is displayed.
Set necessary parameters

again.
High-precision contour control is

enabled.
10.19.5 Setting by specifying accelerations

The highspeed & highprecision machining (adjustment) screen has been enhanced by the addition of a new
entry method that supports the specification of accelerations in addition to conventional parameter entry. Spec-
ifying accelerations enables the automatic calculation of the following parameters.
Specified acceleration Automatically calculated parameter
Acceleration/deceleration before interpola- Time constant before interpolation
tion (Nos. 1523, 1543, and 1563)
Clamp acceleration Acceleration clamp
(Nos. 1525, 1545, and 1565)
Acceleration Maximum speed
(Nos. 1527, 1547, and 1567)
293
Operating procedure
1 Press the function menu key so that the function selection soft key display appears.
2 Press the [SERVICE] key several times until the highspeed & highprecision machining screen appears.
Alternatively, press the [CHAPTER] key so that the chapter selection soft key display appears, then press
the [HPCC] key.
3 If the [ACC INPUT] key is displayed, press it to select acceleration input mode. If the [PARAM INPUT] key
is displayed, acceleration input mode has already been selected.
When the input mode is switched from parameter input to acceleration input, some items will be changed
for acceleration input.
NOTE 1 To select acceleration input mode (or parameter input mode), the following conditions must be
satisfied.
Bit 0 (PWE) of parameter No. 8000 = 1, and
1. The current mode is MDI, and key entries are acceptable, or
2. The current state is emergency stop.
NOTE 2 When accelerations are specified, each parameter is calculated automatically according to the
following expression:
Time constant before Maximum speed [mm/min] 1/60 [min/sec]

interpolation [msec]
=
Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [mm/sec/sec] 1/1000 [sec/msec]
Time constant before interpolation :

Parameter 2 for specifying acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation (Nos. 1523, 1543, and 1563)
Maximum speed : Parameter 1 for specifying acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation (No. 1630). If 0 is specified, the maximum cutting
feedrate (No. 1422) for the reference axis is used.
Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation :
Acceleration/deceleration applied before interpolation
Reference axis maximum cutting feedrate [mm/min] 1/60 [min/sec]
Acceleration clamp [msec] =
Clamp acceleration [mm/sec/sec] 1/1000 [sec/msec]
Acceleration clamp : Parameter for determining the allowable acceleration used to determine
a speed by acceleration, for highspeed contour control (Nos. 1525,
1545, and 1565)
Reference axis maximum cutting feedrate:
Maximum cutting feedrate along the reference axis (No. 1422)
Clamp acceleration : Acceleration applied in acceleration clamping
Maximum speed [msec] = 60 SQRT (Radius [mm] Acceleration [mm/sec/sec/] )
Maximum speed : Upper speed limit applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius (Nos. 1527,
1547, and 1567)
Radius : Arc radius applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius (Nos. 1526, 1546,
and 1566). If 0 is specified, the radius is assumed to be 5 [mm] (for
millimeter machines) or 1 [inch] (for inch machines).
Acceleration : Acceleration applied to feedrate clamping by arc radius
294
10.20 M Code Group Function

This function enables the display of M codes that are currently being executed, or those which have been
executed, by classifying them into several functional groups. The group number (up to 127 groups can be set)
and function name of each M code can be specified from the M code group setting screen or by using a pro-
gram. The user can thereby check, on the screen, the M functions executed on the machine.
For the program restart M/S/T/B code output function, the last M code can be output for each M code group.
This function can also be used to check whether the combination of multiple (up to five) M codes specified in
a block is correct.
10.20.1 Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently Being Executed or Which Have Already Been
Executed
Display the screen for displaying M codes currently being executed or which have already been executed (M-
CODE DISPLAY screen), as follows:
(1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys.
(2) Press the [PRG _CHK] soft key.
(3) If the M-CODE DISPLAY screen does not appear, switch the screen by performing either of the following
operations:
a. Press the [PRG_CHK] soft key repeatedly until the M-CODE DISPLAY screen appears.
b. Press the [CHAPTER] soft key to display the chapter selection soft keys. Then, press the [M-DISP] soft
key.
[9 CRT Screen]
MCODE DISPLAY O0111 N00001

MCG MCODE NAME
001 03 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
002 10 11 12 13 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
003 20 21 VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
004 30 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
005 40 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
010 100 101 102 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
011 110 111 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
012 120 QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
013 130 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
014 140 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
>
MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
CHAPTER+
Underlined M codes: Already executed

Highlighted M code: Currently being executed
The MCG field displays the M code groups (1 to 127) that have been registered with the M-CODE GROUP
SETTING screen. To display another set of M code groups, press a page key. M code groups that have
not been registered are not displayed.
295
The M-CODE field displays the five most recent M codes for each M code group, with the latest on the right.
An M code which is currently being executed in the current block is highlighted. M codes which have al-
ready been executed are displayed in green or by varying the intensity, according to whether a color or
monochrome CRT is being used, respectively.
The five M codes, however, can be displayed only when they are of two-digit format. If M codes using three
or more digits are included, as many of the five M codes as will fit on a line are displayed.
The NAME field displays the name of the last-specified M code for each group.
[14 CRT Screen]

MCG MCODE NAME MCG MCODE NAME
001 03 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD 030 300 301 302 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR

002 10 11 12 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 031 310 311 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
003 20 21 22 23 VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV 032 320 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
004 30 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 033 330 SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
005 40 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 034 340 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
010 100 101 102 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
011 110 111 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
012 120 QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
014 140 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
020 200 201 202 VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
021 210 211 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
022 220 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM
023 230 WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
024 240 GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG
>
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
CHAPTE
R

10.20.2 M,S,T,B Codes Output for Program Restart

On the program restart screen, M codes, found during the search for the program restart position, as well as
those output with MDI or overstore, can be displayed for each M code group. The last M code can also be output
for each M code group.
(1) Displaying M codes for each M code group after restarting the program
The program restart function supports the display of M codes for each M code group, as follows:
(a) Using the program restart function, search for the program restart position and display the program restart
screen.
[9 CRT Screen]
PROGRAM RESTART O0111 N00200

(DESTINATION) BC: 00000000
X 200.000 M 03 10 11 12 13
Y 0.000 20 21 30 40 100
Z 500.000 101 102 110 111
120 130 140 **
** ** ** ** **
(DIST TO GO) ** ** ** ** **
X 1000.000 ** ** ** ** **
Y 0.000 ** ** ** ** **
Z 2000.000 T 101 102
S 200
B **
ACT.F 0 S: (RPM)
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

INPUT MCGDSP CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER
296
[14 CRT Screen]
PROGRAM RESTART O1111 N00001
(DESTINATION) (DIST TO GO)

X 200.000 X 1000.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 500.000 Z 2000.000
BC: 00000000
M 03 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 (ACTUAL SPEED)
40 100 101 102 110 111 120
130 140 ** ** ** ** ** ** F 0
** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** (MM/MIN)
T 101 102 S 0
S 200 (RPM)
B **
>
MEM***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT MCG CLEAR OVERST CHAPTE

DISP ORE R
(b) Press the [MCG-DSP] soft key to display the M codes, found during the search, for each M code group.
Note that these M codes are not displayed on the M-CODE DISPLAY screen described.
[9 CRT Screen]
MCODE DISP IN P.RESTART O0111 N00200

MCG MCODE BC: 00000000
001 03 M 03 10 11 12 13
002 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 40 100
003 20 21 101 102 110 111
004 30 120 130 140 **
005 40 ** ** ** ** **
010 100 101 102 ** ** ** ** **
011 110 111 ** ** ** ** **
012 120
013 130 T 101 102
014 140 S 200
B **
ACT.F 0 S: (RPM)
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

INPUT P.RSTRT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER
297
To display another set of M code groups, press a page key. The [OVERSTORE] soft key can be used to
output M, S, T, and B codes.
[14 CRT Screen]
MCODE DISPLAY IN P.RESTART O1111 N00001

MCG MCODE MCG MCODE
001 03 020 200 201 202 203
002 10 11 12 13 14 021 210 211
003 20 21 022 220
004 30 023 230
005 40 024 240
010 100 101 102 103 030 300 301 302 303
011 110 111 031 310 311
012 120 032 320
013 130 033 330
014 140 034 340
BC: 00000000
M 103 110 111 120 130 140 (ACTUAL SPEED)
200 201 202 203 210 211
220 230 240 300 301 302 F 0
303 310 311 320 330 340 (MM/MIN)
T 101 102 S 0
S 200 (RPM)
B **
>
MEM***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT PRGRAM CLEAR OVERST CHAPTE

RESTRT ORE R
NOTE Pressing the [MCG-DSP] soft key displays the above screen, regardless of the number of axes
under the control of the CNC.
(c) When M codes have been output to the PMC with MDI or overstore, after the search for the program restart
position, the M code which is currently being executed is highlighted and those M codes that have already
been executed are displayed in green or in a different intensity, according to whether a color or mono-
chrome CRT is being used, respectively.
For example, when M13 and M14 have been output after search for the program restart position and M14
is being executed, the screen will appear as follows:
[9 CRT Screen]

001 03 M 03 10 11 12 13
002 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 40 100
003 20 21 101 102 110 111
004 30 120 130 140 **
005 40 ** ** ** ** **
010 100 101 102 ** ** ** ** **
011 110 111 ** ** ** ** **
012 120
013 130 T 101 102
014 140 S 200
B **
ACT.F 0 S: (RPM)
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

INPUT P.RSTRT CLEAR OVRSTR CHAPTER+

298
At this time, the M-CODE DISPLAY screen appears as follows:

MCG MCODE NAME
001
002 13 14 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
003
004
005
010
011
012
013
014
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

CHAPTER+

(d) Pressing the [P. RSTRT] soft key returns to the program restart screen (a).
(2) Output of the last M code
Bit 0 (MCGO) of parameter No.7710 can be used to select whether the last M code is output for each M
code group or not, when automatically output the last M code by means of the program restart M/S/T/B
code output function.
1) When bit 0 (MCGO) of parameter No.7710 is 0, only the last M code found during the search is output.
Example When the last M code is M140, the screen will appear as follows:

001 03 M 03 10 11 12 13
002 10 11 12 13 14 20 21 30 40 100
003 20 21 101 102 110 111
004 30 120 130 140 **
005 40 ** ** ** ** **
010 100 101 102 ** ** ** ** **
011 110 111 ** ** ** ** **
012 120
014 140 140 S 200
B **
ACT.F 0 S: (RPM)
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

2) When bit 0 (MCGO) of parameter No.7710 is 1, the last M code for each M code group found during
the search is output.
Example When the last M code for each group is M03, M14, M21, M30, M40, M102, M111, M120,
M130, and M140 and the last M code (M40) of group 005 is being executed, the screen will
appear as follows:
299

001 03 03 M 03 10 11 12 13
002 11 12 13 14 14 20 21 30 40 100
003 20 21 21 101 102 110 111
004 30 30 120 130 140 **
005 40 40 ** ** ** ** **
010 100 101 102 ** ** ** ** **
011 110 111 ** ** ** ** **
012 120
013 130 T 101 102
014 140 S 200
B **
ACT.F 0 S: (RPM)
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

CAUTION The last M code data for a group is lost, thus cannot be output, if five or more M codes of
a group have already been output with MDI or overstore.
10.20.3 M Code Group Check Function

The check, described below, can be performed for multiple M codes specified in a single block. Bit 3 (MGCK)
of parameter No.7710 is used to select whether the check is performed.
(1) Check for M codes which must be specified alone
An alarm occurs if an M code, which must be specified alone, is specified with another M code in a single
block.
(2) Check for M codes of the same group
An alarm occurs if M codes of the same group are specified in a single block.
Group numbers from 0 to 127 can be set. Group numbers 0 and 1, however, both have special meaning.
A 0 indicates M codes for which no check is required, while 1 indicates M codes which must be specified
alone.
10.20.4 Details of Grouping M codes

(1) M-code Group Setting Screen
Display the M-CODE SETTING screen as follows:
(1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys.
(2) Press the [SERVICE] soft key.
(3) If the M-CODE SETTING screen does not appear, switch the screen by performing either of the follow-
ing operations:
a. Press the [SERVICE] soft key repeatedly until the M-CODE SETTING screen appears.
b. Press the [CHAPTER] soft key to display the chapter selection soft keys. Then, press the [M-CODE]
soft key.
300
[9 CRT SCREEN]
MCODE GROUP SETTING O0111 N00001

CODE GROUP NAME
0001 1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
0002 1 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
0003 1 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
0004 1 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
0005 1 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
0006 1 GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG
0007 1 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
0008 1 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII
0009 1 JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
>
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT PUNCH INP_NO +
The M code group number (GROUP) for each M code (CODE) can be set on this screen. The M code
name (NAME) set by a program can also be checked for each M code on this screen. The above
shows an example where M codes are represented using four digits. M codes can be represented
using up to eight digits, depending on the corresponding parameter setting.
M code groups can be set for M00 to M99, and up to 400 additional M codes, numbered starting from
M100, can be specified by the user (see Parameter Manual for an explanation of how to add M codes).
To set the M code group number for an M code, use the cursor keys or the [INP_NO] soft key to move
the cursor to the M code, then enter the group number. M code group numbers can be entered consec-
utively by separating them with a semicolon (;) . M code groups can be numbered from 1 to 127. When
0 is entered, the M code is not registered in an M code group. To display another sets of M
codes, press a page key.
Only 0 can be set for those M codes which call a subprogram, such as M98 and M99. Data can be
entered only when the PWE bit of parameter No.8000 is set to 1. This setting is made from the setting
screen.
A function name of up to 20 characters can be specified uniquely for each M code in the M code name
(NAME) field. M code names, however, cannot be entered directly on the M-CODE GROUP SETTING
screen. See Item, Input/output of M code group numbers and M code names for an explanation of
how to set M code names.
[14 CRT SCREEN]
MCODE GROUP SETTING O0111 N00001

CODE GRP NAME CODE GRP NAME
0000 0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 0015 2 PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP

0001 1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB 0016 2 QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
0002 1 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC 0017 2 RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR
0003 1 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD 0018 2 SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
0004 1 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE 0019 2 TTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTT
0005 1 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 0020 3 UUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU
0006 1 GGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGGG 0021 3 VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV
0007 1 HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH 0022 3 WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW
0008 1 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 0023 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
0009 1 JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ 0024 3 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
0010 2 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK 0025 3 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
0011 2 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL 0026 3 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
0012 2 MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM 0027 3 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
0013 2 NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN 0028 3 CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
0014 2 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 0029 3 DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
>
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT PUNCH INPUT CHAPTE

NUMBER R
(2) Input/ output of M code group numbers and M code names

M code group numbers and M code names can be set by executing a program. The numbers and names
can be output to external devices.
301
(a) Setting by G10

G10 L40 Pn Rg ( ) ;
Pn : Specify an M code in n.
Rg : Specify an M code group number in g.
( ) : Specify an M code name in parentheses.
Alphanumerics and special characters can be directly specified. When using
Japnese characters, provided Japanese character input is enabled (bit 3(JPN)
of parameter No.2205 is set to 1), specify the internal code for each character
(four hexadecimal digits for Kanji and Hiragana characters, or two hexadecimal
digits for Katakana characters) prefixed and suffixed with @. The character @,
therefore, cannot be used in an M code name.
Up to 20 characters, excluding @, can be specified in parentheses. The two
hexadecimal digits of an internal code are regarded as being one character. Up
to ten @s (five pairs) can be specified.
NOTE M code names are not displayed on the program/program check screen even when blocks for
specifying M code names are executed.
Example When the following program is executed, M code group 1 and M code name SPINDLE are
set for M03:
G10 L40 P03 R1 (SPINDLE@84647B5F@) ;
The number of characters in parentheses is as follows:
SPINDLE 7 characters
@
8464 ( ) 2 characters 2 pcs (One pair)
7B5F ( ) 2 characters
@
(b) Output to external devices
M code group numbers and M code names can be output, via the RS 232C interface, to external de-
vices such as a Floppy Cassette by pressing the [PUNCH] soft key on the M code group setting
screen.
Data is output in G10 format (described in (1) ), without a program number, with file name M CODE
GROUP.
NOTE The options for the reader/punch interface and programmable data input (G10) must
bespecified.
(3) Notes
(a) Part program length reduces by 45 meters when this option is combined.
302
10.21 Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function

This function can set the workpiece zero point offset value on the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen so that the
current workpiece position becomes the new workpiece zero point or coincides with a specified position.
10.21.1 Screen Selection

(1) Display the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen according to the following procedure.
1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys.
2) Press the OFFSET soft key.
3) If the workpiece zero point offset screen does not appear, switch the screen by performing either of
the following two steps.
a. Press the OFFSET soft key repeatedly until the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen appears.
b. Press the CHAPTER soft key to display the chapter selection soft keys, then press the WORK
ZERO soft key.
(2) The following data is newly displayed as shown in the example below.
1) Currently selected workpiece coordinate system G code on the second line from the top
2) Current machine coordinates in the lower right section
9 CRT Screen (when no. of controlled axes is 5)

CURRENT G54
NO. 00 (COMMOM) NO. 02 (G55)
X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000
NO. 01 (G54) (MACHINE)
X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000
>
MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT +INPUT MEASURE TL_INP INP_NO +
Operation Selection key
INPUT +INPUT MEASURE TLINP INPNO
PUNCH CHGDSP CURRENT
Guide key
EXEC (VALUE)
EXEC
303
14 CRT Screen (when the no. of controlled axes is 7)

CURRENT G54.1 P02
NO.00 (COMMON) NO.02 (G55) NO.04 (G57) NO.06 (G59)

X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000
C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000
NO.01 (G54) NO.03 (G56) NO.05 (G58) (MACHINE)

X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000
C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000
>
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT +INPUT MEASUR TL INP INPUT PUNCH CURRNT CHAPTE

E NEMBER POS R
Operation selection key

MEASUR INPUT CURRNT CHAPT
INPUT +INPUT E TL_INP PUNCH
NUMBER POS ER
Guide key
EXEC
10.21.2 Operation method

(1) To specify a workpiece offset that makes the current position (machine coordinates) become the workpiece
coordinate system origin:
Step 1 Place the cursor on the desired coordinate system axis on the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen.
2 PUNCH CHG_DSP CURRENT CHAPTER +
3 EXEC (VALUE) +
(2) To specify a workpiece offset that makes the current position coincide with a certain point () in the work-
piece coordinate system:
Step 1 Place the cursor on the desired coordinate system axis in the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen.
2 PUNCH CHG_DSP CURRENT CHAPTER +
3 Input the coordinate value from the MDI panel.
4 EXEC +
NOTE 1 The CURRENT soft key becomes effective when parameter WZMS (bit 3 of parameter No.
1200) is 1.
NOTE 2 When the cursor is at workpiece zero point offset No.00 (COMMON) , an attempt to manually
specify the workpiece zero point is rejected, and the warning message EXTERNAL
WORKPIECE ZERO NOT INPUT will appear.
304
<Example of operation>
(1) When an external workpiece zero point (offset specified at COMMON in WORK ZERO OFFSET
screen) and workpiece coordinate system 1 (G54) are specified
1) If an operation (operation (1) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates:
X100. , Y200.) becomes the zero point of workpiece coordinate system 1
250
G A : External workpiece zero point offset

200 Current B : Original G54 workpiece zero point offset
position C : New G54 workpiece zero point offset
D : Machine coordinate value display
E : Absolute coordinate value before setting
F : Original workpiece coordinate zero point
G : New workpiece coordinate zero point
E
150
D C F
100
50
External workpiece zero point
X
Machine 50 100 150 200 250 300
zero point
Before operation NO. 00 (COMMON) NO. 01 (G54) MACHINE ABSOLUTE

X 50. 000 X 100. 000 X 100. 000 X 50. 000
Y 50. 000 Y 50. 000 Y 200. 000 Y 100. 000
After operation NO. 00 (COMMON) NO. 01 (G54) MACHINE ABSOLUTE
X 50. 000 X 50. 000 X 100. 000 X 0. 000
Y 50. 000 Y 150. 000 Y 200. 000 Y 0. 000
305
2) If an operation (: X-50. , Y-50. in operation (2) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine
coordinates: X100. , Y200. ) coincides with position (X-50. , Y- 50.) in workpiece coordinate system
1
250
A : External workpiece zero point offset
B : Original G54 workpiece zero point offset
C : New G54 workpiece zero point offset
D : Machine coordinate value display
E : Absolute coordinate value before setting
200 G F : Original workpiece coordinate zero point
H : Input value (X-50. , Y-50.)
Current H
position
150
E
100 F
B
50 External workpiece zero point
X
Machine 50 100 150 200 250 300
zero point

X 50. 000 X 100. 000 X 50. 000 X 50. 000
Y 200. 000 Y 50. 000 Y 150. 000 Y 50. 000
X 50. 000 X 100. 000 X 50. 000 X 50. 000
Y 200. 000 Y 150. 000 Y 150. 000 Y 50. 000
306
(2) When a local coordinate system (G52) is specified

1) If an operation (operation (1) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates: X50.
, Y150.) becomes the origin of workpiece coordinate system 1, on the assumption that the external
workpiece zero point offset is (X0. , Y0.)
250
A : Original G54 workpiece zero point offset

B : New G54 workpiece zero point offset
C : Machine coordinate value display
200 D : Absolute coordinate value before setting
E : Local coordinate system offset (no change)
F : Original workpiece coordinate zero point
Current
position G
150
D
E
F
100
E
C
50 B
X
Machine 50 100 150 200 250 300
zero point

X 0. 000 X 200. 000 X 50. 000 X 100. 000
Y 0. 000 Y 50. 000 Y 150. 000 Y 50. 000
X 0. 000 X 100. 000 X 50. 000 X 0. 000
Y 0. 000 Y 100. 000 Y 150. 000 Y 0. 000
307
(3) When tool length and cutter compensation are specified

1) If an operation (operation (1) ) is performed so that the current tool position (machine coordinates:
X100. , Z100.) becomes the origin of workpiece coordinate system 1 when tool length and cutter com-
pensation are functioning, on the assumption that the external workpiece zero point offset is (X0. , Z0.)
A : Original G54 workpiece zero point offset

Z B : New G54 workpiece zero point offset
C : Machine coordinate value display
D : Absolute coordinate value before setting
E : Original workpiece coordinate zero point
F : New workpiece coordinate zero point
G : Cutter compensation vector = -10.000
200
H : Tool length compensation vector = 20.000
150
100 E D
E
C
50
A
X
Machine 50 100 150 200 250 300
zero point

X 0. 000 X 200. 000 X 100. 000 X 90. 000
Z 0. 000 Z 50. 000 Z 100. 000 Z 30. 000
X 0. 000 X 110. 000 X 100. 000 X 0. 000
Z 0. 000 Z 80. 000 Z 100. 000 Z 0. 000
NOTE The absolute coordinates assume that bits 2 (DTL) and 3 (DCR) of parameter No.2202 are
both 1 (either set of coordinates does not include a distance traveled because of tool length
or cutter compensation).
308
10.21.3 Workpiece zero point measurement B

If there is the tool measurement value B option, the indications on the WORK ZERO OFFSET screen vary de-
pending on parameter WMH (bit 4 of parameter No.6003).
9 CRT
Parameter WMH (NO. 6003#4) = 0

CURRENT G54 (TL)
NO. 00 (COMMOM) NO. 02 (G55)
X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000
NO. 01 (G54) (MACHINE)
X 100.000 X 150.000
Y 100.000 Y 150.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000
>
MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK

CURRENT G54 (TL)
NO. 00 (COMMOM) NO. 01 (G54)
X 0.000 X 100.000
Y 0.000 Y 100.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000
(MACHINE) HOLE MEASURED
X 150.000 #1 0.000
Y 150.000 0.000
Z 0.000 #2 0.000
A 0.000 0.000
B 0.000 #3 0.000
> 0.000
MDI *** STOP **** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
309
14 CRT screen

CURRENT G54.1 P02 (TL) 0.000

X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000
C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000

X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000
C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000 W 0.000
>
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT +INPUT MEASUR TL_INP INPUT PUNCH CURRNT CHAPTE

E NUMBER POS R

CURRENT G54.1 P02 (TL) 0.000

X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000
C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000

X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000
A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000 A 0.000
B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000 B 0.000
C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000 C 0.000
HOLE MEASURED
#1X 0.000 #2X 0.000 #3X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Y 0.000
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 10:10:00 LSK
INPUT +INPUT MEASUR TL_INP INPUT PUNCH CURRNT CHAPTE

E NEMBER POS R
310
10.22 Transverse Inhibit Limit Function

When the absolute coordinate along an axis exceeds the transverse inhibit limit (setsetting parameter
No.5251) during automatic operation, movement along that axis is stopped but the automatic operation contin-
ues, updating the absolute coordinate along axis. That is, operation continues as if the machine lock had been
applied tothe axis. Movement along the axis is resumed when the absolute coordinate again falls within the
range of the transverse inhibit limit.
The operation is identical during manual operation. When the absolute coordinate along an axis exceeds the
transverse inhibit limit during manual operation, movement along that axis is stopped. Any subsequent manual
operation results in the absolute coordinates still being updated, as if the machine lock had been applied to
the axis. Movement along the axis is resumed when the absolute coordinate again falls within the range of the
transverse inhibit limit.
The transverse inhibit limit is checked only along a single axis and in a single direction. This axis is specified
with setting parameter No.5250 and the direction is specified with the TILM bit of setting parameter No.5201.
The figure below outlines operation with the transverse inhibit limit.
(3)

(2) (2)

(1)
+Y
G01 X+ ; (1)

Y+ ; (2)
X ; 3)
+X
Commands (1), (2), and (3) and used to move the tool along the path indicated in the figure by (1), (2) , and
(3) when parameters are set to check the limit along the X-axis in the positive direction.
This function is enabled or disabled by setting the TILE bit of setting parameter No.5201.
CAUTION 1 This function is not available for rotary axis.

CAUTION 2 This function is not available during the following modes.
(1) Selection of machine coordinate system (G53)
(2) Automatic reference position return (G28/G30)
(From the intermediate point to the reference point)
(3) Thread cutting mode (G33)
(4) Tapping mode (G63)
(5) Binary operation (Unit time 2msec)
(6) Manual reference point return
(7) Selection of machine coordinate system of axis control by PMC
CAUTION 3 This function is disabled for the following axes:
(1) The axis subject to three-dimensional coordinate conversion in three-dimensional
coordinate conversion mode (G68)
(2) The axis subject to polar coordinate interpolation in polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G12.1)
(3) The axis subject to cylindrical interpolation in cylindrical interpolation mode (G07.1)
(4) The tapping axis in rigid tapping mode (G84.2/G84.3)
(5) The chopping axis in chopping mode (G81.1)
(6) The axis subject to hobbing in hobbing mode
311
CAUTION 4 When mirror image is specified with a signal (or setting) for an axis during manual operation,
the absolute coordinate along the axis is subjected to mirror image conversion relative to
the actual machine movement.
The limit, at which the tool will be stopped, is compared with the converted absolute
coordinate.
When mirror image is specified with a signal (or setting) for an axis during automatic
operation, the absolute coordinate indicates the coordinate specified with the command,
while the machine coordinate and actual machine movement are subject to mirror image
conversion. The limit, at which the tool will be stopped, is compared with the absolute
coordinate that is not subjected to mirror image conversion.
CAUTION 5 The relationship between the absolute coordinate and the machine coordinate for an axis
is shifted when the workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position
exceeds the transverse inhibit limit for the axis or the workpiece coordinate system is set
in an area that exceeds the transverse inhibit limit.
(1) When the workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position exceeds the
transverse inhibit limit
(a) When parameters are set to check the limit along the X-axis in the positive direction,
the current position and inhibit limit will be as follows:
Machine coordinate

Work coordinate
(Absolute coordinate)

Active position Ihibit limit position
(b) The workpiece coordinate system is set such that the current position exceeds the
transverse inhibit limit (G92 X25.).
Machine coordinate

Work coordinate offset by G92

Work coordinate

Ihibit limit position Active position
(c) G90 X5. 0 is commanded
(i) While the absolute coordinate exceeds the transverse inhibit limit for an axis, only
the absolute coordinate is updated.
The machine coordinate remains as is (the tool does not move).
Machine coordinate

Machine sift value

Work coordinate

Active position
312
(ii) When the absolute coordinate falls within the range of the transverse inhibit limit, the
tool starts moving and the machine coordinate and absolute coordinate along the
axis are updated as follows:
Machine coordinate

Machine sift value

Work coordinate

Active position Ihibit limit position
As a result, absolute coordinate 0 in the actual workpiece coordinate system is

shifted from the origin, as indicated by the workpiece coordinate system offset
specified with G92, by the machine shift value shown in the figure above.
This shift value can be canceled only by performing the following operations:
Manual reference position return
Workpiece coordinate system preset with G92.1
Workpiece coordinate system preset with the WORK operation selection soft
key on the current position display screen
(2) The absolute coordinate is shifted in the same way when the workpiece coordinate
system is set such that it exceeds the range of the transverse inhibit limit.
NOTE To change the transverse inhibit limit, perform either of the following:
(1) Change setting parameter No.5251 by an MDI operation.
(2) Change setting parameter No.5251 by programmable parameter input (G10).
313
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.DISPLAY
11.1 Program Display
11.1.1 Execution program and program directory

2 Press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key.
One of the following screens appears:
i) Program screen
ii) Program number screen
iii) Program number and program name screen
The display can be switched between these screens as shown below.
DRCTRY
TEXT DIR.MEM and MEMORY is

displayed by pressing the CHAPTER key
Programscreen
DIR.MEM key TEXT key TEXT key
DIR.MEM key
Page key
Programnumberscreen Programnumberandprogram
+ namescreen
Forthecompact
CRT/MDIpanel
314
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
At the bottom of the program screen, the size of the remaining part program storage space and the number
of programs that can be registered are displayed as follows:
FREE PAGES: 6960 (1272M) FREE FILES: 100
The page is the minimum unit used to store a program in part program storage. One page corresponds to 77
characters (or a part program length of about 0.2 m).
In the example above, the size of remaining space is 193 pages (about 38.6 m), and the number of programs
that can be registered is 39.
When the program number and program name screen displays a program name, up to 16 characters are dis-
played. However, when the option for 48character program name display is selected, up to 48 characters are
displayed as shown below.
Example of display: 14 CRT (18 programs on one screen)
In the case of the 9 CRT, one screen displays the program numbers and names of up to five programs.
NOTE The term page used here is a unit of data in internal memory. It is not related to the size of a
page on the CRT screen.
11.1.2 Program check screens

Three program check screens are used.
1) Screen to display the command values specified in the block to be executed next, and the continuous
state values in that block
The command values specified in the block that is four or more blocks after the current block and the contin-
uousstate values in that block are displayed. (Whether these values are displayed depends on the pro-
gram specified.)
2) Screen to display the command values specified in the block executed last, and the continuousstate val-
ues in that block
3) Screen to display the command values specified in the current block, and the continuousstate values in
that block
2 Press the <PRGCHK> soft key or <PCHECK> key hard key.
One of the three screens above appears. The desired screen is selected in one of two ways:
i) Press the <PRGCHK> soft key or <PCHECK> hard key repeatedly until the desired screen ap-
pears.
ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the corresponding soft key.
315
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
iii) Whether absolute or relative is 9" CRT function selection keys

selected for the current position
display on the screen after chap-
ter selection for program check-
ing depends on the setting of the 9" CRT program checking chapter selection keys
DAP bit in parameter No. 2203. CHECK LAST ACTIVE +
For the operation of the ORIGIN
and PRESET keys after this
9" CRT operation selection keys after chapter selection
screen is selected, see Section for program checking (Same as above for other chapters)
11.3.2.
ORIGIN PRESET 0

ON M CHECK G E E R
14" CRT program checking chapter selection keys

CHE LAST NEXT
CK
14" CRT operation selection keys after chapter selection

for program checking (Same as above for other chapters)
ORI PRE CHE LAST NEXT
GIN SET CK
Command values specified in the Command values specified in the

block executed last (LAST) current block (ACTIVE)
Summarized display of the current program and position

data (check). The remaining subprogram call count is
displayed in the L field.
316
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.1.3 Groupbygroup program directory display and punchout

In addition to program directory display, which displays the program numbers and program names of all regis-
tered programs, groupbygroup directory display is possible. This display divides programs into groups ac-
cording to units of machining.
The name of programs in the same group need to contain the same character string.
In groupbygroup directory display, the programs whose names contain the specified character string are
searched for, then a directory of their program numbers and program names is displayed.
Furthermore, a group of program numbers and names can be punched out.
Suppose that the character string GEAR1000 is included in the names of the main program and subprograms
for machining a gear part with part number 1000. The programs whose names contain the character string
GEAR1000 can be found from all the programs stored in memory, and a directory of their numbers and names
can be displayed. Thus, the programs stored in large memory can be managed easily.
Directory display listing the program numbers and

program names of currently registered programs
Display of a directory of programs for a shaft
317
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(1) Procedure for groupbygroup directory display

Use the procedure below. (The soft keys indicated below are for the 9 CRT.)
1 Set the part program storage and edit mode.
2 Press the function menu key, then press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key.
3 Select chapter selection key display by pressing the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key re-
peatedly or by pressing the <CHAPTER> key. Then, press the <DIR.MEM> key to select the program
number and program name screen.
4 Press the <OPERATION SELECTION> key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
5 Press the <DIR.GRP> key.

6 Press the (NAME) key.

7 Enter the character string identifying the desired program in the group.
The program names can be as long as desired. However, only the first 48 characters are effective in
the search.
When the programs whose names start with the character string GEAR1000 are to be found, for ex-
ample, enter GEAR1000*. Be sure to append the asterisk, called a wild card, which indicates that
any character string meets the requirements of the search. If the asterisk is omitted, only the programs
whose names consist of the character string GEAR1000 are searched for. A question mark specifies
a single arbitrary character. For example, when ????1000 is entered, the programs whose names
start with four arbitrary characters are searched for.
8 Press the <EXEC> key.

9 The screen changes to the group directory screen, which displays a directory of programs whose
names contain the specified character string.
When no program whose name contains the specified character string is found, the message DATA
NOT FOUND is displayed.
10 If a directory of programs occupies more than one page, use the page keys to scroll the pages.
11 Unless the power is turned off, a directory of programs in a group continues to be stored until a search
is done for another group. After switching from the group directory screen to another screen, the direc-
tory of programs in the group previously searched can be displayed again. This operation is per-
formed using the procedure below.
i) Press the function menu key, then press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key.
ii) Switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys by pressing the <PROGRAM> soft key or
<PROG> hard key repeatedly or by pressing the <CHAPTER> key. Then, press the <DIR.MEM>
key to select the program number and program name screen.
iii) Press the <OPERATION SELECTION> key to switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
iv) Press the <DIR.GRP> key.
v) Press the <PRVGRP> key.

vi) The screen switches to the group directory screen and displays the directory of the programs in
the group previously searched.
Therefore, when the group directory screen is to be displayed again after switching to another
screen, the character string included in the programs of the group need not be reentered.
318
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(2) Groupbygroup program output (punchout)

1 Display the directory of programs in a group according to the procedure for groupbygroup directory
display.
2 Press the <PUNCH> key.

3 Press the <GRP.ALL> key.
(PROG#)
The programs searched for in the group are output.

When the group directory display screen is displayed, programs can be punched out using the follow-
ing keys:
<THIS> : Punches out the currently selected main program.
<(PROG#)> : Punches out a searched for program numbered 0.
319
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.2 Status Display

This function displays the status of the control unit, alarm status, editing status, whether the buffer contains the
next block, and so forth.
These statues are displayed on the second last line (soft key display line) of the CRT screen.
This figure is for the 9" CRT.

On the 14" CRT screen, the same
status data is displayed, right-justi
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) fied.
16 TAPE JOG STOP READ MTN FTN 16:52:13 @ ALM
17
1 40
The status display line contains nine fields, (1) to (9). On all CNC screens, the status items listed below are
displayed.
(1) Automatic operation mode selection (MEM, MDI, TAPE, EDIT, or ****)
This field displays the automatic operation mode currently selected. When no automatic operation mode
is selected, **** is displayed.
(2) Manual operation mode selection (JOG, HND, INC, AGJ, J+REF, or ***)
This field displays the manual operation mode currently selected. When no manual operation mode is se-
lected, **** is displayed.
(3) Automatic operation status (RESET, STOP, HOLD, STRT, MSTR, or SRCH)
This field displays the status of automatic operation.
RSET : Reset is in progress.
STOP : Automatic operation is stopped.
HOLD : Automatic operation is suspended.
STRT : Automatic operation is started.
MSTR : Execution of a manual numeric command is started.
NSRC : Sequence number search is in progress.
(4) Program editing status (READ, PNCH, VRFY, SRCH, COND, EDIT, or ****)
This field displays the status of program editing.
READ : Registration is in progress.
PNCH : Punchout is in progress.
VRFY : Verification is in progress.
SRCH : Search is in progress.
COND : Memory arrangement is in progress.
EDIT : An editing operation (such as insertion or alteration) is in progress.
**** : No editing operation is in progress,
(5) Axis movement/dwell status (MTN, DWL, or ***)
This field displays MTN during movement along an axis, and displays DWL when the machine is dwelling.
This field displays *** in other cases.
(6) M/S/T/B function status (FIN or ***)
This field displays FIN when a miscellaneous function such as M, S, T, and B is being performed (that is,
when the system is waiting for a completion signal from the PMC). In other cases, this field displays ***.
(5) (6) Emergency stop status (EMG)
If an emergency stop occurs, the display of (5) and (6) disappears and the character string EMG is dis-
played in reverse, instead.
320
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(7) Current time display

This field displays the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds.
Example 16:52:13 (Fiftytwo minutes and thirteen seconds after four oclock in the afternoon)
(8) Status of writing into nonvolatile memory (@ or space)
This field displays @ when data is being written into nonvolatile memory.
(9) Alarm status and label skip status (ALM, BAT, WRN, LSK, or ***)
ALM blinks in reverse when an alarm has occurred.
WRN blinks when a warning message appears on the CRT screen.
This field displays BAT when the voltage of the battery for the absoluteposition detector or nonvolatile
memory for storing parameters, tool compensation data, and part programs is low. This display disappears
after the battery is replaced and the alarm is reset.
This field displays LSK when none of these statuses arepresent, and the tape reader is placed in the label
skip status. In other cases, this field displays ***.
321
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.3 Current Position Display

Four currentposition screens are used.
Current position in the relative coordinate system
1) Overall position display screen
2) Currentposition screen based on Current position in the workpiece coordinate system
the relative coordinate system
3) Currentposition screen based on Current position in the machine coordinate syste
the workpiece coordinate system
Remaining distance to travel
4) Currentposition screen based on
the machine coordinate system
11.3.1 Currentposition screens

2 Press the <POSITION> soft key or <POS> hard key.

9" CRT position chapter selection keys

OVERALL RELATIV ABSOLUT MACHINE
Overall position display Relative position display

ON M CHECK G E E R
14" CRT position chapter selection keys

OVER RELA ABSO MACH
ALL TIV LUT INE
Current position display Current position display

in the workpiece coordinatein the machine coordi-
system nate system
Select the desired screen using one of the procedures described below.
i) Press the <POSITION> soft key or <POS> hard key repeatedly until the desired screen appears.
ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the corresponding soft key.
OVERALL : Displays overall position data.
RELATIV : Displays the current position in the relative coordinate system
ABSOLUT: Displays the current position in the workpiece coordinate system.
MACHINE : Displays the current position in the machine coordinate system.
322
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.3.2 Presetting the current position display

The current position in the relative coordinate system or workpiece coordinate system can be preset.
1 Select the currentposition screen based on the relative coordinate system or the currentposition screen
based on the workpiece coordinate system. (See Section 11.3.1.)
3 To set the current position to 0 To set the current position to particular coordinates,
Press the <ORIGIN> key. press the <RESET> key. The soft keys are switched
to the operation guidance keys.
The soft keys are switched to the opera-
tion guidance keys.
4
(4)1 To set the coordinates on all axes to Enter desired coordinates, then press the <EXEC>
0, press the <ALLAXS> key. key.
(4)2 To set the coordinate on a particular Example X100.0Y2000.0 <EXEC> key
axis to 0, enter the axis name (X, Z, etc.),
then press the <EXEC> key.
(4)2 To set the coordinates on multiple
axes to 0, enter the axis names in succes-
sion, then press the <EXEC> key.
Example XYZ <EXEC> key
5
This operation performed on the current This operation performed on the currentposition
position screen based on the workpiece screen based on the workpiece coordinate system is
coordinate system is the same as specify- the same as specifying G92XY; in a program. The
ing G92X0Y0....; in a program. The work- workpiece coordinate system is shifted so that the cur-
piece coordinate system is shifted so that rent position is set to the specified coordinates.
the current position becomes the zero point.
9" CRT position operation selection keys
ORIGIN RESET
9" CRT origin operation guide keys
ALL-AXIS (AXIS)
9" CRT preset operation guidance key
(AXIS)

ORI
RESET
GIN
14" CRT origin operation guidance keys

ALL
(AXIS)
AXIS
14" CRT preset operation guidance key
(AXIS)
323
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.3.3 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system

(a) Manual intervention when the manual absolute signal is off
(b) Move command executed with the machine locked
(c) Handle interrupt, and movement by manual/automatic simultaneous operation
(d) Operations with a mirror image
(e) Setting the local coordinate system with G52 or shifting the workpiece coordinate system with G92
(f) Setting the origin of the workpiece coordinate system from the MDI panel
The operations above shift the workpiece coordinate system. When the MDI panel is used, however, the
shifted coordinate system can be cancelled, and the workpiece coordinate system can be preset at the
original position offset from the machine zero point by the workpiece reference point offset. (For detailed
information about presetting the workpiece coordinate system, see Section 8.2.6 in Part II.)
Use the procedure below.
1 Select the overall position display screen.
3 Set the reset state or automatic operation stop state, then press the <WRKCRD> soft key or <WORK
COORD> hard key.
4
41 To preset all axes, press the <ALLAXS> key.
42 To preset a particular axis, enter the axis name and immediately after the axis name, then
press the <EXEC> key.
9" CRT position operation menu keys
ORIGIN PRESET MEM-FRP WRK-CRD
9" CRT workpiece coordinate operation guidance keys
ALL-AXIS (AXIS)

ORI PRE MEM WORK
GIN SET -FRP COORD

14" CRT workpiece coordinate operation guidance keys

ALL
(AXIS)
AXIS
5 The cutter compensation, tool length compensation, and tool offset are cancelled, and the origin of
the selected workpiece coordinate system (G54 to G59) is preset at the position offset from the origin
of the machine coordinate system by the workpiece reference point offset. As a result, the current posi-
tion (in absolute coordinates) in the workpiece coordinate system are the values obtained by subtract-
ing the workpiece reference point offset from the machine coordinates.
Whether to preset relative position display as with absolute coordinates is specified by the DSE bit of
parameter No. 2202.
324
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.4 Operator Message Display

The operator messages are classified into two groups:
(i) External operator messages
(ii) Operator messages specified with custom macros
When an operator message is reported, the operator message screen is usually displayed automatically.
2 Press the <MESSAGE> soft key or <MESSAGE> hard key.

Operator
message
9" CRT message chapter selection keys
ALARM OPERATOR +

ON M CHECK G E E R
Alarm
message 14" CRT notice chapter selection keys
ALAR OPER
M ATOR
The operator message screen can be selected in one of two ways:

i) Press the <MESSAGE> (soft key or hard key) key repeatedly until the operator message screen ap-
pears.
ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the OPERATOR key.
Clearing operator messages
External operator messages are cleared by external commands.
For detailed information about external operator messages including how to clear them, refer to the rele-
vant manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
When an operator message specified with a custom macro is displayed, a singleblock halt occurs. The
message disappears when the next cycle is started.
For the display of operator messages specified with custom macros, refer to the relevant manual describ-
ing the custom macros.
325
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.5 Alarm Message Display

The alarm messages are classified into three groups:
(i) Alarm messages reported by CNC selfdiagnosis
(ii) External alarm messages
(iii) Alarm messages specified with custom macros
When an alarm message is reported, the alarm message screen is displayed automatically.
2 Press the <MESSAGE> soft key or <MESSAGE> hard key.

Operator
message
9" CRT message chapter selection keys
ALARM OPERATOR +

ON M CHECK G E E R
Alarm
message 14" CRT notice chapter selection keys
ALAR OPER
M ATOR
The alarm message screen can be selected in one of two ways:

i) Press the <MESSAGE> (soft kye or hard key) key repeatedly until the alarm message screen ap-
pears.
ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the ALARM key.
Clearing alarm messages
External alarm messages are cleared by external commands.
For detailed information about external alarm messages including how to clear them, refer to the relevant
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.
Alarms reported by CNC selfdiagnosis and alarms specified with custom macros are cleared by resetting
the NC.
For detailed information about alarms reported by CNC selfdiagnosis, see Appendix 11.
For detailed information about alarms specified with custom macros, refer to the relevant manual describ-
ing the custom macros.
326
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.6 Graphic Display

To enable the user to check the progress of machining and current tool position on the CRT screen, the tool
path can be drawn during automatic or manual operation.
The functions listed below are available for this drawing function.
(i) Different colors can be used for rapid traverse and cutting feed when drawing a tool path.
NOTE Seven colors are available.
(ii) The O, N, F, S, and T values of the program being draw and the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate
system are displayed.
(iii) Drawing can be performed in an arbitrary plane. Threedimensional drawing is possible as well as bi
plane drawing.
Z Y Y
Z
X Y Z X
X
Drawing in an
arbitrary plane Three-dimensional drawing Bi-plane drawing
(iv) Threedimensional drawing allows a graphic to be rotated horizontally and vertically.
Z
Horizontal rotation
Vertical rotation
X Y
(v) Parameter No. 7703 allows the controlled axes to be selected for the graphic display axes X, Y, and Z.
The names of the controlled axes selected with the parameter are displayed as the names of the axes on
the CRT screen.
(vi) A graphic on the screen can be shifted and enlarged.
Current screen New screen
Enlargement
Current screen New screen
Shift
327
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.6.1 Selecting the graphic screen

2 Press the <GRAPHIC> soft key or <OTHERS> hard key to display the graphic screen.

POSI PRO OFF PRGRAM SET SER MES GRAPH CHAP
TION GRAM SET CHECK TING VICE SAGE IC TER
11.6.2 Setting the graphic parameters

(1) Operation
1 Select the graphic screen (see Section 11.6.1).
2 Press the <GRAPH PARAM> key to display the graphic parameter screen.
3 Move the cursor to the desired parameter with the cursor keys <> , <> , <> , and <> .
The cursor keys <> and <> move the cursor horizontally.
The cursor keys <> and <> move the cursor vertically.
4 To set a parameter, enter the desired data then press the <INPUT> key.
5 To return to the graphic screen after setting the parameters, press the <GRAPH> key.
328
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(2) Graphic parameters

(a) Graphic plane
This parameter sets a graphic plane.
The following graphic planes are available:
Z
Y Z X
XY YZ ZX XYZ
X Y Z
X Y
Y
X Y Z
YX ZY XZ XZY
Y Z X
Z X
Y
XYZ2
X
(Bi-plane graphic)
Z
X
(b) Rotation angle (horizontal)

This parameter specifies a horizontal rotation angle in degrees.
Set a value from 360 to +360. An initial value can be set using parameter No. 4831. Suppose that
180 is set in parameter No. 4831. When a rotation angle of 30 is set, the resultant graphic rotation
angle is 210 degrees.
Z
X
Y 30,
180,
X Y
f:Represents the resultant XYZ coordinates.
329
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(c) Rotation angle (vertical)

When the graphic plane XYZ or XZY is used, vertical rotation is allowed as well as horizontal rotation.

X Y
Parameter No. 4832 can rotate the vertical rotation axis in the horizontal plane. When this parameter
is set to 0, the vertical rotation axis is parallel to the display screen.
330
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY

Drawing plane: XZY
Rotation angle (horizontal)= +20
Rotation angle (vertical) = +10
Parameter No. 4832 = +65
Y Y
Vertical rotation axis

10
65
Initial vertical
X rotation axis
10
20 20
Z X
Z X
f:Represents the resultant XYZ coordinates.
331
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(d) Scale factor

A value from 0.01 to 100.00 can be specified. When a scale factor is automatically determined from
the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range, the scale factor is clamped within this range.
(e) Maximum and minimum values of the graphic range
When the maximum and minimum values are set for each axis on specified planes, the scale factor
and the center of the screen are automatically determined so that the screen can display the maximum
and minimum values.
The maximum value must be greater than the minimum value.
When 0 is specified for these parameters, the scale factor and CRT center parameters are not auto-
matically determined. Instead the scale factor set and CRT center that have been manually set are
used.
When a scale factor is automatically set, it includes an allowance of 10%. The scale factor of an axis
subject to screen restriction is effective. Axes that are not restricted by the screen are positioned so
that the range determined by a maximum value and minimum value is positioned at the center of the
screen. (See the figures that follow.) This means that when a difference between a maximum value
and minimum value set for one axis varies too much from that for another axis, the actually displayed
screen does not match the maximum and minimum values set for one of the axes.
X-Y plane

Y
Suppose that the following is set:
Maximum value: X = 100. Y = 5.
100
Minimum value: X = -100. Y = -5.
In this case, the center (0) of the Y-axis is posi
tioned at the center of the screen so that the 0
screen display matches the X-axis range, +100
to -100. This means that the screen display
does not match the maximum and minimum 100 X
values set for the Y-axis. (See the figure to the 100 0 100
right.)
Screen
Area set by maximum and

minmium values
10% 10%
332
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
In the case of a biplane drawing on the XYZ2 graphic plane, when the ratio of the difference between
the maximum and minimum values set for the Yaxis to the difference between those set for the Zaxis
exceeds 1:2 or 2:1, the screen allocation is clamped to 1:2 or 2:1.
Screen
Y
1
Z X
If the ratio of the difference between the maximum and minimum values set for the Zaxis to the differ-
ence between those set for the Yaxis is greater than 2, the screen is divided as shown above.
In the case of the drawing plane XYZ or XZY, the scale factor is determined so that the rectangular
parallelepiped determined by the set maximum and minimum values always fits in the screen when
rotated horizontally by any angle.
10% 10%
Parallelepiped determined
by the set maximum and
minimum values
Rotated by an arbitrary angle
(f) CRT center

This parameter specifies the coordinates of the screen center in the workpiece coordinate system of
a program used for drawing. When the maximum values and minimum values are set, the centers of
those values are automatically set.
The drawing scale in the coordinate system on the graphic screen is calculated from the screen center
coordinates and the scale factor. The unit is mm or inches.
333
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(g) Notes
(i) Specify positional values in mm or inches.
(ii) The parameter scale factor, the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range, and the CRT
center are independent of data defining the graphic screen and data displayed on the screen for
making alterations. This is to make it easier to return to the original screen after a graphic enlarge-
ment or shift operation. Usually, graphic data matches the settings. After a graphic enlargement
or shift operation, however, the graphic data changes, resulting in a mismatch with the settings.
In such a case, @ is prefixed to the setting.
When the <AFTER SHIFT> soft key is pressed, the graphic data is transferred to the settings (A
in the figure below). When the <BEFORE SHIFT> soft key is pressed, the settings are transferred
to the graphic data (B in the figure below.)
A

B

NOTE When enlarging a graphic, the red and yellow cursors are used to change the maximum and
minimum values. When shifting a graphic, the RELATIVE SCALE field is used to change the
scale factor parameter, and the red cursor is used to change the center coordinate data.
(iii) The graphic parameters are not cleared even when the power is turned off.
334
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.6.3 Drawing a tool path

The tool path in automatic or manual operation can be drawn so that the user can check the progress of machin-
ing, the current tool position, and so forth on the CRT screen.
(1) Starting drawing
1 Select the graphic screen. (See Section 11.6.1.)
2 Press the <START MACHIN> key to allow the movement of a tool in automatic or manual operation
to be drawn. DRAWING is displayed in the lowerright corner of the screen.
3 Execute the desired program in the tape or memory operation mode. To draw the tool path without
moving the machine, lock the machine.
The cutting feed path and rapid traverse path can be drawn in different colors by setting parameter
Nos. 4821 and 4822.
The tool position from which a tool offset is subtracted in the workpiece coordinate system is drawn
according to the CRT center and scale factor determined by the graphic parameters set.
If the tool position in the workpiece coordinate system changes discontinuously as in the case of origin
setting or workpiece coordinate system switching, a tool movement is assumed.
The drawing function may not be able to follow a very low feedrate. In this case, only the tool path can
be drawn, but not the machining profile.
When DRAWING is displayed, the internal processing for drawing continues even if the screen is
switched. When the display returns to the graphic screen, the drawing during that period is displayed
with the tracking capability somewhat degraded.
(2) Terminating drawing
1 Select the graphic screen. (See Section 11.6.1.)
2 Press the <STOP> key to terminate drawing. The movement of the tool in the automatic or manual
operation stops.
(3) Clearing the graphic screen
To clear the tool path, press the <ERASE> key after terminating drawing.
335
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(4) Shifting the screen

Press the <SHIFT> key to display the shift screen. Move the cursor (a red box) up and down and to right
and left with the cursor keys <> , <> , <> , and <> to specify the center of the new screen. Enter
a value from 0.01 to 99.99 in the RELATIVE SCALE field in the lowerright corner of the screen, then press
the <INPUT> key. The value displayed in the RELATIVE SCALE field in the lowerright corner of the
screen multiplied by the entered scale factor then becomes the new relative scale factor.
After pressing the <SET END> key, press the <ERASE> key and the <START MACHIN> key. Then the
tool path is drawn on the new screen.
When the graphic parameters, and the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range are set, the
scale factor automatically determined by the maximum and minimum values is multiplied by the value set
in the RELATIVE SCALE field. For drawing at the center according to a specified scale factor, the parame-
ters specifying the maximum and minimum values of the graphic range to 0.

SCALE FACTOR

336
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(5) Enlarging a graphic

Press the ENLARGE key to display the graphic enlargement screen. Specify the diagonal points of the
new screen by moving the red and yellow cursors (J) displayed in the central part of the screen up and
down and to right and left with the cursor keys <> , <> , <> , and <> . The next drawing operation
is performed so that the rectangle with the set diagonal points fits in the screen.
Press the <SET END> key, the <ERASE> key then the <START MACHIN> key. The tool path is then drawn
on the new screen.

NOTE 1 Reduction is not allowed. For reduction, use the RELATIVE SCALE field for the graphic shift
operation.
NOTE 2 After graphic shift or enlargement, the graphic parameter screen may display an at sign (@).
This means that graphic data set for shifting or enlarging a graphic does not match the setting
on the graphic parameter screen.
NOTE 3 When two planes are selected, the plane containing the red cursor (J) is subject to
enlargement.
337
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.7 Displaying the Actual Spindle Speed

The actual spindle speed is displayed on several screens including the position display screen.
On each screen, the spindle speed in rpm is displayed in decimal after the character S or the characters ACT.S.
The display mode and position slightly vary, depending on the size of the CRT screen and screen type.
The NOS bit (bit 0) of parameter No. 2204 enables the spindle speed display function to exclude the header
(such as S and ACT.S) and unit (rpm) from the display.
11.8 Directory of Floppy Disk Files

It is possible to display a directory of files in a floppy disk that contains execution programs, parameters, and
offset data.
2 Press the <PROGRAM> soft key or <PROG> hard key.
3 Press the <DIR.FLP> key.
The floppy cassette file directory screen appears. However, the file names are not displayed at this stage.
4 Press the operation menu key, then switch the soft keys to the operation selection keys.
5 Press the <SRH_FIL> key.
6
61 To display a directory of files starting at the first file, press the <TOP> key
62 To display a directory of files starting at a particular file, press the <(FILE#)> key, enter the desired
file number, then press the <EXEC> key.
7 The files listed on the preceding and following pages can be displayed by scrolling the page up and down.
(1) Select the DIRECTORY (FLOPPY) screen.

(a) Press the function selection key <PROGRAM> several times to display the DIRECTORY screen.

338
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(b) The DIRECTORY screen can also be selected by pressing the function selection key <PRO-
GRAM>, then pressing the chapter selection key <DIR.FLP>.
TEXT DIR.MEM DIR.FLP
NOTE The directory is not displayed at this stage.
(2) Press the operation selection key <SRH_FIL>.
DELETE
READ PUNCH SRH_FIL TEXT +
FILE
(3) Display a directory.

(a) Press the operation guidance key <TOP> to display a directory starting with the first file.
TOP (FILE#) +
(b) To display a directory starting with a particular file, press the operation guidance key <(FILE#)>,
enter the desired file number, then press the <EXEC> key.
TOP (FILE#) +
File number input
EXEC +
(4) The files listed on the previous pages can be displayed by scrolling the pages.
NOTE The directory display is cleared when the mode or screen is changed. To return to the directory
display, perform the above operation again.
339
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.9 Load Meter Display

The load (torque) on the spindle motor and servo motor are displayed as a bar graph on the CRT screen. The
14 CRT screen displays waveforms indicating the fluctuation in the load as well.
In bar graph display, the latest sampling values are displayed. In waveform display, the fluctuations over one
minute are displayed. The rated load of the motor corresponding to each load meter must be set in a parameter.
When the load reaches the rated value the load meter indicates 100%.
The load meter screen also displays load meters, the absolute position, specified speed, actual speed, override
value, number of machining parts, and operation data.
Up to three axes can be displayed on the load meter screen for the servo motor. The user can select the axes
whose load is displayed by setting parameters.
To display the load on the spindle motor, the load signal needs to be connected to the A/D converter of the CNC.
The load meter screen is selected as follows:
1 Press the function selection key.
2 Press the <PRGCHK> soft key or <PCHECK> hard key.
The load meter screen can be selected in either of the following ways:
(i) Press the <PRGCHK> soft key or <PCHECK> hard key repeatedly until the load meter screen ap-
pears.
(ii) Press the <CHAPTER> key, then press the <OPE.MNTR> or <OPE.MONITR> key.
9 CRT function selection keys

9 CRT program checking chapter selection keys

14 CRT function selection keys

14 CRT program checking chapter selection keys

340
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
NOTE 1 Set the numbers of the axes whose load is to be displayed in parameter Nos. 2231 to 2333.
Set the rated load of the motor corresponding to each load meter in parameter Nos. 2234 to
2237. When the applied load reaches the rated load, the load meter indicates 100%.
NOTE 2 Load meter data is displayed using a bar graph and percentages. The range of the bar graph
is 0% to 200%. 100% is indicated by a change in color on the 14 screen or a change in
brightness on the 9 CRT screen.
NOTE 3 The 14 CRT screen displays a graph indicating the fluctuations in load over one minute. One
screen displays the fluctuations for one load meter. The cursor keys <> and <> can be
used to select the load meter for which this type of graph is to be displayed.
341
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.10 Display of Run Times and Parts Counts

The CRT screen can display the cumulative poweron time, the cumulative automatic operation time, the cu-
mulative cutting time, and the cumulative time recorded with an arbitrary timer for each machine. Except for
the cumulative poweron time, the operator can alter and preset any of the cumulative times via the MDI panel.
The CRT screen can also display the number of parts required and cumulative parts counts. Two types of
cumulative parts counts are displayed. One is a cumulative parts count that can be changed only by parameter
alteration. This is used to count the total number of parts machined, and is referred to as the total cumulative
parts count. The other is the cumulative parts count that can be be altered or preset by the operator via the
MDI panel. In general, before a new type of workpiece is machined, this count is preset to 0 to count the number
of parts machined. Unless otherwise noted, this count is referred to as the cumulative parts count. Each time
M02, M30 or an M code with a parameter set is executed, these counts are incremented by one. This means
that the number of machined parts can be counted using a program that executes M02, M30, or an M code
with a set parameter when each workpiece has been machined.
When the cumulative parts count reaches the number of parts required, a signal is output to the machine. The
operator can alter the number of parts required via the MDI panel.
Use the procedure below to select the run time and parts count display screen, and alter or change cumulative
values.
2 Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key.
The run time and parts count display screen can be selected in one of two ways:
(i) Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key repeatedly until the run time and parts count display screen ap-
pears.
(ii) Press the [CHAPTER] key, then press the [TIMER] key.
3 Select the MDI mode, then move the cursor to the cumulative parts count field with the cursor keys. Enter
the desired preset value with the numeric keys, then press the [INPUT] key.
Similarly, the number of parts required can be preset. When 0 is set as the number of parts required, the
number of parts required is assumed to be infinite. The total cumulative parts count cannot be preset on
this screen. Use the parameter screen to preset the total cumulative parts count.
4 To alter the cumulative automatic operation time, cumulative cutting time, and cumulative time recorded
with an arbitrary timer for each machine, move the cursor to the corresponding hours (H), minutes (M), and
seconds (S) fields with the cursor keys, then enter the desired values.
NOTE 1 Custom macro system variables can be used to write to or read from the cumulative parts count
field and the field for the number of parts required.]
Cumulative parts count: #3901
Number of parts required: #3902
NOTE 2 Specifying DTIM, bit 5 of parameter No. 7620, appropriately enables the accumulated values
of poweron time, automatic operation time, cutting time, and time recorded on the timer which
can be used for any purposes, to be displayed in units of days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
342
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.11 Clock
The current time is displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds on each CRT screen. The clock display screen
displays the current date and time in year, month, day, hours, minutes, and seconds. The clock display screen
enables the current time to be set.
The current date and time (year/month/day/hours/minutes/seconds) can also be read using custom macros
or the PMC window.
(1) Display
The current time is displayed in hours, minutes, and seconds on the status display line of each CRT screen.
The current time is displayed on the

status display line on all CNC
screens as shown in the figure at the
right.
The clock display screen displays the current date and time as the year, month, day, hours, minutes, and
seconds.
1 Press the function menu key to
switch the soft keys to the func-
tion selection keys.
2 Press the [SETTING] soft or
hard key.
When the current screen is not the clock display screen, the clock display screen can be displayed
in one of two ways:
i) Press the [SETTING] soft or hard key repeatedly until the clock display screen appears.
ii) Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys, then press the
[TIMER] key.
343
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02

9" CRT setting chapter selection keys
TIMER

9" CRT clock operation selection keys
INPUT +INPUT


14" CRT setting chapter selection keys
HANDY GEN OPERAT MACRO TOOL SER MES TIMER CHAP
ERAL PANEL VAR. LIFE VICE SAGE TER

INPUT +INPUT
(2) Setting
The clock display screen is used to set the time.
1 Display the clock display screen. (See Item (1) above.)
2 Move the cursor to the desired field.
3 Enter the desired value, then press the [INPUT] key.
Item Maximum value

Year 99
Month 12
Day 31
Hours 23
Minutes 59
Seconds 59
NOTE When specifying the year, enter only the last two digits. Negative values and values greater
than the maximum value above cannot be specified.
(3) Custom macros and clock

Reading system variables #3011 and #3012 enables the current date and time (year/month/day/hours/
minutes/seconds) to be checked.
Data System variable

Year/month/day #3011
Hours/minutes/seconds #3012
Example When the current date and time is 17 minutes 5 seconds past 4 p.m. on May 20, 1987
#3011: 19870520
#3012: 161705
344
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.12 Background Graphic Display
11.12.1 Overview
The background graphic display has the function described below.
Tool path drawing: This function draws the path of the tool center specified by a part program.

The tool path drawing function represents the path of the tool as lines to allow the part program to be closely
checked.
(1) Notes
(a) For a program stored in memory, the tool path is drawn in the background (background drawing).
(b) The tool path can be drawn along the Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis, and axes parallel to these axes. The
tool path cannot be drawn along a rotary axis, PMC axis, or so forth.
(c) The tool path can be drawn for the functions listed below.
G00: Positioning
G01: Linear interpolation
G02/G03: Circular interpolation
G17/G18/G19: Plane selection
G90/G91: Absolute/incremental data input
G40/G41/G42: Cutter compensation/cancel
G43/G44/G49: Tool length compensation/cancel
G50/G51: Scaling/cancel
G50.1/G51.1: Programmable mirror image/cancel
G68/G69: Coordinate system rotation/cancel
G72.1/G72.1: Figure copy
G52: Local coordinate system setting
G92: Workpiece coordinate system change
G92.1: Workpiece coordinate system presetting
G73/G74/G76/G80/G81/G82/G83/G84/G85/G86/G87/G88/G98/G99: Canned cycle/cancel
G65: Macro call
M98: Subprogram call
Optionalangle chamfering/corner rounding
Custom macros (with some restrictions)
(d) When the ordinary graphic display option is also installed, you can enable background graphics by
setting bit 2 of parameter No. 10 to 1.
345
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(2) Features
The tool path drawing function draws the path of the center of a tool. The function has the features listed
below.
(a) Highspeed drawing
Compared with graphic display A, a tool path is drawn at higher speed, thus allowing a faster NC pro-
gram check.
(b) Partially enlarged drawing
While viewing a drawn tool path, the user can specify a partial enlargement center and relative scale
factor (graphic shift) or diagonal points (graphic enlargement). So, a required portion can be enlarged
using simple operations.
(c) Threedimensional drawing
In addition to twodimensional graphics, threedimensional graphics can be drawn. A graphic can
be rotated horizontally and vertically.
(d) Biplane drawing
Two planes, the XY plane and XZ plane, can be drawn at the same time.
(e) Scale display (plane drawing and biplane drawing), or coordinate axis and reference dimension dis-
play (threedimensional drawing)
Each screen displays a ruler for plane drawing and biplane drawing, or coordinate axis and dimen-
sions for threedimensional drawing, so that the dimensions of each graphic can be determined cor-
rectly.
(f) Colors for rapid traverse and cutting feed paths
Different colors can be used for rapid traverse and cutting feed when drawing a tool path.
(g) Position display
The O, N, and T values of the program being drawn and the coordinates in the workpiece coordinate
system are displayed.
(h) Graphic display axis
Parameter No. 7703 allows the controlled axes to be selected for the graphic display axes X, Y, and
Z. The names of the controlled axes selected with the parameter are displayed as the names of the
axes on the CRT screen.
11.12.2 Setting of graphic parameters

Before a tool path can be drawn, necessary data must be set on the graphic (parameter) screen. This screen
includes the parameters described below.
(1) Graphic plane
Specify the desired plane for drawing.
The following types of drawings are available.
Y Z X Z
XY YZ ZX XYZ
X Y Z
X Y Y
X Y Z
YX ZY XZ XZY
Y Z X
Z X
Y
XYZ2
X

Z
X
346
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(2) Rotation angle (horizontal)

This parameter specifies a horizontal rotation angle in degrees.
Set a value from 360 to +360. The initial value can be set using parameter No. 4831. Suppose that 180
is set in parameter No. 4831. When a rotation angle of 30 is set, the resultant graphic rotation angle is 210
degrees.
Z
X
Y
X
Y 30
180
X Y
f

(3) Rotation angle (vertical)

When the graphic plane XYZ or XZY is used, vertical rotation is allowed as well as horizontal rotation.

X Y
347
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
Parameter No. 4832 rotates the vertical rotation axis in the horizontal plane. When this parameter is set
to 0, the vertical rotation axis is parallel to the display screen.
Graphic plane: XZY

Rotation angle (horizontal) = +20
Rotation angle (vertical) = +10
Parameter No. 4832 = +65
Y Y
Vertical rotation axis

10_
65_
Initial vertical
X rotation axis
10_
20_ 20_
Z X
Z X
f:Represents the resultant XZY coordinates.
(4) Scale factor

A value from 0.01 to 100.00 can be specified. When the scale factor is automatically determined from the
maximum and minimum values of the graphic range, the scale factor is clamped within range.
(5) CRT center
This parameter specifies the coordinates of the screen center in the workpiece coordinate system of a pro-
gram used for drawing. When the maximum values and minimum values are set, the midpoint of those
values are automatically set.
From the screen center coordinates and scale factor, the drawing scale in the coordinate system on the
graphic screen is calculated and displayed.
The units are millimeters or inches.
(6) Maximum and minimum values of the graphic range
When a maximum value and minimum value are set for each axis on specified planes, a scale factor and
CRT center are automatically determined so that the screen displays the maximum and minimum values.
When 0 is specified for these parameters, the scale factor and CRT center parameters are not automatical-
ly determined, but the set scale factor and CRT center are used.
(7) Use of color
Different colors can be used for rapid traverse and cutting feed when drawing a tool path.
Seven colors are available.
(8) Graphic program number specification
This parameter specifies a program number subject to tool path drawing. When the [REWIND] soft key
is pressed, the graphic program pointer returns to the start of the specified program. When [START MA-
CHIN] is pressed, the tool path is drawn from the beginning of the program.
348
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(9) Graphic offset numbers

In general, a part program subject to background drawing does not allow offset values to be altered using
G10 or system variables during drawing. (Any attempt to do so is ignored.) However, an offset value can
be modified during drawing for three offset numbers specified here. (This has no effect on the offset values
used for machining.)
(10)Program numbers and sequence numbers defining the start and end of a program fragment
When only a part of program is to be drawn, these parameters specify the start block and end block with
fourdigit program numbers and fivedigit sequence numbers. When 0 is set in all the parameters, the
parameters are ignored and the entire program is drawn. Usually, set these parameters to 0.

0001
00010

0002
00020
0001 ; 0002 ;
N10
M98 P2 ; N20
M02 ; M99
In this example, only the portions indicated by the solid lines are drawn.
NOTE The 0xxxx and Nxxxx blocks corresponding to program numbers and sequence numbers
specified in these parameters must be single blocks or blocks containing an NC statement.
Blocks containing an instruction for calling a macro program or subprogram and blocks
containing a macro program are ignored.
Example
Specifiable Not specifiable
01234; 01234 M1 ; Macro call by an M code
N234 ; N234 M98 P4500 ; Subprogram call
N235 G92 X0 Y0; N345 #10 = #20 ; Macro program
(11)Graphic tool numbers (maximum, minimum)

Instead of the procedure in Item (10) above, the tool path of a program fragment can also be drawn by spec-
ifying the maximum graphic tool number and minimum graphic tool number. These parameters specify
a tool number range so that a tool path can be drawn during machining using the tools with the specified
range of tool numbers.
When both of these parameters are set to 0, the settings are ignored. When only the minimum graphic
tool number is set to 0, the paths of all tools whose numbers are not larger than the set maximum graphic
tool number are drawn. When only the maximum graphic tool number is set to 0, the paths of all tools
whose numbers are not smaller than the set minimum graphic tool number are drawn.
These parameters can be used in combination with the program numbers and sequence numbers defining
the start and end of a program fragment.
349
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.12.3 Procedure for setting graphic parameters

Use the procedure below to set the graphic parameters.
GRAPHIC (PARAMETER)
GRAPHIC PLANE = XYZ CRT CENTER X = 40,000

1:XY2:YZ3:ZX4:XYZ Y = 10,000
5:YX6:ZY7:XZ8:XZY Z = 20,000
9:XYZ2
GRAPHIC RANGE MAX X = 70,000
SCALE FACTOR = 1.00 Y= 15,000
Z= 70,000
ROTATION ANGLE (H) = 210
(V) = 0 GRAPHIC RANGE MIN X =150,000
GRAPHIC START PROGRAM 0=#### Y = 35,000
SEQENCE N=##### Z = 30,000
GRAPHIC END PROGRAM 0=####
SEQUENCEN N=##### GRAPHIC PROGRAM 0= ####
GRAPHIC TOOL MAX T=####
MIN T=#### COLOR CUTTING= #
OFFSET NO. 01 D=#### RAPID = #
NO. 02 D=####
NO. 03 D=####
(1) Press the function menu key to switch the soft keys to the function selection keys.
(2) Press the [GRAPHIC] soft key or [OTHERS] hard key repeatedly until the graphic screen appears.
(3) Press the [GRAPH PARAM] key to display the graphic parameter screen.
(4) Move the cursor to the desired parameter with the cursor keys <> , <> , <> , and <> .
(5) Enter the desired values, then press the <INPUT> or <+INPUT> key.
(6) After setting the parameters, press the <GRAPH> or <GRAPHIC> key to return to the graphic screen.
350
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.12.4 Drawing procedure

The GRAPHIC (GRAPH) screen is used for drawing.
GRAPHIC (GRAPH)
Y
X 400,000
Y 100,000
Z 200,000
100,000
F 0
S 0
T 0
0,000
100,000
X
100,000 0,000 100,000
The soft keys on the GRAPHIC (GRAPH) screen have the functions indicated below.
Soft key Function

<STOP> Stops drawing the tool path.
<ERASE> Clears the drawn tool paths. When a parameter is changed, the
graphic data remains valid until the <ERASE> key is pressed. The
<ERASE> key is valid when drawing is not in progress.
<SHIFT> Sets the graphic shift screen.
[ENLARGE] Sets the graphic enlargement screen.
[START MACHIN] Starts drawing. If [START MACHIN] is pressed when STOPPED is
not displayed at the lowerright corner of the screen, drawing starts
at the beginning of the program. If [START MACHIN] is pressed
when STOPPED is displayed at the lowerright corner of the screen,
drawing resumes from where it stopped.
<GRAPH> Ignored.
[GRAPH PARAM] Displays the GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen.
<REWIND> Pressed to start drawing at the beginning of the program.
[SINGLE] Draws the tool path for one block then stops.
351
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
The center path of a tool specified in a part program can be drawn according to the procedure below.
(1) To start a new drawing, set the necessary parameters according to Chapter 11.12.2.
(2) Select the GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen, then set the necessary data.
(3) When the part program to be drawn is not stored in memory, load it into memory. M02 or M30 must be
specified at the end of the part program.
(4) Press the [REWIND] soft key to call the part program to be drawn.
(5) Press the [START MACHIN] soft key to start drawing. If STOPPED is not displayed in the lowerright cor-
ner of the screen, drawing starts at the beginning of the program. When drawing is in progress, DRWING
is displayed in the lowerright corner of the CRT screen. If the screen is switched, drawing stops. To re-
sume drawing, return to the graphic screen, then press the [START MACHIN] soft key.
(6) To stop drawing temporarily, specify M00 in the middle of the part program beforehand, or press the STOP
soft key. STOPPED is then displayed in the lowerright corner of the CRT screen. To resume drawing,
press the [START MACHIN] soft key. To resume drawing from the beginning of the program, press the
[REWIND] soft key, then press the [START MACHIN] soft key.
(7) When the last part (M02 or M30) of the part program is executed, drawing stops, and DRWING is no longer
displayed. The drawn tool path is retained until the [ERASE] key is pressed, the graphic is used by another
function, another tool path is drawn, or the power is turned off.
11.12.5 Figure to be drawn

In the case of rapid traverse, a tool path is drawn at a speed proportional to the rapid traverse speed set in a
parameter for machining. Note that a straight line is drawn for the rapid traverse of linear interpolation.
A tool path for helical cutting can also be drawn.
11.12.6 Start coordinates and position

The system determines the start point of the tool path in a program according to two cases.
(1) When G92, G52, or G92.1 is specified
If G92, G52, or G92,1 is followed by an initial movement command, the point specified in G92, G52, or
G92.1 defines the start point.
(2) When G92, G52, and G92.1 are not specified
If an initial movement command is specified without specifying G92, G52, and G92.1, the coordinates of
the end point of the initial movement command in the workpiece coordinate system define the start point.
11.12.7 Drawing position after the start of drawing

The tool path is drawn according to a specified amount of movement.
(1) Ignored functions
Blocks that include G04 (dwell), G10 (offset setting), G20 and G21 (inch/metric switching), ATC M06, and
G22 and G23 (stored stroke limit on/off) are ignored.
For G28 and G30, the tool path is drawn to an intermediate point. For G29, the tool path is drawn from an
intermediate point.
The secondary miscellaneous functions M, S, T, and B are ignored.
When G27 is specified, the system does not check if the tool is returned to the reference point.
The system does not check the tool position according to the stored stroke limit.
(2) Block for which a cycle is not performed
For a block that includes G31 (skip function) or G60 (unidirectional positioning), the cycle is not performed.
Instead, drawing proceeds to the end point.
352
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(3) Custom macros

(a) I/O commands to DI/DO using #1000 to #1035 and #1100 to 1135 (interface signals) are ignored.
#1000 to #1035 are assumed to be set to 0.
The contents of #1100 to #1135 are not output. #1100 to #1135, when referenced, are assumed to
be set to 0.
(b) #2000 to #2799 (tool offset value) cannot be used to change the offset.
(c) #5201 to #5335 (workpiece reference point offset) and #2500 to #2806 (workpiece reference point
offset of FS6 type) cannot be used to change the offset of the workpiece reference point.
(d) No message is displayed by #3000 (alarm message), but the warning NC STATEMENT ERROR (B.G)
is displayed, and drawing does not proceed any further.
(e) #3001 and #3002 (clock) are ignored.
Therefore, note that drawing does not proceed any further when, for example, the following is speci-
fied:
#3001 = 0 :
WHILE [#3001 LE 100] D01 ;
END1 ;
(f) The values of #5001 to #5104 (position information) are undefined.
(g) The variables #1 to #33, #100 to #199, and #500 to #699 set in a program being drawn are not
associated with the machining program, and have no effect on machining.
(h) The values of the common variables (#500 to #699), which are not cleared when the power is turned
off, can be changed in the program to be drawn, but the new values are cleared when the power is
turned off.
(i) #700 to #999 can be referenced in the program being drawn, but no data can be written to #700 to
#999.
(j) The macrobased print command, punch command, and SETVN command are not executed.
11.12.8 Graphic shift

See the description of graphic shift in Subsec. 11.6.3.
11.12.9 Graphic enlargement

See the description of graphic enlargement in Subsec. 11.6.5.
11.12.10 Initial values at the start of drawing

(1) Local variables: Null
(2) Macro variables: Foreground values are set in #100 to #199 and #500 to #599.
(3) Workpiece coordinate offsets: Foreground values are set in COMMON and G54 to G59.
(4) Tool offsets: Foreground values are set only for three offsets set by the parameters.
353
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.13 Waveform Diagnosis Function

Waveform diagnosis functions are classified into the following two types:
(1) Singleshot type
This type of waveform diagnosis function enables graphic display of waveforms that represent variations
in the following data items.
This function can generate triggers for sampling data when a machine control signal rises or falls. This
facilitates the adjustment of servo and spindle motors.
[Data items for servos]
Servo errors, number of pulses to be generated, torque, electric current commands, heat simulation, and
composite speed for all axes
[Data items for spindles]
The speed of each spindle and the value of the load meter for each spindle
[Data items for signals]
On or off states of machine control signals specified by signal addresses
NOTE Up to two data items and up to four signals can be sampled simultaneously.
(2) Servoalarm type

This type of waveform diagnosis function triggers terminating data sampling when a servo alarm occurs
or when the specified machine signal rises or falls. The termination of data sampling can be delayed by
a specified time since the trigger is generated, thus facilitating detection of faults.
Recorded data items can be input or output to or from an external device using the reader/punch interface.
[Data items for servos]
Servo errors, number of pulses to be generated, torque, electric current commands, heat simulation, and
composite velocity for all axes
[Data items for spindles]
None
[Data items for signals]
None
NOTE Up to four data items can be sampled simultaneously. The maximum number of data items
sampled cannot be specified on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. See the later
description of parameters.
11.13.1 Screens
Three display screens are provided for the waveform diagnosis function. This section describes how to display
each screen.
(1) WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen

1

Press the [SERVICE] function selection soft key or press the [SERVICE] key on the MDI panel, then press
the operation menu key. The chapter selection soft keys in (1) are displayed.
Press the [WAVE DIAGNS] chapter selection soft key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is dis-
played. On this screen, press the operation menu key. The operation selection keys in (2) are displayed.
354
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
WAVE DIAGNOSIS(GRAPH)000000000000111 NNN000000000000333
WAVE
1.X
2.Y
00
0 500 1000 1500 TIME(MS)

MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18 LSK
TRACE ERASE STOP READ PUNCH PARAME- SHIFT CHAPT

TER ER
(2) WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen and WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen

2

While these soft keys are displayed, press the [PARAMETER] or [SHIFT] key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS
(PARAMETER) screen or WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is displayed. In this case, the operation
selection soft keys in 3 or 4 are displayed.

3

4

Pressing the [SET END] key redisplays the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
WAVE DIAGNOSIS(PARAMETER) 000000000000111 NNN000000000000333
CONDITION = 0 DI/DO = X001.1

TRIGGER = X010.1 X001.2
DELAY TIME = 1000 X001.3
X001.4
TIME RANGE = 0
(25,50,100,200,400,800MS)
ZERO SIFT = 0
(WAVE 1) (WAVE 2)
DATA KIND = 0 DATA KIND = 1
DATA RANGE = 1 DATA RANGE = 2
DATA COLOR = 1000 DATA COLOR = 1000
WAVE COLOR = 1 WAVE COLOR = 2
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18 LSK
INPUT SET CHAPTE

END R
355
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
WAVE DIAGNOSIS(GRAPH) 000000000000111 NNN000000000000333
WAVE
1.X
2.Y
00
X001.1
X001.2
X001.3
X001.4
0 500 1000 1500 TIME(MS)
MEM *** STOP **** *** *** 03:14:18 LSK
WAVE1 WAVE1 WAVE2 WAVE 2 SET CHAPTE

END R
11.13.2 Specifying the conditions for starting data sampling

As described above, waveform diagnosis functions are classified into two types: the singleshot type and ser-
voalarm type. Items to be set for these types are different. See the description in item (i) for how to use the
singleshot waveform diagnosis function. See the description in item (ii) for how to use the servoalarm wave-
form diagnosis function.
(i) Singleshot waveform diagnosis
(1) CONDITION
Enter one of the following settings in the CONDITION field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)
screen.
0 : Starts sampling data the moment the [TRACE] key is pressed.
1 : Starts sampling data when the trigger signal rises after the [TRACE] key is pressed.
2 : Starts sampling data when the trigger signal falls after the [TRACE] key is pressed.
NOTE When no trigger signal is specified, 1 and 2 are assumed to be 0.
(2) TRIGGER
Enter the PMC address and bit number corresponding to a trigger signal in the TRIGGER field on the
WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
Valid data range : G000.0 to G511.7, F000.0 to F319.7,
Y000.0 to Y127.7, and X000.0 to X127.7
(3) TIME RANGE
Enter 25, 50, 100, 200, 400, or 800 in the TIME RANGE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAME-
TER) screen. The sampling time is specified as 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, or 16.0 s.
The sampling time determines not only sampling conditions, but also graph display conditions.
(4) DATA KIND
Select the type of waveform to be traced and enter your choice in the DATA TYPE field on the WAVE
DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
0 : Servo error (pulses, detection units)
1 : Number of servo pulses to be generated (pulses, command units)
2 : Servo torque (%)
5 : Actual speed (pulses, detection units)
6 : Value of the electric current command for the servo (%)
7 : Data during heat simulation (%)
9 : Composite speed for all axes (mm/min or rpm)
10 : Spindle speed (rpm)
11 : Load meter for a spindle (%)
356
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
NOTE The servo torque and the value of the electric current command are represented as
percentages of the corresponding settings in parameter 1979. Spindle speed refers to the
speed of a digital spindle only.
1 : Number of servo pulses after interpolation 0 : Servo error
+
Pulse distribution Acceleration/
CMR Error counter
(interpolation) deceleration
circuit
DMR
(5) AXIS ASSIGN

Enter one of the following settings in the AXIS ASSIGN field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)
screen.
[When 1 to 7 is specified as the waveform type]
1 to (the number of controlled axes): Servo axis number
[When 9 is specified as the waveform type]
1 or 2: For Series 15MB, specify 1.
[When 10 or 11 is specified as the waveform type]
1 or 2: Spindle amplifier number
(6) DI/DO
Enter the PMC address and bit number of the external input/output signal to be traced in the DI/DO
field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
Y000.0 to Y127.7, and X000.0 to X127.7
(7) DATA RANGE
Enter the value per graduation on the vertical axis of the graph (0 to 524287) in the DATA RANGE field
on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
(8) ZERO SHIFT
Enter the value for the zero point (10000 to +10000) in the ZERO SHIFT field on the WAVE DIAGNO-
SIS (PARAMETER) screen.
(9) WAVE COLOR
Enter one of the following settings in the WAVE COLOR field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAME-
TER) screen.
1: Red, 2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple, 6: Light blue, 7: White
(ii) Waveform diagnosis of servoalarm type
1 CONDITION
Enter one of the following settings in the CONDITION field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)
screen.
100 : Starts sampling data and fetching it into the ring buffer the moment the [TRACE] key is pressed
and terminates the sampling when a servo alarm occurs.
and terminates the sampling when a servo alarm occurs or when the trigger signal rises.
and terminates the sampling when a servo alarm occurs or when the trigger signal falls.
357
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
2 TRIGGER
Enter the PMC address and bit number corresponding to the trigger signal specified in the TRIGGER
Y000.0 to Y127.7, and X000.0 to X127.7
3 DELAY TIME
Enter the time (0 to 32000 ms) in the DELAY TIME field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)
screen. This setting specifies how long actual termination of tracing is delayed since the tracing ter-
mination condition is satisfied.
4 DATA KIND
Select the types of waveforms to be traced from the following and enter the settings in parameters
4640, 4641, 4645, and 4646 on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
For details, see the later description of parameters.
0 : Servo error (pulses, detection units)
1 : Number of servo pulses to be generated (pulse, command units)
2 : Servo torque (%)
5 : Actual speed (pulses, detection units)
6 : Value of the electric current command for the servo (%)
7 : Data during heat simulation (%)
NOTE The servo torque and the value of the electric current command are represented as
percentages of the corresponding settings in parameter 1979.
5 AXIS ASSIGN
Enter one of the following settings in the AXIS ASSIGN field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)
screen.
1 to (the number of controlled axes): Servo axis number
6 DATA RANGE
Enter the value per graduation on the vertical axis of the graph (0 to 524287) in the DATA RANGE field
on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
7 ZERO SHIFT
Enter the value for the zero point (10000 to +10000) in the ZERO SHIFT field on the WAVE DIAGNO-
SIS (PARAMETER) screen.
8 WAVE COLOR
Enter one of the following settings in the WAVE COLOR field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAME-
TER) screen.
1: Red, 2: Green, 3: Yellow, 4: Blue, 5: Purple, 6: Light blue, 7: White
11.13.3 Starting or terminating data sampling

(1) Starting data sampling
Press the [TRACE] key. The system enters the samplingenabled state (trace mode).
(2) Terminating data sampling
Press the [STOP] key. When data is being sampled, data sampling is terminated.
11.13.4 Waveform display

As soon as data is sampled, it is displayed in the form of a graph on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen.
For servoalarm types, the date and time at the end of data sampling are displayed at the top of the screen.
358
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.13.5 Editing a displayed waveform

The waveform representing the sampled data can be edited using the following operations to make it easier
to view.
(1) Specifying the waveform type (only for the servoalarm type)
To display data items sampled with the servoalarm waveform diagnosis function, specify the waveform
type specified in parameters 4640 and 4641 as the type of the 1st waveform and the waveform type speci-
fied in parameters 4645 and 4646 as the type of the 2nd waveform.
(2) Specifying the display range of the vertical axis
To enlarge or reduce the display range of the vertical axis, enter a value per graduation in the DATA RANGE
(3) Specifying the display range of the horizontal axis
To enlarge or reduce the display range of the horizontal axis, enter a time per graduation in the TIME
RANGE field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
(4) Specifying the value of the zero point
To move the display range for the vertical axis up or down, enter the desired value of the zero point in the
ZERO SHIFT field on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen.
(5) Moving the zero point
press the [SHIFT] key on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS
(GRAPH) screen is displayed. To move the position of the zero point in the graph up and down, press the
[WAVE 1 ], [WAVE 1 ], [WAVE 2 ], and [WAVE 2 ] keys on the screen.
11.13.6 Erasing a displayed waveform

To erase the waveform being displayed, press the [ERASE] key on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER)
screen. Once a waveform is erased, it cannot be displayed again.
11.13.7 Waveform data input/output

The servoalarm type waveform diagnosis data can be output to an output device via the reader/punch inter-
face controlled in the foreground. Also servoalarm type waveform diagnosis data that was output can be input
from an input device.
(1) Type of waveform diagnosis data to input or output
Servoalarm type diagnosis data items are classified into the following six types. Diagnostic data items
are recorded for four waveforms (two waveform types for any two axes).
1. Positional deviation
2. Move command
3. Actual electric current
4. Actual speed
5. Electric current command
6. Heat simulation
(2) Outputting waveform diagnosis data
When the [PUNCH] operation key is pressed, servoalarm diagnostic data recorded by the CNC controller
is output. Diagnostic data consists of all the data on four waveforms.
Even when a singleshot waveform is displayed after servoalarm type data is traced, the CNC controller
still stores the previous servoalarm waveform diagnosis data.
In this case, pressing the [PUNCH] key outputs the waveform diagnosis data currently recorded, namely,
the latest servoalarm waveform diagnosis data.
Waveform diagnosis data cannot be output under the following conditions:
During automatic operation
While servoalarm waveform diagnosis data is being sampled
While the input/output device controlled in the foreground is being used
When servoalarm type data has not been traced since the power was turned on
(3) Inputting waveform diagnosis data
When waveform diagnosis data that was output is input to the CNC controller, the servoalarm waveform
diagnosis data recorded by the CNC controller is replaced with the input waveform diagnosis data.
359
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
When the waveform diagnosis data has been input and the waveform diagnosis graph screen is displayed,
graphs are displayed automatically according to the graph display parameter for waveform diagnosis used
when waveform diagnosis data was output.
Graphs are also displayed when the waveform diagnosis graph screen chapter is selected on a screen
other than the graph screen.
Waveform diagnosis data cannot be input under the following conditions:
During automatic operation
While servoalarm waveform diagnosis data is being sampled
While an input/output device controlled in the foreground is being used
(4) Input/output format of waveform diagnosis data
This item shows the input/output format of waveform diagnosis data for reference.
When data output from the CNC controller is used as input, there is no need to care about the input/output
format.
NOTE The input/output format is subject to change without notice.
T (identifier word) A (axisnumber word)

T0: Header
T69: Date and time of the start or end of tracing D (waveformdata word)
T60: Positional deviation
T61: Move command C (characterdata word)
T62: Actual electric current
T63: Actual speed
T64: Electric current command
T65: Heat simulation
1 T0: Header
T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;
C: Characterdata word
2 T60: Date and time of the start or end of tracing
T 6 9 D * * * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;
D*...*: Date and time of the start or end of tracing

Example D19921031,230859; indicates 23:08:59 on October 31, 1992.
3 Identifier word and axisnumber word
T 6 0 A 1 ; T 6 2 A 1 ; To a.
a. T 6 0 A 3 ; T 6 4 A 3 ;
Pairs of identifier and axisnumber words specify the order to input waveform data blocks in 4.
The above example shows that waveform data blocks are input in the following order: Positional devi-
ation waveform data for the 1st axis, actual electric current waveform data for the 1st axis, positional
deviation waveform data for the 3rd axis, electric current command waveform data for the 3rd axis
4 Waveform data block
D * * * , * * * , * * * , * * * ;
D: Indicates the beginning of a waveform data block. Each data item is separated by a comma
(,). Each block has data for every 8 ms. These blocks continue to be generated for 16 seconds.
360
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(5) Inputting and outputting waveform diagnosis data

PARAME PITCH DIANO DISPLAY SYSTEM WAVE CHATE
1 TER +
ERROR SIS MEMORY CONFIG DIAGNS R

Press the [SERVICE] function selection soft key or press the [SERVICE] key on the MDI panel, then press
the operation menu key. The chapter selection soft keys in 1 are displayed.
Press the [WAVE DIAGNS] chapter selection soft key. The WAVE DIAGNOSIS (GRAPH) screen is dis-
played.
On this screen, press the operation menu key. The operation selection keys in 2 are displayed.
TRACE ERASE STOP READ PUNCH PARAME SHIFT CHAPTE
2 +
TER R

Go to 3. Go to 3.
When the [READ] or [PUNCH] soft key is pressed, operation guidance key is displayed.
When the [READ] or [PUNCH] soft key is pressed after a file name or file number is input using the keyin
buffer, processing starts immediately.
(FILE_ (FILE
3 EXEC
NAME) #)

Go to 5 if READ . Go to 4. Go to 4.
has been pressed
Go to 6 if PUNCH
has been pressed.
4 EXEC

Go to 5 if READ has been pressed. If the (FILE_NAME) or (FILE#) soft key
Go to 6 if PUNCH has been pressed. has been pressed, enter a file name or file
number with the MDI keys, then press the
EXEC key.
5 STOP

Stops reading and displays soft keys in 2.
FEED
6 STOP
CANCEL

Stops feeding paper tape, if it is being fed, and starts punching.
Stops punching and displays soft keys in 2.
NOTE 1 When the start condition and axis number are specified again to edit the displayed waveforms
after waveform data is sampled, the original waveforms are not displayed again.
NOTE 2 The singleshot type and servoalarm waveform diagnosis functions have different setting
fields on the WAVE DIAGNOSIS (PARAMETER) screen. For instance, the DI/DO field is
provided only for the singleshot waveform diagnosis function, and the DELAY TIME field is
provided only for the servoalarm waveform diagnosis function.
For the singleshot waveform diagnosis function, the smaller the setting of the TIME RANGE
field, the shorter the sampling time. This allows a large numbers of short cycles to be specified
for sampling. For the servoalarm waveform diagnosis function, each sampling cycle is
always 8 ms regardless of the setting of the TIME RANGE field.
361
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.14 Help Function

The help function displays detailed information about the alarm state of the CNC unit and soft key operations
in a window on the CRT screen. This function can display the following:
(1) Alarm help
Alarms are issued when the operator makes an error in operating the CNC unit or a failure occurs in the
CNC unit. The help function explains the cause and location of the error in detail. It also explains action
to be taken to cancel the alarm condition.
(2) Soft key help
The soft keys displayed on the CRT screen depend on the operating state of the CNC unit. The help func-
tion explains in detail the function of each soft key that is currently displayed. It describes when a soft key
needs to be pressed and what happens to the CNC unit when the key is pressed.
While operating the CNC unit, the operator can obtain necessary information from the window on the CRT
screen without referring to the operators manual.
11.14.1 Operation
(1) Displaying and erasing the help window
To use the help function, press the [HELP] key (<SHIFT>+<EOB>) on the MDI panel. On a 9inch CRT
screen, the help window is displayed at the center. On a 14inch CRT screen, the help window is displayed
in the topright corner. To erase the help window from a CRT screen, press the [HELP] key again or select
9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW from the initial help menu. The previous screen is redisplayed.

(2) Selecting an option from the menu

Unless the CNC is in the alarm state, the initial help menu is displayed when the [HELP] key is pressed
in the initial state (usual screen display). One of the following three options can be selected from the initial
help menu: 1. ALARM, 2. SOFT KEY, and 9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW. Move the cursor to an option
and press the [INPUT] key.
HELP INITIAL MENU
1.ALARM
2.SOFT KEY
9.CLOSE HELP WINDOW
HELP ROM
SER.:AH00
EDT.:01
(SELECT BY CURSOR & PUSH INPUT KEY)
Fig. 11.14.1(a) Initial Help Menu (14Inch CRT)
362
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(3) Alarm help

If 1. Alarm is selected from the initial help menu, the window lists alarm types (alarm selection display).
Move the cursor to PS, GB, SR, or any other alarm type, enter an alarm number using the keyin buffer,
and press the [INPUT] key. The window shows detailed information on the selected alarm (detailed alarm
display). When the [INPUT] key is pressed again, the window returns to the alarm selection display.
For detailed alarm display, use the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys. By pressing these keys, the pre-
vious or succeeding information can be displayed. The [PAGE DOWN] key can also be used to see the
next part of a help message.
1.ALARM 1.ALARM
ALARM SELECTION ALARM NO. :PS010
DIVISION :GENERAL
PS :FOREGROUND PROGRAM/SETTING ALM. AN ILLEGAL G CODE WAS SPECIFIED IN
BG :BACKGROUND PROGRAM/SETTING ALM. A NC SENTENCE. THIS ALARM ALSO
SR :SERIOUS PROGRAM/SETTING ALARM OCCURS BY A OPTION ORGANIZATION,
OH :OVER HEAT ALARM NC SITUATION OR MODE SELECTION,
SB :SUB CPU ALARM EVEN IF A G CODE IS PROPER.
SW :PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON ALM.
OT :OVERTRAVEL ALARM
PC :PMC ALARM
SV :SERVO ALARM
IO :I/O ALARM
PW :POWER OFF PARAMETER SET ALARM
(SELECT BY CURSOR & INPUT NUMBER) (PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT)
Fig. 11.14.1(b) Sample Alarm Selection Display Fig. 11.14.1(c) Sample Detailed Alarm Display
(14Inch CRT) (14Inch CRT)

NOTE Arrows ( on the 14inch CRT screen) or minus and plus signs ( on the 9inch CRT
+
screen) at the topright corner of the window indicate that the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN]
keys can be used.
363
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(4) Soft key help

When 2. SOFT KEY is selected from the initial help menu, the window lists the soft keys (soft key selec-
tion display). Move the cursor to a soft key displayed in the window and press the [INPUT] key. The window
shows detailed information on the soft key (detailed soft key display). When the [INPUT] key is pressed
again, the window returns to the soft key selection display.
For detailed soft key display, use the [PAGE UP] and [PAGE DOWN] keys. When these keys are pressed,
the previous or succeeding information can be displayed. The [PAGE DOWN] key can also be used to
see the next part of a help message.
2.SOFT KEY 2.SOFTKEY

SOFTKEY SELECTION NO.1
KEY STATUS
NO.1 NO.2 NO.3 NO.4 NO.5 :FUNCTION SELECTION
POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PRGRAM SETTIN
ON M CHECK G PRESS THIS KEY TO SELECT THE
SCREEN RELATIVE TO THE POSITION
NO.6 NO.7 NO.8 NO.9 NO.10 DISPLAY.
SERVIC MESSAG GRAPHI CHAPTE YOU CAN SELECT THE DETAILED
E E C R SCREENS, WHEN YOU PRESS THIS KEY
FOR SEVERAL TIMES OR PRESS
KEY STATUS : FUNCTION SELECTION CHAPTER KEY SO AS TO CHANGE SOFT
KEY STATE TO CHAPTER SELECTION.
REVERSE DISPLAYED KEY IS *OVERALL POSITION SCREEN

CURRENTLY SELECTED FUNCTION. *RELATIVE POSITION SCREEN
(SELECT BY CURSOR & PUSH INPUT KEY) (PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT)
Fig. 11.14.1(d) Sample Soft Key Selection Display Fig. 11.14.1(e) Sample Detailed Soft Key Display
(14Inch CRT) (14Inch CRT)
NOTE An arrow ( on the 14inch CRT screen) or a plus sign ( + on the 9inch CRT screen)
at the bottomright corner of the window indicates that the message continues beyond the
window.
(5) Returning to the initial help menu

To return to the initial help menu from a help window, press the [SHIFT] key and enter 9. Even in the alarm
state described in (7) below, soft key help can be selected from the initial help menu.
(6) Deleting a window from the initial help menu
When 9. CLOSE HELP WINDOW is selected, the help window is erased.
364
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(7) Using the help function in the alarm state

When the [HELP] key is pressed when an alarm occurs in the initial state (usual screen display), the initial
help menu is not displayed. Instead, the detailed help window for the current alarm is displayed. When
two or more alarms occurred, information on the state of the alarm not currently displayed can be displayed
by pressing the [PAGE UP] or [PAGE DOWN] key. At the topright corner of the window, the total number
of current alarms (m) and the number of the current message (n) are indicated in the format n/m. In Fig.
11.14.1(f), the message regarding the first of two alarms (PS010, OT008) is displayed. When the [INPUT]
key is pressed in the detailed alarm display state, the window lists current alarms (alarm list display). To
return to detailed alarm display, move the cursor to an alarm and press the [INPUT] key.
1.ALARM 1.ALARM
ALARM NO.:PS010 01/02 CURRENT ALARM LIST
DIVISION :GENERAL
AN ILLEGAL G CODE WAS SPECIFIED IN PS010 OT008
A NC SENTENCE. THIS ALARM ALSO
OCCURS BY A OPTION ORGANIZATION,
NC SITUATION OR MODE SELECTION,
EVEN IF A CODE IS PROPER.
(PUSH INPUT KEY TO RETURN SELECT) (SELECT BY CURSOR & PUSH INPUT KEY)
Fig. 11.14.1(f) Sample Detailed Alarm Display Fig. 11.14.1(g) Sample Alarm List Display
(14Inch CRT) in the Alarm State (14Inch CRT) in the Alarm State
(8) Enabling or disabling the cursor (only for a 14inch CRT)
The frame of a help window is first displayed in green. In this state, the cursor can be moved only within
the help window. The cursor displayed on the original screen is erased.
If the [SHIFT] key is then pressed twice, the cursor is erased from the window and restored on the original
screen. In this state, the frame of the window is displayed in white. By pressing the [SHIFT] key twice, the
cursor can be moved to the help window or to the original screen. When the cursor is in the right half of
the original screen, the help window is shifted to the left. The operator can edit the program and specify
parameters while the help window is open.
365
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.14.2 Help window states

By pressing keys, the help window state is changed as shown below:
<HELP> key Initial state
(Alarm state) (usual screen display)

<SHIFT> +< SHIFT>
key
Enabling or disabling the
cursor, only for a 14-inch
9. CLOSE HELP <HELP> <HELP> CRT)
WINDOW key key
Initial help
menu
<SHIFT> + 9 Cursor and

key <INPUT> key
Alarm Soft key

selection selection
<INPUT> Cursor and <INPUT> Cursor and

key <INPUT> key key <INPUT> key
Cursor and Detailed Detailed

<INPUT> key alarm soft key
Alarm list <DOWN
<DOWN key>
key>
<INPUT> key
<UP <UP
key> key>
Fig. 8 Help Window States
The dotted box indicates the area in which the help window is displayed. When the <HELP> key is
pressed in this state, the help window is closed and the initial state is restored.
The help window is not displayed on the PMC, MMC, or conversational macro screen. If the screen is
switched to one of these three screens while the help window is displayed, the help window is erased.
366
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.15 Operation History

This function always collects history data for keys pressed by the NC operator, the states of signals set by the
NC operator, and alarms that occurred. In addition, this function enables the operator to monitor history data
when necessary.
The main features of this function are:
(1) Collecting the following history data items:
(a) Procedures in which the NC operator presses MDI keys
(b) Changes in the states (on or off) of the input/output signals
(c) Alarm data
(d) Time stamp (time and date)
(2) Searching for the following data items:
(a) Input/output signals
(b) Alarm data
(c) Time and date
(3) Outputting the following data items (punchout):
(a) All history data items
(b) A selected range of history data items
(4) Selecting signals
Up to 20 input/output signals can be selected for history data collection.
(5) Alarm history data check
Details of alarm history data, including the time and date of alarm occurrence, can be checked.
11.15.1 Operation history

(1) Soft keys
(a) Soft keys for the 9inch CRT
(i) Function selection keys
HISTRY CHAPTER
(ii) Chapter selection keys
OPE_HIS DIOSLCT ALM_HIS
(iii) Operation selection keys

When the OPE_HIS soft key is pressed
TOP LAST SEARCH PUNCH CHAPTER +
ERASE CHAPTER +
367
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(iv) Operation guidance key

When the [SEARCH] soft key is pressed

When the [DIDO], [ALARM], or [TIME] soft key is pressed

When the [PUNCH] soft key is pressed

When the [ALL] or [PART] soft key is pressed

When the [ERASE] soft key is pressed

(b) Soft keys for the 14inch CRT


POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN SERVIC CHAPTE
CHECK
ON M G E R

HISTRY CHAPTE

R


OPERAT DIDO ALARM

HISTRY SELECT HISTRY


TOP LAST SERACH PUNCH ERASE

(iv) Operation instruction key
When the [SEARCH] soft key is pressed

When the [DIDO], [ALARM], or [TIME] soft key is pressed

FRWRD BKWRD

SERACH SERACH

When the [PUNCH] soft key is pressed

368
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
When the [ALL] or [PART] soft key is pressed

When the [ERASE] soft key is pressed

EXEC CANCEL

(2) Display procedure
(a) Press the [HISTRY] soft key during function selection.
(b) The OPERATION HISTORY screen is displayed.
History data items are displayed in order from oldest to newest.
On the 9inch CRT, one page contains forty history data items, and on the 14inch CRT, one page
contains ninety.
NOTE The number of display lines varies according to the history data type. For details, see item(4).
(c) The following soft keys are used as operation selection keys.
(i) TOP
Displays the first page of history data, which starts with oldest history data item.
(ii) LAST
Displays the last page of history data, which ends with the newest history data item.
(iii) SEARCH
Searches for a particular type of history data item. For details, see item(5).
(iv) PUNCH
Outputs history data. For details, see item(6).
(v) ERASE
Erases history data. For details, see item(7).
(d) Press the [SEARCH] soft key (one of the above operation selection keys). Any of the following data
items can be searched for. For details, see item(5).
(i) DIDO
Searches for signal history data.
(ii) ALARM
Searches for alarm history data.
(iii) TIME
Searches for time history data.
(iv) FW_SRCH
Press this soft key after pressing one of the soft keys in (i) to (iii). The selected history data is
searched for forward from the currently displayed history data (toward newer history data).
(v) BW_SRCH
Press this soft key after pressing one of the soft keys in (i) to (iii). The selected history data is
searched for backward from the currently displayed history data (toward older history data).
(e) Press the [PUNCH] soft key selected (one of the operation selection keys). The following operation
instruction keys are displayed. For details, see item(6).
(i) ALL
Outputs all history data items.
(ii) PART
Outputs some history data items.
369
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
(iii) EXEC
Starts punchout.
(f) Press the [ERASE] soft key (one of the operation selection keys). The following operation instruction
keys are displayed. For details, see item(7).
(i) EXEC
Executes erasing.
(ii) CANCEL
Cancels erasing.
(3) OPERATION HISTORY screen
The smaller the number of a history data item, the older it is.
9inch CRT
OPERATION HISTORY O0001 N00001

NO. DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA NO. DATA
01 PW 000 11 5 21 G003.3 31 G
02 92/08/25 12 [SOFT 5] 22 G003.4 32 9
03 08:40:00 13 1 23 [SOFT 2] 33 0
04 <RESET> 14 0 24 O 34 X
05 G003.5 15 0 25 0 35 4
06 G003.3 16 0 26 0 36 5
07 [SOFT 6] 17 [SOFT 1] 27 0 37 6
08 2 18 <RESET> 28 1 38 .
09 2 19 92/08/25 29 [SOFT 2] 39 F
10 0 20 08:41:36 30 ; 40 1
MDI***STOP**** *** *** 00:00:00 ***
TOP LAST SEARCH PUNCH CHAP-

TER
(4) Data displayed

(a) MDI key data
(i) Address keys and numeric keys: A to Z, 0 to 9, semicolon (;), plus (+), minus (), etc.
(ii) Page keys and cursor keys: <PAGE>, <CUR>, <CUR>, etc.
(iii) Operation menu keys and soft keys: [LEFT.F], [SOFT 1], [RIGH.F], etc.
(iv) Other keys: <RESET> <CAN>, etc.
(v) Keys used when the power is turned on: <RESET>, etc.
Items in (i) are displayed after a space.
Items in (ii), (iv), and displayed (v) are displayed enclosed in symbols. (< >)
Items in (iii) are displayed enclosed in square brackets ([ ]).
Data items in (v) are displayed in reverse video.
MDIkey data items are each displayed on one line.
(b) Input/output signal data
Input/output signal data is displayed in the following format:
G000. 7
An up arrow () indicates that the state of the signal changed from off to on.
A down arrow () indicates that the state of the signal changed from on to off.
Bit number
Address
Input/output signal data items are each displayed on one line.
370
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(c) Alarm data

Alarm data items are displayed in reverse video.
Only the type and number of an alarm are displayed on the OPERATION HISTORY screen.
PS 003
Alarm number
Alarm type
Alarm data items are displayed over three lines. The number and type of the alarm are displayed on the
first line, and the date and time when the alarm occurred are displayed on the next two lines.
(d) Time and date
The following times and dates are collected and displayed as history data.
i) Time and date when the power was turned on
92/08/30
11:30:32
ii) Time and date when the power was turned off
92/08/30
11:55:16
iii) Time and date when an NC alarm occurred
92/08/30
11:33:48
iv) Time and date when the time and/or date was changed
92/08/31
00:00:00
5 Time and date at constant intervals
92/08/30
11:45:32
Specify this interval in parameter 7765.
NOTE Even when the above parameter is set, the time and date are not collected if no other history
data (keys, signals, etc.) is collected within the specified interval.
The time and date are displayed over two lines.

The data items in ii) to (v) are displayed in reverse video.
(5) Searching for a history data item
Pressing the [SEARCH] key (one of the operation selection keys) enables the following data items to be
searched for.
(i) Signal data item
(a) Press the [DIDO] key.
(b) Use one of the following search methods:
1 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F), address, decimal point (.), and bit number.
Example G3.5
When the entered signal type, address, and bit number agree with those of a history data item,
that history data item is found.
2 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F) and address.
Example G3
When the entered signal type and address agree with those of a history data item, that history
data item is found.
3 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F).
371
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
Example G
When the entered signal type agrees with that of a history data item, that history data item
is found.
(ii) Alarm data item
(a) Press the [ALARM] key.
(b) Use one of the following search methods:
1 Enter an alarm type and alarm number with keys.
Example OT7
When the entered alarm type and alarm number agree with those of a history data item, that
history data item is found.
2 Enter an alarm type with keys.
Example OT
When the entered alarm type agrees with that of a history data item, that history data item is
found.
(iii) Time data
(a) Press the [TIME] key.
(b) Use the following search method.
Enter month/date/hour/minute with keys. Less significant data can be omitted as shown in the
example below.
Example Month/date/hour/minute: 08/26/13/24
Month/date/hour: 08/26/13
Month/date: 08/26
Month: 08
NOTE Enter the month, date, hour, and minute with two digits each.
After the above operations do the following:

To search for a history data item forward from the currently displayed history data (toward newer histo-
ry data), press the [FW_SRCH] soft key.
To search for a history data item backward from the currently displayed history data (toward older his-
tory data), press the [BW_SRCH] soft key.
NOTE Searching forward for a history data item terminates at the most recent history data item (last
data item). Searching backward for a history data item terminates at the oldest history data
item (first data item). If the specified history data item is not found, a warning is issued.
When the specified history data item is found during searching, the page of history data items that con-
tains the specified history data item is displayed. The line number of the specified history data item
is displayed in reverse video. Subsequently, this history data item is used as the (search pointer) dur-
ing searching. When searching has not yet been performed, the oldest history data item (first data)
is used as the search pointer. The search pointer is also used during partial punchingout.
Once history data has been searched for, the search pointer is kept until the power is turned off. When
the memory for history data items becomes full, the first data in the history is automatically used as
the search pointer.
(6) Outputting history data
History data can be output to the host computer via the RS232C interface.
(a) Press the [PUNCH] soft key (one of the operation selection keys) on the OPERATION HISTORY
screen.
(b) The following punchingout can be performed:
(i) Complete punchout
Press the [ALL] soft key, then press the [EXEC] soft key. All history data items are output.
(ii) Partial punchout
372
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
1 Before starting partial punchout, use the search function to determine the reference points for
starting and ending partial punchout. The search pointer is used as (reference history data item)
for partial punchout.
For details on searching, see item(5).
2 Specify the number of display lines of history data items to output.
For details on display lines, see item(4).
Example 1 To output 100 history data items forward from the reference history data item, press the
[PART] soft key, enter 100, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
Example 2 To output 100 history data items backward from the reference history data item, press the
Example 3 To output all history data items forward from the reference history data item, press the [PART]
soft key, enter 9999, then press the [EXEC] soft key.
Example 4 To output all history data items backward from the reference history data item, press the
NOTE 1 History data items are always output in the foreground.

NOTE 2 The valid data range for partial punching is 9999 to 9999 excluding 0. 9999 and 9999 have
the meanings described in the above examples.
When the number of history data items is less than the absolute value of the value entered, the
entered numeric value is handled as if it were 9999 or 9999.
(c) History data items are output in ASCII code in the following format.
(i) MDI key
Example When the [A] key is pressed
[MDI] key pushed A LF
(ii) DI/DO
Example 1 When the state of G003.5 changes from off to on
DI/DO changed G3.5_ON LF
Example 2 When different signals with the same address are changed at the same time
DI/DO changed F0.6_ONF0.1_OFF LF
(iii) Alarm
Example When the alarm, PW000 TURN OFF THE POWER occurs
Alarm! PW0 at 92/8/30 23:17:56 LF
(iv) Time
Example 1 At 23:17:56 on August 30, 1992
92/8/30 23:17:56 LF
Example 2 When the power is turned on
92/8/30 23:17:56 Power On LF
(d) Communication protocol
Refer to the case where the NC sends data in Transmission Method for the RS232C Interface in
the FANUC Series 15B Operators Manual (Appendixies).
(7) Erasing history data
(a) Press the [OPE_HIS] soft key (one of the chapter selection keys).
(b) Press the [ERASE] soft key (one of the operation selection keys).
(c) Press the [EXEC] soft key (one of the operation instruction keys).
When the [EXEC] soft key is pressed by mistake during selection, press the [CANCEL] soft key.
When operation history data is erased, the date and time it was erased is recorded at the beginning
of new history data.
373
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.15.2 Selecting signals

(1) Soft keys
HISTRY CHAPTER

When the [DIOSLCT] soft key is pressed
CLEAR ALL_CLR ON:1 OFF:0 CHAPTER +
INPUT CHAPTER +
(iv) Operation guidance keys

When the [CLEAR] or [ALL_CLR] is pressed
EXEC CANCEL

//
CHECK +
ON M G E R
//
//
HISTRY CHAPTE
+
R
//

//
OPERAT DIDO ALARM
+
//

When the [DIDO SELECT] soft key is pressed
//
ALL
CLEAR ON:1 OFF:0 INPUT
CLEAR
//
374
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(iv) Operation guidance keys

When the [CLEAR] or [ALL CLEAR] soft key is pressed

EXEC CANCEL

(2) SELECT DI/DO screen
Up to 20 addresses can be used to select signals. Signals need not always be specified in sequence from
data number 1.
DI/DO SELECT O0001 N0001

NO. ADDRESS SIGNAL NO. ADDRESS SIGNAL
01 X000 00001000 11 G000 00000001
02 X004 10000000 12 G004 00000010
03 X008 00001100 13 G008 00000011
04 X009 00111000 14 G003 01011100
05 X012 00001111 15 G043 00100001
06 Y000 01000000 16 F000 01100010
07 Y004 00110000 17 ********
08 Y007 00011100 18 ********
09 Y008 00011100 19 ********
10 Y010 00011100 20 F020 10101010
MDI * * * STOP * * * * * * * * * * 00:00:00 * * *

CLEAR ALL_CLR ON:1 OFF:0 CHAPTER +
(3) Specifying data

1 Press the [HISTRY] soft key several times, or press the [CHAPTER] soft key followed by the [DIDO
SELECT] soft key. The [SELECT DI/DO] screen is displayed.
2 Press the cursor keys [] or [] to move the cursor to the position to enter data.
3 Enter a signal type (X, Y, G, or F) and address, then press the [INPUT] soft key.
Example Y4([INPUT] key)
Valid data range: G0 to G511, F0 to F319, X0 to X127, or Y0 to Y127
4 Specify signal address Y004 in the ADDRESS column, then set the SIGNAL column to the initial value
(00000000).
5 The operation selection keys have the following functions:
(i) CLEAR
When the [CLEAR] soft key and the [EXEC] soft key are pressed, the signal data at the cursor is
deleted. The contents of the signal field is changed to ********, and the address field is cleared.
When the [CLEAR] soft key is pressed by mistake, press the [CANCEL] key.
(ii) ALL_CLR
When the [ALL_CLR] soft key and the [EXEC] soft key are pressed, all specified data items are
deleted. When the [ALL_CLR] soft key is pressed by mistake, press the [CANCEL] key.
(iii) ON:1
Press this soft key to set all bits of the data item at the cursor to 1.
(iv) OFF:0
Press this soft key to set all bits of the data item at the cursor to 0.
(v) INPUT
This soft key is used to enter a signal address. It is also used to enter the value of the signal after
a signal address is entered.
NOTE Changes in signals cannot be deleted unless they continue for longer than 16ms.
375
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.15.3 Alarm history

(1) Soft keys
HISTRY CHAPTER

(iii) Function selection keys
//
CHECK +
ON M G E R
//
//
HISTRY CHAPTE
+
R
//
(iv) Chapter selection keys

//
OPERAT DIDO ALARM
+
//
(2) Alarm history screen

9inch CRT
ALARM HISTORY O0001 N00001

SW000 PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON
92/08/26 12:35:26
OT007 X + OVERTRAVEL(HARD)
92/08/27 08:40:18
0T008 X OVERTRAVEL(HARD)
92/08/27 08:40:18
PW000 POWER MUST BE OFF
92/08/27 08:45:32
MC001
92/08/28 09:20:50
MDI * * * STOP * * * * * * * * * * 00:00:00 * * *

CHAPTER
376
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(3) Display format of history data

History data items are displayed as follows:
OT 007 X + overtravel (hard limit)
Message text
Axis for which the alarm occurred
Alarm number
Alarm type
On the 14inch CRT display, the date and time of alarm occurrence and alarm history data are displayed in
this order on a line. On the 9inch CRT display, the date and time of alarm occurrence is displayed over two
lines under the alarm history data.
NOTE 1 No message text is displayed for EX and MC alarms.

NOTE 2 When the values of parameter 1020 and 1021 are different from those when an alarm occurred,
no correct axis data is not displayed.
11.15.4 Restrictions
(1) The operation history function does not collect history data items while the OPERATION HISTORY screen
is being displayed.
(2) While the OPERATION HISTORY screen is being displayed, the operation history function does not collect
history data items even when the OPERATION HISTORY screen is changed to the PMC screen. This is
because it is still assumed that the OPERATION HISTORY screen is being displayed.
(3) Approx. 2040 <MDI> key history data items can be recorded in memory as history data. When memory
is full, older data items are deleted first.
(4) Specify the correct date and time on the setting screen.
(5) The number of signal addresses specified on the SELECT DI/DO screen affects the processing speed dur-
ing automatic operation. Specify only the required signal addresses.
377
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
11.16 Internal Position Compensation Data Display Function

The function for displaying internal position compensation data displays the data used in the CNC for each
function while the following functions are executed:
Cutter compensation
Tool length compensation
Drilling canned cycle
Coordinate rotation
Three-dimensional coordinate conversion
Programmable mirror image
Scaling
Three-dimensional tool compensation
Operations
This function provides a screen for each of the above functions. How to display each screen is described below:
(1) Press the function menu key to display the function selection soft keys 1.
(2) Press the function selection soft key [PRG_CHK] (9 CRT) or [COMMAND] (14 CRT) or the MDI panel
key [P- CHECK] and the operation menu key to display the chapter selection soft keys 2.
Pressing the chapter selection soft key [POS_DAT] (9 CRT) or [POS. DATA] (14 CRT) displays the POSI-
TION DATA screen shown below. Then pressing the operation menu key displays the operation selection
soft keys 3.
(3) Press the operation selection soft key corresponding to the screen you want to display. Subsequent pages
briefly describe each screen.
Function selection keys on 9 CRT
1 POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG_CHK CHAPTER

Chapter selection keys for program check on 9 CRT

2 POS DAT

Operation selection keys for positional compensation data on 9 CRT
3 CUT CMP TLC OFS CAN CYL ROTATON 3DM CNV
Function selection keys on 14 CRT

POSITI PROGRA COMMAN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE
1 ON M
OFFSET
D
SETTING
E E
GRAPH
R
Chapter selection keys for program check on 14 CRT

OPE POS.
2 CHECK LAST ACTIVE
MONITR DATA
Operation selection keys for position compensation data on 14 CRT

CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3 DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3 DIM CHAPTE
3 CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRRORG G OFFSET R
378
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
[Cutter compensation screen]
POSITION DATA O0100 N0000 [ON / OFF]

CUTTER COMPENSATION (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)
ON/OFF
X 0.000 X 0.000
Displays ON in the cutter com-
OFFSET VECTOR
Y
Z
0.000
0.000
Y
Z
0.000
0.000
pensation mode and OFF in
X 100.000
U
V
0.000
0.000
U
V
0.000
0.000
other modes.
Y 200.000 W 0.000 W 0.000
(G/D/H) (M) (T) [OFFSET VECTOR]
G91 G54 M02
G01
G17
G80
G64
Displays the cutter com-
G41
D 0
G49
H 0
(L): 0
pensation vector created for
(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0 each block.
(S) (ACT.S) 0
MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK
CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM CHAPT

CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET ER
[Tool length compensation screen]

CUTTER COMPENSATION (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)
Displays ON in the tool length
ON/OFF
X 0.000 X 0.000
compensation mode and
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 OFF in other modes.
OFFSET VECTOR Z 0.000 Z 0.000
U 0.000 U 0.000
X
Y
100.000
200.000
V
W
0.000
0.000
V
W
0.000
0.000
[OFFSET VECTOR]
Z 300.000 (G/D/H) (M) (T) Displays the tool length com-
U 0.000
V 0.000 G91 G54 M02 pensation vector created for
W 0.000 G01 G80
G17 G64 each block.
G40 G43 (L): 0
D 0 H 0
Remark)
(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0
(S) (ACT.S) 0 Tool length compensation
can be applied for any axis
MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK according to parameter set-
CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM CHAPT ting and therefore data for
all axes are displayed.
379
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
[Canned cycle screen]

CANNED CYCLE (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO) Displays ON in the drilling
ON/OFF
X 0.000 X 0.000
canned cycle mode and OFF
INTIAL POINT NUMBER OF REPETITIONS
Y
Z
0.000
0.000
Y
Z
0.000
0.000
in other modes.
U 0.000 U 0.000
Z 0.000 L(CMD) 20 V 0.000 V 0.000 [INITIAL POINT]
L(ACT) 1 W 0.000 W 0.000
POINT R (G/D/H) (M) (T) Displays the absolute position
CUTIN VALUE
Z 200.000 G91 G54 M02 of the initial point.
G01 G76
POINT Z
SHIFT VALUE
G17
G40
G64
G49 (L): 0
[POINT R]
Z 200.000
X 10.000
D 0 H 0
Displays the absolute position
Y 20.000 (F)
(S)
0 (ACT.F)
(ACT.S)
0
0
of point R.
[POIN Z]
MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK Displays the absolute position
CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM
CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET
CHAPT
ER
of point Z.
[NUMBER OF REPETITIONS]
Displays the specified value
and current value of the num-
ber of repetitions.
[CUT IN VALUE]
Displays the depth of cut for
G73 and G83.
[SHIFT VALUE]
Displays the shift for G76 and
G87.
[Coordinate rotation screen]

COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)
ON/OFF
X 0.000 X 0.000
Displays ON in the coordinate
ROTATION CENTER
Y
Z
0.000
0.000
Y
Z
0.000
0.000
rotation mod and OFF in other
X 100.000
U
V
0.000
0.000
U
V
0.000
0.000
modes.
Y 200.000 W 0.000 W 0.000
ANGLE OF ROTATION
(G/D/H) (M) (T) [ROTATION CENTER]
G91 G54 M02
90.00000 G01
G17
G80
G64
G40
D 0
G49
H 0
(L): 0
of the center of coordinate
(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0 rotation.
(S) (ACT.S) 0
[ANGLE OF ROTATION]
MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

Displays the angle of coordi-
nate rotation.
380
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
[Three-dimensional coordinate conversion screen]

3DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION
ON/OFF
(RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO) Displays ON in the three-di-
X 0.000 X 0.000 mensional coordinate conver-
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
ROTATION CENTER Z 0.000 Z 0.000 sion mode and OFF in other
(FIRST) (SECOND) U 0.000 U 0.000
X 1.000 X 1.000 V 0.000 V 0.000 modes.
Y 2.000 Y 2.000 W 0.000 W 0.000
Z 3.000 Z 3.000 (G/D/H) (M) (T)
[ROTATION CENTER]
DIRECTION OF CENTER AXIS OF POTATION
(FIRST) (SECOND)
G91 G54
G01 G80
M02
X
Y
1.000
2.000
X
Y
1.000
2.000
G17 G64
G40 G49 (L): 0
of the rotation center for three-
Z 3.000 Z 3.000 D 0 H 0 dimensional coordinate con-
ROTATION ANGLE (F) 0 (ACT.F) 0 version.
(FIRST) (SECOND) (S) (ACT.S) 0
30.00000 30.00000
[DIRECTION OF CENTER AXIS
MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK OF ROTATION]
CUTTER TL LEN CANNED ROTATI 3DIM PRGMBL SCALIN 3DIM
CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET
CHAPT
ER
Displays the direction of the
rotation center axis for three-
dimensional coordinate con-
version
[ROTATION ANGLE]
Displays the rotation angle for
three-dimensional coordinate
conversion.
[Programmable mirror image screen]

PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE
ON/OFF
(RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO) Displays ON in the program-
X 0.000 X 0.000 mable mirror image mode and
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
MIRROR CENTER Z 0.000 Z 0.000 OFF in other modes.
U 0.000 U 0.000
X 100.000 V 0.000 V 0.000
Y 200.000 W 0.000 W 0.000
Z 300.000 (G/D/H) (M) (T) [MIRROR CENTER]
U
V G91 G54 M02 Displays the absolute posi-
W G01
G17
G80
G64
tion of the mirror axis.
G40 G49 (L): 0
D 0 H 0
Remark)
(F)
(S)
0 (ACT.F)
(ACT.S)
0
0
Nothing is displayed for axes
along which no mirror axis ex-
MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK ists. When 0 is displayed, it
means that the mirror axis ex-
CMPENS OFFSET CYCLE ON CNVSON MIRROR G OFFSET ER ists at coordinate 0.
381
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
[Scaling screen]

SCALING (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)
ON/OFF Displays ON in the scaling
X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 mode and OFF in other
SCALING CENTER SCALING FACTOR Z 0.000 Z 0.000
U 0.000 U 0.000 modes.
X 0.000 X 2.00000 V 0.000 V 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 2.00000 W 0.000 W 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 2.00000 (G/D/H) (M) (T) [SCALING CENTER]
U 0.000 U 1.00000
V 0.000 V 1.00000 G91 G54 M02
W 0.000 W 1.00000 G01 G80 Displays the absolute posi-
G17 G64
G40 G49
D 0 H 0
(L): 0 tion of the scaling center.
(F)
(S)
0 (ACT.F)
(ACT.S)
0
0
[SCALE FACTOR]
Displays the scale factor for
MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK
each axis.
[Three- dimensional tool compensation screen]
POSITION DATA O0100 N0000 [ON / OFF ]

THREEDIMENSIONAL TOOL OFFSET (RELATIVE) (DIST TO GO)
ON/OFF Displays ON in the three-di-
X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000 mensional tool compensation
OFFSET VECTOR Z 0.000 Z 0.000
U 0.000 U 0.000 mode and OFF in other
X 1.000 V 0.000 V 0.000
Y
Z
2.000
3.000
W 0.000
(G/D/H) (M)
W
(T)
0.000 modes.
G91
G01
G54
G80
M02 [OFFSET VECTOR]
G17 G64
G41
D 0
G49
H 0
(L): 0 Displays the threedimen-
(F) 0 (ACT.F) 0
sional tool compensaion vec-
(S) (ACT.S) 0
tor created for each block.
MDI***STOP**** */* */* 02:47:55 LSK

382
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
11.17 Coordinate System Related Data Display Function

The FANUC Series 15-B provides the following diagnostic displays for coordinate data:
(i) Display of the shift (*) of the coordinate system when manual intervention is applied with the manual abso-
lute signal turned off during manual operation
(ii) Display of the shift in the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic/manual
simultaneous function or other function
(iii) Display of the offset of the coordinate system when the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is set
with a G92 command or MDI operation
(iv) Display of the offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate systems set with a G52 command
(v) Display of the shift of the coordinate system due to a move command issued when the machine is in the
lock state
Workpiece coordinate system (G54)

before manual intervention
Po
Position before manual
intervention
S
Amount of manual
Offset of the origin of the WZo Origin of the workpiece intervention
workpiece coordinate coordinate system before manual
system for G54 intervention
Workpiece coordinate sys-
tem (G54) after manual in-
tervention
S
Pn
Position after manual in-
Machine zero point tervention
WZn Origin of the workpiece coordinate

system after manual intervention
Fig. 11.17 Coordinate System before and after Manual Intervention when the Manual Absolute
Signal is Off
NOTE The shift is the distance the coordinate system moves along each axis (in the case of (i) for
example). Vector S in Fig. 11.17 in dicates the total shift along the axes.
Explanation
The workpiece coordinate system used for automatic operation is defined with several offsets.
The controlled axes, the machine coordinates, absolute coordinates, and offsets are related as fol lows:
[Machine coordinate]=[Absolute coordinate] + External workpiece zero point offset
+ Currently valid offset among those caused by G54 to G59
+ Offset caused by G92 (1)
+ Offset caused by G52 (2)
+ Other data related to coordinates (3)
This function can display values (1), (2), and (3) above on the diagnosis screen.
383
11. DISPLAY B62564E1/02
The table below lists the diagnosis number of each data item related to the coordinates for each control axis.
Diagnosis No. Description
4100 Shift in the coordinate system by manual operation
4101 Shift in the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic /
manual simultaneous function or other function
4102 Offset of the coordinate system when the workpiece coordinate system is set with a
G92 command
4103 Offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate system is set with a G52
command
4104 Shift of the coordinate system in the machine lock state
(1) Shift in the coordinate system by manual operation

Displays the shift in the coordinate system along each axis in manual operation with the manual absolute
signal turned off.
Diagnosis No. Indication Description
4100 MANUAL SHIFT Displays the shift in the coordinate system by manual operation
along the X-axis.
Displays the shift in the coordinate system by manual operation
along the Y-axis.

Displays the shift in the coordinate system by manual operation
along the Z-axis.
(2) Shift of the coordinate system due to a manual interrupt caused by the automatic/manual simultaneous
function or other function.
Displays the amount of intervention caused by a manual interrupt along each axis.
4101 MANUAL SHIFT Displays the manual interrupt amount along the X-axis caused by
the automatic/manual simultaneous function or other function.
Displays the manual interrupt amount along the Y-axis caused by

Displays the manual interrupt amount along the Z-axis caused by
(3) Offset of the coordinate system when the workpiece coordinate system is set with a G92 command.
Displays the offset along each axis in the coordinate system set with a G92 command.
4102 G92 OFFSET Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the X-axis in
input increments.
Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the Y-axis in
input increments.

Displays the offset caused by a G92 command along the Z-axis in
input increments.
384
B62564E1/02 11. DISPLAY
(4) Offset of the coordinate system when the local coordinate system is set with a G52 command.
Displays the offset along each axis in the coordinate system set with a G52 command.
4103 G92 OFFSET Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the X-axis in
input increments.
Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the Y-axis in
input increments.

Displays the offset caused by a G52 command along the Z-axis in
input increments.
(5) Shift in the coordinate system in the machine lock state.

Displays the shift in the coordinate system due to a move command issued in the machine lock state.
4104 MCN LOCK SHIFT Displays the shift in the machine lock state along the X-axis in input
increments.
Displays the shift in the machine lock state along the Y-axis in input
increments.

Displays the shift in the machine lock state along the Z-axis in input
increments.
385
12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION B62564E1/02
12.CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION

The CRT screen saving function clears all data items on the CRT screen when the power is on and the CRT
has not used within a certain period of time. This function is effective for extending the life of the screen.
12.1 Small CRT/MDI Panel

To clear all data items on the CRT screen, press the SHIFT and cancel (CAN) keys simultaneously. To subse-
quently redisplay data items on the CRT screen, press any key.
12.2 Panels Other than the Small CRT/MDI Panel

To clear all data items on the CRT screen, press any function key and the cancel (CAN) key simultaneously.
To subsequently redisplay data items on the CRT screen, press any key.
The following function keys can be used.
POS PROG OFFSET P-CHECK
SETTING SERVICE MESSAGE OTHERS
This function cannot be used with a system equipped with the MMC function.
12.3 Screen Saver Function

When the operator does not operate the keyboard for a predetermined period, the screen being displayed is
automatically cleared and an animated screen (called a saver screen) is displayed instead.
When one of the following conditions occurs, the original screen is redisplayed.
The operator presses a key (including a key from the PMC)
A new alarm is issued
A new operator message is output
The operation mode changes
The saver restoration signal goes high
Saver screen
When the screen saver is activated, the screen

<< 11 : 20 : 33 >> (saver screen) shown on the left is displayed.
The current-time indication moves across the
screen from left to right, gradually moving down the
screen as it deletes the original screen.
(The original screen is not updated while the screen
saver is activated.)
j j j j j
386
B62564E1/02 12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION
Notes
(1) When operator input causes the original screen to be redisplayed, the input is also reflected on the
screen.
(2) For screens other than the CNC screen, such as the PMC, conversational, or TC screen, the screen
saver function is disabled.
(3) When a newly issued alarm is of the same type (PS, OT, or SV) as that of an alarm which was issued
previously, the original screen is not redisplayed.
Example While OT100 is being issued, if OT001 is issued, the original screen is not redisplayed. When
SV001 is issued, the original screen is redisplayed.
(4) Even while an alarm is being displayed on the screen, if the operator does not operate the keyboard
for a predetermined period, the screen saver is automatically activated, and the saver screen is dis-
played.
(5) While a graphic screen is being created (for example, with the graphic display function), the screen
saver may not be activated.
(6) This function cannot be used with a system equipped with the MMC function.
(7) This function is also enabled while the screen is displayed using a conversational macro.
(8) When the screen clear function is used, it takes priority over this function. (The saver screen is als
cleared.)
Parameter Description
0016 Screen saver start time
Setting entry
Data type : Byte
Data unit : Minute
Data range : 0 to 127
When the operator does not operate the keyboard for the period specified in this parameter, the saver screen
is displayed. When 0 is specified, the screen saver function is disabled.
387
13. DATA OUTPUT B62564E1/02
13.DATA OUTPUT
13.1 Tool Offsets

The tool offsets set in offset memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same
as the offset data input (programmable data input : G10) format specified by the tape command.
1 Setting the data output interface 9" CRT unit
Set what interface is used as the data

output interface in the foreground
output device. (See Section 10.3.)
The reader/punch interface or
ASR33 interface can output data.
2 Setting the output code
Function Soft keys Operation
Set whether to output data in the EIA menu key menu key
or ISO code in the punch code. (See
Section 10.3.) 9" CRT function selection keys
3 Set the operation mode to the EDIT
mode. POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET PRG-CHK CHAPTER +
4 Press the function menu key to en-

able the soft keys to function as the
9" CRT OFFSET operation selection keys
function selection keys.
5 Press the OFFSET key (soft or hard ALL_CLR PUNCH MEASURE +
key) several times.
Display the screen of the tool offset.
6 Press the operation menu key to en- 9" CRT operation guide keys (PUNCH)
operation selection keys. TOOL (F_NAM) (FILE#)
7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the

soft keys to function as the operation
guidance keys. 14" CRT unit
8 Press the TOOL key.
9 Output of the offset values is started
and the STOP soft key is displayed.
10 To cancel offset value output, press
the STOP key. Once this key is
pressed, however, output of the re-
maining offset values cannot be re- Function Soft keys Operation
started. menu key menu key
11 After the offset values have been out-
put, the soft keys return to operating 14" CRT function selection keys
as the operation selection keys. POSITI PROGRA OFFSET PROGRAM SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE
ON M CHECK G E E R

INPU +IN MEAS PUNC INPUTA ALL
T PUT URE H NUMBER CLEAR
14" CRT operation guidance keys

TOOL (FILE_ (FILE
NAME) #)
388
B62564E1/02 13. DATA OUTPUT
13.2 Parameters
The parameters set in NC memory can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as
the parameter tape format.
1 Setting the data output interface
Set what interface is used as the data 9" CRT function selection keys
output interface in the foreground
output device. (See Section 10.3.)
The reader/punch interface or
ASR33 interface can output data.
2 Setting the output code 9" CRT operation selection keys
Set whether to output data in the EIA PUNCH READ
or ISO code in the punch code. (See
Section 10.3.)
3 Set the operation mode to the EDIT
mode. 9" CRT operation guide keys
4 Press the function menu key to en- A L L PARAM PITCH (F_NAM) (FILEt)
function selection keys.
5 Press the SERVICE key (soft or hard
key) several times.
Display the screen of the parameter
6 Press the operation menu key to en-
POSITI PROGRA OFFSET SETTIN SERVIC MESSAG CHAPTE
able the soft keys to function as the ON M
PROGRAM
CHECK G E E R
operation selection keys.
7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the
soft keys to function as the operation
guide keys. 14" CRT operation selection keys
INPUT
8 INPUT +IN ON:1 OFF:0 NUM READ PUNC
PUT BER H
To output parameters other
than the pitch error com-
pensation 14" CRT operation guidance keys
PARA PITCH (FILE_ (FILE
Press the PARM key. ALL ME ER NAME) #)
TER ROR
To output only the pitch error
compensation
Press the PITCH key.
To output all the parameters at
a time
Press the ALL key.
9 Parameter output is started and the
STOP soft key is displayed.
10 To cancel parameter output, press
the STOP key. Once this key is
pressed, however, output of the re-
maining parameters cannot be re-
started.
11 After the parameters have been out-
put, the soft keys return to operating
as the operation selection keys.
389
13. DATA OUTPUT B62564E1/02
13.3 Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point

The offset from the workpiece reference point set in the offset memory can be output to the output device. The
output data format is the same as the format of offset data input (programmable data input G10) specified
by the tape command.
Set what interface is used as the data output interface in the foreground output device. (See Section 10.3.)
The reader/punch interface or ASR33 interface can output data.
Set whether to output data in the EIA or ISO code in the punch code. (See Section 10.3.)
3 Set the operation mode to the EDIT mode.
4 Press the function menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the function selection keys.
5 Press the OFFSET key (soft or hard key) several times.
Display the screen of the work origin compensation.
6 Press the operation menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation selection keys.
7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation guide keys.
8 Press the WRK.ZER key.
9 The output of offset values is started and the STOP soft key is displayed.
10 To cancel output of the offset values, press the STOP key. Once this key is pressed, however, output of
the remaining offset values cannot be restarted.
11 After the offset values have been output, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.
NOTE The offset from the workpiece reference point can be output only when the addition of
workpiece coordinate set count (option) is available.
ALL_CLR PUNCH MEASURE +
9" CRT operation guidance keys (PUNCH)
WRK.ZER (F_NAM) (FILE#)

ON M CHECK G E E R

IN +IN MEA INPUT CHAPTE
TL_INP PUNCH
PUT PUT SURE NUMBER R

WORK (FILE_N (FILE#
ZERO AME) )
390
B62564E1/02 13. DATA OUTPUT
13.4 Output of Tool Offset Data Corresponding to Tool Number

Tool offset data corresponding to the specified tool number
can be output to the output device. The output data format is the same as the format of offset data input speci-
fied by the tape command.
G10 L70 ;
Tffff Pffff Rffff Kffff ;
:
:
:
G11 ;
M2 ;
Set what interface is used as the data output interface in the foreground output device. (See Section 10.3.)
The reader/punch interface or ASR33 interface can output data.
Set whether to output data in the EIA or ISO code in the punch code. (See Section 10.3.)
4 Press the function menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the function selection keys.
5 Press the OFFSET key (soft or hard key) several times. The screen which contains the tool offset data
corresponding to the specified tool number is displayed .
6 Press the operation menu key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation selection keys.
7 Press the PUNCH key to enable the soft keys to function as the operation guidance keys.
8 Press the TL.DATA key.
9 Output of tool offset data is started.
10 After the tool offset data has been output, the soft keys return to operating as the operation selection keys.
ALL_CLR PUNCH MEASURE
9" CRT operation guidance keys (PUNCH)
TL.DATA (F.NAM) (FILE#) (FILE#)

ON M CHECK G E E R

INPUT INSERT DELETE SERACH PUNCH MEASUR
E

TOOL (FILE_ (FILE
DATA NAME) #)
391
14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD B62564E1/02
14.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE

AND FANUC FA CARD
In this chapter, the FANUC Floppy cassette and FANUC FA Card are reffered to as the cassette and card, re-
spectively.
14.1 What is a File

The unit of data, which is input/output between the cassette or card and the CNC by one input/output operation
(pressing the [READ] or [PUNCH] key), is called a file. When inputting CNC programs from, or outputting them
to the cassette or card for example, one or all programs within the CNC memory are handled as one file.
Files are assigned file numbers 1,2,3,4 and so on, with the lead file as 1.
File1 File2 File3 Filen Blank
One file can also be written over two cassettes as follows:

Cassette 1 or Card 1
File1 File2 File3 File (k-1) File k
Cassette 2 or Card 2
Continuation
of file k File (k+1) File n Blank
Once written in the cassette or card, data can subsequently be read out by correspondence between the data
contents and file numbers. This correspondence cannot be verified, unless the data contents and file numbers
are output to the CNC and displayed.
Therefore, when writing data in the cassette or card, enter the file numbers and data contents in the memo col-
umn.
Entry example on MEMO
File 1 NC parameters
File 2 Offset data
File 3 NC programO0100
. .
. .
File (n1) NC programO0500
File n NC program O0600
392
B62564E1/02 14. FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD
14.2 File SearchOut

To enable data input/output between a cassette or a card and the CNC, the data in the cassette or the card to
be input or output must be specified. This operation is called file searchout. File searchout is performed
as follows:
Be sure to perform file searchout in conjunction with data input/output operation. File searchout alone cannot
be performed.
1 Select the mode in which the desired input/output operation is to be performed (see each item).
2 Press one of the soft keys to select the screen on which the desired input/output operation is to be per-
formed (see each item).
3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft keys for input/output operation.
4 Press soft key [READ] or [PUNCH] to select the desired input/output operation.
5 Press soft key [(FILE#)] and enter a file number.
6 Perform the desired data input/output operation.
When the above operation is completed, the following file searchout is performed according to the file
number entered in step 5 before data input/output:
File number Contents of file searchout
0 (zero) The beginning of the cassette is searched out.
1 to 9999 The file with the specified file number ( 1 to 9999 ) is searched out.
NOTE 1 Note that when file number N0 or N1 is specified, the results of file searchout depend on
whether the cassette or card contains any files.
File searchout
When the cassette contains or the When the cassette or the card dose
card a files not contain any files
N0 Cassette or card searchout The beginning of the cassette or the

(File 1 is searched out.) card is searched out.
N1 File 1 is searched out. If an input/output operation is

performed , a P/S alarm occurs
because on file has benn written in
the cassette or the card.
When writing data in a new cassette or card for the first time, specify N0 to search out the cassette or the
card. Also specify N0 when writing data from the beginning of the cassette or the card after deleting all
the written data.
NOTE 2 Even if file searchout is not performed correctly (the file is not found, etc.), no alarm occurs
in the CNC. Whether P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs depends on what I/O channel is
being used when data input/output is performed after file searchout.
393
Examples of data input/output performed after file searchout are given below. For details of data input/
output, see Sections 14.3 and 14.4.
Example 1 When program number 1234 in NC memory is output as file 5 in the cassette or the card
2 Press the PROGRAM soft key or the PROG hard key to select the program display screen.
3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH].
4 Press the soft key PUNCH.
5 Enter [(FILE#)], [5], [(PROG#)], [1], [2], [3], and [4] in that order.
6 Press the soft key [EXEC].
When the soft key [EXEC] is pressed, the file corresponding to number 5 is searched out and a program
with program number 1234 is output to the file as a new file. File number 5 follows N and program number
1234 follows 0.
Example 2 When file 3 in the cassette is loaded into CNC memory
3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [READ].
4 Press the soft key [READ].
5 Enter [(FILE#)] and [3] in this order.
6 Press the soft key [ALL].
When the soft key [ALL] is pressed, the file corresponding to the file number following N is searched out
and the CNC program in that file is loaded into CNC memory.
394
14.3 Data Output Operation

To output data from the CNC to the cassette or the card, use the following procedure:
Slide the writeprotect top on the cassette or the card to RECORD (which means writeenable) before output-
ting data.
If data is output with the cassette or the card in the writedisable status, P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs.
Which P/S alarm occurs, however, depends on what input/output channel is being used.
14.3.1 CNC program output

The following operation enables an NC program to be output to the cassette or the card. To output the NC pro-
gram to a specific file, however, perform file searchout in advance (see Section 14.2). Note that the files before
the searched out file remain unchanged but that the subsequent files are deleted. When outputting the NC
program is attempted without file searchout specified, the program is added to the end of the last file in the
cassette or the card.
3 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH].
4 Press the soft key [PUNCH].
5 Specify file searchout when necessary.
6 Enter [(PROG#)] [program number] and press the soft key [EXEC] or [ALL]. When [EXEC] is pressed, one
NC program in the CNC memory is output. When [ALL] is pressed, all the NC programs in CNC memory
are output.
Example 1 When [A] is output
(a) When file searchout is not specified
File1 File2 File3 Blank (Beforeoutput)
A
File1 File2 File3 (File4 ) Blank (Afteroutput)
(b) When file searchout is specified

File searc-out
File1 File2 File3 Blank (Beforeoutput)
A
File1 (File2 ) Blank (Afteroutput)
395
CAUTION The cassette and card are provided with the write protect switch. Set the switch to the write
enable state. Then, start output operation.
1 Write protect switch of the cassette
(1) Write protect (2) Write enable

(enabling read (enabling read,
operation only) write, and erase
operations)
2 Write protect switch of the card
Write protect switch
Write protect Write enable

(disabling write operation; (enabling write operation)
read operation only is allowed)
NOTE 1 If P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs when the CNC program is being output to the cassette
or the card, the contents of the cassette or the card are restored to the preoutput status. If
P/S alarm No. 820, 830, or 840 occurs when the CNC program is being output after file
searchout has been performed, however, only the files before the searched out file are
restored.
NOTE 2 When program output is conducted after N1 to N9999 head searching, the new file is output
as the designated nth position. In this case, 1 to n1 files are effective, but the files after the
old nth one are deleted. If an alarm occurs during output, only the 1 to n1 files are restored.
NOTE 3 Head searching with a file No. is necessary when a file output from the CNC to the cassette
or card is again input to the CNC memory or compared with the content of the CNC memory.
Therefore, immediately after a file is output from the CNC to the cassette or card, record the
file No. on the memo.
396
14.3.2 Offset data output

The following operation enables the output of offset data to the cassette or the card.
1) Select the EDIT mode.
2) Press the OFFSET soft or hard key to select the tool offset data display screen.
3) Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH].
4) Press the soft key [PUNCH].
5) Specify file searchout when necessary.
6) Press the soft key [TOOL].
For which file the offset data is output to, refer to 14.3.1.
14.3.3 CNC parameter output

The following operation enables the output of CNC parameters to the cassette or the card.
1) Select the EDIT mode.
2) Press the SERVICE soft or hard key to select the parameter display screen.
3) Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [PUNCH].
4) Press the soft key [PUNCH].
5) Specify file searchout when necessary.
6) Press the soft key [PARAM] or [ALL]. When [PARAM] is pressed, only ordinary parameters are output.
When [ALL] is pressed, both ordinary parameters and pitch error compensation data are output.
For which file the CNC parameter is output to, refer to 14.3.1.
397
14.4 Data Input Operation

Observe the following procedures to input data from the cassette or the card to the CNC.
14.4.1 CNC program input

The following operation enables the CNC program to be output from the cassette or the card to the CNC:
5 Specify file searchout for the file containing the program to be input. (For details of file searchout, see
Section 14.2.)
6 Press the soft key [ALL] (ordinary operation) or enter [(PROG#)] [program number] and press the soft key
[EXEC] (valid when the number of the program to be input is changed).
14.4.2 Offset data input

The following operation enables the CNC program to be input from the cassette or the card to the CNC:
5 Specify file searchout for the file containing the offset data to be input.
6 Enter [(PROG#)] [program number] and press [EXEC].
Since offset data in the file is first input as one CNC program as a result of this operation, be sure to specify
the program number. Otherwise, a warning is output.
7 When the input operation is completed, the input offset data is displayed on the screen in the format of data
input by the offset value program (G10).
G10L____P____R____ ;
8 Switch the EDIT mode to the MEMORY mode and press the cycle start button to execute the program.
When the program is executed, offset data is loaded into the CNC offset memory.
9 Select the offset data display screen and check whether the offset data is set correctly.
14.4.3 CNC parameter input

The following operation enables CNC parameters input from the cassette or the card to the CNC.
1) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine side.
2) Press the corresponding soft key to select the service setting screen.
3) Set PARAM and WRITE ENABLE to 1. Alarm SW000 is displayed.
4) Operate the SERVICE soft or hard key to display the program screen.
5) Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [READ].
6) Press the soft key [READ].
7) Specify file searchout.
8) Press the soft key [PARAM] or [ALL]. When [PARAM] is pressed, only ordinary parameters are input.
When [ALL] is pressed, both ordinary parameters and pitch error compensation data are input.
9) As a result of step 8, CNC parameters are loaded into the memory for CNC parameters. Usually, alarm
PW000 occurs after all the CNC parameters have been read.
10)Select the service setting screen and set PARAM and WRITE ENABLE to 0.
11) If alarm PW000 is issued, turn the CNC power off then on again.
12)Release the emergency stop button on the machine.
398
14.5 File Deletion

Data written in the cassette or the card can be deleted in units of files.
3 Release the program protect switch ( ).
4 Slide the writeprotect key of the cassette to RECORD and insert the cassette or the card into the adapter.
The red lamp goes on to indicate the adapter status.
5 Press the operation menu key to display the soft key [DELETE FILE].
6 Press the soft key [DELETE FILE].
7 Enter [(FILE#)] [file number] and press [EXEC].
The specified file is deleted and the file numbers after the deleted file are moved up one.
CAUTION If steps 5 to 7 are executed without the writeprotect key in the RECORD position in step
4, no alarm occurs. Also note that the specified file is not deleted.
Example 1 When [(FILE#)] [2] is entered and [EXEC] is pressed (when file 2 is deleted)

399
14.6 Precautions
14.6.1 Request for cassette replacement

When one file has been entered over two cassettes red and green lamps on the adaptor flash alternately on
completion of data input/output between the first cassette and the CNC, prompting cassette replacement. In
this case, take the first cassette out of the adaptor and insert a second cassette in its place. Then, data input/out-
put will continue automatically.
Cassette replacement is prompted when the second cassette is required during file searchout, data input/out-
put between the CNC and the cassette, or file deletion.
NOTE 1 Since cassette replacement is processed by the adaptor, no special operation is required. The
CNC will interrupt data input/output operation until the next cassette is inserted into the adaptor.
NOTE 2 When reset operation is applied to the CNC during a request for cassette replacement, the
CNC is not reset at once, but reset after the cassette has been replaced.
14.6.2 Adaptor lamp conditions

The yellow and green lamps of the cassette or card adaptor indicate operating conditions.
For details, refer to the Operators Manual of the FLOPPY CASSETTE or FANUC FA Card.
CAUTION All alarms occurred in the adapter are displayed as P/S alarm No.86. Find out the cause of
the error using the statuses of the cassette or card and looking back each operation, then
release the alarm.
400
14.7 File Name of Floppy Cassette or Card

Using a Floppy Cassette enables a name to be assigned to the file when the file is output.
File names are assigned according to the following rules:
(1) CNC program = Oxxxx
Oxxxx: Selected program number
(2) CNC parameter = PARAMETER
(3) Pitch error data = PITCH. ERROR
(4) Parameter and pitch error = PARAM. AND. PITCH
(5) Tool offset data = OFFSET
(6) All program (at PUNCH ALL operation) = ALL. PROGRAM
401
14.8 Expanded File Control Function

The expanded file control function enables a file directory display function designed for use with the FANUC
Floppy Cassette adapter to input, output, delete, and search for a desired file simply by specifying its file name.
When the FANUC 2drive Floppy Cassette adapter is used, the display of a directory, file input/output, and re-
naming of a file can also be performed.
14.8.1 Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting a file by specifying its file name
Searching for a file by specifying its file name
A file that has been stored to a cassette can be searched for by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure:
Example Searching for file ABC
1. Select the floppy directory screen from the program screen.
2. Press the [SRH_FIL] operation selection key.
3. Press the [(F_NAM)] soft key.
(SRH _FIL > is displayed in the keyin field.)
4. Key in A , B , and C as the file name.
(SRH _FIL > ABC is displayed in the keyin field.)
5. Press [EXEC].
Inputting a file by specifying its file name

A CNC program can be input from the cassette by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure:
Example Inputting a file named ABC
2. Select EDIT mode.
3. Press the [READ] operation selection key.
(READ > is displayed in the keyin field.)
(READ> ABC is displayed in the keyin field.)
6. Press [ALL] (for normal operation).
Alternatively, enter [(PROG#)], (program number), then [EXEC] (to change the program num-
ber of the program to be input).
Outputting a file by specifying its file name

A CNC program can be output from the cassette by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure:
Example Outputting a program with its file name set to ABC
2. Select the EDIT mode.
3. Press the [PUNCH] operation selection key.
When outputting one program stored in CNC memory
(PUNCH > ABC is displayed in the keyin field.)
3. Enter [(PROG#)], then (program number).
(PUNCH > ABC Oxxxx is displayed in the keyin field.)
xxxx: Selected program number
4. Press the [EXEC] soft key.
When outputting all programs stored in CNC memory
(PUNCH > is displayed in the keyin field.)
(PUNCH > ABC is displayed in the keyin field.)
6. Press the [ALL] soft key.
402
Deleting a file by specifying its file name

A file stored on a cassette can be deleted by specifying its file name. Use the following procedure:
Example Deleting a file named ABC
3. Press the [DELFILE] operation selection key.
(DELFILE > is displayed in the keyin field.)
(DELFILE > ABC is displayed in the keyin field.)
6. Press [EXEC].
14.8.2 Twodrive floppy cassette control

To use the 2drive Floppy Cassette adapter, set bit 2 (DRV) of parameter No. 7620 to 1.
Selecting a drive, displaying the directory, and inputting/outputting a file
Press the [DRIVE] soft key to select a drive. Pressing the soft key toggles the selection between drive 0 and
drive 1. The selected drive number is displayed at the top of the screen. After a drive has been selected, display
of the directory and file input/output can be performed as normal. Use the following procedure:
2. Press the [DRIVE] soft key to select the drive. Pressing this soft key toggles the selection between drive
0 and drive 1.
3. For the selected drive, display of the directory and input/output of a file can be performed as normal.
Renaming a file by specifying its file number

A file can be renamed by specifying its file number. Use the following procedure:
Example Assigning file name ABC to a file having file No. 3
3. Press the [RENAME] operation selection key.
4. Press the [(FILE#)] soft key.
5. Key in 3 as the file number.
(RENAME > N3 is displayed in the keyin field.)
(RENAME > N3ABC is displayed in the keyin field.)
8. Press [EXEC].
Volume transfer
A file stored on the currently selected drive can be transferred to the other drive by specifying the file number
or file name. This operation is called volume transfer. In volume transfer, all files or a single file can be trans-
ferred. Use the following procedure:
3. Press the [VOLCOPY] operation selection key.
4. Press [ALL] (to transfer all files).
(VOLCPOY > ALL is displayed in the keyin field.)
Alternatively, enter [(FILE#)], then (file number) (to transfer one file by specifying its file number).
(VOLCPOY > Nxxxx is displayed in the keyin field.)
xxxx: Selected file number
Alternatively, enter [(F_NAM)], then (file name) (to transfer one file by specifying its file name).
(VOLCPOY > filename is displayed in the keyin field.)
5. Press [EXEC].
403
Deleting all files

All files in the selected drive can be deleted at one time. Use the following procedure:
3. Press the [DELFILE] operation selection key.
4. Press the [ALL] soft key.
(DELFILE > ALL is displayed in the keyin field.)
5. Press [EXEC].
14.8.3 Soft key operations

The following lists the soft key operations that can be performed from the floppy directory screen:
Operation 1st guide 2nd guide 3rd guide

SRH_FIL (FILE#) EXEC
(F_NAM)
READ (FILE#) (PROG#) * EXEC
(F_NAM) ALL
PUNCH (F_NAM) * (PROG#) * EXEC
ALL, THIS
DELFILE (FILE#) EXEC
(F_NAM)
ALL
RENAME (FILE#) (F_NAM) EXEC
VOLCOPY (FILE#) EXEC
(F_NAM)
ALL
NOTE 1 Those soft keys marked with * can be omitted.

NOTE 2 A dotted line separating soft keys indicates that one of those soft keys should be selected.
14.8.4 Notes
NOTE 1 Parameters can be input and output, using the parameter screen, as normal. Note, however,
that the output file name is PARAMETER.
NOTE 2 Offset data can be input and output, using the offset screen, as normal. Note, however, that
the output file name is OFFSET.
NOTE 3 Up to 17 alphanumeric characters can be entered as a file name. If more than 17 characters
are entered, only the first 17 are used as the file name. The first character of the file name must
not be a space.
NOTE 4 Drive selection, renaming of a file, volume transfer, and deletion of all files can be performed
only when the 2drive Floppy Cassette adapter is being used. If these operations are
attempted while using the onedrive Floppy Cassette adapter, the ILLEGAL INTERFACE
warning message appears.
NOTE 5 If a file name, specified for search, input, or deletion, is not found on the cassette, alarm DR
OFF is issued.
NOTE 6 If the name specified for an output file duplicates one that already exists, alarm DR OFF is
issued.
404
B62564E1/02 15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION
15.ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION
On an axis equipped with an absolute pulse coder, the machine position is monitored even when the CNC pow-
er is turned off, so return to the reference position is unnecessary when the power is turned on again.
An absolute pulse coder consists of an ordinary incremental pulse coder equipped with an absolute counter.
Based on the counter value, an absolute position can be detected.
The absolute pulse coder uses the backup battery so that the pulse coder monitors the machine position by
the counter if the CNC is turned off.
If an absolute pulse coder is installed on an axis, the current position on that axis is read from the absolute
counter when the CNC is turned on, and the machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate system are
automatically set based on the read value. Automatic operation can thus start immediately.
The requirements for reference position return after poweron operation, described in this manual, do not apply
to axes equipped with an absolute pulse coder.
CAUTION If a servo motor is to be detached from a control axis, the absolute pulse coder cannot be
used for that axis.
NOTE The time from the poweron operation until the servo ready signal (SA) is output varies
depending on the distance between the machine position detected at poweron and the
reference position. If the distance is 1 m, the time required until the servo ready signal (SA)
is output is extended by approximately 1 s.
15.1 Initial Setting at PowerOn

(1) The machine coordinate system and a workpiece coordinate system are set automatically. The G54 coor-
dinate system is selected as the workpiece coordinate system.
(2) The offsets from the workpiece reference point which are specified with G92 and G52 are cleared.
(3) Relative coordinates (RELATIVE) for indicating a position are set with the DSE bit, bit 1, of parameter No.
2202.
(4) The other initial settings at poweron are the same as when the absolute position detection function is not
provided.
15.2 Manual Reference Position Return at Machine Installation

In the following cases, be sure to manually return to the reference position to associate the reference position
with the counter value of the absolute pulse coder:
(a) First field adjustment (after the reference position is defined)
(b) When the reference position is changed
(c) When the absolute pulse coder is replaced.
(d) When alarm OT32 occurs
(e) When the CMOS memory is replaced
(f) When the CMOS memory is cleared
Manually return to the reference position as follows:
(1) Set APLCZRN, bit 4 of parameter No. 1815, to 0.
(2) Turn the power off then on again. Alarm OT32 is then displayed.
(3) Return to the reference position manually. When tool reaches the reference position, parameter APLC
ZRN is automatically set to 1.
(4) Press the reset button. Alarm OT32 is then released.
405
15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION B62564E1/02
15.3 Alarm
When the power is turned on, one of the following alarms may occur:
(1) Alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS SCDR)
The reference position is not associated with the counter value of the absolute pulse coder. That is,
parameter APLCZRN is 0.
Before the CNC power is turned on, the battery voltage for the absolute pulse coder dropped to 0 V,
and the counter value of the absolute pulse coder is lost.
An error was detected in the counter value of the absolute pulse coder.
If alarm OT32 occurs, it is necessary to manually return the tool to the reference position. See Section
15.2.
(2) Alarm SV101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR)
An error occurred while data was being read from the absolute pulse coder. (The absolute pulse coder
may be faulty.)
If the machine moves a considerable amount when the power is turned on, the motor excess deviation
alarm occurs.
If this alarm occurs, turn the power off then on again.
(3) Battery voltage alarm
The battery voltage alarm, BAT, is indicated on the CRT screen.
For how to replace the battery, see Part IV, Maintenance.
CAUTION If BAT is indicated on the CRT screen, display the signal output status on the service screen
to check whether the alarm applies to the system or the absolute pulse coder.
To display the service screen, use the following procedure:

1 Press the function menu key to display the function selection keys.

2 Press the [SERVICE] soft key or the SERVICE hard key. The service screen appears.
3 If the service screen being displayed does not show diagnostic data, perform the following:
Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.

Press the [DIAGNOS] key.

Alternatively:
Press the [SERVICE] soft key or the SERVICE hard key several times until diagnostic data is displayed.
4 If desired diagnostic data is still not displayed, perform the following:
Using the page keys
(4)1 Press a page key to change pages.
(4)2 Using soft keys
406
B62564E1/02 15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION
(i) Press the operation menu key to display the operation selection keys.
INP-NO. +
(ii) Press the [INPNO.] key. Then, the operation guidance keys are displayed.
(VALUE)
(iii) Enter the number of the target diagnostic data.

As the data number is entered, the following soft key display appears:
EXEC
Display diagnostic data No. 240 using the above procedure. If the 7th bit (leftmost data) is 1, the battery
voltage alarm applies to the system. If the 6th bit of diagnostic data No. 240 is 1, the battery voltage alarm
applies to the absolute pulse coder.
CAUTION The voltage level of the backup battery for the absolute pulse coder is normally 6 V. Over
time, however, the voltage level drops.
V
6V
4.5V
DO.PBATL
1.5V
DO.PBATZ
DO.PBATL : Battery alarm

This alarm occurs when the voltage drops to 4.5 V. If it occurs, BAT is
indicated on the CRT/MDI.
DO.PBATZ : Battery zero alarm

This alarm occurs if the power to the NC unit is turned off when the voltage
is approximately 1.5 V or less.
In this case, alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) or OT34 BATTERY
ZERO (ABS PCDR) is indicated, and the absolute pulse coder storage
completion bit, bit 4 of parameter No. 1815, is automatically set to 0. When
this alarm occurs, the battery alarm also occurs.
407
15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION B62564E1/02
15.4 Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder through MDI
Operation
When the absolute pulse coder or servo motor is replaced, the zero point of the absolute pulse coder must be
set by storing the counter value of the absolute pulse coder with the machine set at the reference position.
There are two methods to set the zero point of the absolute pulse coder. One method uses manual reference
position return. The other method uses MDI operation for setting the zero point, which is done after the machine
is moved to the reference position manually.
When the zero point of the absolute pulse coder is set through MDI operation, the dog which is used for decel-
eration in manual reference position return and the switches for selecting the manual reference position return
mode are unnecessary. The MDI operation for setting the zero point of the absolute pulse coder, however, re-
quires some means to confirm that the machine is at the reference position.
When the machine has been moved to the reference position by manual jog feed, manual handle feed, or
another operation, the zero point can be set by setting parameters through MDI.
Use the following procedure:
1 Set APLCZRN (bit 4) of parameter No. 1815 to 0.
Alarm message POWERMUST BE OFF appears.
2 Turn off the power, then turn it on again.
Alarm OT32 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) appears.
3 Move the machine to the reference position through manual jog feed, manual handle feed, manual incre-
mental feed, or suchlike.
4 Set APLCZRN (bit 4) of parameter No. 1815 to 1.
Alarm message POWERMUST BE OFF appears.
5 Turn off the power, then turn it on again.
The zero point is then set.
408
B62564E1/02 16. AXIS CONTROL
16.AXIS CONTROL
16.1 Axis Control by the PMC

Any axes can be isolated from control of the CNC and controlled directly by the PMC. The PMC can issue com-
mands specifying a traveled distance, feedrate, and so forth to move the tool along these axes independently
of the other axes operating under the CNC. Therefore, peripheral equipment such as a turret, pallet, or index
table can be controlled by using an axis of the CNC.
Whether to place each axis under control of the CNC or PMC can be selected with a relevant input signal.
The following operations can be controlled by the PMC directly:
(i) Rapid traverse with a traveled distance specified
(ii) Cutting feed with a traveled distance specified
Feedrate and override can also be specified.
Cutting feed can be started simultaneously with another PMCcontrolled axis.
(iii) Reference position return
(iv) Positioning at the machine coordinates
(v) Dwell
PMC CNC
BMI
First axis Pulse Servo
management control Motor
distribution
First axis,
PMC axis
control data
Second axis Pulse Servo
management distribution control Motor
Second axis,
Command PMC axis
control data
Third axis Pulse Servo
management distribution Motor
control
Third axis,
PMC axis
control data
:
:
Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for details.
409
16. AXIS CONTROL B62564E1/02
16.2 Mirror Image Function

The mirror image function can be enabled or disabled for each axis by setting MIRx of parameter No. 12 or by
using an external signal.
When the function is enabled and a move command is specified for an axis in the positive direction, the machine
moves and the coordinates change in the direction shown in the table below.
Machine movement Machine coordinate Relative coordinate Absolute coordinate

Automatic
Negative direction Negative direction Negative direction Positive direction
operation
Manual
Positive direction Positive direction Positive direction Negative direction
operation
CAUTION The machine coordinate and absolute coordinate are updated in different directions along
the specified axis. The workpiece coordinate system shifts as the machine moves. When
the mirror image function is enabled for the Xaxis, the coordinate system shifts as shown
below.
Machine movement
after mirror image Move command
(Automatic operation)
Absolute coordi
nate when mirror
image is started Absolute coordinate
after mirror image on
Work coordinate
system shiftvalue
Origin of work coordinate system
Work offset value
Machine X
origin
After a desired machining has been finished, move the machine to the position where the
mirror image function was applied and disable the function. This cancels the shift of the
workpiece coordinate system to zero.
Alternatively, perform one of the following to set the shift of the workpiece coordinate system
to zero.
Manual reference position return
Presetting the workpiece coordinate system (by using the G92.1 command or by
specifying the preset operation on the MDI)
NOTE 1 The mirror image cannot be switched during axis movement. Always switch the mirror image
during stopped state.
NOTE 2 For mirror image during manual operation, either on or off of mirror image that was valid by
setting operation or by external mirror image signal when the mode was switched to the manual
operation is effective. Switching of mirror image state either by setting operation or by external
mirror image signal is not effective in the manual operation.
410
II. MAINTENANCE
B62564E1/02 1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
1.1 Cleaning the Tape Reader

(a) Tape reader without reels
No. Part to be cleaned Reference drawing Interval Cleaning procedure

Surface of the read head
1 Fig. 1.1 (a) (1) Every day
(lightdetection part)
2 Fig. 1.1 (a) (2) Every day
(lightemitting part)
3 Tape retainer Fig. 1.1 (a) (3) Every day Clean with
Cl i h gauze or a thin
hi brush
b h
4 Tape path Fig. 1.1 (a) (4) Every day moistened with pure alcohol.
alcohol
5 Capstan Fig. 1.1 (a) (5) Every week

6 Guide roller Fig. 1.1 (a) (6) Every week
7 Pinch roller Fig. 1.1 (a) (7) Every week
Machine assembly under
8 Fig. 1.1 (a) (8) Every month
the tape path plate
Clean with a cloth or blush.
Inside of the tape reader
9 Fig. 1.1 (b) (9) Every month
cover
(3)
(5)
A8600060V009
(2)
(4)
(10)

(6)

(1) (8)
(7) (11)

Fig. 1.1 (a) Front view of the tape reader without reels (with the cover removed)
(9)
Fig. 1.1 (b) Side view of the tape reader without reels
413
1. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE B62564E1/02
(b) Tape reader with reels
No. Part to be cleaned Reference drawing Interval Cleaning procedure

1 Fig. 1.1 (c) (1) Every day
(lightdetection part)
2 Fig. 1.1 (c) (2) Every day
(lightemitting part)
3 Tape retainer Fig. 1.1 (c) (3) Every day Clean with
Cl i h gauze or a thin
hi brush
b h
4 Tape path Fig. 1.1 (c) (4) Every day alcohol
moistened with pure alcohol.
5 Capstan Fig. 1.1 (c) (5) Every week

6 Guide roller Fig. 1.1 (c) (6) Every week
7 Pinch roller Fig. 1.1 (c) (7) Every week
Machine assembly under
8 Fig. 1.1 (c) (8) Every month
the tape path plate
Clean with a cloth or blush
blush.
Inside of the tape reader
9 Fig. 1.1 (d) (9) Every month
cover
(3) (1) (2)

(4)
(6) (5)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(7) (8)
Fig. 1.1 (c) Front view of the tape reader with reels (with the cover removed)
(9)
Fig. 1.1 (d) Side view of the tape reader with reels
414
1.2 Tape Reader Lubrication

(a) Tape reader without reels
The points to be lubricated periodically and the intervals are as follows:
No. Lubrication point Interval Lubricant (*1) Amount
1 Magnet section See Fig.1.1 (a) (7) . Every 3 Luna oil 1 drop
months
Every Rocol paste Apply a thin

year film of paste.

415
(b) Tape reader with reels

The points to be lubricated periodically and the intervals are as follows:
No. Lubrication point Interval Lubricant (*1) Amount

1 Magnet section See Fig.1.2 (e) . Every 3 Luna oil 1 drop
months

Every Rocol paste Apply a thin
year film of paste.

2 Guide roller section See Fig.1.2 (e) . Every 6 Rocol oil 2 to 3 drops
months

3 Tension arm guide roller See Fig.1.2 (f) . Every 6 Rocol oil 2 to 3 drops
months

416
(3) (3)
2
(2)
(1)
Fig. 1.2 (e) Front view of the tape reader with reels
*1 Types of lubricants
No. Name Trade name Manufacturer

Rocol oil Sumitomo Metal Mining Co., Ltd.
1 Rocol oil
ROCOL ASO ROCOL CO. LTD.(U.K)
Rocol paste Sumitomo Metal Mining Co., Ltd.
2 Rocol paste
ROCOL APS ROCOL CO. LTD.(U.K)
3 Luna oil Luna oil Nippon Oil Co., Ltd.
417
1.3 Adjusting the PhotoAmplifier of the Tape Reader with Reels

1 Punch about 40 cm of test tape consisting of alternating patterns of punched and unpunched positions as
shown below (*1 and *2), then splice both ends to make an endless tape.

*U*U*U*U DELETE
CR
For adjustment, use the adjustment program included in the tape reader with reels.
2 Start the adjustment program.

a) Set RELEASE, then press the
FORWARD and REWIND but-
tons simultaneously.
b) The AUTO and ALARM LEDs
blink.
c) The adjustment program mode
is then entered.
d) Set the test tape(*3).

e) Set REEL OFF.
f) Press the FORWARD button.
g) The tape starts running.
418
3 Adjustment
a) The adjustment points are lo-
cated at the right side, viewed
from the rear of the tape reader
with reels. (If they are not at the
location indicated in the figure,
they are located in section
A(*4).)
b) Turn SP until LD5 lights.
c) Turn DATA until LD1 blinks(*5).
If LD5 does not light, adjustment
is impossible.
4 End of adjustment
a) Press STOP.
b) Set RELEASE.
c) Press FORWARD and STOP at
the same time.
d) The normal mode then returns.
e) Before starting adjustment,
make sure that the signal cables
are connected properly.
*1 The paper tape used must conform to the following:

Unpunched paper tape for information interchange : JIS C6243
Dimensions for punched paper tape for information interchange : JIS C6246
*2 If the tape reader is adjusted with black paper tape, then it is used with paper tape other than black, a read
error may occur.
When adjusting the output waveform of the photoamplifier, use blue, white, pink, yellow, or orange paper
tape. Do not use black or gray. If the tape reader is adjusted with black or gray paper tape then used with
blue, white, or pink, etc. paper tape, a read error occurs. Do not use black or gray paper tape for adjustment
unless it is used in regular operation.
*3 If the version of the program in the tape reader is version B or later, EIA test tape can also be used.
*4 Loosen the four screws shown in the following figure to open the printed circuit board. The board swings
open in the direction of the arrow with the lower side attached. After adjustment is completed, close the
board and tighten the screws.
419
Losen the
Printed circuit screws.
board
Screw DATA
Rear Front LD0 to 7
Be careful not touch the power supply unit which

Screw Open Screw produces 5 V and 24 from 200 V VAC.
*5 If LD0 and LD3 blink when the DATA dial is turned, the following adjustment is needed:
DATA DATA
LD3 LD1
1) Cause LD3 to blink.

2) Turn the DATA dial toward the center until LD1 starts blinking, then set DATA at that point.
420
1.4 Cleaning the Air Filter (For the SelfStanding Cabinet Only)
If the air filter in the lower part at the rear of the unit is clogged by dust, the efficiency of dust collection drops,
and the temperature inside the equipment may rise. Therefore the air filter needs to be cleaned. Clean the
filter every week as follows:
(1) Remove the filter retainer, then remove the air filter in the lower part at the rear of the unit.
(2) Blow dust away from the internal side of the filter while shaking the filter lightly.
(3) If the filter is still dirty, clean it with neutral cleanser, then dry it in the shade.

421
2. REPLACING A FUSE B62564E1/02
2. REPLACING A FUSE
If a fuse in the CNC system blows, find the cause, take appropriate action, then replace the fuse.
2.1 Fuse Specifications

The specifications of the fuses used in the CNC system are as follows:
Table Units containing fuses and fuse specifications
Unit name Parts symbol Capacity Specifications Use

Power unit F1,F2 7.5A A60L00010245#GP75 For 200 VAC input power supply
AI F3 3.2A A60L00010075#3.2 For 9CRT (monochrome)
F4 5A A60L00010046#5.0 For I/O
Power unit F1,F2 10A A60L00010245#GP100 For 200 VAC input power supply
BI F3 5A A60L00010075#5.0 For 9CRT (monochrome)
F4 5A A60L00010046#5.0 For I/O
Connection F51 1.6A A60L00010046#1.6 Protection from an external defect
unit of machine side 24VDC line
2.2 Fuse Mounting Position
2.2.1 Power unit
Power unit AI or BI
F1
F2
F3
F4
2.2.2 Connection unit
1.6A fuse (F51)
DI/DO connector
422
B62564E1/02 3. REPLACING BATTERIES
3. REPLACING BATTERIES
3.1 Replacing the Battery for Backing Up the Memory in the Control Unit
(1) Obtain a lithium battery (A98L00310007).
(2) Turn on the power to the machine (NC). (The battery can be replaced when the NC is either on or off. Note
that if the battery is replaced with the NC turned off, replacing the buttery must be completed within 30 min-
utes. Otherwise the NC memory contents may be lost.
(3) Remove the battery case from the front panel of the power unit. Hold the upper and lower sides of the case,
and pull it out toward you.

A98L00310007
(4) Disconnect the connector from the battery.

(5) Replace the battery, then attach the connector to a new battery.
(6) Mount the battery case.
(7) Turn off the machine (NC).
423
3. REPLACING BATTERIES B62564E1/02
3.2 Replacing the Batteries of the Absolute Pulse Coder

(1) Prepare four commercially available alkaline dry cells, size D.
(2) Turn on the power to the machine (NC). (Be sure to turn on the NC unit before replacing the batteries. If
batteries are replaced when the power is off, the stored absolute position is lost.)
(3) Loosen the screws of the battery case. For the location of the battery case, refer to the manual issued by
the machine tool builder.
(4) Replace the batteries in the case. Be careful to install the new batteries with correct polarity. (Insert two
batteries in one direction, and the other two in the opposite direction as shown below.)

(5) After replacement, install the cover.

(6) Turn off the machine (NC).
424
B62564E1/02 4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 Symptom and Investigation

(1) Type of failure
Check the mode.
Check the display on the CRT/MDI.
Check the CNC status indication.
Check whether a positioning error occurred. If so, check on which axis the error occurred, and also check
the magnitude of the error.
Check whether a tool path error occurred. If so, check the magnitude of the error.
Check whether the speed is normal.
Check whether a miscellaneous function failed.
Check the alarm number.
(2) Frequency of failure
Check when the failure occurred, and check the frequency of the failure. (Check whether the failure oc-
curred while another machine was operating.)
Check the frequency of the failure with the same workpiece.
Find the program in which the failure occurred. Then, check the sequence number.
Check whether the failure occurred in a specific mode.
Check whether the failure is related to the operation of changing tools.
Check whether the failure is related to the feedrate.
(3) Repetition of failure
Run the program tape several times in which the failure occurred.
Check the values in the CNC, then compare them with the programmed values.
Check to see whether the failure is due to an external factor.
Check the stored offsets and the remaining distribution.
Check the response to override (while changing the amount of override).
Ask the operator to explain the symptoms of the failure.
425
4. TROUBLESHOOTING B62564E1/02
4.2 Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions, Handling, Programming,

Operation, Machine, and Interface
(1) Checking the input voltage
Check whether the input voltage fluctuates.
Check whether the input voltage drops.
Check whether the front or rear door is open (door interlock).
Check whether there is equipment in the factory using a large amount of current.
Check whether there is an electrical discharge machine or welding machine operating in the factory.
(2) Ambient conditions
Check the temperature.
Check for temperature changes. Check for a sudden temperature change.
Check whether the filter is cleaned.
Check whether the tape reader is dirty.
Check whether there is oil or coolant splashed about.
Check for vibration.
Check whether the unit is exposed to direct sunlight.
(3) External factors
Check whether the machine has been repaired or adjusted recently.
Check whether the power magnetics cabinet has been repaired or adjusted recently.
Check whether the CNC unit has been repaired or adjusted recently.
Check whether there is any source of noise nearby, such as a crane, high frequency sewing machine, or
electrical discharge machine.
Check whether a new machine has been installed nearby.
Check whether there is any other CNC unit experiencing the same failure within the factory.
Check whether the user has adjusted the inside of the CNC unit.
Check whether the same failure occurred before.
(4) Handling
Check whether the operator has been trained properly.
Check whether the operator has been replaced.
Check whether the operator is familiar with the program.
Check whether the program was completed too early or interrupted.
Check whether the program includes incremental commands.
Check whether the tool compensation is set correctly.
Check whether modification to the tool compensation is made correctly.
Check whether transition to another operation mode is made.
Check whether the optional block skip function is used properly.
Check whether the tape is set properly.
Check if the part program code contains any errors.
Check whether an erroneous operation was performed.
426
(5) Punched tape

Check whether the tape is dirty.
Check the tape for any folds or creases.
Check whether the splice is normal.
Check whether the program operated normally before.
Check whether the tape is a copy of the master tape.
Check whether the tape has been punched.
Check whether the tape is punched correctly.
Check whether the tape punch unit operates normally.
Check whether a wrong tape is being used.
Check whether the puncher operates properly.
(6) Programming
Check whether the used program is a new one.
Check whether the program was created according to the instructions explained in the operators manual.
Check whether the order of addresses is valid.
Check whether a failure occurs in a specific block.
Check whether an error occurs in a subprogram.
Check whether a listing of the tape is created for inspection.
(7) Operation
Check whether any change or adjustment was made in operation.
Check if any fuses have blown.
Check whether the emergency stop is still effective.
Check whether the machine is ready for operation.
Check whether an alarm has occurred.
Check whether the MODE switch is set correctly.
Check whether the tape reader switch is set correctly.
Check whether the override is set to 0.
Check whether a machine lock is applied.
Check whether the system is in the feed hold status.
(8) Machine
Check whether the machine is prepared properly.
Check whether the machine vibrates during operation.
Check whether the tool tip is normal.
Check the offset due to the change of tools.
Check whether the backlash compensation is appropriate.
Check whether changes in temperature result in any distortion in the machine parts.
Check whether the workpiece is measured correctly.
Check whether the measurement was made at a constant temperature. (For 1,C change in temperature,
the length of a 1m piece of steel changes by 10.)
Check whether the cables are in the normal state. (Check the radius of each curve in the cables, and also
check for any flaws, twists, and abnormally pressed cables.)
Check whether the signal lines are separated from the power lines.
(9) Interface
Check whether the power lines are installed separately from the CNC cables.
Check whether the shielding is normal.
Check whether parts such as relays, solenoids, and motors are provided with a noise suppressor.
427
4.3 Visually Checking the CNC System

(1) Checking the appearance of the control unit
Check if the cabinet is broken anywhere.
Check whether the CRT/MDI unit is normal.
Check whether the filter is clean.
Check whether the reader is clean.
Check whether the reader door is closed.
Check whether the unit was operated with the door left open.
Check that the chips accumulated on the cabinet do not fall into the cabinet when the door is opened.
(2) Tape reader
Check whether the tape reader is dirty.
Check whether the brake magnet works normally.
(3) Inside of the control unit
Check whether the control unit is dirty.
Check whether the fan motor operates normally.
Check whether the unit is damaged by corrosive gas.
(4) Power supply unit
Check whether the power supply unit is connected correctly.
Check the fuses.
Check the circuit breaker.
Check whether the voltage level is within the allowable range.
Check whether the shielding and cable duct are grounded correctly.
Check whether the wiring path is correct.
Check whether the terminals are tightened securely.
(5) Grounding
Check whether grounding is normal.
Check whether the shielding is grounded normally.
(6) Cables
Check whether the cable connectors are connected securely.
Check whether the internal cables are normal.
Check whether the external cables are normal.
Check the cables for flaws and twists.
(7) Printed circuit board
Check whether the printed circuit boards are installed securely.
Check whether the plug connectors are connected normally.
Check the mechanical conditions. (Check whether the printed circuit boards are distorted.)
Check the version number.
Check whether the printed circuit boards are connected to one another properly.
(8) CRT/MDI unit
Check whether the push buttons are normal.
Check whether the tape cable is normal.
428
4.4 CNC Status Indication

The internal status of the CNC can be displayed.
4.4.1 How to display the CNC internal status

1 Press the function menu key to display the function selection keys.
2 Press the [SERVICE] key. Then, the service screen appears.

3 If the service screen displayed does not contain diagnostic data, perform the following:
Press the [CHAPTER] key to switch the soft keys to the chapter selection keys.
PARAM PITCH DIAGNOS DSP.MEM
Press the [DIAGNSIS] key.

Alternatively:
Press the [SERVICE] key repeatedly until diagnostic data appears on the screen.
4 If the desired diagnostic data is not displayed on the screen:
Using the page keys
41 Change pages by using page keys.
42 Using soft keys
(i) Press the operation menu key to display the operation selection keys.
INP-NO. +
(ii) Press the [INPNO]. key. Then, the soft keys are switched to the operation guidance keys.
(VALUE)
(iii) Enter the data number of the target diagnostic data. As the data number is entered, the soft keys
are displayed as follows:
EXEC
5 Press the [EXEC] key. Then the diagnostic data with the entered data number is displayed on the screen.
The soft keys are returned to the operation selection keys.
429
4.4.2 Description of internal selection

(1) Indication of status in which no command is apparently executed
No. Bit Indication Internal status when 1 is indicated

0 INPOSITION CHECK Position check is in progress.
1 FEED RATE OVERRIDE The feedrate override is set to 0%.
2 JOG FEED OVERRIDE The jog feedrate override is set to 0%.
3 INT/START LOCK ON Start lock/interlock is set on.
4 SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK The system waits for the speed arrival signal to go on.
1000
5 WAIT REVOLUTION The system waits for the spindle 1revolution signal
during threading.
6 STOP POSITION CODER The system waits for the revolution of the position
coder during feed per spindle revolution.
7 FOREGROUND READING A part program is being read in the foreground.
1001 0 BACKGROUND READING A part program is being read in background editing.
(2) Indication of the reset status

The status of the input signals related to the reset and feed hold operations is indicated.
No. Bit
1010 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RST ERS RRW ESP
When 1 is indicated
ESP : Emergency stop
RRW : The reset & rewind signal is on.
ERS : The external reset signal is on.
RST : The reset key is pressed.
A bit set to 1 means that the associated error explained above occurred.
(3) TH alarm status indication
The TH alarm status is indicated.
No. Indication Meaning

1100 POSITION (CHARACTER) If a TH alarm occurs, the position of the character that
caused this alarm is indicated as the number of
characters counted from the top of the block.
(Foreground TH alarm)
1101 BIT PATTERN (CHARACTER) F The read code of the character that caused a TH alarm
is indicated with a bit pattern. (Foreground TH alarm)
1100 POSITION (CHARACTER) B If a TH alarm occurs, the position of the character that
caused this alarm is indicated as the number of
characters counted from the top of the block.
(Background TH alarm)
1101 BIT PATTERN (CHARACTER) B The read code of the character that caused a TH alarm
is indicated with a bit pattern. (Background TH alarm)
(4) Indication of positional deviation

The positional deviation on each axis is indicated.
No. Indication Meaning

X SERVO ERROR Positional deviation on the Xaxis in detection units
Y SERVO ERROR Positional deviation on the Yaxis in detection units
3000 Z SERVO ERROR Positional deviation on the Zaxis in detection units
:
:
430
(5) Indication of servo control information

Servo control information is indicated.
3010 to 3023 Servo control information for the 1st axis

3030 to 3043 Servo control information for the 2nd axis
3050 to 3063 Servo control information for the 3rd axis
3070 to 3083 Servo control information for the 4th axis
Investigation of disconnection alarm and overload alarm

If an overload alarm (SV 023) or disconnection alarm (SV 015) message appears on the CRT, check
the diagnostic data (No. 3014 (1st axis), No. 3034 (2nd axis), No. 3054 (3rd axis), or the starting diag-
nostic number for the target axis plus 4). Then, confirm whether the display indicates the disconnec-
tion alarm or overload alarm.

Overload alarm : #7 = 1
Disconnection alarm : #1 = 1
Then check the diagnostic data (No. 3015 (1st axis), No. 3035 (2nd axis), No. 3055 (3rd axis), or the start-
ing diagnostic number for the target axis plus 5). Confirm the meaning of the alarm.
From bits 7 and 4 at each address, the alarm can be determined in detail. See the following table:

7bit 4bit
Alarm type
ALDF EXPC
Overheated motor 1 0
Overheated amplifier 0 0
Disconnection in the internal pulse coder (hardware) 1 0
Disconnection in the separate pulse coder (hardware) 1 1
Pulse coder disconnection (software) 0 0
Example If the SV 015 disconnection alarm occurs on the first axis, diagnostic data Nos. 3014 and
3015 contain the following:
No. 3014 : 00000010
No. 3015 : 10110100
As shown above, bit 1 (FBAL) of diagnostic data No. 3014 is set to 1.
At the same time, bit 7 (ALDF) and bit 4 (EXPC) of diagnostic data No. 3015 are both set to
1. Thus, the alarm indicates disconnection in the separate pulse coder (hardware).
431
Digital servo alarms

Symbol Description
OFAL LSI OVERFLOW
An overflow alarm has occurred in the digital servo.
FBAL PULCO DISCONNECTION
A pulse coder disconnection alarm has occurred.
DCAL EXCESS I FORM MOTOR
A regenerative discharge circuit alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier.
(The DC LED on the servo amplifier is on.)
HVAL EXCESS V TO MOTOR
An overvoltage alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The HV LED
on the servo amplifier is on.)
HCAL ABNORMAL CURRENT IN SERVO
An abnormal current alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The HC
LED on the servo amplifier is on.)
OVC EXCESS CURRENT IN SERVO
An overcurrent (overload) alarm has occurred in the
servo amplifier.
LV POWER V TOO LOW
An insufficient voltage alarm has occurred in the servo amplifier. (The LV
OVL SV OVERLOAD
An overload alarm has occurred in the servo motor or servo amplifier. If
the alarm is activated from the servo amplifier, either the servo amplifier,
separate discharge unit, or power transformer has overheated. (The OH
432
Investigation of absoluteposition detection alarm

When optional absolute position detection is performed, an alarm may be detected at poweron. In
this case, SV101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR) or OT032 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) is indicated. The
cause of the alarm is indicated in the diagnostic data. If alarm SV101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR) or
OT032 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) is indicated on the CRT, the diagnostic data (No. 3018 (1st axis), No.
3038 (2nd axis), No. 3058 (3rd axis), or the starting number of the target axis plus 8) contains detailed
information.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
APMVAL APPER APFER APTER APCER APBATZ APPLSM APNZRN
Symbol Meaning (action)

APNZRN The reference position is not associated with absolute position detection.
(Action : Associate the reference position with absolute position
detection.)
APPLSM A pulse error alarm has been raised.
(Action : Associate the reference position with absolute position
detection.)
APBATZ The battery voltage of the AB pulse coder is zero.
(Action : Replace the battery, then associate the reference position with
absolute position detection.)
APCER A communication error occurred during data transmission.
(Action : Replace the pulse coder.)
APTER A timeout occurred during data transmission.
APFER A framing occurred during data transmission.
APPER A parity error occurred during data transmission.
APMVAL A motor excess deviation alarm has occurred.
This alarm is raised when the machine movement at poweron is
detected as exceeding 24000 pulses.
(Action : Make sure that the machine does not move when the power is
turned on.)
433
5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE B62564E1/02
5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE

As a knowledge base, the knowhow of experts who are familiar with troubleshooting and corrective actions
against various possible machine failures can be stored in memory of the Series 15. Using the knowledge
base, the inference engine included in the Series 15 traces the cause of a failure in the machine according to
the same process used by experts.
The operator only needs to perform simple conversational operations with the CRT/MDI unit, such as selecting
a symptom, and answering questions as needed. Then, the Series 15 diagnoses the failure in the same way
as an expert.
The failure diagnosis expert system varies according to the contents of the knowledge base. Refer to the
manual provided by the machine tool builder for detailed operations.
An example of operation is shown below.
1 Suppose that automatic operation cannot be started. Press the MESSAGE soft key several times to select
the diagnosis screen.
Failure Diagnosis
In the example at the left, four
diagnosis items are provided.
1 Automatic operation
2 Manual operation
3 ATC
4 APC
Select an item to be diagnosed. To diagnose an automatic operation failure, for example, select item 1.
2
Failure Diagnosis
1 Automatic operation does

not actuate.
2 The machibe does not actuate
during automatic operation
Then, detailed diagnosis items for automatic operation are displayed. When item 1 is selected, the failure is
diagnosed based on the knowledge base.
434
B62564E1/02 5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE
3 Generally, the states of input/output signals are checked automatically. Only items that require the opera-
tors confirmation appear as shown below:
Failure Diagnosis
Check to see if bit 0 of DGN 005 can be turned

on or off by switching the Start SW on the ma
chine operator's panel.
1. It turns on/off.
2 It does not turns on/off.
4 When the inference about the cause of the failure has been made, the cause and action to be taken are
displayed.
Failure Diagnosis
Automatic operation is not started due to open

ing of the splash guard.
The limit switch which checks the splash guard
is opening and closing may be damaged. Con
firm it.
435
APPENDIX
APPENDIX A . STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON,
B62564E1/02 WHEN RESET
APPENDIX A. STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET

f: The status is not changed or the movement is continued.
: The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted.
Item When turning power on When reset
Offset value f f
ata
Setting dat
Data set by the MDI
f f
setting operation
Se
parameter f f
Programs in memory f f
Contents in the

buffer storage
Display of sequence f

number ( Note 1 )
One shot G code

Other data
ta
Initial G codes ( For G20 Initial G codes.

and G21, the one effective G20/G21 and G22/G23,
Modal G code
before cutting off the pow- not change.
er remains effective. )
F, E Zero Zero
S, T, M f
Work coordinate value Zero f
Movement
Dwell
xecution
Issurance of M, S

and T codes
n during exe
Depends on system pa-

Tool offset rameter LVK
( Data NO. 6000 )
peration
Tool nose radius

compensation
Op
Storing called

subprogram number ( Note 2 )
Rewind
439
APPENDIX A . STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON,
WHEN RESET B62564E1/02
Item When turning power on When reset
Extinguishes if there is no Extinguishes if there is no

ALM
cause for the alarm cause for the alarm
( lights in emergency
NOT READY
stop )
LSK Lights Lights
BUF Extinguishes Extinguishes
REFERENCE POINT
RETURN COMPLE- f
TION LED
EDs
for LE
S and T codes f
nals fo
M code f
utput sign
M, S and T strobe

signals
Out
Spindle speed signal

( S12 bits/S agano- f f
gue signal )
NC ready signal
ON f
( MA, MB )
ON ( When other than ON ( When other than

Servo ready signal
servo alarm ) servo alarm )
CYCLES START LED
FEED HOLD LED
NOTE 1 When a program is returned to its head, the start program number is displayed.
NOTE 2 When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram, execution returns to the head
of the main program by the rewind operation. Execution cannot be started from the middle of
the subprogram.
440
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES

1. GENERAL
The following two interfaces are used for data input/output between the Series 15 and input/output units.
(i) RS232C interface
(ii) RS422 interface
Table Name and specification of Interfaces
RS232C RS422
Interface Serial voltage Balanced transmission,
interface serial interface
( Startstop system ) ( Startstop system )
Baud rate 50 to 19200 baud 50 to 86400 baud
Tape punch Possible Possible
Tape reading Possible Possible
Cable length 100m ( When 4800 baud Approx. 800m ( When
( Max. ) or less ) 4800 baud or less )
( depending on I/O
50m ( When 9600 baud equipment )
or less )
( depending on I/O
equipment )
Remarks RS232C is not name RS422 is not name
of I/O equipment. of I/O equipment.
Its EIA standard. Its EIA standard.
Specifying reader/punch interface A, which is a Series 15 option, enables the following two channels to be
used:
(a) Connector JD5A on main CPU board (printed circuit board of control unit)
RS232C
(b) Connector JD5B on main CPU board (printed circuit board of control unit)
RS232C
This interface, however, cannot be used if a tape reader incorporated into an NC cabinet is used.
Specifying reader/punch interface B and serial port A or B also enables the following two channels to be
used:
(c) Connector JD6D on Sub board (printed circuit board of control unit)
RS422
(d) Connector JD5J on Sub board (printed circuit board of control unit)
RS232C
For the parameters related to the RS232C and RS422 interfaces, see Appendix 7.4.15.
441
APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES B62564E1/02
2. INTERFACE CONNECTOR POSITIONS AND PIN ASSIGNMENT

(1) Main CPU board
POS. 1
2

3 JD5A ( RS-232-C )

4
JD5B ( RS-232-C )

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21
442
(2) Sub board

443
(3) Pin assignment
JD5A
JD5B RS 232 C
JD6D RS 422 JD5J
1 RD 11 SD 1 RD 11 SD
2 *RD 12 *SD 2 0V 12 0V
3 RT 13 TT 3 DR 13 ER
4 *RT 14 *TT 4 0V 14 0V
5 CS 15 RS 5 CS 15 RS
6 *CS 16 *RS 6 0V 16 0V
7 DM 17 TR 7 CD 17
8 0V 18 *TR 8 0V 18
9 *DM 19 ( + 24V ) 9 19 + 24V
10 ( + 24V ) 20 10 + 24V 20
444
3. RS232C INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Names of RS232C Interface Signals

The RS232C interface uses the signals shown in Fig. 3.1 (a).
CNC
Output

Input

SD (Send Data)

RD (Receive Data)

RS (Request to Send)
When not using CS, connect CS and

RS.
CS (Clear to Send)

ER (Equipment Ready)
When not using DR, connect
DR and ER.

DR (Data Set Ready)
Be sure to connect ER and CD.

CD (Carrier Detect)

SG (Signal Ground)
FG (Frame Ground)
Fig. 3.1 (a) RS232C Interface
445
3.2 Signal Description of RS232C Interface
RS232C
Signal name I/O Description
circuit number
SD 103 Output Send Data Start bit Stop bit

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
RD 104 Input Receive Data ( When ISO code H0I is sent)
RS 105 Input Request to Send Sending request:

This signal is set to on when NC starts sending data
and is turned off when transmission ends.
CS 106 Input Clear to Send When this signal and the DR signal are on, the NC
unit can send data. For this reason, if the input/out-
put unit cannot keep up with processing due to
punchout, etc., this signal is turned off to stop data
transmission from the NC unit. Data transmission
stops after two characters, including the data cur-
rently being sent, have been sent. When not using
this signal, be sure to connect it to the RS signal of
the NC.
DR 107 Input Data Set Ready When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/
output unit is ready for operation. This signal usual-
ly connects to the signal (ER signal of the input/out-
put unit) indicating that the power of the input/output
unit is on (see Note below). The NC unit sends data
when this signal is on. If this signal is turned off dur-
ing data transmission, alarm SR820 DR OFF,
SR830 DR OFF, or SR840 DR OFF occurs. When
not using this signal, be sure to connect it to the ER
signal of the NC.
ER 108.2 Output Equipment Ready When this signal is on, it indicates that the NC unit is
ready for operation. Also, when this signal is on, the
input/output unit must regard the SD signal as sig-
nificant information.
CD 109 Input Carrier Detect Be sure to connect this signal to the ER signal of
the NC in the connecting cable because this signal
is not used to connect the input/output unit.
SG 102 Signal grounding
FG 101 Frame grounding
NOTE Signal on/off state is defined as follow.
3 V or lower +3 V or higher
Function OFF ON
Signal condition Marking Spacing
446
3.3 RS232C Interface Transmission Methods

(a) Startstop transmission
Usually, synchronous and startstop transmission are provided for serial interfaces. The Series 15/150
uses startstop transmission.
Startstop transmission: In this transmission, each transmitted character consists of eight bits preceded
by a start bit and followed by two stop bits.
One character in start-stop
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8
Start bit Data bit (8 bit including one parity bit) Stop bits (2 bits)
(b) Codes
(i) EIA code + control codes DC1 to DC4
(ii) ISO code + control codes DC1 to DC4
Input/output units must be able to identify the following control codes output from the NC unit:
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC 1 Tape reader start f f f
DC 2 Tape punch designation f f f
DC 3 Tape reader stop f f f f f
DC 4 Tape punch release f f f
NOTE The above control codes are always used irrespective of EIA and ISO.
The RS232C interface uses control codes DC1 to DC4.

(a) The NC unit can send control codes DC1 to DC4 to control input/output units.
(b) When an input/output unit cannot keep up with processing (when the NC sends data)
(i) The CS signal of the NC can be used to temporarily stop data transmission from the NC. Data trans-
mission is stopped within two characters, including the data currently being sent, after the off CS signal
has been input to the NC. When the CS signal is turned on again, data transmission is restarted.
(ii) The NC unit stops data transmission within ten characters after the input/output unit has sent control
code DC3 to the NC. When the input/output unit sends control code DC1, the NC restarts data trans-
mission. If the input/output unit is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, it must satisfy the specifications
listed in Table 3.3 (a).
447
Table 3.3 (a) Tape code
ISO code EIA code

Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 f f f 0 f f Numeral 0
1 f f f f f 1 f f 1
2 f f f f f 2 f f 2
3 f f f f f 3 f f f f 3
4 f f f f f 4 f f 4
5 f f f f f 5 f f f f 5
6 f f f f f 6 f f f f 6
7 f f f f f f f 7 f f f f 7
8 f f f f f 8 f f 8
9 f f f f f 9 f f f f 9
A f f f a f f f f Address A
B f f f b f f f f B
C f f f f f c f f f f f f C
D f f f d f f f f D
E f f f f f e f f f f f f ? E
F f f f f f f f f f f f f F
G f f f f f g f f f f f f G
H f f f h f f f f H
I f f f f f i f f f f f f I
J f f f f f j f f f f J
K f f f f f k f f f f K
L f f f f f l f f f f L
M f f f f f m f f f f M
N f f f f f n f f f f N
Not used at significant data zone in
O f f f f f f f o f f f f ISO code.
Assumed as address 0 at EIA code.
P f f f p f f f f f f Address P
Q f f f f f q f f f f Q
R f f f f f r f f f f R
S f f f f f s f f f f S
T f f f f f t f f f f T
U f f f f f u f f f f U
V f f f f f v f f f f V
W f f f f f f f w f f f f W
X f f f f f x f f f f f f X
Y f f f f f y f f f f Y
Z f f f f f z f f f f Z
DEL f f f f f f f f f Del f f f f f f f f * Delete( cancel erroneous hole )
No holes. Not used at significant data
NUL f Blank f *
zone is EIA code.
BS f f f BS f f f f * Back space
HT f f f Tab f f f f f f * Tabulator
LF or NL f f f CR or EOB f f End of block
CR f f f f f * Carriage return
SP f f f SP f f * Space
% f f f f f ER f f f f Absolute rewind stop
( f f f ( 245 ) f f f f Control out( start of comment )
) f f f f f ( 247 ) f f f f Control in( end of comment )
+ f f f f f + f f f f * Plus sign
f f f f f f f Minus sign
Assumed as program number in
: f f f f f
ISO code.
/ f f f f f f f / f f f f Optional block skip
. f f f f f . f f f f f f Decimal point
# f f f f f Sharp
$ f f f * Dollar symbol
& f f f f f & f f f f * Ampersand
f f f f f * Apostrophe
* f f f f f * Asterisk
, f f f f f , f f f f f f * Comma
; f f f f f f f * Semicolon
< f f f f f * Left angle bracket
= f f f f f f f * Equal mark
> f f f f f f f * Right angle bracket
? f f f f f f f * Question mark
@ f f f * Commerical at mark
f f f * Quotation mark
448
CAUTION When the input/output unit is equipped with the ISO/EIA converter, pay special attention to
the following items listed in Table 3.3 (a):
Control out (Comment field start)

Control in (Comment field end)
EIA code (. . . . . . . . . . . . . ) CR O . . . . . . . . . . .
Condition 1 Condition 1 Condition 3 Condition 2
ISO code ( . . . . . . . . . . . . .) LF : . . . . . . . . . . .
Condition 1 :To represent left parenthesis ( of the ISO code in the EIA code, bits 2, 4, and
5 of the EIA code are punched out. To represent right parenthesis ) of the ISO
code in the EIA code, bits 2, 4, and 7 of the EIA code are punched out.
Condition 2: Character O of the EIA code corresponds to colon : of the ISO code.
Condition 3: : code.
CR of the EIA code corresponds to LF of the ISO
NOTE Control codes DC1 to DC4 are the transmission codes output from NC. These codes need not
be punched out on an NC tape.
(iii) Transmission rate (baud rate)

The transmission rate (baud rate) indicates how many bits are transmitted per second.
In the Series 15, the following baud rates can be selected:
50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 2800, and 9600
Example When the baud rate is 110
When one character consists of one start bit, eight data bits, and two stop bits (11 bits in total), the num-
ber of characters transmitted per second is calculated from the
following formula:
Number of characters/second = 110 characters/second (max.)

11
(iv) Cable length
The cable length depends on each input/output unit. For the actual cable length, consult with the
manufactures of the input/output units.
When cable A (A66L00010041) is used, the NC assumes the following cable length according to
the baud rate and interface to be used:
RS232C 4800 bauds or less: 100 m or less
9600 bauds: 50 m or less
RS422 4800 bauds or less: 800 m or less
449
Timing chart when the NC receives data (loading data into memory)
(1) The NC unit sends control code DC1 to the input/output unit.
(2) When it receives DC1, the input/output unit starts sending data to the NC.
(3) When the NC cannot keep up with processing, the NC sends control code DC3 to the input/output unit.
(4) When it receives DC3, the input/output unit stops data transmission to the NC.
Data transmission stops within 10 characters after control code DC3 has been sent. (If more than ten char-
acters are sent, alarm SR82, SR83, or SR84 occurs.)
(5) The NC sends control code DC1 to the input/output unit after processing has terminated.
(6) When it receives DC1, the input/output unit restarts data transmission to NC. (Data transmission, however,
must be restarted beginning with data immediately following the previously sent data.)
(7) When data read is completed, the NC sends control code DC3 to the input/output unit.
(8) When it receives DC3, the input/output unit stops data transmission.
10 ms or longer
100 ms or longer
ER (Output)

RS (Output)
DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3
SD (Output)

ER code
RD (Input)

DR (Input)
CS (Input)
Up to 10 characters
1 ms or longer
Timing chart when the NC sends data (punch out)
(1) The NC unit sends control code DC2 to the input/output unit.
(2) The NC sends punched out information to the input/output unit.
(3) When the input/output unit cannot keep up with data processing
(a) When the CS signal of the NC is turned off, the NC stops data transmission within two characters, in-
cluding the data currently being sent.
When the CS signal is turned on again, the NC restarts data transmission. (See Fig. A).
(b) The input/output unit sends control code DC3 to the NC. NC stops data transmission within ten char-
acters after DC3 has been sent. The input/output unit sends control code DC1 to the NC. When it
receives DC1, NC restarts data transmission. (See Fig. B.)
(4) If the CS signal of the NC is turned on when the input/output unit side terminates data processing, the NC
restarts data transmission beginning with the data immediately following the previously sent data.
(5) The NC sends control code DC4 to the input/output unit when data transmission is completed.
450
10 ms or longer 100 ms or longer
ER (Output)
RS (Output)

DC2 DC4
SD (Output)
DR (Input)
CS (Input)
1 ms or longer within 10 characters
Fig. A
10 ms or longer 100 ms or longer
ER (Output)
RS (Output)

DC2 DC4
SD (Output)

RD (Input) DC3 DC1
within 10 characters
DR (Input)
CS (Input)
1 ms or longer
Fig. B
451
3.4 Connection between RS232C Interface and I/O Device

452
In the cable connecting the input/output unit and RS232C interface, the SG signal and each signal must be
paired as shown in the figure below.
CNC or PMC
SD RD
External device

RD SD
RS CS

CS RS
SG SG
ER DR
DR
ER
Cable: 10 pairs 0.18 mm2, with total shield
453
4. RS422 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
4.1 Names of RS422 Interface Signals

The RS422 interface uses the signals shown in Fig. 4.1 (a).
CNC
or CD3
PMC-J
1

SD
2
10
*SD
RD
Send data

11
5

*RD
RS
Receive data

6
14

*RS
CS
Request to send
Short with RS if CS is not used.

15
12

*CS
RR
Clear to send
Short with TR

13
16

*RR
DM (DR)
Receiver ready if RR is not used.

17
3

*DM (*DR)
TR (ER)
Data mode
Short with TR
if DM is not used.

4 *TR (*ER) Terminal (CNC or PMC-J) ready
7
SG
FG
Signal ground
Security ground
Fig. 4.1(a) RS422 interface
454
4.2 Explanation of RS422 Interface Signals
RS422 Input/
Name Description
circuit No. output
SD 103 Output Send Data Start bit Stop bit

ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
RD 104 Input Receive Data ( When ISO code H0I is transmitted. )
RS 105 Output Request to Send This signal is turned on when data transmission
from the NC starts. It is turned off when data trans-
mission terminates.
CS 106 Input Clear to Send When both this signal and the DM signal are on, the
NC can send data. For this reason, if the input/out-
put unit cannot keep up with processing due to
punchout, etc., this signal is turned off to stop data
transmission from NC. Data transmission stops
after two characters, including the data currently
being sent, have been sent. When not using this
signal, be sure to connect it to the RS signal.
DM 107 Input Data Mode When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/out-
(DR) put unit is ready for operation. This signal is usually
connected to the signal (TR signal of the input/out-
put unit) indicating that the power of the input/output
unit is on (see Note below). The NC sends data
when this signal is on. If this signal is turned off dur-
ing data transmission, alarm SR870 DR OFF oc-
curs. When not using this signal, be sure to con-
nect it to the TR signal of the NC.
TR 108.2 Output Terminal Ready When this signal is on, it indicates that NC is ready
(ER) for operation. Also, when this signal is on, the input/
output unit must regard the SD signal as significant
information.
RR 109 Input Receiver Ready When this signal is on, it indicates that the input/out-
put unit can send data to NC. When not using this
signal, be sure to connect it to the TR signal of the
NC.
TT 113 Output Transmission tim- This signal is not used.
ing
SG 102 Signal ground
FG 101 Security ground
NOTE Signal ON and OFF are as follows:
A<B A>B

Driver

Function OFF ON A
Signal condition Marking Spacing B
Receiver
A

B

455
4.3 RS422 Interface Transmission Methods

See Section 3.3 RS232C Interface Transmission Methods.
4.4 Connection between RS422C Interface and Input/Output Unit
NC I/O device side

CD3

SD

SD

10
*SD
RD
*SD

RD

11

5
*RD
RS
*RD

RS

14
*RS
CS
*RS

CS

15

12
*CS
RR
*CS

RR

13

16
*RR
DM
*RR

DM

17

3
*DM
TR
*DM

TR

4 *TR *TR

7 SG SG

FG FG
456
CNC External device side

CD3
1 SD SD

2 *SD *SD

10 RD RD

11 *RD *RD

5 RS RS

6 *RS *RS

14 CS CS

15 *CS *CS

12 RR RR

13 *RR *RR

16 DM DM

17 *DM *DM

3 TR TR
4 *TR *TR
7 SG SG
FG FG
Cabling to I/O devices is done as follows, and pair each signals.
CNC External device
SD RD
*SD *RD
RD SD
*RD *SD
RS CS
*RS *CS
CS RS
*CS *RS
TR RR
*TR *RR
RR TR
*RR *TR
SG SG
Cable: 8 pairs 0.3mm2 , with total shield.
457
APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST B62564E1/02
APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST
Message Meaning
PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACRO Because MDI operation is being performed, neither parameters, setting
VARIABLE CANT REWRITE data, nor macro variables can be rewritten.
(MDI EXECUTING)
PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACRO Because reset operation is being performed, neither parameters, setting
(RESETTING)
PARAMETER/SETTING DATA/MACRO Because mode switching is being performed, neither parameters, setting
(MODE CHANGING)
KEY IN DATA Enter data with keys.
FORMAT ERROR The format is illegal.
WRITE PROTECT (MEMORY Input is disabled because the memory protection key (workpiece coordi-
PROTECTION KEY IN EFECT) nates, offset values, and programs) is on.
WRITE PROTECT (DATA NUMBER Parameter input is disabled because PWE (bit 0) of parameter No. 8000
8000#0/PWE IS 0) (enable/disable parameter write) is set to 0.
CHANGE TO MDI MODE An attempt was made to input parameters in mode other than the MDI
mode. Place the system in the MDI mode.
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE An attempt was made to input a value, but the value exceeded the allowable
range.
TOO MANY DIGITS An attempt was made to input a value, but it was longer than the maximum
allowable number of digits.
START REJECT The start of automatic operation is not accepted.
(1)Automatic operation pause signal *SP is low.
(2)An alarm exists.
(3)The SRN signal has been sent.
(4)The program the operator wants to execute is now being edited in the
background.
(5)PTR is not ready in the tape mode.
LOCKED PARAMETER An attempt was made to enter data for a parameter, but input for that param-
eter was not allowed.
DATA NOT FOUND Data is missing.
DEVICE IS ALREADY IN USE The external input/output device channels are being used, so a device can-
not be used unless the operation is terminated. To release this state, reset
the system.
NO PROGRAM SELECTED Although no program was selected, an attempt was made to perform editing.
Before editing, select a program by searching for its program number or reg-
istering the program.
ORIGIN IMPOSSIBLE (IN RESET OR ORIGIN operation is disabled because the system is in the reset or feed
FEED HOLD) hold state.
EDIT REJECT (IN RESET OR Editing is disabled because the system is in the reset or feed hold state.
FEEDHOLD) Release the reset or feed hold state.
EDIT REJECT (PROGRAM IN Editing of a program is disabled because that program is currently running.
OPERATING)
ALREADY EXISTS An attempt was made to register a new program with an existing program
number.
NO MORE PROGRAM CANT BE Because the program memory area is full, no more programs can be regis-
ENTERED tered.
NOT EMERGENCY STOP An attempt was made to register parameters in a state other than the emer-
gency stop state. Place the system in the emergency stop state.
THE NUMBER OF PROGRAMS IS OUT Because the number of registered programs has reached the maximum
OF RANGE allowable number, no more programs can be registered.
458
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST
Message Meaning
GUARDED WORD An attempt was made to edit a word that cannot be edited. For example,
this message appears when an attempt is made to alter or delete a program
number.
NO PROGRAM NUMBER An attempt was made to write a program to tape, but no program number
was found at the beginning of the program.
COMMAND ILLEGAL USE The command cannot be used in the current CNC status. (This message
appears when HERE is specified at the beginning in program verification or
when a program restart is specified during program restart operation.)
BACKGROUND EDIT REJECT Although a program was running in the background, an attempt was made
(PROGRAM IN OPERATING) to edit that program.
BACKGROUND EDIT REJECT (SAME An attempt was made to edit a program in the background, but the program
PROGRAM ON THE FOREGROUND) was being used in the foreground. (The program, however, can be edited in
the background when the program is being reset and rewound in the fore-
ground.)
INVISIBLE PROGRAM The cursor was used to select a program, or an attempt was made to edit a
program, but the program could not be displayed (when a parameter is set
to suppress the display of that program during operation or when the pro-
gram is encrypted).
NO OPTION No option is given to a specified command.
GRAPHIC AXIS NUMBER NOT SET The parameter for selecting the graphic display axis (parameter No. 7703) is
not set.
FAIL TO OCCUPY GRAPHIC CPU Another user (such as the PC) tried to use the graphic CPU.
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE ZERO NOT Workpiece zero point manual setting was performed on the external work-
INPUT piece zero point offset.
+OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke
limit 1 during manual movement in the positive direction. Backing out the
tool in the negative direction automatically clears this warning message.
OVERTRAVEL(SOFT1) The tool has attempted to enter an area set as inhibited by stored stroke
limit 1 during manual movement in the negative direction. Backing out the
tool in the positive direction automatically clears this warning message.
CAN NOT REPEAT (BUFFER IS An attempt was made to use the repeat search function when neither the
EMPTY) forward nor backward search function had been executed.
Before using the repeat search function, execute either the forward or back-
ward function.
CAN NOT REPEAT (FUNCTION IS The previous forward or backward search operation was invalid for the NC
DIFFERENT) mode screen on which you attempted to use the repeat search function.
Retry the forward or backward search function by starting from scratch.
ALREADY EXISTS On the signal selection screen, an attempt was made to newly register a
previously registered address.
459
APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS B62564E1/02
APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS

Data PWE = 1
Classifica- Mode Function
Function protection DATA
tion selection key
key No. 8000
Operation menu key ALLCLR

Clear Tool offset Value KEY 1 Power ON OFFSET
ALL , WEAR , or GEOMETRY
One Program Input Operation menu key READ

(program number KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
not changed) 1PRGRM NEW
One Program Input Operation menu key READ

(program number KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM (PROG #) Program number
changed or added) EXEC
D
Data I
Input
From Tape Operation menu key READ
Add Program KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
1PRGRM ADD
Registration of all
programs
KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key READ ALL
Pitch Error Com- Emergency

f SERVICE PITCH READ
pensation amount SW. ON.
ON: 1
MDI or PARAM INPNo. OFF: 0
Parameter f Emergency SERVICE
switch ON. Data No. EXEC INPUT
+INPUT
Operation menu key

INPUT (Absolute input)
Offset Value KEY 1 OFFSET +INPUT
Data
D Input
I (Incremental input)
From MDI Offset value EXEC
Operation menu key

HANDY (Setting relating to I/O)
GENERAL (Settable parameter)
Setting Data KEY 2 MDI SETTING
1: ON
0: OFF Data EXEC
(VALUE)
Operation menu key PUNCH

Parameter, Pitch ALL
error compensation EDIT SERVICE
PARAM
data
PITCH

ALL
Offset Value EDIT OFFSET
TOOL
O
Output
WRK.ZER

All Program KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
ALL

One Program KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM THIS or PUNCH (PROG #)
Program number EXEC
Program No. Operation menu key FWSRCH

EDIT or
Search (Programs KEY 3 PRGRM (PROG #) Program number
MEMORY
in memory) EXEC
Sequence No. Operation menu key FWSRCH

EDIT or
S
Search
h Search (Sequence KEY 3 PRGRM (SEQ #) Sequence number
MEMORY
No. in memory) EXEC
Sequence No. Operation menu key FWSRCH

Search (Sequence TAPE PRGRM (SEQ #) Sequence number
Nos. on tape) EXEC
460
B62564E1/02 APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS
Data PWE = 1
Classifica- Mode Function
Function protection DATA
tion selection key
key No. 8000
CHAPTER TEXT Operation

Word Search menu key FWSRCH or BWSRCH
KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
(Words in memory) (WORD) Word to be searched
EXEC
Search
CHAPTER TEXT Operation
Address Search menu key FWSRCH or BWSRCH
(Addresses in KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
(WORD) Address to be searched
memory)
EXEC
Deletion of all Operation menu key DELETE

KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
Programs PROGRAM ALL EXEC
Current-
ly dis- Operation menu key DELETE
played PROGRAM THIS
Deletion program
of a Pro- KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
gram Disig- Operation menu key DELETE
nated PROGRAM (PROG #) Program
program number EXEC
Deletion of words,
from cursor posi- Operation menu key DELETE
KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
tioned to desig- A(WORD) Word EXEC
nated word
Deletion of words Operation menu key DELETE
from cursor position KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
AEOB
to EOB
Program
P Deletion of one Operation menu key DLTWRD
KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
Editing word or DELETE WORD
Operation menu key ALTER

Alternation of a
KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM (WORD) Word to be changed
word
EXEC
Operation menu key INSERT

Insertion of a word KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM (WORD) Word to be inserted
EXEC
All Program Operation menu key CONDENS

Memory Arrange- KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
ALL
ment
Currently Selected Operation menu key CONDENS
Program Memory KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
THIS
Arrangement
Designated Pro- Operation menu key CONDENS

gram Memory Ar- KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM (PROG #) Program number
rangement EXEC
Comparison all Pro- Operation menu key VERIFY

grams in Memory EDIT PRGRM
with those on tape ALL
Comparison one Operation menu key VERIFY

C
Comparison
i Program in Memory EDIT PRGRM
1PRGRM
with that on tape
Comparison from Operation menu key VERIFY

EDIT PRGRM
Current Position HERE
461
APPENDIX E. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH
KEY AND SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15) B62564E1/02
APPENDIX E. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY AND

SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15)
Table : Correspondence between English key and Symbolic key (Series 15)
Name English key Symbolic key Name English key Symbolic key
RESET key CANCEL key CAN
POSITION key POS DELETE key DELETE
ALTER/
ALTER
PROGRAM key PROG CALCULATION
key CALC
OFFSET key OFFSET MMC key MMC
PMC
PCHECK key PCHECK PMC/CNC key
CNC
INPUT/INSERT INPUT
SETTING key SETTING
key INSERT
SERVICE key SERVICE SHIFT key SHIFT
MESSAGE key MESSAGE PAGE UP key

PAGE
PAGE DOWN PAGE

OTHERS key OTHERS
key
EOB
EOB/HELP key
HELP
462
INDEX
A CNC program output, 395

CNC Status Indication, 429
ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION, 405
Collating Programs, 164
ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS, 152
Connection between RS232C Interface and I/O
Adaptor lamp conditions, 400 Device, 452
Adjusting the PhotoAmplifier of the Tape Reader Connection between RS422C Interface and In-
with Reels, 418 put/Output Unit, 456
Alarm, 406 Connection unit, 422
Alarm history, 376 Contents to be displayed and operations when the
MMC is installed, 29
Alarm Message Display, 326
Coordinate System Related Data Display Function,
All Axes Machine Lock, 136 383
Arithmetic key (SHIFT or ALTER key), 39 Copying and moving a program, 169
AUTOMATIC OPERATION, 93 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY
AND SYMBOLIC KEY (Series 15), 462
Automatically inserting sequence numbers, 177
CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION, 386
Auxiliary Function Lock, 136
Current Position Display, 322
AXIS CONTROL, 409
Currentposition screens, 322
Axis Control by the PMC, 409
Custom Macro Variables, 218
B D
Background Editing, 166
Data displayed on the subscreen, 276
Background Graphic Display, 345 Data Input Operation, 398
Block restart, 108 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC
FLOPPY CASSETTE AND FANUC FA CARD,
392
C
DATA OUTPUT, 388
Changing language of the display, 38
Data Output Operation, 395
Changing soft keys, 31
Data Protection Key, 227
Changing the contents of the key input buffer, 29
Deleting Part Programs, 156
Changing tool length compensation in the longitudi- Description of internal selection, 430
nal direction of the tool, 86
Details of Grouping M codes, 300
Changing words and addresses (CHANGE), 175
Details of Screens, 280
Chapter selection keys, 34
Directory of Floppy Disk Files, 338
Checking the Input Voltage, Ambient Conditions,
Handling, Programming, Operation, Machine, and DISPLAY, 314
Interface, 426 Display, 144
Class B measurement of the tool length, 231 Display and setting, 210
Class B Measurement of the Tool Length and Work- Display format of tool life data, 246
piece Reference Position, 231
Display of Run Times and Parts Counts, 342
Class B measurement of the workpiece reference
point, 237 Displaying and modifying a tool group, 245
Cleaning the Air Filter (For the SelfStanding Cabi- Displaying the Actual Spindle Speed, 338
net Only), 421 Displaying the coordinates of the tool tip, 88
Cleaning the Tape Reader, 413 Displaying the number of pulses for manual interrupt
and the traveled distance, 89
Clearing all tool offset values, 212
Displaying tool life data while executing a machining
Clearing execution data, 245 program, 245
Clock, 343 Drawing a tool path, 335
CNC parameter input, 398 Drawing position after the start of drawing, 352
CNC parameter output, 397 Drawing procedure, 351
CNC program input, 398 Dry Run, 137
i1
E I
Editing a displayed waveform, 359 Incremental Feed, 64
Editing Part Programs, 157 Initial Setting at PowerOn, 405
Editing part programs, 159 Initial values at the start of drawing, 353
Effect of Manual Intervention, 74 INTERFACE CONNECTOR POSITIONS AND PIN

ASSIGNMENT, 442
Emergency Stop, 148 Internal Position Compensation Data Display Func-
Erasing a displayed waveform, 359 tion, 378
Example of the procedure for using the tuning Interruption, 91
screen, 293 INTRODUCTION, 3
Executing Automatic Operation, 98
Execution program and program directory, 314 K
Expanded File Control Function, 402 Key input and input buffer, 29
Expanded tool life management, 248
Explanation of RS422 Interface Signals, 455
L
Length of Part Program Storage, 167
Extended Part Program Editing, 168
LIST OF OPERATIONS, 460
Load Meter Display, 340
F
FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE, 434 M
FANUC PPR, 58
M Code Group Check Function, 300
Feed hold, 99 M Code Group Function, 295
Figure to be drawn, 352 M,S,T,B Codes Output for Program Restart, 296
File Deletion, 399 Machine Lock on Each Axis, 136
File Head Searching, 393 Machine Operators Panel, 42
File Name of Floppy Cassette or Card, 401 Manual Absolute ON and OFF, 70
Format Guidance, 182 Manual Continuous Feed, 62
Format guidance with figure, 186 Manual Feed in a Specified Direction, 67
Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens, 272 Manual Handle Feed, 65
Function selection keys, 33 Manual handle interrupt, 129

Manual Interrupt during Automatic Operation, 129
Fuse Mounting Position, 422
Manual interruption and the coordinate system, 92
Fuse Specifications, 422
Manual Interruption Function for ThreeDimensional
Coordinate Conversion, 91
G Manual Numeric Command, 68
GENERAL, 441 MANUAL OPERATION, 60
Graphic Display, 327 Manual Reference Position Return, 60
Graphic enlargement, 353 Manual Reference Position Return at Machine
Installation, 405
Graphic shift, 353
MDI keyboard, 25
Groupbygroup program directory display and
punchout, 317 MDI operation, 94
Measuring the Tool Length, 228
H Menu Switch, 243
Merging programs (MERGE), 173
Handle feed in the longitudinal direction of the tool,
75 Mirror Image Function, 410
Handle feed in the transverse direction of the tool, Modes, 140
79
Moving the cursor to the position to be edited, 157
Help Function, 362 MULTIEDIT FUNCTION, 161
Help Message, 285
Help window states, 366 N
How to display the CNC internal status, 429 Names of RS232C Interface Signals, 445
i2
Names of RS422 Interface Signals, 454 Presetting a tool life counter, 245
NC format guidance, 182 Presetting the current position display, 323
New tool selection signal, 247 Presetting the workpiece coordinate system, 324
Note, 145 Procedure for setting graphic parameters, 350
Note for handling tape reader, 57 Program check screens, 315
Notes, 284, 404 Program Display, 314
Notes on threedimensional handle feed, 87 Program Encryption, 187

Program end (M02, M30), 99
Number of Programs that can be Registered, 167
Program restart, 102
O Program restart function and output of M, S, T, and

B, codes, 106
Offset data input, 398 Program stop (M00), 99
Offset data output, 397
Offset from the Workpiece Reference Point, 213, R
390
Read/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common
Offset Values, 210 Variables, 220
Operation, 140, 362 Registering a part program from the tape, 154
Operation and Display Transition, 161 Registering Part Programs, 154
Operation guidance keys, 37 Registering part programs from CRT/MDI panel, 155
Operation History, 367 Remarks, 163
Operation history, 367 Repeat search, 158
Operation in the MEMORY mode, 93 REPLACING A FUSE, 422

REPLACING BATTERIES, 423
Operation in the tape mode, 93
Replacing the Batteries of the Absolute Pulse Cod-
Operation method, 304 er, 424
Operation Mode, 93 Replacing the Battery for Backing Up the Memory in
Operation selection keys, 36 the Control Unit, 423
OPERATIONAL DEVICES, 19 Request for cassette replacement, 400
Operations, 270 Reset, 100

Resetting a tool change signal, 247
Operator Message Display, 325
Restarting Automatic Operation, 101
Optional stop (M01), 99
Restrictions, 377
Outline of operations, 33
Retrace, 126
Output of Tool Offset Data Corresponding to Tool,
391 RETRACE PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION, 139
Override Playback, 133 Rewinding a program, 97
Overtravel, 148 Rotational handle feed around the center of the tool
tip, 83
Overview, 345
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE, 413
RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES, 441
P RS232C INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS, 445
Panels Other than the Small CRT/MDI Panel, 386 RS232C Interface Transmission Methods, 447
Parameters, 223, 389 RS422 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS, 454
Part Program Output, 165 RS422 Interface Transmission Methods, 456
Pitch Error Compensation Data, 225 RS232C Parameter Setting Screen, 280
Playback, 180
Portable tape reader, 55 S
POWER ON/OFF, 59 SAFETY FUNCTIONS, 148
Power unit, 422 Screen configuration, 286
PreTravel Stroke Limit Check Function, 149 Screen for Displaying M Codes Currently Being
Executed or Which Have Already Been Executed,
Precautions, 400 295
Preparations for Storing and Editing Part Programs, Screen for Specifying HighSpeed and HighPreci-
153 sion Machining, 286
i3
Screen Saver Function, 386 Status Display, 320
Screen Selection, 303 STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON,
WHEN RESET, 439
Screens, 354
Stopping Automatic Operation, 99
Searching for a program by name, 96
Stored Stroke Limit Check in Manual Operation,
Searching for a program number or sequence num- 151
ber, 95
STORING AND EDITING PART PROGRAMS (IN-
Searching for, inputting/outputting, and deleting a CLUDING PROGRAM REGISTRATION), 153
file by specifying its file name, 402
Subscreen operations, 273, 278
Selecting a Program to be Executed, 95
Subscreen states, 272
Selecting RS232C Screen, 280
Symptom and Investigation, 425
Selecting signals, 374
Selecting the graphic screen, 328
Selecting the tool data screen, 256
T
Tape Reader, 44
Servo and Spindle Setting and Adjustment Screens
and Spindle Monitor Screen, 263 Tape Reader Lubrication, 415
Servo screens, 263 Tape reader with reels, 46
Setting and Display Unit, 19 Tape reader without reels, 44
SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA, 210 TEST OPERATION, 136
Setting by specifying accelerations, 293 ThreeDimensional Handle Feed, 75
Setting of graphic parameters, 346 Time Stamp Function, 191
Setting screen, 288 Tool change signal, 247
Setting the Floating Reference Position, 262 Tool Life Management Data, 245
Setting the graphic parameters, 328 Tool Offset Using Tool Numbers, 256
Setting the Zero Point for the Absolute Pulse Coder Tool Offsets, 388
through MDI Operation, 408
Tool retraction and recovery, 115
Setting tool data, 257
Tool skip signal, 247
Settings, 216
Transverse Inhibit Limit Function, 311
Signal Description of RS232C Interface, 446
TROUBLESHOOTING, 425
Simple Conversational Programming, 196
Tuning screen, 289
Simultaneous automatic and manual operation, 131
Twodrive floppy cassette control, 403
Single Block, 137
Singleblock stop according to the comparison be-
tween sequence numbers, 100 V
Small CRT/MDI Panel, 386 Visually Checking the CNC System, 428
Soft key display, 30
Soft key operations, 404 W
Software Operators Panel, 252 Warning message, 30
Specifying a tool holder offset for tool length com- WARNING MESSAGE LIST, 458
pensation in the longitudinal direction of the tool, Waveform data input/output, 359
86
Waveform Diagnosis Function, 354
Specifying the conditions for starting data sampling,
356 Waveform display, 358
Spindle screens, 265 What is a File, 392
Start coordinates and position, 352 When the soft keys are insufficient, 30
Starting Automatic Operation, 98 Workpiece Zero Point Manual Setting Function, 303
Starting or terminating data sampling, 358 Workpiece zero point measurement B, 309
i4
Revision Record
FANUC Series 15/150-MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATION OPERATORS MANUAL (B62564E1)
D Addition of new functions

02 Dec., 1996
D Correction of errors
01 Aug., 1994
evision Date Contents Revision Date Contents

No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

GFZ 62564E 102l PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GFZ 62564E 102l PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15 / 150 Model B

Operator's Manual (Operation)

GFZ-62564E-1/02 December 1996

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

Copyright 1996 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO

1. Coordinate system setting

4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

7. Workpiece coordinate system shift

5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

1. Memory backup battery replacement

2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :

Product Name Abbreviations

FANUC Series 15MB 15MB

FANUC Series 15MFB 15MFB

FANUC Series 15MELMODEL B4 (*) 15MEL

FANUC Series 150MB 150MB Series 150

Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B are as follows.

Table Related Manuals

FANUC Series 15TB/TFBTTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS B62072E

6. TEST OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

7. SAFETY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

8. ACTIONS REQUIRED FOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

10. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

11. DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

12. CRT SCREEN SAVING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

13. DATA OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

14. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT TO AND FROM FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE AND

15. ABSOLUTEPOSITION DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

16. AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

2. REPLACING A FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

3. REPLACING BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

5. FAILURE DIAGNOSIS GUIDANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

APPENDIX B. RS232C AND RS422 INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

4. RS422 INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

APPENDIX C. WARNING MESSAGE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

APPENDIX D. LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

APPENDIX E. CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN ENGLISH KEY AND

Fig. 1 (a) Manual Reference Position Return

Fig. 1 (b) Tool Movement by Manual Operation

The tool can be moved in the following ways:

Fig. 1 (c) Tool Movement by programing

Operation according the tape

(ii) Memory operation

Fig. 1 (d) Memory operation

(iii) MDI operation

  

Fig. 1 (e) MDI Operation

O1001 Program number

Fig. 1 (f) Program Selection for Automatic Operation

(ii) Start and stop (See Section 5.3 to 5.5)

Cycle start Manual start

PS133 MISSING ="